Chief Architect Premier X16

Professional 3D Home Design Software

Tutorial Guide
A step-by step introduction to drawing a model
and creating construction documents.

Chief Architect, Inc

6500 N. Mineral Dr
Coeur d'Alene, ID 83815
[Link]

7/31/2024
Contents
Floor Plan Tutorials 3
Exterior Walls 4
Interior Walls 30
Multiple Floors 48
Interior Stairs 64
Doors and Windows 87
Decks and Porches 111

Roof Tutorials 133

Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles 134
Hip Roofs 136
Gable Roofs 136
Dutch Gable Roofs 137
Shed Roofs 138
Offset Gable Roofs 138
Gambrel Roofs 139
Gull Wing Roofs 140
Half Hip Roofs 141
Mansard Roofs 142
Finding the Start of an Upper Pitch 142
Chic Cottage Roof 143
Dormers 168

Interior Design Tutorials 188

Custom Ceilings 189
Finish Materials 204
Room Moldings 226
Interior Furnishings 238

Kitchen and Bath Tutorials 254

Cabinet Styles 255
Cabinet Layout 279
Appliances and Fixtures 299
Light Fixtures 324
Electrical Objects 345

Framing Tutorials 358

Floor Framing 359
Wall Framing 377
Roof and Ceiling Framing 393

Landscaping Tutorials 411

Plot Plans 412
Terrain Elevation 434
Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads 452
Landscaping Design 466

Layout Tutorials 484

Layout Page Templates 485
Title Blocks and Borders 495
Sending Views to Layout 520
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Plan Tutorials

Floor Plan Tutorials Chapter 1

The Floor Plan Tutorials describe best practices for drawing a building’s floor plan in Chief Architect.
In this tutorial you will learn about:

TOPICS
Exterior Walls 4
Interior Walls 30
Multiple Floors 48
Interior Stairs 64
Doors and Windows 87
Decks and Porches 111

3
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

Exterior Walls
The first step in creating a structure in Chief Architect is to draw the exterior walls on Floor 1 of the plan.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for beginning a new plan and laying out the exterior, or perimeter,
walls of a structure. Concepts introduced include:
File Management 4
Saving Your Work 5
Productivity Tips 5
Using Plan Views 6
Drawing Walls 8
Zooming and Panning 9
Working with Wall Type Definitions 10
Setting the Defaults 13
Drawing Exterior Walls 16
Creating Room Definition 17
Creating 3D Views 18
Creating Dimension Lines 20
Adjusting Wall Positions 23
Adding Annotations 26
Creating File Revisions 28

FILE MANAGEMENT
Regardless of the kind of work you do on your computer, good file management is a useful skill. The first step in starting a
new project in any application is to specify a save location and a name for the file.

Save Location
It is important to know where your files are saved. By default, most programs will save to your Documents folder because
this is the location that Windows and macOS operating systems prefer. You might instead prefer your Desktop, which is
another location acceptable to your operating system. You should, however, avoid saving your files in any location that is
intended for software installation or for files that the operating system uses. You should also avoid saving your files at a
network location or on a removable device, as this can cause program slowness and may introduce the risk of data loss.

Folders and Subfolders

While you can save all of your files directly into the Documents folder, it will become more and more difficult to find the
files you need as their numbers increase. To avoid this, organize your files into folders.
Folders may be created for a variety of purposes; for organizing Chief Architect files, an effective approach is to create a
folder for each of your projects. Projects can be identified by client name, site address, a design name, or even an account
number - choose one that allows you to find a specific project quickly.

4
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

You can also organize projects into subfolders. If you have a client who has multiple projects, consider creating a folder
identified by the client name or their account number, and inside it adding folders named after the site addresses or design
titles.
Always remember, though, that both Windows and macOS operating systems place a limit of 255 total characters on each
file’s total pathname, so folder names should be kept as short as possible and the use of subfolders should be limited to one
or two levels.

Naming Convention
Choosing an effective naming convention is important in Chief Architect in large part because of the need to manage
multiple file revisions. Each revision’s name should give an indication of its contents, but must also be short enough that its
pathname does not exceed 255 characters.
l Avoid unnecessary information in file names. For example, the title block on a project’s construction documents might
state “Johnson Family Primary Residence”, but your plan file name can be limited to just “Johnson Home”.
l Use abbreviations instead of full words. For example use “kit” instead of “kitchen”.
l Indicate dates using numbers. For example, “112320” can be used instead of “November 23 2020”.
It is important to distinguish your working drawing from your revisions. One way to do this is to name your working
drawing in all capital letters while naming revisions using lower case.

To save a new plan file

1. Begin by selecting File> New Plan from Template to open a new, blank plan.

l If a plan file is already open, instead select File> Templates> New Plan from Template .

2. In the Choose Template File dialog, select the “Residential Template” file and click Open. A new, blank plan file is
created.
3. Select File> Save As . In the Save Plan File dialog, browse to your Documents folder.

4. Create a new folder for this project and name it Chic Cottage.
5. Navigate into the newly created Chic Cottage folder so that it becomes the Save location for your plan file.
6. For the File name, type CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT. You have now created the main working drawing for this
project.

The full pathname for this new plan file is C:\Users\<your user account name>\Documents\Chic Cottage\CHIC COTTAGE-
[Link] in Windows, which has a total of 58 characters not including the characters in your User Account name.
This is a good starting pathname that will give you flexibility later on as you save revisions and possibly need to create
additional subfolders.

SAVING YOUR WORK

It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide will remind you to do so regularly. It is also a
good idea to implement a revision strategy. See Creating File Revisions on page 28, below.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to lay out the exterior walls of a project, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

5
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

Drawing and Editing

l Setting defaults before you draw saves time and reduces the chance of error.
l Draw exterior walls with Grid Snaps enabled.
l Draw walls to an approximate length and then position them with accuracy using dimensions.

Content
l A selection of name brand siding material catalogs are available for download in the “Materials and Surfaces”
category of the 3D Library. Select Library> Get Additional Content Online to launch your default web browser
to that page.
l Create template plans that have your custom wall types set as defaults, and ready for use when you begin a new plan.
l Wall types that have been customized can be imported into other plans.
l Customized wall types can also be saved in the Library for future use.

Interface
l The Status Bar at the bottom of the program window reports useful information about the active tool, the selected
object, and more.
l Use the middle mouse button to pan and zoom the current view.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l F6 - Fill Window
l Ctrl/⌘ + W - Close View
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save
Although Temporary Dimensions are toggled off in most of images in this tutorial, it is assumed that they are on for the
purposes of following the steps. Select View> Temporary Dimensions and confirm that there is a check mark in lower
right corner of the tool icon.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views,
each with customized settings for a range of purposes, and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each
task.
This functionality of plan views will be explored throughout this guide; however, to get started, the currently active
Working Plan View will be used.
To see examples of Saved Plan Views and their settings, as well as other types of views saved with a plan file, open the
Project Browser.

6
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

To examine a saved plan view’s settings

1. The Project Browser side window is docked to the right side of the program window.
l Click on its tab to bring it to the front of the other side windows docked at that location.

l If you do not see the Project Browser, select View> Project Browser .

2. Under the CHIC COTTAGE - CURRENT line item are a set of folders. Click the arrow to the left of “Plan Views”.
3. Notice that:
l “Working Plan View” has an icon that indicates that it is Open.
l There are a number of other Saved Plan Views created for various tasks.
4. Right-click on “Working Plan View” and select Edit View from the contextual menu.

5. In the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, you can see that a variety of settings can be saved with a view,
including:
l The current Floor.
l The current Default Set, which can be used to select a pre-set collection of Layer settings and Saved Defaults,
also found in this dialog.
l The current Layer Set, which controls which objects display, and their appearance.
l The active Saved Defaults, which determine the attributes of dimensions, text and other objects used to
annotate plan views.
l The Reference Floor and its attributes, which allows you to display information from other floors for reference,
along with the current Floor.
6. Click OK to close the dialog.

Saved Plan Views are convenient and powerful, but you don’t have to master everything about them right now. Choosing an
appropriate plan view is simply a good step to take before you begin any drawing task.

7
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

Note: When a new plan is created using the Residential Template, both
exterior dimensions and roof planes are generated as soon as walls are
drawn to enclose a room area. By default, the Reference Grid and
Crosshairs are also toggled on. To improve the clarity of illustrations in
this tutorial, these are turned off.

DRAWING WALLS
Walls are arguably the most important type of object in Chief Architect because they define most of every building’s
structure. Walls are structural elements in and of themselves; but they are also used to define rooms, which are required in
order to create floor and ceiling platforms.

Note: Whenever possible, default settings should be specified before

objects of that type are drawn. As this is the case, most lessons in this
guide begin with a Setting the Default section. This lesson is unique in
that it begins with drawing an object in order to demonstrate what
defaults do.

When a new plan is created using the Residential Template, the Reference Grid displays and both exterior dimensions and
roof planes are generated as soon as walls are drawn to enclose a room area. For the purposes of this tutorial, these are
turned off.

l To turn on/off the Reference Grid, select View>Reference Grid .

l To turn off/on Auto Exterior Dimensions, see To set dimension defaults for locating walls on page 20, below.
l To turn off/on Auto Rebuild Roofs, see Auto Rebuild Roofs on page 136.
l To turn on/off the Crosshairs, select View> Crosshairs .

To draw a wall
1. When drawing a structure’s perimeter walls, it is recommended that you select Edit> Snap Settings> make sure
Grid Snaps are turned on. You may choose to disable them, though, once the shell walls are in position.
2. Select Build> Wall> Straight Exterior Wall from the menu or click the corresponding toolbar button, then
click and drag to draw a line from right to left.
3. As you draw a wall, its length displays in two places: below the wall and in the Status Bar at the bottom of the
screen:

8
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

4. The wall’s angle is also shown in the Status Bar. Wall angles are restricted to 15° increments, which makes drawing
straight walls easy; however, you can toggle Angle Snaps on and off by selecting Edit> Snap Settings> Angle
Snaps or pressing the F10 key.

5. When the wall is between 13 and 14 feet long and its angle is described as 180°, release the mouse button to create
the wall.
6. As you draw walls, do not worry about their exact length. In Chief Architect, walls can be sketched out at their
approximate lengths, allowing you to think creatively rather than focus on entering exact values. Once walls are in
place, they can be positioned precisely using dimensions, which will be described later.

ZOOMING AND PANNING

Chief Architect plans can vary considerably in size, and often contain objects that are very large and those that are very
small. You can control what objects are on-screen and how much detail is visible at any time by zooming and panning.
There are a number of ways to zoom and pan in the program, but one of the easiest is to use the scroll wheel on your
mouse: scroll to zoom in or out, click and drag to pan.

To use the Zoom and Undo Zoom tools

1. For a closer view of a certain area, click the Zoom tool, click and drag a box around the area you want to see in
detail, and release the mouse button. That area fills the screen.
2. To return to the previous zoom factor, select Window> Undo Zoom .

3. Select Window> Fill Window Building Only to center your plan on screen.

4. To center all objects in the current view on screen, including the Living Area label and dimensions, select Window>
Fill Window .

9
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

WORKING WITH WALL TYPE DEFINITIONS

Zoom in on the wall in your plan so you can see its layers and notice its appearance. The lines and colors represent the
layers of the wall assembly, including its siding, sheathing, framing, and drywall. All of these characteristics are part of the
wall’s Wall Type Definition.

To specify a wall’s Wall Type

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the wall to select it.

2. Click the Open Object edit button and go to the WALL TYPES panel of the Wall Specification dialog. Notice:

l The Wall Type name, “Siding-6”.

l The 3D preview. Click and drag in the preview window to rotate its contents.

l Click the Show Plan View button above the preview.

3. Click the Wall Type drop-down and note that there are numerous other wall types available. Select a different wall
type and notice the object preview, which changes to show the new wall type. Switch back to “Siding-6”.
4. Click the Define button to open the Wall Type Definitions dialog. Notice that the wall type is composed of multiple
layers with different materials and specific thicknesses.
5. Click the Cancel button to close both dialogs without making any changes.

The Wall Type Definitions dialog can also be accessed from the program menu.

To create a new Wall Type

1. Select Build> Wall> Define Wall Types , then select “Siding-6” from the drop-down list at the top left corner of
the dialog.
2. Click the Copy button, then type a short, descriptive Name for the new Wall Type. Here, “Stone-6” is used.
3. Specify a new Thickness for Layer 1 of this Wall Type:
l Click in the Thickness cell for Layer 1.
l Type 3" in the text field, then press the Tab key.
4. Specify a new Material for Layer 1 of this Wall Type: click in the Material, Pattern, or Texture cell for Layer 1 to
open the Select Material dialog.

10
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

5. The LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog is a modal version of the Library Browser. In the
Browser, a wide variety of items useful for creating a detailed design can be found. On the LIBRARY MATERIALS
panel, however, the content is filtered to list materials only.
l When accessed from a specification dialog, the content is further filtered to show the folder that the selected
material is found in. Active filters are listed in rectangular shapes directly under the Search field at the top of
the panel.
l Here, the Lap siding folder is used as a filter. You can mouse over its shape to see its location in the Folders
list in a tool tip. To search for materials in other folders, click on the Lap filter shape to remove it.

l In the Search field, type "Stone" and notice that a drop-down list finds numerous items that match this search
word, including downloadable Manufacturer catalogs. You can click on any of these items to use it as a
filter. Here, though, press the Enter key to search for what you've typed as a Text filter.

l In the Folders panel, navigate the tree list to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials> Masonry & Stone.

11
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

l Scroll down as needed to find the "Stacked Stone" material. Click on it to select it and click OK.

6. Remove the Fill from Layer 1 of this Wall Type:

l Click in the Fill cell for Layer 1.
l In the Layer Fill Style dialog, select “No Pattern” from the Type drop-down list, then click OK.
7. With the “Stacked Stone” layer still selected, click the Insert Below button. A copy of the selected layer is created
directly below the original. Specify “Thinset Mortar” as the Material, a Fill of “No Pattern”, and a Thickness of 3/8".
8. Repeat step 6 to create a new layer below the “Thinset Mortar”. Specify a Material of “Metal Lath”, a Fill of “No
Pattern”, and a Thickness of 1/16".
l Create one more layer below the “Housewrap” layer. Specify a Material of “Insulation Sheet”, a Fill of “No
Pattern”, and a Thickness of 1".
l To help distinguish your new custom wall type from other walls, you can give its Main Layer a "Solid" Fill
with a distinct color, such as yellow.

12
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

9. Specify how this Wall Type bears on foundation walls:

l Under the wall layer table, select the Wall Properties tab.
l Select "1 - Stacked Stone" from the Foundation to Exterior of Layer drop-down list.
10. Click OK to close the dialog and create your new Wall Type.
11. When you are finished, select File> Save .

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
drawing the shell of a plan, there are several defaults of particular importance.

To change the Default Exterior Wall Type

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog. Click the arrow to the left of “Walls” to
expand the category, select "Exterior Wall", then click the Edit button.

2. On the WALL TYPES panel of Exterior Wall Defaults dialog:

l Note that the selected Wall Type is “Siding-6”.
l Select “Stone-6” from the drop-down list, then click OK.
3. Click the Done button to close the Default Settings dialog.
4. Select Build> Wall> Straight Exterior Wall and draw another wall connected to the left end of the existing
wall, dragging in an upward direction about 10 feet. Notice:

13
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

5. The two walls snap together, forming an intersection.

6. Even though this wall and the wall to its right were drawn using the same tool, they have different Wall Types
because a change was made to the default settings after the first wall was drawn.
7. Select the vertical “Siding-6” wall and click the Open Object edit button. On the WALL TYPES panel of the Wall
Specification dialog, select “Stone-6” from the Wall Type drop-down list and click OK.

The Exterior Wall tool is used to draw a single wall type, like Siding-6 or Stone-6. Occasionally, though, walls are made of
two different wall types: one built above the other. In Chief Architect, this kind of wall configuration is referred to as a
Pony Wall.

To specify the Default Pony Wall

1. Select Edit> Default Settings , expand the “Walls” category, select “Pony Wall”, and click the Edit button.

2. On the WALL TYPES panel of the Pony Wall Defaults dialog, select “Siding-6” as the Upper Wall Type and “Stone-
6” as the Lower Wall Type.
3. Specify the Elevation of Lower Wall Top as 20".
4. Specify how you would like these walls to display in plan view. Here, the Upper Wall is used.
5. Click OK.

The default floor structures can be set for different categories of rooms in the Room Defaults dialogs. These are considered
critical because they influence the overall height of a structure. While not critical, the default floor and ceiling finishes can
also be set in these dialogs. See "To set flooring defaults" on page 218 of the Finish Materials Tutorial.

To set the default floor structures

1. In the Default Settings dialog, expand the “Floors and Rooms” category, select “Floor/Ceiling Platform”, and click
the Edit button.
2. In the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog, click the Edit button to the right of the Floor Structure label.

14
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

3. In the Floor Structure Specification dialog:

l Notice that Layer 1 is composed of 3/4" OSB sheets.

l Click on the Layer 2 line item and notice that under the Structure heading below, is composed of a fir framing
material and that its structure Type is "I-Joist".
l Change Layer 2’s Type to “Lumber” and in the layers table, change its Thickness 11 1/4" to represent floor
joists of conventional 2x12 lumber, then click OK.
4. The Ceiling Structure can be edited in a similar manner; however, it will not be changed in this example.
5. Click OK to return to the Default Settings dialog, then select "Room Types" and click the Edit button to open the
Room Types dialog.
6. Notice the many Available Room Types that can be assigned to rooms in a plan. Room Types will be explored in
"Room Types" on page 34 of the Interior Walls Tutorial.
7. For example, select “Garage” from the list of room types and click the Edit button.
8. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Garage Room Type Defaults dialog:
l The default floor structure for Garage, Porch, and Slab room types can be set here.
l In this example, 4" of concrete will be used so no changes are needed.
9. Click Cancel and to return to the Default Settings dialog.

When the exterior walls are finished, they will form the shell of Floor 1; so now is also a good time to set up important
structural default settings in the 1st Floor Defaults dialog.

15
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

To set the 1st Floor Defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings and in the Default Settings dialog:

l Click the arrow next to "Floors and Rooms";

l Click the arrow next to Floor Levels".
l Select "1st Floor", and click the Edit button.
2. On the STRUCTURE panel of the 1st Floor Defaults dialog:
3. Specify the Ceiling Height as 97 1/8".
4. Notice that the Floor Structure of 12" is drawn from the floor structure set in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults
dialog.
5. Click OK and then Done to apply your change and close both dialogs.
6. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

Note: The default Floor Height for Floor 1 cannot be changed. It is

always 0.

Although dimensions are not structural objects, it is a good idea to set up how they locate structural objects as well. See "To
create automatic exterior dimension lines" on page 22 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial, below.

DRAWING EXTERIOR WALLS

When drawing walls, do not try to size or position them precisely - they can be more easily positioned after they are created.

Note: The “Auto Rebuild Roofs” and "Auto Refresh Exterior

Dimensions" options have been turned off in this tutorial to simplify the
display of the building in plan view.

The first two walls drawn in this plan were created using the Exterior Wall tool and the remaining walls will be Pony Walls

To draw exterior walls

1. Select Build> Wall> Straight Pony Wall , then click and drag a wall from the top of the vertical wall, extending
about 28’ to the left.
2. Walls can be drawn in two ways:
l Left-click, drag, and release to draw a wall. Place the pointer over an existing wall end and repeat to create a
new wall section connected to the previous one.
l Right-click, drag, and release. Move the pointer to a new location and click once to draw a new wall section
connected to the previous one. Continue clicking to create more walls.

16
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

3. Continue drawing walls, creating a rough outline of the building’s exterior, as shown in the following image:

l Exact dimensions are not important yet, but keep the final size of the structure in mind as you draw. The
overall lengths of this building’s sides are approximately 40’.
l It is helpful to draw exterior walls in a clockwise direction to ensure the proper orientation of wall surfaces.
4. When you are finished, Save your work.

CREATING ROOM DEFINITION

When the exterior walls completely enclose an area, room definition is established and:
l A Living Area label that states the enclosed area’s size is created.
l A set of Auto Exterior Dimensions is created around the exterior walls.
l A roof is automatically generated.
When a room is defined, floor and ceiling platforms are also automatically created within it.

To confirm a room’s structure

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click in an empty space in the room to select it. When a room is selected, it
will become highlighted.
2. Click the Open Object edit button to open the Room Specification dialog.

3. On the STRUCTURE panel, notice that the Ceiling Height is 97 1/8": the value set in the 1st Floor Defaults dialog.
4. Also note that the Floor Structure matches what was set in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog, then click
Cancel.

It is important to remember that in order for a room to be created, there can be no gaps in the walls that surround it. There
are a number of ways to create openings in walls, however, and these will be discussed in the Doors and Windows tutorial.
See also: Interior Walls on page 30.
Rooms are discussed in further detail in the Interior Walls and Interior Design Tutorials. See "Room Types" on page 34 of
the Interior Walls Tutorial and "Interior Design Tutorials" on page 188 of the Interior Design Tutorials Tutorial.

17
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

CREATING 3D VIEWS
As you draw walls in plan view, a 3D model is also being developed. Create a 3D view of the model to see how it looks so
far.

To create a camera view

1. Select Window> Fill Window to zoom out as needed to fill the view window with the entire drawing.

2. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Full Camera , then click and drag to draw a camera inside the area
enclosed by walls.

l The point where you click (A) defines the location of the camera.
l The line created as you drag (B) defines the direction of perspective.
l The point where the mouse is released (C) is the camera’s focal point.
3. Release the mouse button to create the 3D camera view and notice that the program has automatically generated a
floor platform and a ceiling in the area enclosed by the walls.

18
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

4. Notice, too, the mouse pointer icon . This indicates that the Mouse-Orbit Camera tool is active.

l Click and drag the mouse in a circular direction and notice that the camera’s direction rotates in response.
l If you select a different tool, Mouse Orbit Camera will become disabled. Select 3D> Move Camera With
Mouse> Mouse-Orbit Camera to enable it again.

5. To return to plan view, select File> Close View.

The structure of this room can be examined in more detail in a different type of camera view: a Back Clipped Cross Section.

To create a Back Clipped Cross Section

1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Back Clipped Cross Section , then:

l Click and drag vertically to create a camera inside the bump out at the bottom right of the drawing.
l Limit the length of the camera line to one or two plan feet and make sure that you draw the camera either
straight up or straight down on-screen.

19
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

2. Zoom in on the bottom left corner of the structure so the wall and floor layers can be seen.

3. Select CAD> Dimension> Tape Measure , then click and drag to draw temporary dimension lines that measure
the depths of these layers.

4. The distances between lines in the wall correspond to the layers of its Wall Type Definition.
5. The distances between lines in the floor correspond to the layers of the Floor Structure and Floor Finish Definitions
set in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog
6. Select File> Close View to return to plan view.

CREATING DIMENSION LINES

Dimension lines can be used to measure and position a wide variety of objects, including walls. A selection of automatically
generated and manually drawn dimensions is available.

To set dimension defaults for locating walls

1. Select Edit> Default Settings , click the arrow next to “Dimension” to expand the category, then select
“Dimensions” and click the Edit button.

20
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

2. Dimensions are an example of annotation tools that support multiple saved defaults. This guide will regularly
explore multiple saved defaults and how they can be used, but for now note that "Plan Dimension Defaults" is
selected and click the Edit button.
3. On the SETUP AUTOMATIC panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog, under the "Exterior" heading, the Auto Refresh
check box allows Auto Exterior Dimensions to stay up-to-date as changes are made to the model. For clarity, Auto
Refresh is not used in the illustrations in this tutorial.
4. On the LOCATE AUTO EXTERIOR panel, note that there two options for locating Walls: at their Surfaces and at their
Wall Dimension Layer.

l The Surfaces option directs Auto Exterior Dimensions to locate wall surfaces, which is helpful when drawing
an existing structure.
l The Wall Dimension Layer option allows you to specify a particular layer in each Wall Type for dimensions
to locate.
5. Leave Wall Dimension Layer selected and click Cancel, then click Done to close both dialogs.
6. Select Build> Wall> Define Wall Types and in the Wall Type Definitions dialog:

21
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

l Select “Siding-6” from the drop-down list at the top of the dialog.
l Select the Wall Properties tab located below the wall layers table.
l Note that Dimension to Exterior of Layer is set to “4: Fir Framing 2”. This means that dimensions will locate
the outside of this wall type’s framing layer.
l Click Cancel to close the dialog without making any changes.

To create automatic exterior dimension lines

1. Select CAD> Automatic Dimensions> Auto Exterior Dimensions .

2. Zoom in on the far left corner at the front of the building.

3. Note that the dimension lines locate the walls at the outside of their framing layer.

22
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

ADJUSTING WALL POSITIONS

With the perimeter walls in place, you can adjust their position. There are several ways to do this, but the fastest and most
accurate uses dimension lines.

To move walls using dimensions

1. Begin by selecting Window> Fill Window Building Only .

2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on a wall that you want to move. Here, the horizontal wall at the
lower left of the plan is selected.
3. Click on a dimension line that indicates how far the selected wall is from another wall. There are a couple of ways to
determine which dimensions can be used for this purpose:
l Move the selected wall and see which dimensions update.
l Move your pointer over a dimension. If it is an associated dimension, the icon will change to a Pointing Hand
.

4. With the Pointing Hand icon visible, click on the associated dimension and enter a new value.

l Remember: Type an apostrophe to denote feet and quotes to denote inches.

l If neither apostrophes nor quotes are included, inches will be used.

23
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

5. Press the Enter key to move the wall to the newly specified distance.

6. Repeat this process, proceeding in a clockwise direction: select the vertical wall on the left.

7. Mouse over a dimension line that shows how far the selected wall is from another wall. When the Pointing Hand
icon is visible, click, then type in a new distance value.

24
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

8. Press the Enter key to move the wall to the specified distance.

When using dimensions to reposition walls, work around

the structure in the same direction: either clockwise or
counterclockwise.

When you are finished, your dimensions should match those in the following image:

9. Remember to Save your work.

Dimensions can also be used to change the length of a selected wall.

To resize a wall using dimensions

1. Select a wall that you would like to resize.
2. Move your mouse pointer over a dimension line that states the length of the selected wall.
3. When the Pointing Hand icon displays, click on the associated dimension and then:

l Select Move Both Ends to resize the selected wall by adjusting the position of both of its endpoints
equally.

25
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

l If the selected wall is oriented horizontally, select Move Left End to move only the wall’s left endpoint or
select Move Right End to move only its right endpoint.

l If the selected wall is oriented vertically, select Move Top End to move only the wall’s top endpoint or
select Move Bottom End to move only its bottom endpoint.

4. Type the desired length in the text field and press the Enter key.
5. The wall will resize according to the option you selected. If an end moves, any walls connected to that end will also
move.

Although using dimensions is generally the fastest and most accurate way to move walls, you can also move them using
their edit handles.

To move walls using their edit handles

1. Click the Select Objects tool then click on an exterior wall to select it.

2. Click and drag the Move edit handle that displays at the position along the wall where you clicked. Walls can be
moved perpendicular to the direction that they are drawn.
3. As you move the wall, the dimension lines that indicate how far it is from other walls will update.
4. When you are finished positioning walls, remember to Save your work.

If you have difficulty positioning a wall at a particular location, try zooming in on it using either the Zoom or Zoom In
tool or by scrolling with your mouse wheel.

You can also use the Arrow keys to nudge a selected wall or other object up, down, left, or right on-screen.
You can continue working on this plan in the Interior Walls tutorial.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
Floor plans typically include text calling out features of the drawing. With the exterior walls in place, some basic
annotations can be added.
As with other objects, before adding annotations it is a good idea to make sure that the defaults are set up to meet your
needs. Annotations are special, though, in that it is possible to create more than one saved default, each for a different
purpose. In addition, the defaults for different annotation tools can be grouped together into a Default Set, as well as set up
to display in some plan views but not others.
As noted earlier, the Working Plan View uses the “1/4” Scale Annotations”. See Using Plan Views on page 6.

To set the rich text defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog.

l Click the arrow beside “Text, Callouts and Markers” to expand the category.
l Select “Rich Text” and click the Edit button.

26
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

2. In the Saved Rich Text Defaults dialog, which opens next:

l Notice that there are a number of different Saved Rich Text Defaults set up for particular drawing scales and
tasks.
l “Plan Rich Text Defaults” is selected in the list because it is the Saved Default that is currently active.
l Recall that the “Working Plan View” uses “Plan Rich Text Defaults”, as well.
l With the “Plan Rich Text Defaults” selected, click the Edit button.
3. In the Rich Text Defaults dialog:

l On the RICH TEXT panel, click the Uppercase button.

l On the APPEARANCE panel, note that Rich Text is placed on the “Text” layer by default.
4. Click OK and then Done to close all dialogs.

To add rich text annotations

1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text , then click in the view, outside the bottom left corner of the structure.

2. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:

l Notice that the Uppercase button is highlighted, indicating that it is active.
l In the text field, type the following: 2x6 exterior walls 24" OC U.N.O. and notice that all of the letters display
in uppercase.
3. Use your mouse to highlight just the letter x in 2x6, then click the Uppercase button to remove that attribute
from the selection. The rest of the text remains uppercase.

27
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

4. Notice that U.N.O. is underlined in red. This indicates that Chief Architect does not recognize this spelling and can
be addressed in a moment.
5. Click OK to close the dialog and create a Rich Text object.
6. Click on the newly created text object to select it, then click and drag its square Move edit handle to adjust its
position.

There are several ways to fix a spelling error. One way is to add the word to the program’s dictionary

To remove a spelling error indicator

1. Select the newly created text and click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog, right-click on the abbreviation U.N.O.
3. Select Learn Spelling from the contextual menu, then click OK.
4. When you are finished, Save your work.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, confirm that your Chic Cottage folder is selected as the Save location.

28
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Shell.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for starting a new plan and laying out exterior walls. It also discusses the important
default settings associated with starting a new plan. These critical defaults include the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults, 1st
Floor Defaults, Wall Defaults, and Dimension Defaults, and they are considered critical because they determine the size of
the structure.
To save a new plan file 5
To examine a saved plan view’s settings 7
To draw a wall 8
To use the Zoom and Undo Zoom tools 9
To specify a wall’s Wall Type 10
To create a new Wall Type 10
To change the Default Exterior Wall Type 13
To specify the Default Pony Wall 14
To set the default floor structures 14
To set the 1st Floor Defaults 16
To draw exterior walls 16
To confirm a room’s structure 17
To create a camera view 18
To create a Back Clipped Cross Section 19
To set dimension defaults for locating walls 20
To create automatic exterior dimension lines 22
To move walls using dimensions 23
To resize a wall using dimensions 25
To move walls using their edit handles 26
To set the rich text defaults 26
To add rich text annotations 27
To remove a spelling error indicator 28
To save a plan revision 28

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 1 - Exterior Walls

Why is it good practice to create file revisions?
l Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your
work that you can refer back to when needed.

29
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

What are default settings and why are they important?

l The initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default Settings.
l Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing.
Name a setting that is associated with a Saved Plan View.
l The floor level, Default Set (Layer Set and Saved Defaults), and Reference Floor are all part of a Saved Plan View.
What important defaults should you set up before drawing exterior walls?
l Before drawing the exterior walls of a plan, set the defaults for the Exterior Wall and other Wall Tools.
l The Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults, structural Floor 1 Defaults, and Auto Exterior Dimension Defaults should be set
in advance, as well.
Why are structural defaults considered critical?
l Structural defaults are considered critical because they affect the overall height of the structure.
What is room definition and why is it important?
l When walls completely enclose an area, room definition is established. Floor and ceiling platforms are automatically
created within it and a Living Area label that states the enclosed area’s size is created.
What are two different ways to move walls?
l Walls can be moved using dimension lines: Select a wall, click on a dimension line that reports its distance from
another wall, then type in the desired distance and press the Enter key.
l A selected wall can be also moved by clicking and dragging its Move edit handle.
When creating a new wall type, why might you specify a unique color for the Main Layer?
l Giving a wall type’s Main Layer a distinct color helps distinguish your new custom wall type from other walls.
What can you see in a cross section view that camera views do not show?
l In a cross section view, you can see structural information like floor platform depth and wall thickness.
How do you change the appearance of some of the characters in a Rich Text object?
l Highlight the characters that you want to customize so they are selected, then make the desired changes.
What is one way to prevent a word or abbreviation from being flagged as misspelled?
l Add the word or abbreviation to the program’s dictionary.

Interior Walls
With the exterior walls in place, interior walls can be added to create rooms.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
The previous lesson, Exterior Walls, explained how to draw and position the exterior walls of the main entry level of a
structure in Chief Architect. This lesson describes best practices for creating interior rooms. Concepts introduced include:
Productivity Tips 31
Setting the Defaults 32
Using Plan Views 32

30
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

Drawing Interior Walls 32

Room Types 34
Modifying Interior Wall Types 39
Using Room Dividers 41
Positioning Interior Walls 42
Working with Wall Connections 45
Adding Annotations 46
Creating Revisions 47

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Exterior Walls tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-shell and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Select File> Open Recent Files and notice that CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT is included in the Recent Files List. The
Recent Files List is also a convenient way to resume work on files you have been working on; however, it is not an
alternative to knowing where your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File
Management" on page 4 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create interior rooms, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l When rooms are subdivided or merged, attributes from the larger room will be inherited by the smaller one.
l Select multiple objects for editing by holding down the Shift key.

Content
l Like exterior walls, customized interior wall types can be exported and imported in a template plan as well as added to
the Library for future use.

Interface
l Use Object Snap Indicators like Midpoint and Intersection snaps to position and align walls with accuracy.
l Floor Overviews are a useful way to view the relationships between room spaces.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l F6 - Fill Window
l Ctrl/⌘ + W - Close View
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

31
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
drawing interior walls, there are several defaults that should be borne in mind.
The Room Type Defaults dialogs can be used to set critical floor and ceiling structure definitions, as well as non-critical
default finish materials for various room types. See "To set the default floor structures" on page 14 of the Exterior Walls
Tutorial and "To set flooring defaults" on page 218 of the Finish Materials Tutorial.
The Floor Defaults dialogs allow you to set up important structural defaults on a floor by floor basis. See "To set the 1st
Floor Defaults" on page 16 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.
Before drawing interior walls, make sure that the Default Interior Wall meets your needs. See "Working with Wall Type
Definitions" on page 10 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.

To set the Interior Wall Defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog.

l Click the arrow beside "Walls" to expand the category.

l Select "Interior Wall" and click the Edit button.
2. On the WALL TYPES panel of the Interior Wall Defaults dialog, the selected wall type is named "Interior-4". Click
the Define button.
3. In the Wall Type Definitions dialog, notice that it is composed of 2x4 framing with drywall on each side.
4. This wall type works well for most purposes, so click Cancel and then Done to close both dialogs.

There are several options for controlling how dimension lines locate interior walls that should be set before dimensions to
these walls are drawn. See Interior Walls on page 30.
When adding interior walls, you may find it helpful to select the Auto Refresh option for Auto Exterior Dimensions. This
can be done in the Auto Exterior Dimension Defaults dialog. See To set Dimension Defaults on page 99.
As with other objects, you should set the appropriate text defaults before annotations are created. See "To set the rich text
defaults" on page 26 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Working Plan View will work well for drawing interior walls, as it did when drawing exterior walls in the Exterior
Walls tutorial. See To examine a saved plan view’s settings on page 7.

DRAWING INTERIOR WALLS

With the exterior walls in position, you can add interior walls to create multiple rooms.

32
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

To define rooms using interior walls

1. Select Build> Wall> Straight Interior Wall , then move your mouse pointer over the horizontal wall at the
lower left of the structure. When your mouse is near the midpoint of that wall, click and drag upward to the back
wall of the structure.

l When Object Snaps are enabled, a red Midpoint Snap Indicator will display when your mouse is over the
midpoint of the wall.
l As with exterior walls, though, it’s not necessary to position interior walls exactly as you draw: they can be
adjusted later on.
2. Draw a second vertical interior wall to the right of the first one.

33
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

3. Finally, draw a horizontal wall across the middle of the structure:

4. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

The floor plan has been divided into six separate zones, which can now be assigned Room Types that reflect how the spaces
will be used.

ROOM TYPES
Rooms in Chief Architect are given special attributes when they are assigned a Room Type. For example, porches use a
concrete floor material and have a ceiling and roof, while decks use floor planking and have no ceiling or roof.

To specify a room type

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click in the room at the top left corner of the structure to select it.

2. When the room is selected, it will become highlighted and you can click the Open Object edit button to open its
specification dialog.

34
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

3. On the GENERAL panel of the Room Specification dialog, select "Kitchen" from the Room Type drop-down list.

4. Repeat steps 1-3 to create a Dining room, Living room, Entry, Bedroom, and Garage, as shown in the following
image:

5. Notice that the horizontal wall snaps at intersecting walls and that a new, separate wall segment is drawn on the
other side.
6. Remember to Save your work.

Differences in these rooms’ properties can be seen in 3D views.

35
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

To view room types in 3D

1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Back Clipped Cross Section , then:

l Click and drag vertically to create a camera inside the Entry room.
l Limit the length of the camera’s line of sight to one or two plan feet and make sure that you draw the camera
either straight up or straight down on-screen.
l Notice that the Garage has a different floor structure than the Entry or Living rooms:

2. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Floor Overview to see the differences in floor finish
materials.

3. Select File> Close View in both views to return to plan view.

The six room areas created thus far can be subdivided further to create additional rooms.

36
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

To subdivide room areas

1. Select Build> Wall> Straight Interior Wall , then click and drag from right to left to divide the Bedroom into
two separate rooms.

l Notice that the new room inherits the Room Type of the larger room that it was created in.
2. Draw a vertical interior wall that divides the new, smaller Bedroom in two.
3. On the left side of the Garage, draw one more vertical interior wall straight up from that room’s left exterior wall.
l The new wall and the exterior wall that it’s collinear with are aligned at the exterior surface of their framing layers.
This creates a small jog on the interior that will be easily corrected later on. See To align collinear walls on page
45, below.
4. Click the Select Objects button, then assign room types to the new rooms as shown in the following image:

37
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

In the above image, note that a number of changes have been made to the room labels.

To control the display of room labels

1. Click the Select Objects button, click on a room label to select it, then click the Delete edit button.

2. To restore a room label that has been deleted, select the room in question and click the Open Object edit button.
On the GENERAL panel of the Room Specification dialog, check Show Room Label and click OK.
3. To change the name of a room such as the Entry, select it and click the Open Object edit button. On the
GENERAL panel of the Room Specification dialog, type a Room Name like "Foyer" in the text field and click OK.
4. Room labels can also be rotated and moved using their edit handles. Select the Foyer Closet's label, then click and
drag the triangular Rotate edit handle to display it vertically instead of horizontally. Click and drag the square Move
edit handle at the center of the label to adjust its position.
5. Open the Active Layer Display Options side window, which is docked to the right side of the program window by
default.
l Click on its tab to display it in front of the other side windows at that location.

l If it is not open, select View> Active Layer Display Options .

6. Turn off the display of the "Rooms, Interior Dimensions" layer:

l Type "room" into the Name Filter field.
l The "Room Labels" layer controls the overall display of room labels.
l The "Interior Area", "Interior Dimensions", and "Standard Area" layers control what room size information
displays underneath the room name.
l Click in the Disp column to remove the check mark for the "Rooms, Interior Dimensions" layer to turn its display
off, then click OK.
7. When room labels look the way you want, Save your work.

Two rooms can be merged into one by either moving or deleting the wall that separates them. The smaller room will inherit
properties from the larger one.

To merge room areas

1. Draw a horizontal Straight Interior Wall to divide the Closet to the right of the Foyer into two separate Closet
rooms.
2. Select the vertical wall dividing the closets from the Foyer, click the Add Break edit button, then click on the
selected wall at the intersection of the horizontal wall dividing the two Closets.

38
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

3. Select and resize the vertical wall separating the upper Closet from the Foyer:
l Click and drag the square Resize handle located at the bottom end of the wall and drag it upward until it snaps to
the vertical wall separating the Foyer and Living rooms.
l The upper Closet room disappears and inherits the Room Type of the larger Foyer room that it merged into.

4. Remember to Save as you work.

MODIFYING INTERIOR WALL TYPES

Interior walls are typically built using 2 x 4 stock. Some interior walls, however, need to be thicker to accommodate
plumbing or to provide support for the floor above.

To specify a different wall type

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the horizontal wall separating the Garage from the Bath.

2. If the wall has merged with the one to its left, use the Add Break edit tool to add a wall break at the bottom left
corner of the Bath, as described above.

39
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

3. Next, hold down the Shift key and click on the wall separating the Garage from the Foyer. This will select the two
walls as a group.
4. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the WALL TYPES panel of the Wall Specification dialog:

l Click the arrow next to the Vector View button above the object preview on the right side of the dialog
and select Show Plan View from the drop-down list.

l Click the Wall Type drop-down and choose "Fire-6" from the list.
l Notice that the preview updates to show the new, thicker wall type.
5. Click the Define button and note that the exterior layer material is a fire-rated drywall with a Solid red fill color.
l Change the Fill of the Main Layer to a red color, too.
l Click OK to close both dialogs.

It is sometimes necessary to flip a wall’s layers from one side to the other.

To reverse a wall’s layers

1. Zoom in on the intersection of the two Fire-6 walls and notice that the red fire-rated drywall layer is facing away
from the Garage.
2. Use the Shift key to select the two Fire-6 walls as a group, as described above.

3. Click the Reverse Layers edit button to flip the two walls’ layers so that the fire-rated drywall faces the Garage.

40
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

Because the fire-rated drywall is thicker than the regular drywall, it will be slightly out of alignment with the wall to its
left when its layers are reversed. You can fix this by selecting the Fire-6 wall and gently dragging its Move handle
slightly downward.

4. When you are finished, Save your work.

USING ROOM DIVIDERS

Rooms are not always divided by a physical wall. For example, two separate room areas may be suggested by a change in
the ceiling height or flooring material. In Chief Architect, a Room Divider or invisible wall can be used to define rooms
without creating an actual wall.
A Room Divider is drawn the same way other walls are: select Build> Wall> Room Divider , then click and drag in any
direction.

To replace a wall with a room divider

1. Select the horizontal wall separating the Entry from the Living room and drag the edit handle on its left end to the
right until it snaps to the corner of the Bath. Notice that either the Entry’s or the Living room's label disappears as
that room merges with the larger room.
2. Select Build> Wall> Room Divider , then click and drag horizontally across the space where the edited wall
used to be: from the top left corner of the Entry to the bottom left corner of the Bath.
3. A single dashed line representing a Room Divider is created, and both rooms have their original labels.

An existing wall can also be modified to serve as a Room Divider.

To change a wall into a room divider

1. Click on the vertical wall dividing the Kitchen and Dining rooms to select it.
2. Click the Add Break edit button, then click on the selected wall at the bottom right corner of the Kitchen to
divide the wall into two segments at that location.
3. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the wall segment separating the Kitchen from the Living room to
select it.
4. Click the Make Wall(s) Invisible edit button and notice that the wall is now represented by a pair of dashed
lines.
5. With the wall still selected, click the Open Object edit button.

6. On the GENERAL panel of the Wall Specification dialog:

41
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

l Notice that the Thickness is 4 1/2" and that Invisible is checked.

l Check No Locate, as well, to prevent the Room Divider from being located by Auto Exterior Dimensions.
7. On the WALL TYPES panel of the dialog, select "Room Divider" from the Wall Type drop-down list.
8. Return to the GENERAL panel of the dialog and:
l Note that the Thickness of the wall is reduced to 0" and that the object preview on the right side of the dialog
box now shows the wall as it looks in plan view.
l Click OK.

9. Remember to Save your work.

POSITIONING INTERIOR WALLS

Like exterior walls, interior walls can be moved using their dimensions or their edit handles. It is a good idea to make sure
that Dimension Defaults are set so that they meet your needs. See "To set dimension defaults for locating walls" on page 20
of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.
The Interior Dimension tool is ideal for laying out interior walls because unlike other Dimension Tools, it always locates
exterior walls on their interior sides. This allows you to easily see the sizes of all of your rooms’ interiors and adjust them as
needed.

To set dimension defaults to locate interior walls

1. Select Edit> Default Settings , click the arrow next to "Dimension" to expand the category, then select
"Dimensions" and click the Edit button.
2. In the Saved Dimension Defaults dialog:
l Notice that there are multiple saved defaults for different scales as well as different purposes such as Electrical
and Framing plans.
l Note that "Plan Dimension Defaults" is listed as the Currently Active Dimension Defaults selected and that it is
selected in the list.
l Click the Edit button.
3. On the LOCATE INTERIOR panel of the Plan Dimension Defaults dialog, notice:
l Walls are located at their Main Layer Inside, which is typically the framing layer, by default. They can be instead
be located at their Surfaces, which is helpful when drawing an as-built structure.

42
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

l There is only one Wall Option for locating interior walls: Display Wall Widths. When checked, Interior
Dimension lines will measure the thicknesses of interior walls; when unchecked, wall widths are not measured.
l These settings can be left unchanged for this example.
4. Click Cancel and then Done to return to plan view.

To draw an interior dimension line

1. Zoom out until you can see the front left corner of the front bump-out.

2. Select CAD> Dimension> Interior Dimension , then click and drag from side to side across the interior of the
Garage.

3. Notice that the Auto Exterior Dimension and the Interior Dimension report different lengths for the same wall.
l This is because Auto Exterior Dimensions locate the outside of the framing by default, while Interior Dimensions
locate the inside of the framing.
l The difference, 11", is equal to the thickness of the two walls’ framing layers, which are each 5 1/2" thick.

Interior Dimensions can be produced along each wall in a room, or along each wall for all rooms on the current floor, with a
single click.

To dimension an entire room

1. Select Window> Fill Window so the plan fills the extents of the view window.

2. Click the Select Objects button, then click in the Entry room to select it.

3. Click the Auto Room Dimension edit button. A dimension line is generated along each of the walls that define
the Entry.

Interior walls can be located by and repositioned using any type of dimension line. See "Adjusting Wall Positions" on page
23 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.
Reposition the interior walls in this plan so their dimensions match those in this image:

43
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

When your interior walls are in position, you may find it helpful to delete some or all of the dimension lines.

To delete a dimension line

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on a dimension line to select it.

2. Click the Delete edit button, select Edit> Delete , or press the Delete key on the keyboard.

To delete all dimensions in the current view

1. Select CAD> Dimensions> Delete Dimensions to delete all dimension lines displaying in the current view.

2. If some or all of the dimensions are set to Auto Refresh, the program will confirm that you wish to disable Auto
Refresh.

To delete all dimensions in all plan views at once

1. Select Edit> Delete Objects to open the Delete Objects dialog.

2. Select the All Rooms On This Floor radio button, then under the CAD heading:
l Check Manual Dimensions to delete manually-drawn dimension lines such as those drawn by the Interior
Dimension tool.

l You can also check Automatic Dimensions to delete automatically generated dimension lines such as those
created by the Auto Exterior Dimensions tool. Bear in mind that dimensions as well as the Auto Refresh state
in multiple Saved Plan Views will be affected by this option so it is not often recommended.
l Click the Delete button to delete the specified objects.
l Click the Done button to close the dialog.

44
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

WORKING WITH WALL CONNECTIONS

Wall segments that are collinear but have different Wall Types usually snap together so that the outside of their Main Layers
are aligned. In some situations, though, they can become unaligned. Walls can be easily realigned using their edit handles.

To align collinear walls

1. Zoom in on the left side of the Garage, where the Fire-6 wall meets the exterior walls.

2. Notice that the vertical walls are not perfectly aligned, producing a slight jog:

3. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the Fire-6 wall to select it.

4. Using the square Move edit handle that displays along the wall at the point where you clicked, gently drag the Fire-6
wall slightly to the right.

l When Object Snaps are enabled, a red Intersection Snap Indicator will display when the inside surfaces of
the two walls meet.
5. When the wall snaps into position, release the mouse button.
6. Select the front wall of the Closet and adjust its position so that the Closet depth is 2’.

With these two collinear walls properly aligned, their intersection can now be adjusted using the Edit Wall Layer
Intersection edit handles.

To use the Edit Wall Layer Intersection edit handles

1. Select the Fire-6 wall and click the Edit Wall Layer Intersection edit handle.

2. Click and drag the edit handle located in the middle of the Main Layer and drag it downward until it reaches the
outside surface of the horizontal wall’s Main Layer.

45
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

3. Repeat step 2 with the edit handle located in the middle of the red fire-rated drywall.

4. When you are finished, Save your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
Floor plans typically include text with a variety of different pieces of information. With the interior walls in place,
additional annotations can be added.
The Working Plan View is active, so "Plan Rich Text Defaults are in use as they were in the Exterior Walls tutorial. See "To
set the rich text defaults" on page 26 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.

To add rich text annotations

1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text , then click in the view, near the top left corner of the Dining room.

2. In the Rich Text Specification dialog:

l Type: 2x4 exterior walls 16" OC U.N.O.

l Notice that U.N.O. is not flagged as a spelling error like it was in the Exterior Walls tutorial. See To remove a
spelling error indicator on page 28.

l Use your mouse to highlight just the letter x in 2x6, then click the Uppercase button to remove that attribute
from the selection.
l Click OK.
3. Adjust the newly created Rich Text object’s position using its Move edit handle.
4. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

46
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

You can continue working on this plan in the Multiple Floors tutorial. You can also learn about applying wall and flooring
materials in the Finish Materials tutorial.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Interior Walls.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for drawing interior walls and creating interior rooms.
To set the Interior Wall Defaults 32
To define rooms using interior walls 33
To specify a room type 34
To view room types in 3D 36
To subdivide room areas 37
To control the display of room labels 38
To merge room areas 38
To specify a different wall type 39
To reverse a wall’s layers 40
To replace a wall with a room divider 41
To change a wall into a room divider 41
To set dimension defaults to locate interior walls 42
To draw an interior dimension line 43
To dimension an entire room 43
To delete a dimension line 44
To delete all dimensions in the current view 44
To delete all dimensions in all plan views at once 44
To align collinear walls 45
To use the Edit Wall Layer Intersection edit handles 45
To add rich text annotations 46
To save a plan revision 47

47
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 2 - Interior Walls

What are some reasons that is it helpful to specify Room Types?
l Rooms in Chief Architect are given special attributes when they are assigned a Room Type. For example, porches use
a concrete floor material and have a ceiling and roof, while decks use floor planking and have no ceiling or roof.
What are two differences between the "Kitchen" and "Garage" Room Types?
l Kitchens have floor finish layers and framed floor platform by default, while Garages have a slab floor with no finish.
Where can you change the information that displays at the bottom of room labels?
l You can change the room size information that displays in a room label in the Layer Display Options dialog. The
"Interior Area", "Interior Dimensions", and "Standard Area" layers control what information displays underneath the
room name.
How are Room Dividers useful?
l The Room Divider tool can be used to define rooms without creating an actual, physical wall.
l Once separated, the rooms can be assigned separate traits like different ceiling heights or flooring materials.
What is the thickness of a Room Divider?
l By default, Room Dividers have a thickness of 0".
How do Auto Exterior Dimensions and Interior Dimensions locate walls differently?
l The Interior Dimension tool always locates exterior walls on their interior sides, while Auto Exterior Dimensions and
other dimension tools locate exterior walls on their exterior sides.
What are two ways to delete dimension lines?
l Dimension lines can be deleted individually using the Delete edit button or key on the keyboard.
l They can also be deleted in groups using the Delete Objects dialog
What type of snapping helps you align two walls so they are collinear?
l Object Snaps, and particularly Intersection Snaps can be used to make walls collinear.
What edit tool allows you to adjust how wall layers meet at an intersection?
l The Edit Wall Layer Intersection edit tool presents an edit handle for each wall layer, letting you adjust how each one
builds into an intersection with another wall.

Multiple Floors
Creating new floors in a plan is easy; but whenever possible, it is best to do so after the first floor plan has been finalized.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for adding floors to a design. Concepts introduced include:
Productivity Tips 49
Setting the Defaults 50
Using Plan Views 50

48
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

Creating New Floor Levels 50

Navigating and Displaying Floor Levels 52
Creating a Foundation 52
Aligning Walls Between Floors 56
Creating a Wall Legend 58
Creating Revisions 62

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Interior Walls tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-InteriorWalls and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File Management" on page 4 of the Exterior
Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to add floor levels to a project, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l It is best to add new floors after the walls on Floor 1 are in place.
l Setting Floor and Foundation Defaults as new floors are built saves time and reduces the changes of introducing errors.
l Align walls between floors using the Align with Floor Above and Align with Floor Below edit buttons.

l The Copy and Paste Hold Position commands can be used to align walls and other objects between floors as
well.

Interface
l There are several ways to navigate multiple floors in a plan: the Up One Floor and Down One Floor buttons,
the Change Floor/Reference tool, and the Project Browser.

l Use the Reference Display to display walls and other objects located on a floor other than the Current Floor.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l F6 - Fill Window
l F9 - Reference Display
l Arrow keys - nudge selected object
l Ctrl/⌘ + C - Copy

49
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

l Alt + Shift + V - Paste Hold Position

l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
adding floors to a plan, there are several defaults of particular importance.
The 2nd Floor Defaults allow you to set the default ceiling height for the floor as well as floor and ceiling structure
definitions. See To add a second floor on page 50.
Foundation Defaults specify the type of foundation to be built as well as important defaults such as wall height and slab
thickness. See Creating a Foundation on page 52.
Foundation default settings can be set in both the Foundation Defaults and Build Foundation dialogs.
As with architectural objects, it is a good idea to set schedule defaults before creating a wall schedule. See To set wall
schedule defaults on page 59

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
As it did for drawing exterior and interior walls, the Working Plan View will work well for adding new floor levels. See To
examine a saved plan view’s settings on page 7.

CREATING NEW FLOOR LEVELS

A plan file can have up to 30 floors.

To add a second floor

1. Select Build> Floor> Build New Floor .

2. In the New Floor dialog, select Derive new 2nd floor plan from the 1st floor plan.
l This option produces a second floor shell using the same wall types as the exterior walls on Floor 1. Walls created
over Pony Walls inherit the upper wall type.
l You could instead create a blank second floor and then draw the second story walls manually; however, it is
usually faster to automatically generate the perimeter walls and then edit them as needed.
3. Click OK to close the New Floor dialog and open the 2nd Floor Defaults dialog.
l Note that the default Rough Ceiling height is 97 1/8" and click OK.
l Later on, this dialog will be used to specify a default floor covering. See "To set flooring defaults by floor" on
page 219 of the Finish Materials Tutorial.

50
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

4. Click OK and a floor plan for the second floor is created based on the exterior walls of the first floor plan.

5. You can confirm that the 2nd floor level is now active in the view by looking at the Change Floor/Reference
toolbar button located between the Down and Up One Floor buttons in the toolbars.

It’s not uncommon for the upper walls of a home to have a different siding material than the walls below.

To customize the second floor wall type

1. Select Build> Wall> Define Wall Type to open the Wall Type Definitions dialog.

2. At the top left corner of the dialog, select "Siding-6" from the drop-down list and click the Copy button.
3. Name the new wall type "Shingle-6", then:
l Specify a Thickness for Layer 1 of 3/4".
l Specify the Material for Layer 1 as "Shake - Natural", which you can find in the Select Material dialog by
searching or browsing to Chief Architect Core Catalogs at Materials> Roofing> Shakes and Shingles> Wood.
l To help distinguish this wall type, change the Fill for Layer 4 to a Solid pale purple color.
l Click OK to create the new wall type and close the dialog.
4. Shift + select the Siding-6 walls on Floor 2 and click the Open Object edit button.

5. On the WALL TYPES panel of the Wall Specification dialog, select "Shingle-6" from the drop-down list and click
OK.

51
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

6. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

NAVIGATING AND DISPLAYING FLOOR LEVELS

Now that there is more than one floor level in the plan, it’s important to be able to display and navigate between them.

To navigate between floors levels

1. Click the Down One Floor button to go to Floor 1.

2. Click the Up One Floor button to return to Floor 2.

3. Select Tools> Reference Floors> Change Floor/Reference or click the toolbar button of the same name located
between the Up and Down One Floor buttons to see a list of all of the floors in your plan and choose the one you’d
like to go to.

You can also see a list of all floors in the plan and navigate to any of them in the Project Browser. Select View> Project
Browser , expand the Floor Levels folder, right-click on a floor, and select Open View from the contextual menu.

In addition to the current floor, you can display a second floor for reference in the same view window as the active floor.
See To align walls between floors on page 56, below.
Sometimes, it is helpful to display a different floor in an entirely separate view window. See To copy and paste walls
between floors on page 58.

CREATING A FOUNDATION
When the rooms on Floor 1 have been defined, a foundation can be created beneath them.

52
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

To create a basement foundation

1. Select Build> Floor> Build Foundation . In the Build Foundation dialog. On the FOUNDATION panel:

l Under the Foundation Type heading, select Walls with Footings.

l Under the Stem Walls heading, change the Minimum StemWall Height to 113 1/8" inches. This will provide
room for standard stud length furred walls of 109 1/8" plus a 4" slab floor.
l Under the Garage Options heading, leave Garage Floor to Stem Wall Top at 12" but change the Minimum Garage
Height to 37 1/2". This will produce a 12" curb around the garage with a 1 1/2" sill plate and stem walls that
extend 24" below the top of the Garage slab.
l Click OK to close the dialog and create a foundation level for the plan.
2. Select Derive New Foundation Plan From the First Floor Plan and click OK to close the New Floor dialog and
create a foundation.

3. Notice that the Garage’s foundation is separated from the rest of the foundation plan and that "S" Markers indicate
where the stem wall top height changes.
4. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Floor Overview .

5. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the floor surface of the Garage area.

6. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the STRUCTURE panel of the Room Specification dialog, notice that
Room Supplies Floor for the Room Above is checked. This indicates that the Garage room on Floor 1 inherits its
concrete floor and curbs from this room on Floor 0. Click Cancel to close the dialog.
7. Select File> Close View to return to plan view.

Basement walls often have furring to accommodate insulation, electrical, and plumbing and a finish surface like drywall.

53
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

To create a furred basement wall type

1. Select the front vertical foundation wall located to the left of the Garage area and click the Open Object edit
button.
2. On the WALL TYPES panel of the Wall Specification dialog:
l Notice that "8" Concrete Stem Wall" is specified as the wall type.
l Click the Define button.
3. In the Wall Type Definitions dialog: notice that "8" Concrete Stem Wall" is the selected wall type, then click the
Copy button.
l A new wall type named "8" Concrete Stem Wall, Copy" is created.
l Click in the text field where its name is stated and change it to "8" Concrete with Furring".
4. Click the Insert Below button to create a new layer, identical to the first.
5. With this new layer selected, click the Move Down button to move the new layer from the "Main Layers" section to
the "Interior Layers" section.
6. Specify Layer 2 as the "Insulation Air Gap" material with a Thickness of 1" and no Fill.
7. With Layer 2 selected, click the Insert Below button two more times to create a total of three Interior Layers, then
modify the two new layers as follows:
l Specify Layer 3 as the "Fir Framing 2" material with a Thickness of 3 1/2" and a pale green Solid Fill color.
l Specify Layer 4 as "Drywall" with a Thickness of 1/2" and no Fill.
8. These three furring layer materials are already present in the current plan file because they are assigned to other wall
types. Since this is the case, you can find them on the PLAN MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog, either
by searching or scrolling the list. Selecting from the PLAN MATERIALS panel is an efficient way to make sure your
new wall type is consistent with other walls in the plan.

9. Click once on the Layer 3 line item to select it, then:

l Check the box beside Framing under the Material Layer tab below the table. This will allow the layer to produce
framing when wall framing is generated later on. See Wall Framing on page 377.
l Make sure the Type is "Lumber".

54
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

l Specify the Stud Spacing as 16" On Center.

l Set the Stud Width as 1 1/2".
10. Click OK to close the dialog and create the new wall type.

To replace the basement wall type

1. Use the Add Break edit tool to divide the right vertical wall in two, at the point where it is intersected by the
horizontal wall at the back of the garage area.
2. Add another break along the left vertical wall of the Garage, where it is intersected by the front left horizontal wall.
3. Click the Select Objects button, then click on one of the foundation wall segments that define the basement
area.
4. Hold down the Shift key, then click each of the walls that define the basement area, adding them to the selection set.

5. Click the Open Object edit button to open the Wall Specification dialog.

6. On the WALL TYPES panel, select "8" Concrete with Furring" from the Wall Type drop-down list.
7. Move the mouse pointer into the dialog preview pane, then click and drag to rotate the wall. You can also use the
mouse third button wheel to zoom in and out.
l Notice that the entire wall assembly is centered over its footing.
l Typically, only the concrete layer should be centered over the footing.
8. Go to the FOUNDATION panel, then:
l Check the box beside Center Footing on Main Layer.
l Notice that the Footing Offset setting updates to show a value of -2 1/2". This is equal to half the thickness of
interior air gap and furring layers.
l Notice, too, that the preview now shows the concrete wall layer centered over the footing.
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes to the selected walls.

55
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

9. Remember to Save your work.

ALIGNING WALLS BETWEEN FLOORS

In any plan with multiple floors, some walls may need to be perfectly aligned from one floor to the next. Here, the walls
that will form one side of a stairwell will be aligned.

To align walls between floors

1. Select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Reference Display .

l The walls on the floor above, Floor 1, are shown in red for reference.
l You can control which floor shows in the Reference Display as well as its appearance.
2. Zoom in on the left side of the plan.

56
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

3. Select Build> Wall> Straight Interior Wall , then draw a vertical wall over the wall visible in the Reference
Display on the left side of the plan.

l If you are sufficiently zoomed in, the new wall will snap into alignment with the wall shown in the Reference
Display.
l Notice that the edge lines of the new wall are highlighted in light blue: this indicates that they are exactly aligned
with the Reference Display lines of the wall above.
4. Click the Select Objects button, then select the newly drawn interior wall.

5. Press the Right Arrow key once to Nudge the wall 1" to the right. Notice:

6. The wall’s edge lines are no longer highlighted and the red lines representing the wall on the floor above can be seen
in the Reference Display.
7. On the edit toolbar, the Align With Wall Above edit button is now available.

57
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

8. Click the Align With Wall Above button. The wall is moved back into alignment with the wall below and the
edit button disappears.

Another way to ensure that walls are aligned between floors is to use the Copy and Paste Hold Position tools.
Copy and Paste Hold Position can be used while navigating in a single plan view window, but it is easier to see what they
do when two plan views showing different floors are tiled.

To copy and paste walls between floors

1. Select the interior wall, then select Edit> Copy .

2. Select Tools> New Plan View . A second plan view window is created and is now active.

3. Click the Up One Floor button twice to go to Floor 2 in the new window. Notice that the current view’s tab
states that it shows Floor 2 while the original window’s tab still indicates that it shows Floor 0.
4. Select Window> Tile Vertically to tile the two plan views side by side. The view of Floor 2 will still be active,
as indicated by the darker color of its title bar.
5. Select Edit> Paste> Paste Hold Position . A copy of the interior wall selected on Floor 0 is created directly
above the original, on Floor 2.

6. Select File> Close View to return to the original view showing Floor 0.
7. Select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Reference Display to toggle the Reference Display off again.

8. Don’t forget to Save your work.

CREATING A WALL LEGEND

In a plan with a number of special wall types, it is helpful to include a legend with information about each. This can be
accomplished using a Wall Schedule.

58
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

To set wall schedule defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog.

l Click the arrow beside "Schedules" to expand the category.

l Select "Wall Schedule" and click the Edit button.
2. On the COLUMNS/ROWS panel of the Schedule Defaults dialog, customize the Columns selections:
l In the list of Columns to Include, select "Wall Type" and click the Remove button.
l In the list of Available Columns, select "Total Width" and click the Add button.
l Add "Wall Construction, Upper" and "Wall Construction, Lower" as well.
3. Also on the COLUMNS/ROWS panel, make sure that Display Column Headings in Schedule is checked.

4. On the MAIN TEXT STYLE panel, notice that there are three ways to assign a Text Style to schedules: by layer, by
specifying a particular Text Style, or by using Custom settings.

l Use Layer for Text Style is selected.

l Although disabled, the Use Text Style option states the name of the saved Text Style that is in use, "Schedule

59
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

Style".
l The settings and the preview below show which settings are in use.
5. Click OK and then Done to close the Default Settings dialog and apply your changes.

CAD Details are a type of view window used to organize detail drawings, schedules, and other 2D CAD information.

To create a wall legend

1. Select CAD> CAD Detail Management .

2. In the CAD Detail Management dialog, click the New button.

3. In the New CAD Detail dialog, type a short, descriptive name like "Legends" and click OK.

4. The "Legends" CAD Detail window opens, and is empty.

5. Select Tools> Schedules> Wall Schedule and click once in the view to place a Wall Schedule at that location.

6. Select the wall schedule and click the Open Object edit button.

7. On the GENERAL panel of the Wall Schedule Specification dialog, change the Main Title to "Wall Legend" and click
OK.

By default, the information in each schedule cell will be presented in a single row. Once a schedule is created, though, its
column widths can be modified.

To edit schedule columns

1. Click on the wall schedule to select it and notice its various edit handles. In particular:

2. The small diamond shaped handles located in the Title row, centered on the grid lines that divide the columns allow
you to Resize Columns.
3. The small square Move Column edit handles are located in the Column Heading row, centered in each cell, and
allow you to rearrange the columns.

60
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

4. Click on the Resize Column handle to the right of the "Wall Construction, Upper" column and drag it to the left.

5. Release the mouse button to resize the "Wall Construction, Upper" column.

6. You can resize the "Wall Construction, Lower" column, as well, if you wish.
7. Columns can also be renamed. With the wall schedule still selected, click the Open Object edit button.

8. On the GENERAL panel of the Wall Schedule Specification dialog:

l Select "Wall Construction, Upper" in the Columns to Include list.
l Click the Rename button.
l Rename Schedule Column dialog, delete ", Upper" from the New Name and click OK.
l Click once more to close the dialog and apply your change.

Since Room Dividers do not actually have materials or an assembly, they do not need to be in the wall legend. There are
two ways to remove them.

To remove an item from a schedule

1. Select a Room Divider wall and click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the SCHEDULE panel of the Wall Specification dialog, uncheck Include in Schedule and click OK.
l Notice that "Room Divider" is still included in the schedule.
l This approach works best if there are other walls of the same type that you would like to be represented in the
schedule.
3. Select the schedule and click the Open Object edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Wall Schedule
Specification dialog:
l Scroll down the list of Categories to Include.
l Click the arrow next to Wall to expand the category.

61
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

l Uncheck "Room Divider" and click OK.

4. When you are finished, Save your work and select File> Close View to close the "Legends" detail.

The order that objects are listed in schedules can be customized. See "To change schedule numbering" on page 129 of the
Decks and Porches Tutorial.
You can continue working on this plan in the Interior Stairs tutorial.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Floors.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for adding a foundation and new floors to a structure.
To add a second floor 50
To customize the second floor wall type 51
To navigate between floors levels 52
To create a basement foundation 53
To create a furred basement wall type 54
To replace the basement wall type 55
To align walls between floors 56
To copy and paste walls between floors 58
To set wall schedule defaults 59

62
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

To create a wall legend 60

To edit schedule columns 60
To remove an item from a schedule 61
To save a plan revision 62

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 3 - Multiple Floors

When building a new floor, why is it beneficial to derive the new floor plan from an existing floor?
l This option produces a second floor shell using the same wall types as the exterior walls on the top living floor of the
plan. It is usually faster to automatically generate the perimeter walls and then edit them as needed than it is to draw
them manually.
What are two ways to switch from one floor to another?
l You can click the Up One Floor and Down One Floor buttons, or the Change Floor/Reference button.
l Floors can also be navigated in the Project Browser side window.
What is the name of the tool that lets you view the location of objects on another floor without going to that floor?
l The Reference Floor Display toggle is found in the Tools> Reference Floors submenu and on the toolbar. The
keyboard hotkey is F9.
What are two ways to align walls between floors?
l The Align With Wall Above and Align With Wall Below edit tools will align a selected wall that is slightly out of
alignment.
l You can also copy a wall and paste a duplicate at the same location on a different floor using the Paste Hold Position
command.
How can you tell which floor level is shown in the current plan view?
l The floor level in the current view is reported in the Change Floor/Reference button, which is located between the Up
One Floor and Down One Floor buttons on the toolbar.
What two attributes of a "Garage" Room Type are created when the foundation is generated?
l When a stem wall foundation is generated, stem walls and a curb are created around the Garage slab.
l On Floor 0, "S" Markers indicate where the stem wall top height changes.
l In addition, the Garage room on Floor 1 inherits its concrete floor and curbs from the room below it on Floor 0.
What does an "S" marker along a foundation wall mean?
l "S" Markers indicate where changes to stem wall top heights occur: for example, where basement walls meet garage
curbs.
What type of view is recommended for creating schedules?
l CAD Detail views are a great place to organize 2D-only information like schedules.
What are three ways that text style settings can be assigned to an object like a schedule?
l Text style settings can be applied to an object by layer, by assigning a Text Style to the object, or by specifying
custom style settings.
How do you adjust the width of a schedule column?

63
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

l Click and drag a small diamond shaped Resize Columns edit handle located in the Title row of the schedule, above
each vertical column divider line.

Interior Stairs
Stairs and staircase rooms connect multiple floors in a plan.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for creating stairs and introduces working in section views. Concepts
introduced include:
File Management 64
Productivity Tips 64
Setting the Defaults 65
Using Plan Views 65
Adding Stairs 66
Working in Cross Section Views 70
Creating a Stairwell 72
Confirming Headroom Clearance 73
Creating a Stacked Staircase 76
Adding Plan Notes 82
Creating Revisions 85

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Multiple Floors tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Floors and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Open Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The
Recent Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing
where your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File Management" on page 4 of the
Exterior Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create stairs and stairwells, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l Stairs automatically detect floor platform heights and create consistent risers and treads to meet standard building
practices.

64
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

l Click between two stair sections with the Draw Stairs tool to create a landing.
l Use the Tape Measure tool to quickly measure distances without drawing a permanent dimension line.

Content
l Cross Section/Elevation views can be annotated with text and dimensions and saved for use later on.

Interface
l Tiling 2D and 3D views can help in the positioning of objects like stairs.
l Use the Reference Display to display walls and other objects located on a floor other than the Current Floor.
l Multiple line items in a list, as well as multiple objects, can be group-selected using the Shift and Ctrl/⌘ keys.
l Saved camera views are listed and can be accessed from the Project Browser side window.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Tab - Select Next Object edit tool
l Shift + F6 - Tile Vertically
l F9 - Reference Display
l Ctrl/⌘ + C - Copy
l Alt + Shift + V - Paste Hold Position
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
drawing stairs, there are several defaults that should be borne in mind.
Before adding stairs, it is best to make sure that your floor and ceiling heights have all been finalized. If changes are made
affect the floor heights, the total rise and run of a set of stairs may also be affected.
Before drawing interior stairs, it is a good idea to set the Interior Stair Defaults to meet your needs. See To set the interior
stair defaults on page 66.
Since stairwell rooms are often defined by railings, it is a good idea to set the Railing Defaults before they are created. See
To set the railing defaults on page 72.
As with architectural objects, it is recommended that you set Note and Note Schedule Defaults before creating floor plan
notes. See Adding Plan Notes on page 82.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Working Plan View will work well for adding stairs to connect the floor levels created in the Multiple Floors tutorial.
See To examine a saved plan view’s settings on page 7.

65
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

ADDING STAIRS
Stairs are drawn in an upward direction, from the current floor to the floor above, and locate floor platforms automatically.
Sometimes, only a few steps are needed to reach between the floors in different rooms.

To set the interior stair defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog. Click the arrow to the left of "Stairs and
Ramps" to expand the category, select "Interior Stairs", then click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Interior Stair Defaults dialog, specify the Width as 44".
3. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel, under the Newels heading:
l Specify the Width as 4".
l Uncheck Rail Passes Over Newel.
l Specify the Height as 44".
l Next to Type, click the Library button to open the Select Library Object dialog.
4. The Select Library Object dialog is a modal version of the Library Browser. In the Browser, a wide variety of items
useful for creating a detailed design can be found. In the Select Library Object dialog, however, the content is
filtered to only list the Type of object that can be used in the current context. Here, where a style of newel post is
being selected, only Millwork is listed in this dialog.
l To further filter the results, type "newel" in the Search field, then move your mouse pointer over the "Balusters,
Newels & Posts" Folder line item in the Filters drop-down list.

l Notice that the folder's location in the Folders tree list is reported below its name as well as in a Tool Tip that
appears when the mouse is over the line item, then click once to select it.
l The tree list in the Folders panel will now expand to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural>
Millwork> Balusters, Newels & Posts.
l Open the Boxed folder, select "BX-02" and click OK.

66
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

5. On the MATERIALS panel:

l Select the "Balusters" component, then hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key and click on the "Riser" and "Wall Trim"
components, and the "Main" component of the BX-02 newel to add them to the selection.
l Click the Select Material button and select "Color - White" from the PLAN MATERIALS panel of the Select
Material dialog. Choosing a color already in use in your plan will help make sure finish materials are
consistent.
6. Next, Ctrl/⌘ + select the "Panels" and "Rails" components as described above and assign the "Red Oak - Natural"
material to them:
l On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog, search for "red oak" and scroll down the list
of Folder items that match this search term.

l Beneath each Folder, its location in the Folders tree list is indicated.
l Select the Red Oak folder located in Materials/Wood from the list to use this folder as a Filter.
l The tree list in the Folders panel will now expand to show the contents of Chief Architect Core Catalogs>
Materials> Wood> Red Oak.
l Select the "Red Oak - Natural" material and click OK.
7. Returning to the Materials panel, select the Tread component and click the Select Material button.
l On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog, search for "red oak" again and scroll down the
list of Folder items that match this search term.

l This time, select the Red Oak folder located in Materials/Flooring/Wood Flooring/3-4-5" Plank/Red Oak.
l If you cannot see a folder's full library location, move your mouse pointer over its name and the location will
display in a tool tip.
l When you click on a folder, the tree list in the Folders panel will expand to show its contents.
l Select "Red Oak 3-4-5" Plank - Natural" and click OK.
8. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs.

The floor finish materials for rooms will be set to match the stairs later on. See "Specifying Flooring Materials" on page
217 of the Finish Materials Tutorial.

67
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

To create stairs between rooms

1. Go to Floor 1, then Zoom out so the Garage can be seen.

2. Select Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs , then move the mouse into the top left corner of the Garage room.

3. Click once to create a short stair section that spans the difference in floor height between the Garage and Foyer
rooms.
4. Notice that the stairs have a direction arrow and an "UP" label, indicating that they are drawn in an upward direction.

Stairs can also be drawn to span different floor levels.

To create a staircase between floors

1. Zoom in on the Foyer room.

2. Select Build> Stairs> Draw Stairs , then click to the right of the wall separating the Foyer from the Dining
room and drag upward. Notice:

68
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

l The stairs have an "UP" label and an arrow indicating their direction.
l The stairs snap to the side of the room automatically.
l When you release the mouse button, a staircase is created.

To position a staircase
1. Select CAD> Dimension> Manual Dimension from the menu, then click and drag a dimension line from the
bottom end of the stairs to the horizontal exterior wall of the Foyer.
2. By default, the dimension line will locate the outside surface of the wall’s Main Layer. Click on the dimension line
to select it, then click and drag the diamond-shaped end edit handle back until it snaps to the inside surface of the
Main Layer.
3. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the staircase to select it and move your mouse pointer over the
dimension line.
4. When the mouse pointer changes to a Pointing Hand icon, click once, enter 4’ 6" in the inline text field, and press
Enter.

To adjust a staircase’s rise and run

1. Click on the stairs to select it, then click the Open Object edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Staircase
Specification dialog, notice:
l The Staircase Information at the top of the dialog states the current Number of Risers and the Rise Angle for
reference.
l In this example, this section also indicates that the selected staircase does not reach Floor 2 and recommends a
total of 16 risers.
2. To prevent the base of the stairs from moving as changes are made to the settings in this dialog, select Lock Bottom
under the "Advanced Options" heading.

69
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

3. Click the Make Best Fit button. Notice that staircase now reaches the next floor and that the Number of Risers and
Rise Angle are modified.
4. Still on the GENERAL panel:
l Under "Advanced Options", select Lock Number of Treads.
l Change the Tread Depth to 10 1/2". Note that Riser Height stays the same but overall Length is adjusted.
l Click OK.
5. Once the staircase's position and length are correct, click the Select Objects button, then select the wall located
to the left of the staircase. Extend its top end upward until it reaches the top end of the staircase.
6. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

WORKING IN CROSS SECTION VIEWS

Cross section views are often required in construction documents, and are also helpful to reference as you develop your
drawing.

To tile floor plan and section views

1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Back Clipped Cross Section , then click and drag a horizontal camera
from right to left, entirely within the width of the staircase:

70
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

l Notice that the stairs are connected to the floor platform on Floor 2.
l Note, too, that the floor platform is unbroken with no passage between floors.
2. Select Window> Tile Vertically to tile the Back Clipped Cross Section and plan views side by side.

3. Notice that the cross section’s title bar is darker in color than that of the plan view. The darker title bar indicates that
the cross section is the currently active view.

Stair sections are often included in construction documents, so this Back Clipped Cross Section view can be saved for use
later on. See "Sending Section and Elevation Views to Layout" on page 528 of the Sending Views to Layout Tutorial.

To save a camera view

1. Select Tools> Active View> Save Active View .

2. Select Tools> Active View> Edit Active View to open the Camera Specification dialog.

l On the CAMERA panel, type a short, descriptive Name for the camera, like "Stair Section".
l On the PLAN DISPLAY panel, notice that the camera is set to display as a callout in plan view, and that its
Callout Label is S1.

71
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

l On the LAYER panel, notice that the camera is located on the "Cameras" layer. This layer controls its display in
plan view.
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.
3. Before continuing, Save your work.

Saved camera views are listed in the Project Browser using their camera Name.

CREATING A STAIRWELL
A stairwell is simply an interior room that has been assigned the Room Type “Open Below” so that it has no floor platform.
The Stairwell for a given staircase is always found on the floor above the stairs.
In the Multiple Floors tutorial, interior walls were aligned between floors to create one side of a Stairwell for the stairs to
Floor 2. See "Aligning Walls Between Floors" on page 56 of the Multiple Floors Tutorial.
Rooms such as Stairwells can also be defined using Railings.

To set the railing defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog. Click the arrow to the left of "Walls" to
expand the category, select "Railing", then click the Edit button.
2. On the RAIL STYLE panel of the Railing Defaults dialog, select Rail to Post.
3. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel, under the Newels/Posts heading:
l Specify the Width as 4".
l Specify the Height as 38".
l Click the Library button.
4. In the Select Library Object dialog, search for "BX-02" as Text , select the BX-02 newel, and click OK:

5. On the MATERIALS panel:

l Select the "Balusters" component, then hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key and click on the "Main" component of the
BX-02 newel to add it to the selection.
l Click the Select Material button, and select the "Color - White" material on the PLAN MATERIALS panel of the
Select Material dialog.
l Select the "Rail" component, click the Select Material button, and select "Red Oak - Natural" from the PLAN
MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog.
6. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs.

To create an automatic stairwell

1. Click in the plan view window to make it active, click the Select Objects button, then click on the staircase to
select it.
2. Click the Auto Stairwell edit button and notice that in the cross section view, the floor platform above the
staircase has been removed.

72
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

3. With the plan view still active, select Window> Tab Windows. This will return the interface to tabbed view
windows with the plan view displaying and both views' tabs located above view window.
4. Go Up One Floor to Floor 2 and notice that a new room has been created to the right of the vertical interior
wall.

l The existing framed wall forms part of the Auto Stairwell, and Railings are created to enclose the rest of the space.
l The vertical Railing at the top of the stairs has a Doorway opening in it.
5. When you are finished, Save your work.

CONFIRMING HEADROOM CLEARANCE

An important consideration in designing a staircase is adequate headroom, which can be measured in a cross section view
such as the one created above. There are several ways to make an existing view window active, including:
l Click on the tab that states the name of the desired view.
l Open the Window menu, then select the desired view from the list of open views at the bottom of the menu.

73
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

l Right-click on the view in the Project Browser and select Open View from the contextual menu.

To draw dimension lines in a cross section view

1. Zoom in on the bottom end of the stairs on Floor 1, making sure that you can also see the ceiling.

2. Select CAD> Dimensions> End to End Dimension , then click and drag a vertical dimension line from the top
outer edge of the stair nosing up to the ceiling surface.
3. As you drag, notice that the dimension line preview locates the second tread of the stairs. This is because this tread is
located within the Reach distance set in the Dimension Defaults dialog.
4. When the dimension line preview locates the ceiling, release the mouse button.

5. An Information message will explain that the dimension line locates point markers instead of architectural objects in
the model. Click OK.

To confirm headroom clearance in a stairwell

1. Zoom in on the bottom stair tread and notice:

74
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

l There is a cross-shaped Point Marker at the end of the dimension line (shown here in red and with thicker than
normal lines for clarity).
l The Point Marker is aligned with the bottom of the tread rather than the top.
2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the Point Marker to select it.

l If you select the dimension line instead, click the Select Next Object edit button or press the Spacebar.

l The selected object’s type is indicated on the left side of the Status Bar.
3. Click and drag its square Move edit handle upward. When Object Snaps are enabled, it will snap to the top
of the tread.

4. Pan upward until the ceiling comes into view. There are two ways to pan in a view:

l Select Window> Pan Window , then click and hold, drag downward, and release the mouse button.

l Click and hold the middle mouse button, drag downward, and release.
5. When the ceiling can be seen:
l Notice what the Point Marker at the end of the dimension line is aligned with.
l If it is aligned with the ceiling framing at the back of the ceiling surface layer, select it and move it downward so
that it is aligned with the ceiling surface.

75
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

6. Select Window> Fill Window to zoom out so the entire cross section can be seen in the view window.

7. Select File> Close View to return to plan view, and remember to Save your work.

CREATING A STACKED STAIRCASE

Staircases are often stacked above one another to save floor space.

To create stacked staircases

1. Click the Down One Floor button to return to Floor 1.

2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the staircase to select it.

3. Select Edit> Copy .

4. Click the Down One Floor button to go to Floor 0.

5. Select Edit> Paste> Paste Hold Position . A copy of the staircase selected on Floor 0 is created directly below
the original.
6. Click the Select Objects button, then select the wall located to the left of the staircase. Extend its top end
upward until it reaches the top end of the staircase.

76
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

Since the ceiling height on Floor 0 is taller than on Floor 1, the length and height of the basement stairs should be examined.

To examine stair structure

1. With the newly pasted staircase still selected, click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Staircase Specification dialog, note that:

l The Staircase Information states although the stairs do reach the next level, they are described as steep.
l The Riser Height is 7 5/8", which meets most residential building codes.

Building codes can vary considerably by location. It is your

responsibility to make sure that your design meets the
building codes for your project site.

3. This time, the top of the stairs is at the correct location, directly below the stairs above, so select Lock Top.
4. Click the Make Best Fit button, then click OK.
5. Zoom in on the bottom end of the basement stairs.

6. Select CAD> Dimensions> Tape Measure , then click and drag a temporary dimension line between the bottom
of the stairs and the vertical exterior wall.

77
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

7. This distance is too narrow to serve as a passage, so select Edit> Undo from the menu to restore the stairs
original rise and run.
8. Select the staircase and click the Auto Stairwell edit button.

9. Save your work, then go Up One Floor to Floor 1, which is where the new stairwell was created.

Stairwells are an example of spaces where objects are drawn close together or even over one another. In situations like this,
it is helpful to turn the display of some objects off.

To turn off the display of objects

1. Open the Active Layer Display Options side window, which is docked to the right side of the program window by
default.
l Click on its tab to display it in front of the other side windows at that location.

l If it is not open, select View> Active Layer Display Options .

2. In the Name Filter field, begin typing the word: stairs. As you type, the layers listed in the table below will filter
automatically.

3. Locate the "Stairs & Ramps" layer and click once in the "Disp" column to remove the check mark.

78
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

Note: Although the "Stairs & Ramps" layer has been turned off, the
dimension line that locates the stairs on Floor 1 can still be seen.

With the display of the staircase turned off, it is now easy to see the railing walls of the Auto Stairwell so that they can be
modified. Here, the railings will be replaced by walls using several methods.

To edit Auto Stairwell railings

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the vertical Railing separating the Stairwell from the Living room.

2. Click the Open Object edit button, and in the Railing Specification dialog:

l On the GENERAL panel, uncheck Railing and No Locate.

l On the WALL TYPES panel, select "Interior-4" from the Type drop-down list, then click OK.
3. Select the horizontal wall separating the Dining room from the Kitchen.

79
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

l Click and drag its right end edit handle to the right until it snaps to the horizontal wall on the other side of the
Stairwell.
l As you drag, the Interior-4 wall replaces the railing.
4. Select the vertical wall separating the Dining room from the Foyer and use its top end edit handle to replace the
portion of the invisible Room Divider above it that defines the Stairwell.
5. Select the wall separating the Stairwell from the Kitchen, click the diamond-shaped Same Wall Type edit handle
located above the top end of the wall and drag it to the right, replacing the railing and the opening in it.
6. Select the horizontal wall dividing the Dining room from the Kitchen, click the Add Break edit button, then
click on the selected wall at the top right corner of the Dining room to divide it into two segments.
7. Select the horizontal wall segment separating the Stairwell from the Foyer.
l Click on the Temporary Dimension that states how far it is from the exterior wall of the Foyer.
l In the inline text field, type 6’ and press Enter to move the wall.

8. Go Up One Floor to Floor 2 and extend the length of the full height wall on the left side of the staircase until it
reaches the top end of the staircase. See To create stacked staircases on page 76.
9. Return to the Active Layer Display Options side window and turn the "Stairs & Ramps" layer back on.
10. When you are finished, Save your work.

As with the first run of stairs, it is a good idea to confirm headroom clearance for the basement stairs. See Confirming
Headroom Clearance on page 73.

To confirm headroom clearance

1. Open the saved "Stair Section" camera created earlier. There are three ways to do this:

l Select the camera callout in plan view and click the Open View edit button.

l Double-click on the camera callout in plan view.

80
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

l Select View> Project Browser , expand the Cross Sections folder, right-click on the "Stair Section" and select
Open View from the contextual menu.
2. Zoom in on the basement stairs and use an End to End Dimension line to measure the headroom of the
stairs on Floor 0.

Since the focus of this section view is the staircase, the rest of the structure does not need to be shown and can be clipped
out.

To add vertical and horizontal clip planes

1. With the section view still active, select Tools> Edit Active View .

2. On the CAMERA panel of the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog:

l Check the boxes beside Clip Elevation and Clip Sides.
l Notice that a Clip Width as well as Bottom and Top Clip Elevations can be specified, but leave them unchanged.
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.
3. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options . In the Active Layer Display Options side
window, turn on the display of the "CAD, Clip Lines" layer.
4. Zoom out until you can see the rectangular border formed by the clip plane lines.

5. Click on the horizontal Top Clip Elevation line to select it, then move it so it is positioned just above the floor
surface of Floor 2:

81
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

l Move your mouse pointer over the red, square Move Line Segment handle that displays at the point where you
clicked. The mouse pointer changes to a two headed arrow .

l Click and drag downwards or upwards as needed and release the mouse button when the line is positioned just
above the floor surface of Floor 2.
l To override Grid Snaps, hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key while you drag.
l As with walls and other types of objects, you can also move clip lines using dimensions if you wish. See To move
walls using dimensions on page 23.
6. Edit the Bottom Clip Elevation line and both Side Clip lines so that only the stairwell from Floor 0 to Floor 2 is
included in the view.

7. When you are finished, Save your work and select File> Close View to close the section view and return to plan
view.

ADDING PLAN NOTES

In previous tutorials, annotations were created using Rich Text. Another way to add written information to a plan view is to
add Note callouts and a Note Schedule.
Note Schedules can be set up for a variety of different purposes: for example, structural key notes.

82
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

To set note schedule defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog.

l Click the arrow beside "Schedules" to expand the category.

l Select "Note Schedule" and click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Note Schedule Defaults dialog, which opens next:

l Leave Include Objects from All Floors checked.

l Notice the Categories to Include. These are the different types of Notes and Note Schedules that can be created.
l Click the arrow to the left of "Note" to expand the category and confirm that only General has a check mark next
to it.
3. On the COLUMNS/ROWS panel:
l Under the Columns heading, leave Display Column Headings in Schedule unchecked.
l Make sure that only "2D Symbol" and "Text" are listed under Columns to Include.
l Under the Rows heading, leave Group Similar Objects checked.
l Under the Object Preview Options heading, make sure that Scale Images and Use Plan View Scale are checked.
4. On the MAIN TEXT STYLE panel, notice that like Wall Schedules, Note Schedules are set to Use Layer for Text
Style. See "To set wall schedule defaults" on page 59 of the Multiple Floors Tutorial.
5. On the LABELS panel, select a Callout Shape. Here, Capsule is used.
6. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

Note schedules can be placed in the same CAD Detail as the Wall Legend. See "To create a wall legend" on page 60 of the
Multiple Floors Tutorial.

83
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

To add a note schedule

1. Select CAD> CAD Detail Management .

2. In the CAD Detail Management dialog, select the "Legends" detail and click the Rename button.
3. In the Rename CAD Detail dialog, rename the detail to "Legends and Notes".
4. With the "Legends and Notes" detail selected, click the Open button.
5. Select Tools> Schedules> Note Schedule and click once to the right of the Wall Legend to place a Note
Schedule at that location.
6. Select the schedule and click the Open Object edit button.

7. On the GENERAL panel of the Note Schedule Specification dialog, change the Main Title to "Floor Plan Notes" and
click OK.
8. Click on the new Note Schedule to select it, then align it with the Wall Legend’s top edge:
l Hold down the Shift key and click on the Wall Legend to select them both as a group.

l Click the Align/Distribute Objects edit button.

l In the Align/Distribute Objects dialog, under the "Move Objects Vertically to" heading, select Top Edges and
click OK.

Because there are no Notes present in the plan yet, the schedule only shows a title bar and column headings. As Notes are
created, though, line items will be added to the schedule automatically.

To set the note defaults

1. Returning to the Default Settings dialog.
l Click the arrow beside "Text, Callouts and Markers" to expand the category.
l Select "Note" and click the Edit button.
2. In the Saved Note Defaults dialog, which opens next, click the Edit button.
l Notice that there are a number of different Saved Note Defaults set up for particular drawing scales and tasks.
l "Plan Note Defaults" is selected in the list because it is the Saved Default that is currently active.
l Recall that the "Working Plan View" uses "Plan Rich Text Defaults", as well.
l With the "Plan Note Defaults" selected, click the Edit button.
3. On the NOTE panel of the Note Defaults dialog, which opens next:
l Unless there is a word or phrase that you want to include in every line of your Note Schedule, make sure that the
Text field is empty.
l The Type drop-down list corresponds to the list of Objects to Include in the Note Schedule Defaults dialog. Make
sure that "General Notes" is selected.
l Notice that Generate Shape from Schedule is checked.
4. Click OK, then OK, and then Done to close all dialogs.

Notes are typically placed in plan views, but can be created in any view that supports text objects.

84
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

To add plan notes

1. Select Window> Tile Vertically to tile the plan view and "Legends and Notes" CAD Detail view side by side.

2. Click in the plan view to make it the active window, then go Down One Floor to Floor 1.

3. Select CAD> Text> Note , then click near the bottom of the stairs.

4. On the NOTE panel of the Note Specification dialog:

l In the Text field, type: headroom 6’ 8" min.
l Make sure that "General" is the selected Type.
l Click OK.
5. Notice:

l In plan view, the new Note is represented using a Capsule callout shape with the number 1.
l In the Schedule Detail, the new Note is listed as the first line item along with its Text.
6. Use the Copy and Paste Hold Position commands to make a copy of the Note callout on Floor 0. See To
create stacked staircases on page 76.
7. Notice that:
l Because the Floor Plan Notes schedule Includes Objects from All Floors, the Note on Floor 0 derives its label from
the schedule.
l Because the schedule is set to Group Similar Objects, only one instance of 1 is listed in the schedule.
8. When you are finished, Save your work.

You can continue working on this plan in the Doors and Windows tutorial.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.

85
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Stairs.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating interior stairs and stairwell rooms.
To set the interior stair defaults 66
To create stairs between rooms 68
To create a staircase between floors 68
To position a staircase 69
To adjust a staircase’s rise and run 69
To tile floor plan and section views 70
To save a camera view 71
To set the railing defaults 72
To create an automatic stairwell 72
To draw dimension lines in a cross section view 74
To confirm headroom clearance in a stairwell 74
To create stacked staircases 76
To examine stair structure 77
To turn off the display of objects 78
To edit Auto Stairwell railings 79
To confirm headroom clearance 80
To add vertical and horizontal clip planes 81
To set note schedule defaults 83
To add a note schedule 84
To set the note defaults 84
To add plan notes 85
To save a plan revision 86

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 4 - Interior Stairs

If you draw interior stairs on Floor 1, what floor level do those stairs try to snap to?

86
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

l Stairs are drawn in an upward direction, from the current floor to the floor above, and locate floor platforms
automatically. So stairs drawn on Floor 1 build upward, seeking Floor 2.
What Room Type is a Stairwell?
l A stairwell is an interior room that has been assigned the Room Type “Open Below” so that it has no floor platform.
The Stairwell for a given staircase is always found on the floor above the stairs.
What tool can you use to create a Stairwell automatically?
l Select the staircase that requires a Stairwell and click the Auto Stairwell edit button.
In what kind of view can you check the headroom of a staircase?
l Structural considerations like headroom clearance can be measured in a Backclipped Cross Section view or regular
Cross Section/Elevation view.
What edit tools are used to create a stacked staircase?
l Copy an existing staircase, go Down One Floor or Up One Floor, and use Paste Hold Position to make a copy of the
original exactly below or above the original.
Why is it sometimes helpful to turn off layers as you work?
l In spaces where objects are drawn close together or over the top of one another, it is helpful to turn the display of
some objects off. You can do this by turning off those objects’ layers.
What annotation tools can be used to create a floor plan note list?
l Notes and Note Schedules can be used to create a dynamic list of plan notes.

Doors and Windows

Windows and doors are placed directly into walls and can be customized to reflect a wide variety of architectural styles.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for placing and customizing doors and windows. Concepts introduced
include:
File Management 88
Productivity Tips 88
Setting the Defaults 89
Using Plan Views 89
Placing Doors 89
Editing Doors 92
Using Library Content 93
Placing and Editing Windows 96
Positioning Doors and Windows 97
Replicating Doors and Windows 102
Creating Grouped Window Units 104
Creating Schedules 104

87
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

Adding Annotations 107

Creating Revisions 109

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Interior Stairs tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Stairs and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to add doors and windows to a plan, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l The Hinged Door and Sliding Door tools will create either an exterior or interior door, depending on where it
is placed.
l The Center Object edit tool allows you to center doors, windows, and other objects relative to a room or another
object.
l The Transform/Replicate Object edit tool lets you replicate objects like windows at regular intervals.

Content
l A selection of name brand door and window catalogs are available for download from the 3D Library. Select
Library> Get Additional Content Online to launch your default web browser to that page.
l Set up the door and window defaults in your template plans so they are ready for use when you begin a new plan.

Interface
l The Select Library Object dialog is a modal version of the Library Browser that lets you assign accents like hardware
and moldings to objects like doors and windows.
l The Select Material dialog is similar to the Select Library Object dialog and lets you assign materials to objects.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + C - Concentric Resize
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

88
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
placing doors and windows, there are several defaults that should be borne in mind.
Each Door Tool has either one or two defaults dialogs. Before placing doors, all of them should be set up to meet your
needs. See To set the Door Defaults on page 89.
Hinged and Sliding Doors are commonly used as both interior and exterior doors. As such, they have two sets of defaults:
Interior and Exterior.
Doors and many of their components - including hardware and casing - are represented using symbols from the library. See
Using Library Content on page 93.
Window Defaults determine the initial window size, type, and more. See To set window defaults on page 96.
The wall framing associated with doors and windows should also be specified prior to building framing. See Wall Framing
on page 377.
As with architectural objects, it is a good idea to set Door and Window Schedule Defaults. See Creating Schedules on page
104.
The Leader Line tool creates Rich Text objects with lines with arrows attached. You should set Rich Text Defaults before
annotations are created. See "To set the rich text defaults" on page 26 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.
In order to position doors and windows in a manner that meets your needs, Dimension Defaults should be set. As doors and
windows are added, Auto Exterior Dimensions automatically refresh so that they locate these objects as they are added. See
To set Dimension Defaults on page 99.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Working Plan View will work well for adding doors and windows. See To examine a saved plan view’s settings on
page 7.

PLACING DOORS
The six Door Tools can be used to place a variety of different doors in interior and exterior walls.
Each Door Tool has at least one defaults dialog. Here, the Interior Door Defaults dialog is examined; however, you should
make sure all Door Defaults meet your needs.

To set the Door Defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings , click the arrow next to "Door" in the tree list to expand the category.

l Notice that there is a defaults dialog for each of the Door Tools.
l Select "Interior Door" from the tree list and click the Edit button.
2. In the Interior Door Defaults dialog:

89
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

3. On the GENERAL panel, notice that the Door Style is "Door P04" and that it is shown in the object preview on the
right. "Door P04" is a panel door available in the library. For more information, see To choose a door style from the
library on page 95.
4. On the CASING panel, note that when no Casing Profile is specified, a basic stock profile is used. For information
about changing the casing, see To specify a door’s casing on page 95.
5. On the ROUGH OPENING and FRAMING panels, you can specify how you want framing around interior doors to be
generated.
6. Additional options such as hardware and millwork can also be specified, as well. See Using Library Content on page
93.
7. Click OK to return to the Default Settings dialog. For this tutorial, the existing defaults will be used, but you can
examine each of the Door Defaults dialogs if you wish. Click Done to close the Default Settings dialog.

To add hinged doors

1. Select Build> Door> Hinged Door , then move the mouse pointer over the exterior wall of the Foyer room.

2. When the mouse pointer is over the exterior wall:

l Click the mouse button and hold it down.
l Move the mouse along the wall to change the hinge side of the door to be placed.
l Move the mouse from one side of the wall to the other to change which way it opens.
l As you move the mouse, the door preview outline will update.
3. When the door preview’s hinges are on the right side and it is opening inward, release the mouse button to create an
exterior hinged door.
4. Select the new door, click the Open Object edit button, and note that:

l The dialog’s title is Exterior Door Specification.

l The door style features three lites and a craftsman style dentil detail.
l Move your mouse pointer into the object preview pane, then click and drag to rotate the preview. Notice that
the door has an Exterior and Interior side.
l Click Cancel.
5. Place a Hinged Door in the wall separating the Bedroom from the Bath.

6. Select this new door and click the Open Object edit button. Notice:

l The Interior Door Specification dialog opens this time.

l The preview shows an interior panel door rather than an exterior craftsman style door.
l Click Cancel.
7. Place three additional hinged doors as shown here:

90
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

To add a sliding door

1. Zoom in on the back exterior wall of the Kitchen.

2. Select Build> Door> Sliding Door and move the mouse pointer over the wall.

3. When the mouse pointer is over the wall:

l Click the mouse button and hold it down.
l Move the mouse from left to right to change which side of the door is movable.
l As you move the mouse, the door preview outline will update.
4. When the door preview’s moveable side is on the right and is on the interior of the opening, release the mouse
button to create an exterior sliding door.
5. Select the new door and click the Open Object edit button. Note that this dialog’s title is Exterior Door
Specification, then click Cancel.

A variety of other door types can be placed, as well.

To add other types of doors

1. Select Window> Fill Window .

2. Select Build> Door> Doorway and click on the wall separating the Foyer from the Dining room. Place another
doorway between the Kitchen and Dining room.
3. Select Build> Door> Bifold Door , then move the mouse pointer over the wall separating the Foyer from the
Closet.
4. When the mouse pointer is over the wall:
l Click the mouse button and hold it down.
l Move the mouse up and down along the wall to change the hinge side of the door that will be placed.

91
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

l Move the mouse button side to side, perpendicular to the wall, to change the direction that the door opens.
l As you move the mouse, the door preview outline will update.
5. When the door preview's hinges fold toward the Foyer, release the mouse button to create a single bi-fold door.
6. Select Build> Door> Pocket Door , then move the mouse pointer over the wall separating the Bedroom from its
Closet.
7. When the mouse pointer is over the right side of the wall, near the vertical exterior wall:
l Click the mouse button and hold it down.
l Move the mouse to the left to change the side of the door that slides into the wall.
l As you move the mouse, the door preview outline will update.
8. When the door preview opens toward the Bath, release the mouse button to create a pocket door.
9. Select Build> Door> Garage Door , then click on the front wall of the Garage to place a garage door at that
location. Garage doors do not have hinge sides and always open in the same direction.

10. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

EDITING DOORS
Once a door has been placed, it can be selected and edited.
A door’s hinge and swing side can be set when it is created, but it can also be changed at any time.

To change the door swing

1. Zoom in on the door located at the top end of the staircase.

2. Click the Change Opening/Hinge Side edit button and notice that the side of the door that the hinges are on
changes.

92
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

3. Click the Change Swing Side edit button and notice that the door now opens into the Stairwell rather than into
the Living room.
4. With the door still selected, notice the triangular edit handle located near the far end of the door swing arch.

5. Click and drag this handle and notice:

l The mouse pointer icon changes to a curved Rotate icon.

l Drag along the arch to control how far open the door appears.
l Drag a line parallel to the wall to change the door’s hinge side.
l Drag a line perpendicular to the wall to change the door’s swing side.
6. When the door’s hinges are on the left and it opens out into the Living room, release the mouse button.

A door’s edit handles can also be used to change its size. It can also be resized using dimensions as well as in the Door
Specification dialog.

To change a door’s size

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the Bifold closet door in the Foyer to select it.

2. Click and drag the resize edit handles at each end to make the door wider. To resize the door concentrically, hold
down the C key while dragging an end edit handle.
3. With the door still selected, click the Open Object edit button.

4. On the GENERAL panel of the Interior Door Specification dialog, specify the Width as 60" and click OK.

To change a glass door’s lites

1. Select the Sliding door in the Kitchen and click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the LITES panel of the Exterior Door Specification dialog, set the Lites Across to 3 and Lites Vertical to 5, then
click OK.
3. Don’t forget to Save your work.

USING LIBRARY CONTENT

In the Interior Stairs tutorial, materials from the Library Browser were applied to different components of an interior
staircase.

93
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

Doors provide another excellent example of how the content in the Library Browser can be used to customize and enhance
your designs. There are a variety of different objects that can be assigned to a door, including hardware, a door style, and
casing.
The Select Library Object dialog is a modal version of the Library Browser that allows you to assign library items to a
selected object. It only lists items in the library that can be used for the task at hand, making it easy to browse for relevant
objects.

To specify door hardware

1. Select the exterior door in the Foyer and click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the HARDWARE panel of the Exterior Door Specification dialog, select "Library" from the Exterior Handle drop-
down list, or click the Library button to its right.
3. In the Select Library Object dialog:

l The content is filtered by Type so that it only lists Hardware.

l To further filter the results, type "knob" in the Search field, then move your mouse pointer over the "Knobs and
Levers" Folder line item in the Filters drop-down list.

l The tree list in the Folders panel will now expand to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural>
Hardware> Door Hardware> Knobs and Levers.
l Select the "Exterior Handle 2" and click OK.
4. Click the Library button beside Interior Lock and choose a lock using a similar process:
l The content is again filtered by Type so that it only lists Hardware.

l Filter the results further: type "lock" in the Search field and click on the "Hardware Options: Lock" Symbol
Options line item in the Filters drop-down list.

l The tree list in the Folders panel will now only list hardware items that are locks.
l In the Folders panel, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Hardware> Door Hardware>
Knobs and Levers.
l Select the "Dead Bolt (interior)" and click OK.
5. Repeat step 4 to select the "Dead Bolt (exterior)" symbol as the Exterior Lock, then click OK to close the dialog
and apply your changes.

The Library also has a selection of door styles that can be applied to individual doors: for example, the P04 door style which
is the default for interior hinged doors.

94
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

To choose a door style from the library

1. Click on the hinged door between the Foyer and the Garage to select it.

l If the stairs or wall becomes selected instead, click the Select Next Object edit button until the door becomes
the selected object.
2. When the door is selected, click the Open Object edit button.

3. On the GENERAL panel of the Exterior Door Specification dialog:

l Notice that this Hinged Door is using the same Craftsman style door as the front door.
l Click the Library button to the right of the Style drop-down list.
4. In the Select Library Object dialog:

l The content is filtered by Type so that it only lists Doors.

l Click on the "Entry Doors" Folder filter to remove it.

l Type P04 in the Search field and press the Enter key to perform a Text search.

l Select Door P04 in the Filter Results panel and click OK to return to the specification dialog.

For best results, door and window casing should be set in the Defaults dialogs prior to placing any doors or windows.
Exterior doors often have different casing on their two sides, which isn't necessary for the door to the Garage, however.

To specify a door’s casing

1. With the specification dialog for the door between the Foyer and Garage still open go to the CASING panel:
2. Change the Exterior Casing Width and Depth to match the Interior Casing.

95
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

3. You can also click the Library button beside Exterior Casing Profile and type "casing" in the Search field.
l Notice that in the drop-down list, there are a number of Manufacturer catalogs that include casing.
l Select the "Casings" Folder located at Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Moldings> Casing to
find a selection of door and window casing profiles. Select one and click OK.
4. Click the Clear button to restore the default stock profile.
5. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

PLACING AND EDITING WINDOWS

Like doors, windows are designed to be placed into walls and are highly editable.

To set window defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings , select "Window" from the tree list, and click the Edit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Window Defaults dialog:

l Specify the Window Type as "Single Casement".
l Specify the Width as 30".
l Specify the Height as 54".
3. On the LITES panel, specify the Lites Across as 3 and Lites Vertical as 4.
4. On the FRAMING panel, notice that the defaults for the Header and Trimmers can be set. See "Wall Framing" on
page 377 of the Wall Framing Tutorial.
5. On the ROUGH OPENING panel, notice that the Additional Height and Width values are 1".
6. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.
7. Save your changes.

To place a window
1. Select Build> Window> Window .

2. Click on the exterior wall of the Foyer, to the right of the wall, to place a window at that location.
3. Continue clicking to place a total of 11 windows:

96
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

To edit a window
1. Select the window in the Foyer and click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Window Specification dialog:

l Select "Fixed Glass" from the Window Type drop-down list.
l Specify the Width as 12" and the Height as 77".
l Confirm that the Floor to Top value is 80".
3. On the LITES panel, specify the Lites Across as 1 and Lites Vertical as 5, then click OK.
4. Select the window in the kitchen and click the Open Object edit button.

5. On the GENERAL panel of the Window Specification dialog:

l Specify the Height as 36".
l Note that the Floor to Bottom height increases to 44".
6. On the LITES panel, specify the Lites Vertical as 3, then click OK.
7. Select the window in the Garage and open its specification dialog. On the GENERAL panel:
l Change the Window Type to "Fixed Glass".
l Change the Height to 48".
l Select "Absolute" as the Elevation Reference, then specify the Elevation at Top as 80" so its height matches that
of the other windows and doors.
8. On the LITES panel, change the number of Lites Vertical to 3, then click OK.
9. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

POSITIONING DOORS AND WINDOWS

There are a number of ways to move doors and windows: using their edit handles, various edit tools, as well as dimensions.

97
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

When positioning doors and windows, often the most important consideration is that it be centered along a wall or relative
to an object.

Note: So that the centering axis can be clearly seen, the "Dimensions,
Automatic" layer is turned off in the following images.

To center a wall opening

1. Select the front exterior door in the Foyer and click the Center Object edit button.

2. Move the mouse pointer into the Foyer, near the wall that the window is located in.

3. Notice that the Foyer room becomes highlighted and a dashed vertical centering axis displays at the midpoint of the
exterior wall.
4. Now move the mouse pointer up to the invisible Room Divider separating the Foyer from the Living area.

98
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

5. When a dashed vertical centering axis displays at the midpoint of the Room Divider, click once. The door becomes
aligned with the center of the Room Divider.
6. Zoom in on the Foyer, then select the door between the Foyer and Garage and click the Center Object edit
button.

7. Move the mouse pointer over the Garage stairs, and when a horizontal centering axis displays down the middle of
the stairs, click once.
8. Use the Center Object edit button to center:

l The Kitchen window

l The Living room window
l The window on the left side of the Dining room
l The window on the right side of the Bedroom
l The window in the Bedroom Closet
l The Garage door
l The Foyer Closet door.

When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

It is a good idea to take a few moments to make sure that your various Dimension Defaults are set up so that they meet your
needs and are consistent.

To set Dimension Defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog:

l Click the arrow next to "Dimension" in the tree list to expand the category.
l Select "Dimensions" and click the Edit button.
2. In the Saved Dimension Defaults dialog, which opens next:
l Notice that dimension lines have multiple Saved Defaults, which you can use to save considerable time when
you annotate your drawings.
l "Plan Dimension Defaults" is selected in the list because it is the currently active Saved Dimension Default.
l Click the Edit button to open the Dimension Defaults dialog.

99
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

3. On the SETUP AUTOMATIC panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog, under the "Exterior" heading, make sure that
Auto Refresh is checked.
4. On the LOCATE AUTO EXTERIOR panel:

l Notice that there are several options for locating wall Openings.
l Make sure that Sides is selected to locate the sides of doors and windows.
5. On the LOCATE MANUAL panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog:
l Note that there are numerous options for controlling many objects in addition to walls and wall openings.
l Under the Openings heading, make sure that Sides is selected.
6. On the LAYER panel, notice that when the "Plan Dimension Defaults" are active, manually drawn dimensions are
placed on the "Dimensions, Manual" layer by default.
7. Click OK and then Done to close the all dialogs and apply your changes.

To position doors and windows using dimensions

1. Zoom in on the Bedroom.

2. Click the Select Objects button, then adjust the space between the two windows in the back wall:

l Click on the left window to select it.

l Move your mouse pointer over the dimension line that states its distance from the right window.
l In the inline text field, type 4 1/2" and press the Enter key on the keyboard. This space will accommodate two
trimmers plus the windows’ rough openings.
3. Center the two windows in the Bedroom:
l With the left window still selected, hold down the Shift key and click on the right window to select the two as
a group.

l Use the Center Objects edit button to center both windows in the Bedroom as described in To center a
wall opening on page 98, above.

100
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

4. Notice that:

l Although the windows are centered in the room, the Auto Exterior Dimensions on either side of them report
different distances.
l This is because the dimensions locate the framing of walls that have different thicknesses.
l If you draw an Interior Dimension line along the back wall of the Bedroom, the dimensions on either side of
the windows will be the same.
5. Select CAD> Dimensions> Manual Dimension , then click and drag to draw a dimension line along the wall
separating the Bedroom from the Bath.
6. Select the door to the Bath and adjust its position:
l Move your mouse pointer over the dimension line that states its distance from the closet wall.
l In the inline text field, type 6" and press the Enter key on the keyboard.

7. Repeat steps 2-4 to space the two windows in the front wall of the Dining room 3’ 6" apart, then center them in the
room, then use the Center Objects edit button to center both windows in the Dining room as described in To
center a wall opening on page 98, above.
8. Position the window in the Foyer 4 1/2" from the front door.
9. Although the front door has been centered in the foyer, its position can be adjusted slightly to produce cleaner
dimensions:
l With the side window still selected, hold down the Shift key and select the door as well.
l Click on the dimension that reports their distance from the Dining room wall.
l In the inline text field, type 6’ and press the Enter key on the keyboard.

101
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

10. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

REPLICATING DOORS AND WINDOWS

Like most objects, doors and windows can be copied and pasted. Here, copies of windows at regular intervals are created.

To create a reflected copy of a window

1. Select the narrow window to the left of the front door in the Foyer.
2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button, then click the Reflect About Object edit button.

3. Move your mouse pointer over the front door. When you see a dashed vertical reflection axis, click once. A copy of
the window is created on the other side of the door.

102
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

To copy windows at regular intervals

1. Select the window in the Kitchen and click the Transform/Replicate Object edit button.

2. In the Transform/Replicate Object dialog:

l Check the box beside Copy and change the Number of Copies to 2.
l Check the box beside Move, then specify the Y Delta value as -35 1/2". This value is equal to the width of each
window, 30", plus a 5 1/2" gap to accommodate a king stud, two stringers, and the windows’ rough openings.
l When you click OK, two copies of the window are created at 35 1/2" intervals along the same wall as the original.
3. With the two newly created windows selected, press the Shift key and click on the original window to add it to the
selection. Then, use the Center Objects edit tool to center the three windows in the Kitchen room, as described
in "To center a wall opening on page 98", above.
4. Repeat these steps to create a grouping of three windows centered in the Living room. This time, specify the X Delta
as -35 1/2".

103
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

5. When you have finished, Save your work.

CREATING GROUPED WINDOW UNITS

Multiple adjacent windows as well as doors can be blocked into a single mulled unit. Here a mulled casement unit with
central fixed glass component will be created.

To create a mulled unit

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the middle window in the Living room.

2. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the GENERAL panel of the Window Specification dialog, select
"Fixed Glass" from the Window Type drop-down list, then click OK.
3. Select the window to its left and click the Open Object edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Window
Specification dialog, under Component Options, select Right Hinge instead of Left Hinge, then click OK.
4. With the window still selected, hold down the Shift key and click on the other two Living room windows to select
all three as a group.
5. Click the Make Mulled Unit edit button.

6. Save your work.

CREATING SCHEDULES
Plan sets often include schedules for doors, windows, and more. Chief Architect’s schedules are dynamic reports of the
objects in the plan and will update automatically if any are modified.

104
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

Although a typical plan is unlikely to have more than one or two door and window schedules, it is still a good idea to set up
the schedule defaults the way you want them in your template plans.

To set schedule defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog.

l Click the arrow beside "Schedules" to expand the category.

l Select "Door Schedule" and click the Edit button.
2. On the COLUMNS/ROWS panel of the Door Schedule Defaults dialog, which opens next, make sure that Display
Column Headings in Schedule is checked.
3. Still on the COLUMNS/ROWS panel, customize the Columns to Include list:

l Select "Dimensions" in the list of Available Columns and click the Add button.
l "Dimensions" is added to the Columns to Include list, and is selected. Click the Move Up button until it is
located between "Floor" and "Size".
l With "Dimensions" still selected, Add the "Top" column, as well.
l Because "Dimensions" was selected in the list of Columns to Include, "Top" is placed directly beneath it.
l Select "Size" from the list of Columns to Include and click the Remove button.
l Remove the "3D Exterior Elevation", "Code", and "Manufacturer" columns, as well.
4. On the MAIN TEXT STYLE panel:
l Notice that like Wall Schedules, Door Schedules are set to Use Layer for Text Style.
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.
5. Returning to the Default Settings dialog, select "Window Schedule" and click the Edit button.
6. On the GENERAL panel of the Window Schedule Defaults dialog:
l Add "Dimensions" and "Top" to the list of Columns to Include, as described above.
l Remove the "3D Exterior Elevation", "Size", "Egress", "Code", and "Manufacturer" columns from the list of
Columns to Include.
7. On the MAIN TEXT STYLE panel, notice that Window Schedules are also set to Use Layer for Text Style.
8. Click OK and then Done to close the Default Settings dialog and apply your changes.

To prevent your plan views from becoming unnecessarily cluttered, schedules should be created in CAD Detail windows.

105
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

To add door and window schedules

1. Select CAD> CAD Detail Management .

2. In the CAD Detail Management dialog, select "Schedules Detail" and click the Open button.
3. The "Schedules Detail" CAD Detail window opens and is empty.
4. Select Tools> Schedules> Door Schedule and click once to place a Door Schedule at that location.

5. Select Tools> Schedules> Window Schedule and click below the Door Schedule to place a Window Schedule
at that location.
6. Click on the new Window Schedule to select it, then align it with the Door Schedule’s left edge:
l Hold down the Shift key and click on the Door Schedule to select them both as a group.

l Click the Align/Distribute Objects edit button.

l In the Align/Distribute Objects dialog, under the "Move Objects Horizontally to" heading, select Left Edges and
click OK.
7. When you are finished, Save your work.

The widths of these schedules’ individual columns can also be edited so that they align.

By default, door and window schedules are ordered according to the information in the Labels column. You can, however,
change their order using either of two methods.

To turn off schedule callouts

1. Select Window> Tile Vertically and in the plan view, notice that doors and windows now have callout labels with
schedule numbers.
2. With the Window Schedule still selected, click the Open Object edit button.

l On the LABEL panel of the Window Schedule Specification dialog, select the Use Labelradio button.
l On the COLUMNS/ROWS panel of the Window Schedule Specification dialog, remove the "Number" column
from the list of Columns to Include, then click OK.
3. In plan view, notice that windows now display their original labels instead of callout shapes with schedule numbers.
4. Turn off the display of the Door Schedule callout labels and remove the "Number" column from that schedule, as

106
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

well.
5. When you are finished, Save your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
Floor plans typically include text with a variety of different pieces of information. With doors and windows in place, they
can be annotated.
The Working Plan View is active as it was in the previous four tutorials, so "Plan Rich Text and Callout Defaults" are still
in use.

To set leader line preferences

1. Select Edit> Preferences in Windows orChief Architect> Preferences in macOS.

2. On the TEXT panel of the Preferences dialog:

l The Number of Segments for Leader Lines can be set here.
l Uncheck Create Rich Text to create simple Text objects when the Leader Line tool is used, if you prefer.
3. In this example, these settings will not be changed, so click Cancel.

Typing text is a simple task, but with a few extra steps this text can also appear in the Comments column of the Door
Schedule.

To add Comments to an object

1. In plan view, Zoom in on the Garage area, then click the Select Objects button.

2. Select the hinged door separating the Garage from the Foyer and click the Open Object edit button.

3. On the OBJECT INFORMATION panel of the Door Specification dialog, type the following into the Comment field: 20
minute
4. Press the Enter key to wrap to a second line, then type: self-closing

5. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your change.

107
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

To add leader line annotations

1. Begin by moving the Garage room label down, towards the center of the Garage room.
2. Select CAD> Text> Leader Line , then:

l In the Garage, click and drag a line from the door to the Foyer down and to the right. When your mouse pointer is
below the Garage stairs, release the mouse button.
l Click and drag a second line straight to the right from the end of the first line.
l When you release the mouse button, the Rich Text Specification dialog opens.
3. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:

l Click the Insert Macro button.

l Select "Comment" from the Referenced Object submenu.

l Click OK.
4. The Comment entered in the Door Specification can now be seen in both plan view and the Door Schedule.

108
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

Additional Note callouts can be created that refer to the Floor Plan Notes schedule.

To add plan notes

1. Select CAD> Text> Note , then click once near the sliding door in the Kitchen.

2. On the NOTE panel of the Note Specification dialog:

l In the Text field, type: tempered glass.
l Make sure General is the selected Type.
l Click OK.
3. Notice that the new Note is automatically assigned the number 2, as 1 was created in the Interior Stairs tutorial.
4. Click on the Note shape to select it, then:

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button

l Click once in front of the side lite to the right of the front door to create a copy at that location.
5. The pasted Note has the same schedule number as the original because they have the same text.
6. If you want, you can open the Schedules Detail to confirm that the Floor Plan Notes schedule has updated to include
the new Notes.
7. When you are finished, Save your work.

You can continue working on this plan in the Decks and Porches tutorial.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

109
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Windows.

Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for adding doors and windows to a design.
To set the Door Defaults 89
To add hinged doors 90
To add a sliding door 91
To add other types of doors 91
To change the door swing 92
To change a door’s size 93
To change a glass door’s lites 93
To specify door hardware 94
To choose a door style from the library 95
To specify a door’s casing 95
To set window defaults 96
To place a window 96
To edit a window 97
To center a wall opening 98
To set Dimension Defaults 99
To position doors and windows using dimensions 100
To create a reflected copy of a window 102
To copy windows at regular intervals 103
To create a mulled unit 104
To set schedule defaults 105
To add door and window schedules 106
To turn off schedule callouts 106
To set leader line preferences 107
To add Comments to an object 107
To add leader line annotations 108
To add plan notes 109
To save a plan revision 110

110
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 5 - Doors and Windows

What are the different ways to specify or change the hinge side of a door? The swing side?
l You can change the hinge and swing side of a door as it is being placed by moving the mouse while holding the
mouse button.
l Once a door is created, hinge and swing side can be modified using the edit handles as well as the Change
Opening/Hinge Side and Change Swing Side edit tools.
What are three examples of door and window attributes that are found in the Library?
l Hardware, door style, and materials can all be selected in the Library.
What are the different ways to change the width of a door or window?
l Door and window width can be changed using the edit handles and in the object’s specification dialog.
What tool can be used to create multiple windows at once?
l The Transform/Replicate Object edit tool lets you replicate objects like windows at regular intervals.
What edit tools are useful for creating identical windows on either side of a door or window?
l The Copy/Paste and Reflect About Object edit tools allow you to create identical windows on either side of a door.
Where do you specify how Auto Exterior Dimensions locate doors and windows?
l You can specify how Auto Exterior Dimensions locate doors, windows, and interior walls in the Auto Exterior
Dimension Defaults dialog.
Where do you control the appearance of callout labels?
l You can specify whether objects like windows and doors use schedule callout labels, as well as their appearance, on
the Labels panel of the Schedule Specification dialog.
What is an example of an object attribute that can be reported in both a schedule and a text object with an arrow attached to
that object?
l The Comments that can be specified on the Object Information panel of many specification dialogs can be listed in the
Comments column of a schedule as well as inserted into a text object using the %comment% Referenced Object
macro.
What tool lets you create a Rich Text object attached to a text line with arrow?
l The Leader Line tool lets you create a Rich Text object along with a segmented line with arrow.
What button can you click in the Rich Text Specification dialog to insert dynamic information about an object into the text?
l The Insert Macro button lets you insert dynamic text macros into text objects.

Decks and Porches

Deck and Porch rooms are Room Types with a number of special characteristics.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for creating Deck and Porch rooms. Concepts introduced include:

111
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

File Management 112

Productivity Tips 112
Setting the Defaults 113
Using Plan Views 113
Railings for Decks and Porches 113
Creating Porch Rooms 115
Creating Deck Rooms 116
Dimensioning Exterior Rooms 118
Creating Porch and Deck Supports 121
Drawing Deck Stairs 125
Creating Concrete Stairs 127
Adding Annotations 128
Creating Revisions 131

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Doors and Windows tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Windows and
CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working.
However, Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left
unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File Management" on page 4 of the Exterior
Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create Deck and Porch rooms, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l When Deck Railings define a room, the room is specified as a Deck automatically.
l Deck posts and beams generate automatically on the floor below the Deck room.
l Stairs that are not placed inside a room will draw in a downward direction and seek the terrain.
l The Center Object edit tool can be used to center a selected object relative to another object.

Content
l Create template plans that have the Deck and Porch Room Type Defaults set the way you want them, ready for use
when you begin a new plan.

112
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

l A selection of name brand deck planking catalogs are available for download in the "Materials and Surfaces" category
of the 3D Library. Select Library> Get Additional Content Online to launch your default web browser to that
page.

Interface
l Object Snaps can be helpful when positioning one object relative to another.
l Temporary Dimensions display when an object like a wall is selected and can be used to move that object.
l Multiple line items in a list, as well as multiple objects, can be group-selected using the Shift and Ctrl/⌘ keys.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l F6 - Fill Window
l Ctrl/⌘ + W - Close View
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
creating Deck and Porch rooms, there are several defaults that should be borne in mind.
Before drawing the railings that define Deck rooms, the Deck Railing Defaults should be set. See To set the Deck Railing
Defaults on page 114.
Similarly, the defaults for Half Walls, which will be used here to define a Porch, can be set in advance. See To set the Half
Wall Defaults on page 115.
Structural characteristics of Deck and Porch rooms should be set before Deck and Porch rooms are created. See To set Deck
Room Defaults on page 117 and To set Porch Room Defaults on page 115.
Before drawing stairs on the exterior of the structure, it is a good idea to set the Exterior Stair Defaults. See To set the
Exterior Stair Defaults on page 125.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Working Plan View will work well for drawing deck and porch rooms.

RAILINGS FOR DECKS AND PORCHES

In Chief Architect, railings are a special type of wall that do not build to the ceiling height of the rooms they define.
Railings are typically used to define Deck rooms as well as Porches. There are three types of railing in Chief Architect:
Deck Railings, regular Railings, and solid Half Walls.
Deck Railings use a single layer wall type so there is no siding material on the sides of deck platforms.

113
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

To set the Deck Railing Defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings . In the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow next to "Walls" in the tree list to
expand the category.
2. Select "Deck Railing Defaults" and click the Edit button to open the Deck Railing Defaults dialog.
3. On the GENERAL panel, notice that No Locate is checked. When this box is checked, Deck Railings will be ignored
by Auto Exterior Dimensions by default.
4. On the WALL TYPES panel, note that the default Wall Type is "Deck Railing/Fence" and click the Define button.
5. In the Wall Type Definitions dialog:
l Notice that the "Deck Railing/Fence" wall type is composed of a single 3 1/2" layer of framing.
l In the Wall Layers table, click in the Thickness field, then type 5 1/2".
l Click OK to return to the Deck Railing Defaults dialog.
6. On the RAIL STYLE panel, under the Newels/Posts heading, select Post to Beam.
7. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel, under the Newels/Posts heading:

l Specify the Newels/Posts Width as 5 1/2".

l Select a Newels/Posts Type from the Library. Here, the Exterior "Capped Post" is used.
8. On the MATERIALS panel:
l Select the "Baluster" component, then hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key and click on the "Beam", "Rail", and "Main"
components to add them to the selection.
l Click the Select Material button and select "Color - White" from the PLAN MATERIALS panel of the Select
Material dialog.
9. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

Unlike Deck Railings, regular Railings are intended to define rooms with enclosed floor platforms. In the Interior Stairs
tutorial, interior railings with newels and balusters are generated by the Auto Stairwell edit tool.

114
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

To set the Railing Defaults

1. With the Default Settings dialog still open, select "Railing Defaults" and click the Edit button to open the Railing
Defaults dialog.
2. On the GENERAL panel, notice that No Locate is checked, just as it is for Deck Railings.
3. On the WALL TYPES panel, note that the default Wall Type is "Interior Railing" and click the Define button.
4. In the Wall Type Definitions dialog, notice that the "Interior Railing" wall type is composed of three layers: a 3 1/2"
framing layer surrounded by two layers of 1/2" drywall.
5. Click Cancel to return to the Default Settings dialog.

Like other types of Railings, Half Walls can also be drawn to define exterior rooms like Porches.

To set the Half Wall Defaults

1. With the Default Settings dialog still open, select "Half Wall Defaults" and click the Edit button to open the Half
Wall Defaults dialog.
2. On the GENERAL panel, both Railing and No Locate are checked.
l Leave Railing checked.
l Uncheck No Locate.
3. On the WALL TYPES panel, select "Siding-6" from the Wall Type drop-down list.
4. Check the box beside Pony Wall, then:
l Select "Stone-6" from the Lower Wall Type drop-down list.
l Notice that the Elevation of Lower Wall Top is 20", which is the value set in the Pony Wall Defaults dialog.
5. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel:
l When a wall is both a Railing, as Half Walls are, and a Pony Wall, the Height setting only affects the height of
the Upper Wall.
l Specify the Height as 16".
6. Click OK to close the Half Wall Defaults dialog, then click Done to close the Default Settings dialog.
7. Remember to Save your work.

CREATING PORCH ROOMS

Porches are another special room type with characteristics of both interior and exterior rooms.

To set Porch Room Defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings , and in the Default Settings dialog:

l Click the arrow beside "Floors and Rooms" to expand the category.
l Select "Room Types" and click the Edit button.
2. In the Room Types dialog, scroll down the list, select "Porch", and click the Edit button.

115
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

3. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Porch Room Type Defaults dialog,

l Notice that unlike Decks, Porch rooms have Roof and Ceiling Over This Room checked.
l Click the Floor Structure Edit button and note that the floor is constructed of 4" of concrete.
4. Click Cancel to close all three dialogs.

To create a porch
1. On Floor 1, Zoom out so the front exterior wall can be seen.

2. Select Build> Wall> Straight Half Wall , then click and drag to draw two half walls enclosing the area outside
the front door.
3. Notice that the Auto Exterior Dimensions update to locate the new railings but no longer locate the entry door or
side windows. This will be addressed in a moment.
4. Select the front Porch wall, then use either of the Auto Exterior Dimensions that locate it to position it 8’ from the
wall with the entry door.
5. Select the left vertical wall and drag its Move edit handle to align it with the interior wall separating the Dining
room and Foyer.
6. Click the Select Objects button, then click in the newly created room to select it.

7. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the GENERAL panel of the Room Specification dialog, select "Porch"
from the Room Type drop-down list and click OK.

8. Save your work.

CREATING DECK ROOMS

Decks are exterior rooms that are defined by the deck railings and exterior walls that enclose them. When an exterior room
is drawn using the Deck Railing tool, the room is automatically assigned the exterior room type of Deck.

116
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

To set Deck Room Defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings , and in the Default Settings dialog:

l Click the arrow beside "Floors and Rooms" to expand the category.
l Select "Room Types" and click the Edit button.
2. In the Room Types dialog, scroll down the list, select "Deck", and click the Edit button.
3. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Deck Room Type Defaults dialog:
l Notice that the Default check box to the right of the Floor Finish Edit button is unchecked and that its total
thickness is 0".
l Click the Planks/Joists Edit button.
4. In the Floor Structure Definition dialog, change the Thickness of Layer 1 to 1" and click OK.
5. On the DECK panel of the Deck Room Defaults dialog, change the Plank Width to 5 1/4" and the Plank Gap
Width to 1/4".
6. On the DECK SUPPORT panel:
l Notice that the Deck Post Footings have a Height Above Terrain setting with a value of 6".
l Specify the Deck Post Footings Thickness as 30". This value is the footings total height, measured from top to
bottom.
7. Click OK and then Done to close all dialogs.

To draw a deck
1. Zoom out so the back exterior wall can be seen.

2. Select Build> Railing and Deck> Straight Deck Railing , then click and drag to draw three Deck Railings at
the back of the structure.

l Notice that when a room is created using Deck Railing , the room is automatically specified as a Deck and
given a room label.
l Notice, too, that the Auto Exterior Dimensions do not update when the Deck is created because of the Deck
Railings' No Locate setting.

3. Click in the Deck room to select it, then click the Open Object edit button to open the Room Specification
dialog:
l On the GENERAL panel, under the Living Area heading, notice that Decks are Excluded from the Living Area
calculation by default but that you can change this here if you wish.

117
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

l On the STRUCTURE panel, note that by default, Roof Over This Room and Ceiling Over This Room are
unchecked, then click Cancel.

DIMENSIONING EXTERIOR ROOMS

Exterior dimensions are not always drawn the same way in the presence of exterior rooms like Decks and Porches as they
are elsewhere.
For added clarity, dimensions can be repositioned outside the Deck room.

To move dimension lines

1. Group-select the three horizontal Auto Exterior Dimensions that run through the Deck room:

l Click the Select Objects button, then draw a small rectangular marquee around sections of all three
dimension lines.
l You can also click on one dimension line, hold down the Shift key on the keyboard, then click on the other two
to select all three.
2. Click the Transform/Replicate Objects edit button.

3. A Question message box will confirm whether you want to turn off the Auto Refresh option for Auto Exterior
Dimensions in the saved "Plan Dimension Defaults". Click Yes.
4. In the Transform/Replicate Object dialog, which opens next:

l The box beside Move should be checked. If there is not, click to add a check mark.
l In the Y Delta field, type 96" or 8'.
l Make sure that Relative to Itself is checked and click OK.
5. The three dimension lines will all move 8' upward onscreen, out of the area of the Deck room.

With the Porch and Deck rooms created, the Auto Exterior Dimension lines can be edited to locate the Deck Railings that
define them as well as features inside the Porch.

118
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

To add and remove extension lines

1. Select the vertical Auto Exterior Dimension that locates walls on the right side of the structure.

l The dimension line's square Move edit handle has a red fill color and displays at the point where you clicked.
l The diamond-shaped Add Extension Line edit handle displays near the Move handle.
l When you move your mouse pointer over the Add Extension Line handle, it displays a two-headed arrow.
2. Click and drag the Add Extension Line edit handle towards the horizontal Deck Railing's exterior side.

l When an Extension Line preview snaps to the exterior side of the Deck Railing, release the mouse button.
3. Repeat steps 1-3 on the left side of the structure.
4. Select the horizontal Auto Exterior Dimension that locates walls at the back of the structure and repeat steps 1-3 to
add extension lines that locate the exterior sides of the two vertical Deck Railings.
5. Zoom, scroll, or pan so the front of the structure and the front Auto Exterior Dimensions can be seen.
6. Select the vertical Auto Exterior Dimension that locates wall openings on the front wall of the structure.

119
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

l The dimension line has a circular Add Segments edit handle just beyond each end.
l When you move your mouse pointer over the Add Segments handle, it displays a two-headed arrow.
7. Click the Add Segments handle on the right end and drag to the right until it reaches the left wall of the Garage and
the dimension line that locates the Garage Door.

l As your mouse pointer reaches the door and side lites, new extension lines will locate the sides of these
openings as well as the Closet wall.
l When an Extension Line preview snaps to the exterior side of the Garage wall, release the mouse button.
8. With the dimension line still selected, remove the extension line locating the Closet wall:

l Click the diamond-shaped Extension Line End handle located at the Closet wall.
l Drag it downward, away from the structure and any objects that it might locate instead.
l When you release the mouse, the extension line will be removed.
9. Select the horizontal dimension line that locates walls on the front of the structure and repeat steps 1-3 to add an
extension line to the closet wall.

Auto Exterior Dimensions were already used to locate the Porch Half Walls. Now that dimensions locate the Deck Railings,
they can be used to position them as well.

120
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

To resize the Deck room

1. Select the left vertical Deck Railing, then click on the dimension that reports its distance from the left exterior wall.
In the inline text field, type 36’ and press Enter.
2. Select the right vertical Deck Railing and position it 36" from the right exterior wall.
3. Select the horizontal Deck Railing, then click on either dimension that reports its distance from the exterior wall of
the house. Type 8’ in the inline text field and press Enter.
4. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Floor Overview to see the results.

l Notice that the Porch has a concrete slab floor.

l Click and drag using the Mouse-Orbit Camera tool until the Deck room can be seen.

l Notice that the program automatically generates planking, joists, beams, and posts with footings.
l Note, too, that the post footings are located at the same height as the foundation wall footings because there is
no terrain present.

5. Select File> Close View to return to plan view and remember to Save your work.

CREATING PORCH AND DECK SUPPORTS

Because porch stem walls and deck post footings are measured relative to grade, now is a good time to add terrain to the
plan. The terrain should always be drawn on either Floor 0 or 1.

To create a Terrain Perimeter

1. On Floor 1, select Terrain> Create Terrain Perimeter .

2. Select Window> Fill Window so that the entire Terrain Perimeter can be seen.

3. To make the edges of the terrain easier to see while editing it, temporarily switch to the "Terrain Plan View".
l Click the Saved Plan View Control Plan View in the top toolbar and select "Terrain Plan View" from
the drop-down list.

121
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

l You can also open the "Terrain Plan View" in a separate view window via the Project Browser. See Using Plan
Views on page 6.
l Notice that the dimensions and various interior details no longer display. The vertical sides of the Terrain
Perimeter are now easier to distinguish.
4. Select Terrain> Terrain Specification and on the GENERAL panel of the Terrain Specification dialog:

l Under the Building Pad heading, uncheck Automatic.

l Specify the Subfloor Height Above Terrain as 28", then click OK.
l This will place the terrain 28" below the first floor’s subfloor and about 1" below the slab floor in the Garage.
5. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the Terrain Perimeter to select it.

6. Use Temporary Dimensions to make the Terrain Perimeter polyline smaller for now:
l Select the top horizontal edge, then click on the Temporary Dimension that reports its distance from the bottom
edge.
l Click in the inline text field and type 60’, then press the Enter key.
7. Use the Center Object edit tool to center the terrain on the right side of the house:

l With the Terrain Perimeter still selected, click the Center Object edit button.

l Move the mouse pointer over the right side of the house, along or just outside the right vertical exterior wall.
l When you see a horizontal centering axis across the center of the wall, click once to center the terrain relative
to the length of that wall.

122
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

l Here, the outline of the Exterior Room is highlighted, indicating that the terrain will be centered along its right
edge.
8. Create a Perspective Floor Overview and Orbit the camera so the back Deck can be seen. Notice that the
post footings now only extend down to the level of the terrain.

9. Select File> Close View to return to plan view.

The footings for deck posts are generated automatically and are set to display by default in most 3D views but not in plan
view.

To turn on the display of objects

1. Go Down One Floor to Floor 0 and notice that deck framing and post footings display.

2. Use the Saved Plan View Control Plan View to return to the "Working Plan View" and notice that these
objects no longer display.
3. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options . In the Active Layer Display Options side
window:
l Type the word "deck" in the Name Filter field. As you type, the names of the layers listed in the table will be
filtered in response.
l Locate the "Footings, Deck Post" layer and click once in the "Disp" column to add a check mark.

123
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

Porches have slab floors and do not typically receive foundations; however, this porch is raised off the terrain and will need
stem walls to support it.

To draw porch stem walls

1. Select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Reference Display .

2. Select Build> Wall> Straight Foundation Wall , then click and drag over the walls of the Porch visible in the
Reference Display.

3. Select each new foundation wall and click the Align with Wall Above edit button to bring the two walls into
alignment with the Porch walls above.
4. Click the Select Objects button, then click in the room defined by the porch stem walls to select it.

124
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

5. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the STRUCTURE panel of the Room Specification dialog:

l Specify the Stem Wall Height as 37 1/2".

l Uncheck Floor Under this Room.
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.
6. When you are finished, select Tools> Floor/>Reference Display> Reference Display to turn off the Reference
Floor, and Save your work.

DRAWING DECK STAIRS

A set of stairs can now be drawn to connect the deck to the terrain.

To set the Exterior Stair Defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings . In the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow next to "Stairs and Ramps" in the
tree list to expand the category.
2. Select "Exterior Stairs" and click the Edit button to open the Exterior Stair Defaults dialog.
3. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel:

l Select the same Newel Type from the Library as used by the Deck Railing: "Capped Post".
l Specify the Newel Width as 5 1/2".
l Uncheck Rail Passes Over Newel.
l Specify the Newel Height as 44".
4. On the MATERIALS panel:
l Assign "Color - White" to the Baluster, Rails, and Capped Post Main components.
l Assign "Redwood" to the Tread component.
l Assign "CA-B Pressure Treated Lumber" to the Stringer component.
5. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To make exterior stairs easier to see, the display of the "Dimensions, Plan" layer is turned off in the images that follow.

125
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

To draw deck stairs to the terrain

1. Go Up One Floor to Floor 1, then Zoom in on the left side of the Deck room.

2. Select Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs , then move the mouse just outside the vertical deck railing on the left side
of the Deck room.
3. When Object Snaps are enabled, a Midpoint snap indicator will display when the pointer is over the Deck
Railing’s center point.
4. Click once to create a short stair section that spans the difference in height between the Deck and the terrain. Notice:

l Unlike interior stairs, which build up to the floor above and have an "UP" label, exterior stairs have a "DN"
label.

l A Doorway opening is automatically added to the deck railing at the top of a staircase.

5. Select the stair section and click the Open Object edit button.

l On the GENERAL panel of the Staircase Specification dialog, specify the Width as 5’.
l On the RAILING panel, check the boxes beside Railing On Left and Right, then click OK.

6. Notice:

l The stair section resizes about its center line and remains centered along the railing.
l The doorway in the Deck Railing resizes automatically, as well.
7. Save your work.

126
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

CREATING CONCRETE STAIRS

Stairs can be edited to represent various construction methods.

To create concrete porch stairs

1. In the plan view, select Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs .

2. Click just outside the front horizontal wall of the Porch room to place a stair section at that location.
3. Select the new stair section and center it relative to the front door:

l Click the Center Object edit button.

l Move the mouse pointer over the front door.

l When you see a vertical centering axis across the center of the door, click once to center the stairs relative to the
door.
4. With the stairs still selected, click the Open Object edit button to open the Exterior Staircase Specification
dialog.
5. On the GENERAL panel, specify the Width as 6’.
6. On the STYLE panel:
l Specify the Tread Overhang as 0".
l Uncheck Open Underneath and Open Risers.
7. On the RAILING panel, check the boxes beside Railing On Left and Right.
8. On the MATERIALS panel, assign a "Concrete" material to the Riser, Support Wall, Tread, Wall Trim, and Underside
components, then click OK.

127
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

9. You can see the results in a Perspective Floor Overview .

10. When you are finished, close the camera view and Save your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
Floor plans typically include text with a variety of different pieces of information. Some basic annotations for the exterior
deck and porch stairs can be added now.
The Working Plan View is active as it was in the previous four tutorials, so "Plan Scale Rich Text and Note Defaults are
still in [Link] "To set the note defaults" on page 84 of the Interior Stairs Tutorial.

To add rich text annotations

1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text , then click in the view, below the Porch stairs.

2. In the Rich Text Specification dialog, type "concrete steps to grade" in the text field and click OK.

3. Create a Rich Text object that says "framed steps to grade" and position it at the bottom of the Deck stairs.

Additional Note callouts can be created that refer to the Floor Plan Notes schedule.

To add plan notes

1. Select CAD> Text> Note , then click once along the back rail of the Deck room.

2. On the NOTE panel of the Note Specification dialog:

128
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

l In the Text field, type: exterior landing 36" minimum in direction of travel
l Click OK.
3. Notice that the new Note is automatically assigned the number 3. Note 1 was added in the Interior Stairs tutorial,
while 2 was added in the Doors and Windows tutorial.
4. Click on the Note shape to select it, then:

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button

l Click once near the bottom of the front Porch stairs to create a copy at that location.

Notes are assigned their schedule numbers in the order that they were created. The first Note created in this project, 1, was
in the Interior Stairs tutorial; 2 was created in the Doors and Windows tutorial, and the Notes created here were
automatically assigned the number 3. Once created, though, schedule order can be changed in either of two ways.

To change schedule numbering

1. Select CAD> CAD Detail Management .

2. In the CAD Detail Management dialog, select "Legends and Key Notes" Detail and click the Open button.
3. Select Window> Tile Vertically to tile the plan view and CAD Detail view side by side.

4. In plan view, zoom in on the Foyer and Porch so the 1, 2, and 3 Notes can be seen.
5. In the "Legends and Key Notes" detail, select the Floor Plan Notes schedule, notice the square Move Row edit
handles that display in the center of each cell in the first column.

129
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

l Click on the handle located over the 2 cell and drag downward.
l When the information in the second row can also be seen in the third row, release the mouse button.
l The numbers stay in numerical order, but the Notes in the schedule change position.
6. In plan view, notice that the Note under the entry window is now 3 while the note at the bottom of the Porch stairs is
now 2.

7. Click in plan view to make it the active window, then click on Note 2 to select it.
8. On its edit toolbar, notice two buttons:

l Click the Move Up in Schedule edit button to move the selected object one row up in the schedule.

l Click the Move Down in Schedule edit button to move the selected object one row down in the schedule.

9. Here, the Move Up in Schedule button is clicked twice to move the Tempered Glass note to the first row.

10. When you are finished, close the Legends and Notes CAD Detail window and Save your work.

You can continue working on this plan in the Chic Cottage Roof tutorial. Before doing so, though, it is a good idea to
become familiar with the information in the Roof Tutorials on page 133.

130
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Deck.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating porch and deck rooms.
To set the Deck Railing Defaults 114
To set the Railing Defaults 115
To set the Half Wall Defaults 115
To set Porch Room Defaults 115
To create a porch 116
To set Deck Room Defaults 117
To draw a deck 117
To move dimension lines 118
To add and remove extension lines 119
To resize the Deck room 121
To create a Terrain Perimeter 121
To turn on the display of objects 123
To draw porch stem walls 124
To set the Exterior Stair Defaults 125
To draw deck stairs to the terrain 126
To create concrete porch stairs 127
To add rich text annotations 128
To add plan notes 128
To change schedule numbering 129
To save a plan revision 131

131
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 6 - Decks and Porches

What are two ways that Deck Railing walls are different from other types of railings?
l Deck Railings use a single layer wall type so there is no siding material on the sides of deck platforms.
l When a room is enclosed by Deck Railings, it is assigned the "Deck" room type automatically.
What are two structural differences between Deck and Porch rooms?
l Deck rooms have a framed floor platform and no roof or ceiling, while Porches have a slab floor, a ceiling. and a roof.
What are the names of the two dimension line edit handles that let you add extension lines to new objects?
l The Add Extension Line edit handle is diamond-shaped and displays near the Move handle. It can be used to add an
extension anywhere along the length of the dimension line.
l There is a circular Add Segments edit handle just beyond each end of a dimension line that lets you lengthen the
dimension line.
How do you remove an extension line from a dimension line?
l Click the diamond-shaped Extension Line End handle, drag it away from the marked object and any other objects it
might locate instead, and release the mouse button.
How do you specify whether a room is included in the total Living Area?
l You can specify whether a selected room is included in the Living Area calculation on the General panel of its Room
Specification dialog.
l You can also set whether each Room Type is included or not in the Room Type Defaults dialog.
Where can the deck plank gap and width be set?
l Deck plank gap and width can be set on the Deck panel of the Deck Room Defaults dialog.
l These settings can be modified for a selected Deck room on same panel of the Room Specification dialog.
What tool is used to create deck and porch stairs?
l The Straight Stairs tool can be used to create deck and porch stairs. Stairs can be customized to create a variety of
different styles.
What are two ways to change the numbering of Notes and the associated line items in a key note list?
l One way is to select a line item in a key note list or other schedule and click and drag its small square Move Row edit
handle upward or downward.
l The other way is to select the Note or other object in the drawing itself and click the Move Up in Schedule or Move
Down in Schedule edit button.

132
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof Tutorials

Roof Tutorials Chapter 2

The Roof Tutorials describe best practices for creating basic roof styles in Chief Architect and then adding a roof to Chic
Cottage.
In this tutorial you will learn about:

TOPICS
Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles 134
Hip Roofs 136
Gable Roofs 136
Dutch Gable Roofs 137
Shed Roofs 138
Offset Gable Roofs 138
Gambrel Roofs 139
Gull Wing Roofs 140
Half Hip Roofs 141
Mansard Roofs 142
Finding the Start of an Upper Pitch 142
Chic Cottage Roof 143
Dormers 168

133
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles

Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles

This tutorial uses a simple, rectangular structure to explain how to create common roof styles using roof style directives
assigned to the exterior walls.

To begin a new plan

1. If any plans are open, select File> Close All from the menu.
2. Select File> New Plan to open a new plan.

3. Select Build> Wall> Straight Exterior Wall and draw a rectangular floor plan, measuring about 34 feet by 24
feet (approximately 10.4 m by 7.3 m), in a clockwise direction.

4. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Full Overview to create a 3D overview of the house.

5. Select Window> Tile Vertically to see both views at the same time.

ROOF STYLE DIRECTIVES IN WALLS

By default, the program will generate a roof plane bearing on each exterior wall that does not have a room-defining wall
directly above it, and will use the pitch specified in the Build Roof dialog. The result is a hip style roof; however, if you

134
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles

need a different condition over a particular wall to produce another roof style, you can define it in that wall’s specification
dialog.
Individual walls can be selected and edited in both 2D and 3D views. When multiple walls are to be edited, however, it is
usually quicker and easier to work in plan view: in part, because you can hold down the Shift key and group-select walls.

To set a wall’s roof directives

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on a wall to select it.

l To select multiple walls, hold down the Shift key on the keyboard and click on additional walls to add them to
the selection set.
2. Click the Open Object button to open the Wall Specification dialog.

3. On the ROOF panel:

l The Roof Options control how the roof builds over the selected wall.
l The Pitch Options control how steep the roof that bears on the selected wall is.
l The Overhang setting lets you specify how far the roof above extends past the wall’s exterior.
l The Auto Roof Return settings let you specify and customize automatic roof returns.
l Lower Wall Type if Split by Butting Roof lets you create a lower wall type that follows the underside of an
adjacent roof plane, if one is present.

The Roof Styles described in this tutorial use only the Roof and Pitch Options.

To reset all roof directives

1. Select Edit> Reset to Defaults.
2. In the Reset to Defaults dialog, set the Reset Scope to All Floors, check Roof Directives in Walls, and click OK.

ATTIC WALLS
When a roof is generated, attic walls may also be generated. An Attic wall fills the space between the walls that define a
room and the roof above. The triangular-shaped wall of a gable, for example, is created using an Attic wall.
If you do not want to see attic walls in plan view, you can turn off their display.

To turn off the display of attic walls

1. In plan view, select Tools> Layer Settings> Display Options (or press the ~ key) to open the Layer Display
Options dialog.
2. Find "Walls, Attic" in the Name column, remove the check from the Display column for this item, and click OK.

DELETING ROOFS
Whether a roof was drawn manually or automatically generated, deleting roof planes is easy:

l Select an individual roof plane and Delete it.

l Select Build> Roof> Delete Roof Planes to delete all roof planes in the plan.

135
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Hip Roofs

l Select Edit> Delete Objects and in the Delete Objects dialog, select either All Rooms On This Floor or All
Floors; place a check beside Roof Planes; and click OK to delete all roof planes either on the current floor or in the
plan.
If a warning message states that roofs cannot be deleted while Auto Rebuild Roof is on, click the Yes button to turn off
Auto Rebuild Roof and delete the roof.

AUTO REBUILD ROOFS

Auto Rebuild Roofs is a convenient feature in Premier that automatically rebuilds the roof in a plan whenever the exterior
walls or floor/ceiling heights are changed. Auto Rebuild Roofs is turned off by default, and this tutorial is presented with
this feature disabled; however the information presented here also applies when it is enabled.

To turn on/off Auto Rebuild Roofs

1. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof from the menu.

2. On the ROOF panel of the Build Roof dialog, check or uncheck Auto Rebuild Roofs and click OK.

Hip Roofs
When roofs are automatically generated, a roof plane is built over every exterior wall in the plan that does not have another
wall drawn above it. The result is referred to as a hip roof.

To create a hip roof

1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles on page 134.
2. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof from the menu to open the Build Roof dialog.

3. Check Build Roof Planes and click OK to generate a hip roof.

Gable Roofs
If you would like a gable over a particular wall rather than a roof plane bearing on it, you can specify it as a Full Gable
Wall in the Wall Specification dialog. To create basic gable roof, two walls should be specified as Full Gable Wall.

136
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dutch Gable Roofs

To create a gable roof

1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles on page 134.
2. Click the Select Objects tool, select the vertical wall on the left, hold down the Shift key, and select the vertical
wall on the right. The two walls should be group-selected.
3. Open the Wall Specification dialog and on the ROOF panel, select Full Gable Wall and click OK. See To set a
wall’s roof directives on page 135.

l Alternatively, you can click the Change to Gable Wall(s) edit button.

l To remove the Full Gable Wall attribute from a selected wall, click the Change to Hip Wall(s) edit button.

4. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof to open the Build Roof dialog, check Build Roof Planes, and click OK.

Dutch Gable Roofs

A Dutch gable, sometimes called a Dutch hip, is a combination of hip and gable roof styles in which a gable is located at the
end of the ridge, at the top of a hip roof plane.

To create a Dutch gable roof

1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in To begin a new plan on page 134.
2. Click the Select Objects tool, select the vertical wall on the left, hold down the Shift key, and select the vertical
wall on the right. The two walls should be group-selected.
3. Open the Wall Specification dialog and on the ROOF panel, change the following settings:
l Select Dutch Gable Wall.
l Specify the Starts at Height as 180".
4. Click OK to close the Wall Specification dialog. See To set a wall’s roof directives on page 135.
5. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof to open the Build Roof dialog, check Build Roof Planes, and click OK.

137
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Shed Roofs

Shed Roofs
To create a single, sloping roof plane, or shed roof, two walls must be specified as Full Gable Walls, and one must be a
High Shed/Gable Wall.

To create a shed roof

1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles on page 134.
2. As in the Gable Roofs on page 136 example, specify the left and right vertical walls as Full Gable Walls.
3. Select the wall where you want the high end of the shed roof and open its Wall Specification dialog. On the ROOF
panel, check High Shed/Gable Wall and click OK. See To set a wall’s roof directives on page 135.
l In this example, the lower wall on screen is set as the High Shed/Gable Wall.
4. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof to open the Build Roof dialog, specify a Pitch of 2 in 12, check Build Roof
Planes, and click OK.

Offset Gable Roofs

An offset gable is a type of gable roof with different pitches on each of the two roof planes and a ridge that is offset from
the building’s center line. Assign a different pitch to the two roof planes in the Wall Specification dialog for the wall

138
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Gambrel Roofs

supporting each one.

To create an offset gable roof

1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in To begin a new plan on page 134.
2. As in the Gable Roofs on page 136 example, specify the left and right vertical walls as Full Gable Walls.
3. Select the lower horizontal wall and open its Wall Specification dialog. On the ROOF panel, leave the Roof Options
unchecked and change the Pitch to 12 in 12. See To set a wall’s roof directives on page 135.
4. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof to open the Build Roof dialog, check Build Roof Planes, specify the Pitch as
2 in 12, and click OK.

Gambrel Roofs
A gambrel or barn style roof has two pitches on each side of the ridge. The first (lower) pitch on either side is steeper than
the pitch near the ridge.

To create a gambrel roof

1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles on page 134.
2. As in the Gable Roofs on page 136 example, specify the left and right vertical walls as Full Gable Walls.
3. Click the Select Objects tool, select the horizontal wall on the top, hold down the Shift key, and select the
horizontal wall on the bottom. The two walls should be group-selected.
4. Open the Wall Specification dialog and on the ROOF panel, change the following settings:
l Make sure that the Pitch field has the Active Defaults icon.

l Check the box beside Upper Pitch.

l Specify the Upper Pitch as 6 in 12 and the Start Height as 156".
l To learn more, see Finding the Start of an Upper Pitch on page 142.
5. Click OK to close the Wall Specification dialog. See To set a wall’s roof directives on page 135.
6. Open the Build Roof dialog, check Build Roof Planes, specify the Pitch as 12 in 12, and click OK.

139
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Gull Wing Roofs

Experiment with alternate pitches and overhangs. Also, try varying the height at which the second pitch begins so that you
can see the effect it has on the gambrel roof design.

Gull Wing Roofs

A gull wing roof has two pitches on either side of the ridge, as a gambrel does; but the first pitch of a gull wing is shallower
than the steeper upper pitch.

To create a gull wing roof

1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles on page 134.
2. As in the Gable Roofs on page 136 example, specify the left and right vertical walls as Full Gable Walls.
3. Click the Select Objects tool, select one of the horizontal walls, hold down the Shift key, and select the other
horizontal wall. The two walls should be group-selected.
4. Open the Wall Specification dialog and on the ROOF panel, change the following settings:
l Make sure that the Pitch field has the Active Defaults icon.

l Place a check in the box beside Upper Pitch.

l Keep the Upper Pitch as 12 in 12 and change the Start Height to 125".
l To learn more, see Finding the Start of an Upper Pitch on page 142.
5. Click OK to close the dialog. See To set a wall’s roof directives on page 135.
6. Click the Build Roof tool, specify a Pitch of 3 in 12, check Build Roof Planes, and click OK in the Build Roof
dialog.

140
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Half Hip Roofs

Experiment with the height at which the second pitch begins so that you can see the effect it has on the gull wing roof
design.

Half Hip Roofs

A half hip roof has two gable ends. At the top of each gable is a small hip that extends to the ridge.

To create a half hip roof

1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles on page 134.
2. As in the Gable Roofs on page 136 example, specify the left and right vertical walls as Full Gable Walls. In
addition, change the following Pitch Option settings:
l Check the box beside Upper Pitch.
l Specify the Upper Pitch as 3 in 12 and set the Start Height at 170".
3. Click the Build Roof tool, check Build Roof Planes, and click OK in the Build Roof dialog.

141
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Mansard Roofs

Mansard Roofs
A mansard roof is a hip roof with two pitches on the roof sections above each exterior walls: an extremely steep lower pitch
and a gently sloping upper pitch.

To create a mansard roof

1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles on page 134.
2. Click the Select Objects tool, select one of the exterior walls, hold down the Shift key, and click on the
remaining walls to select them as a group.
3. Open the Wall Specification dialog and on the ROOF panel, and change the following settings:
l Check the box beside Upper Pitch.
l Specify the Upper Pitch as 1.5 in 12 and the Start Height as 132".
l To learn more, see Finding the Start of an Upper Pitch on page 142.
4. Click OK to close the dialog. See To set a wall’s roof directives on page 135.
5. Click the Build Roof tool, specify a Pitch of 24 in 12, check Build Roof Planes, and click OK in the Build
Roof dialog.

Finding the Start of an Upper Pitch

When creating a roof style with lower and upper pitches, you can determine the exact Starts at Height or In From Baseline
values that you need in an elevation view.

To find the start of an upper pitch

1. Generate the roof using only the first, lower pitch. Be sure to define all the roof information for each wall (gable,
hip, first pitch, etc.).
2. Create a cross section view that includes the roof plane that will have the second pitch.
3. Select CAD> Points> Place Point , click to place a temporary point near the location where you want the second
pitch to start, then using the Point-to-Point Dimension tool either:

142
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

l Drag a dimension line from the floor on Floor 1 (which has a height of 0 by default) to the temporary point.
l Drag a dimension line from the baseline to the vertical plane of the temporary point.

4. Enter either of these values in the Wall Specification dialog. You can press the Tab key to update the other value.
Click OK to close the dialog.

5. Open the Build Roof dialog, check Build Roof Planes and click OK to rebuild the roof.

Chic Cottage Roof

With a basic understanding of how automatically generated roofs work, a roof can be created in the Chic Cottage plan.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes techniques that can be used to create a custom roof for Chic Cottage. Concepts introduced include:
File Management 143
Productivity Tips 144
Setting the Defaults 144
Using Plan Views 145
Working in Camera Views 147
Adding a Roof to Chic Cottage 148
Controlling Roof Height 153
Creating a Curved Roof 157
Adding Roof Details 161
Moving the Display of Roof Planes 163
Adding Annotations 164
Creating Revisions 166

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Decks and Porches tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Deck and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,

143
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File Management" on page 4 of the Exterior
Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create the roof in Chic Cottage, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l Many roof designs are best created by generating a roof automatically and then manually editing individual roof
planes.
l The Join Roof Planes edit tool lets you join the edges of two roof planes along a line or arc to form a
geometrically correct valley, hip, or ridge.

Content
l A selection of name brand roofing catalogs are available for download from the 3D Library. Select Library> Get
Additional Content Online to launch your default web browser to that page.

Interface
l Tiling 2D and 3D views can make it easier to manually edit a roof design.
l Auto Rebuild Roofs and tiled views are often helpful during roof design - in large plans, both can cause slowness on
some systems.
l When a roof design is complete, be sure to turn off Auto Rebuild to avoid unwanted changes.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + R - Build Roof
l F6 - Fill Window
l F9 - Reference Display
l 3 - Add Break edit tool
l 2 - Join Roof Planes edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
creating a roof, there are a number of defaults that should be borne in mind.

144
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

Settings in the Floor Defaults dialogs that affect the overall height of a structure will also affect roof height. These include
the default Ceiling Heights and Floor and Ceiling Platform Thicknesses. See To set the 1st Floor Defaults on page 16 and
"To set the default floor structures" on page 14 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.
The structure of individual rooms can be customized, and will also affect how roofs build. In addition, a room can be set to
have a roof above it, or not. See To add a shed roof over the deck on page 152.
The settings in the Roof Defaults control the structure and appearance of the roof itself. See To set the roof defaults on page
148.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
As noted in the Exterior Walls tutorial, Saved Plan Views have a number of important settings associated with them,
including active Layer Set and Saved Defaults. In previous tutorials, the "Working Plan View" is active, the Active Layer
Display Options side window is used to turn the display of various objects off and on, and all annotations are created using
saved "Plan Rich Text Defaults" and "Plan Scale Callout Defaults" settings. See "To examine a saved plan view’s settings"
on page 7 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.
When you know that a particular task will require you to make changes to multiple layers and to create annotations using
different saved defaults, you can save time by opening a Saved Plan View created for that task. You can switch between
Saved Plan Views in the Project Browser or using the Saved Plan View Control drop-down in the toolbars.

To open and examine a saved plan view

1. The Project Browser side window is docked to the right side of the program window by default.
l Click on its tab to display it in front of the other side windows at that location.

l If it is not open, select View> Project Browser .

2. Under the CHIC COTTAGE - CURRENT line item are a set of folders. The "Plan Views" folder should be
expanded already, but if it is not click the arrow to its left.
3. Right-click on "Roof Plan View" in the Project Browser and select Edit View from the contextual menu.
4. In the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, notice the various settings that control what displays in this view:
l The settings on the GENERAL panel control a variety of behaviors and display options.
l The settings on the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel control which saved defaults and layer settings are active in the
view. Notice that the "Roof Plan View" uses the "Roof Plan Layer Set".
l The settings on the REFERENCE DISPLAY panel control the appearance of the Reference Floor in the view, as well
as whether it displays.
5. Click OK to close the dialog.
6. Right-click on "Roof Plan View" and select Open View from the contextual menu. Notice:
l There are now two view window tabs above the active view window.
l The "Roof Plan View" is now the active view.
l In the Project Browser, both "Working Plan View" and "Roof Plan View" now have an icon indicating that they
are Open.

145
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

There are several ways to switch between open view windows, but clicking on the tab associated with a view window is
usually the easiest.

To compare plan views

1. Select Window> Tile Vertically to tile the two windows side by side and compare their appearance.

2. Notice:
l Room labels, door and window labels, camera symbols, and multiple wall layers display in the "Working Plan
View" but not in the "Roof Plan View".
l The dimensions, text and callouts created in previous tutorials are turned off in the "Roof Plan View".
l The lines representing walls are lighter in color in the "Roof Plan View".
3. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options to open the Active Layer Display Options
side window.
4. Notice that "Roof Plan Layer Set" is selected at the top of the side window, indicating that it is in use in the current
view.
5. Use the scroll bar to browse through the list of layers and notice:
l Many of the layers are turned off.
l The "Text" and "Text, Callouts" layers are turned off, while the "Text, Roofs" layer is turned on.
l The "Walls, Normal" layer has a grey color assigned to it.
6. Click on the "Working Plan View" tab to make it the active view window.
7. In the Active Layer Display Options side window, notice:
l The "Working Layer Set" is now selected at the top of the side window.
l Most of the layers are now turned on.
l The "Text" and "Text, Callouts" layers are turned on.
l The "Walls, Normal" layer color is black.

146
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

8. In the plan view, notice:

l The room labels, door and window labels, and multiple wall layers display.
l The text and callout annotations created in previous tutorials are now turned on.
l The lines representing walls are now black.

Although the display settings in the "Working Plan View" are useful for plan views, those in the "Roof Plan View" are
typical of roof plan drawings and will make working on roofs easier.

To close a plan view

1. There are several ways to close a plan view:
l Right-click on its name in the Project Browser and select Close View from the contextual menu.
l Click the Close Tab button on its view window tab.
l Select File> Close View while the view in question is active.
2. Close the "Working Plan View" using the method of your choice.

The "Roof Plan View" should now be the only open view window.

WORKING IN CAMERA VIEWS

Roofs can often be best worked on and understood when 2D and 3D views are tiled.

To tile floor plan and camera views

1. Go Up One Floor to Floor 2.

2. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Full Overview to create a 3D overview of the house.

3. Select Window> Tile Vertically to tile the overview and plan views side by side.

4. Click and drag with the Mouse-Orbit Camera tool active to orbit the camera around the model until the side of
the Porch can be seen.
5. Notice that the overview’s title bar is darker in color than that of the plan view. The darker title bar indicates that the
overview is the currently active view.

147
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

6. Click on the plan view’s title bar or anywhere within the view window to make it the currently active view instead.

ADDING A ROOF TO CHIC COTTAGE

By default, Chief Architect builds a roof plane bearing on each exterior wall, producing a hip roof style. See Hip Roofs on
page 136.

To set the roof defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings , select "Roof" in the tree list and click the Edit button.

2. On the ROOF panel of the Roof Defaults dialog:

l Check Auto Rebuild Roofs.

l Specify the Pitch as 12" in 12".
3. On the STRUCTURE panel, specify the roof surface material, rafter depth, and other details of how the roof planes are
to be constructed. The initial settings will be used for now and will be modified later. See "Setting the Defaults" on
page 394 of the Roof and Ceiling Framing Tutorial.

148
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

4. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your change.

With Auto Rebuild Roof checked, a roof builds automatically and will rebuild any time a change is made to the model that
affects the roof.

To add gable walls

1. In plan view, click the Select Objects button, then click on the vertical wall on the left side of the plan to select
it.
2. There are two ways to specify this wall as a gable wall:
l Check Full Gable Wall on the ROOF panel of its Wall Specification dialog.

l Click the Change to Gable Wall(s) edit button.

149
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

3. Specify the front wall of the Garage as a Full Gable Wall, as well.

The Porch roof is built over the first floor, so it is lower than the rest of the roof. By adding a room above it, that roof can
be raised and a nested gable created.

To create a nested gable

1. Select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Reference Display , then Zoom in on the Porch area in the front
of the structure.
2. Select Build> Wall> Straight Exterior Wall , then click and drag two walls over the red lines representing the
porch Half Walls on Floor 1.
3. Specify the two walls as the "Shingle-6" wall type. See "To customize the second floor wall type" on page 51 of the
Multiple Floors Tutorial.
4. Confirm that the walls are aligned with the Half Walls below. See "To align walls between floors " on page 56 of the
Multiple Floors Tutorial.
5. Select the horizontal wall and specify it as Full Gable Wall.

150
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

6. When you are finished, select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Reference Display or press the F9 key to turn
the Reference Display off again.

The vertical wall on the right also needs a gable above it: but only over the portion that is located behind the garage bump-
out.

To create a reverse gable

1. Click in the overview to make it the active window, then use the Mouse-Orbit Camera tool to orbit the camera
around the model until the right side of the structure can be seen.
2. Return to the plan view window, click on the right vertical wall to select it, then click the Add Break edit
button.
3. Click once on the right vertical wall, anywhere along the back part of the Garage room to break the wall into two
segments at that location.

4. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the back portion of the vertical wall and specify it as a Full Gable
Wall.

151
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

5. With the wall still selected:

l Click on the temporary dimension line that reports its length.
l In the inline text field, type 28’ to match the length of the opposite exterior wall and press Enter.

6. The gable on the right is now identical to the gable on the left and a single ridge line generates across the structure.

By default, Deck rooms do not have a ceiling or a roof. Once created, though, Decks can be customized.

To add a shed roof over the deck

1. Click in the overview to make it the active window, then use the Mouse-Orbit Camera tool to orbit the camera
around the model until the Deck room can be seen.
2. Return to the plan view window and go Down One Floor to Floor 1.

3. Click the Select Objects button, then click in the Deck room to select it.

4. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the STRUCTURE panel of the Room Specification dialog, check the
boxes beside Roof Over This Room and Flat Ceiling Over This Room and click OK.

152
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

5. Specify the two vertical side railings of the Deck as Full Gable Walls.

6. Select the horizontal deck railing and click the Open Object edit button.

7. On the ROOF panel of the Railing Specification dialog, specify the Pitch as 2" in 12".

8. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

CONTROLLING ROOF HEIGHT

There are a number of ways to control and customize roof heights. By default, they are based on the ceiling heights of the
rooms below.

To create a story and a half

1. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof .

2. On the ROOF panel of the Build Roof dialog, under the "Roof Height" heading:
l Specify the Raise/Lower All Roof Planes value as 18 1/8".
l Check the box beside Ignore Top (2nd) Floor.

153
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

l Click OK.

3. Notice how the roof builds now:

l The roof builds over the ceilings on Floor 1 instead of Floor 2.
l The roof directives of the walls on Floor 1 are used instead of those on Floor 2.
4. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Back Clipped Cross Section , then:

l Click and drag horizontally to create a camera inside the Kitchen room.
l Limit the length of the camera line to one or two plan feet and make sure that you draw the camera either straight
left to right or straight right to left on-screen.
l For more information, see To create a Back Clipped Cross Section on page 19.
5. Zoom in on the right side of the section view, where the front wall meets the roof.

6. Select CAD> Dimension> Tape Measure , then click and drag to draw a temporary dimension line that
measures the distance from the top of the wall to the bottom of the roof plane that bears on it.

154
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

7. Notice that the distance matches the Raise/Lower All Roof Planes value set in the Build Roof dialog, then select
File> Close View to return to the plan view window.
8. On Floor 1, specify the front walls of the Garage and the Porch as a Full Gable Walls. See To add gable walls on
page 149.
9. Specify the two side walls of the main structure as Full Gable Walls, as described above. See To create a reverse
gable on page 151.

Lowering the roof also reduces the top heights of many of the walls. In the front of the structure, the gable over the garage
door now has a gap behind it.

To edit the nested gable wall

1. Click in the overview to make it the active window, then use the Mouse-Orbit Camera tool to orbit the camera
around the model until the front of the structure can be seen.
2. Zoom in on the gable over the Porch and Garage rooms and notice the gap in the wall.

3. Return to the plan view window, go Up One Floor to Floor 2, and zoom in on the area over the Porch and
Garage rooms.

155
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

4. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the horizontal wall located over the front of the Porch room to
select it.
5. Click and drag its right end edit handle to the right until it reaches the vertical exterior wall on the right side of the
structure. The gap seen in the camera view will be closed.
6. Click in the small rectangular "Living" room that is created over the front of the Garage, then click the Open Object
edit button.

7. On the GENERAL panel of the Room Specification dialog, select "Attic" from the Room Type drop-down list, then
click OK.
8. Select the vertical wall on the left side of the Attic room and click the Add Break edit button. Next:

l Click once at the intersection of the vertical wall on the left side of the Attic room and the back horizontal wall.
l This will prevent the vertical wall from building through the horizontal Shingle-6 wall.
9. Remember to Save your work.

156
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

CREATING A CURVED ROOF

Custom roof configurations can be created by generating a roof automatically and then editing individual roof planes.

To add a gull wing

1. With the plan view window active, go Down One Floor to Floor 1.

2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the vertical Half Wall on the left side of the Porch room to select
it.
3. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the ROOF panel of the Railing Specification dialog:

l Specify the Pitch as 4" in 12".

l Check the box beside Upper Pitch.
l Specify the Upper Pitch as 12" in 12".
l Specify the In From Baseline value as 7’ and click OK.

157
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

4. Notice that because of the reduced pitch, the lower Porch roof has a deeper eave so that it can have the same fascia
height as the adjacent roof eave.

Once created, roof planes can be individually selected and edited. In order to edit a roof plane, Auto Rebuild Roofs must be
turned off.

To edit roof overhangs

1. In the plan view window, Zoom in on the Porch, Foyer, and Dining rooms.

2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the edge of the roof plane located over the left porch Half Wall to
select it.
l To produce a Temporary Dimension that reports the eave depth, click on the lower portion of the eave edge,
across from the exterior corner of the Porch.
3. Click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far the eave edge is from the framing layer of the Half Wall.

4. A Question message box will ask if you want to turn off Auto Rebuild Roofs. Click Yes to close the message box
and continue editing the selected roof plane.
5. Type 18" in the inline text field and press the Enter key.
6. Next, select the main roof plane located over the Foyer and Dining rooms.

158
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

7. Click the Add Break edit button, then move your mouse pointer over the point where the roof plane’s angled
valley edge crosses the exterior of the Porch’s side wall.

8. When the square Endpoint Snap Indicator displays, click once to break the angled edge into two segments and
add a corner edit handle at that point.
9. Click on the corner edit handle located between the horizontal eave edge and the angled valley edge and drag to the
right until it meets the surface of the Porch side wall.

10. To see the results in 3D, Orbit the camera so that the valley behind the Porch can be seen.

The horizontal eave of the main roof now extends under the higher eave of the Porch roof.

159
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

To create a curved roof plane

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the edge of the roof plane located over the left porch Half Wall to
select it.
2. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the ROOF panel of the Roof Plane Specification dialog:

l Select the Lock radio button next to Ridge Top Height.

l Check the box beside Curved Roof.
l Specify the Angle at Eave as 0°, then press the Tab key to update the other settings.
l Notice that the Angle at Ridge and Radius to Roof Surface both update.

l Click OK.
3. Click on the edge of the Porch roof plane that extends over the Foyer room to make it the Selected Edge.
4. Click the Join Roof Planes edit button, then move your mouse pointer into the Foyer room.

5. When the larger roof plane becomes highlighted, click once.

160
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

6. The two roof planes now meet along a curved valley.

7. When you are finished, Save your work.

ADDING ROOF DETAILS

Chief Architect offers a variety of tools for adding architectural detail to a roof design.
Auto Roof Returns can be specified for any wall, and will generate on Full Gable Walls.

To add roof returns

1. Select the wall at the front of the Garage and click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the ROOF panel of the Wall Specification dialog:

l Check the box beside Auto Roof Return.

l Specify the Roof Type as Hip.
l Check the box beside Include Frieze.
l Click OK.

Frieze molding can be specified in the Roof Defaults and Build Roof dialogs. Since the Porch roof has been manually
edited, though, rebuilding the roof is not the best option.

161
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

To add frieze moldings

1. Select Build> Roof> Edit All Roof Planes .

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Roof Plane Specification dialog:

l Notice that most of the values are reported as "No Change".
l This is because this dialog is shared by all roof planes in the plan: as though they had been group-selected.
3. On the FRIEZE panel, click the Add New button.
4. In the Select Library Object dialog:
l The content is filtered by Type so that it only lists Moldings and Profiles.

l Type the word ’Frieze’ in the Search field and press the Enter key to perform a Text search.

l Right-click on an item in the search results and select Show in Browser from the contextual menu to see its
location in the tree list.
l Select the "FZ02" profile and click OK

5. Confirm that the frieze molding Type is set to "Eave and Gable", then click OK to add frieze molding under the
eaves of the roof.

162
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

6. Frieze molding can be seen in the 3D overview if you Zoom in on the overhang area of any wall.

7. When you are finished, close the camera view and remember to Save your work.

MOVING THE DISPLAY OF ROOF PLANES

Although the roof in this plan was generated on Floor 1 owing to the Ignore Top Floor setting, most roof plans show the
walls on the top living floor of the structure. The display of roof planes can easily be moved from floor to floor as needed
without affecting the height of the roof structure.

To move the display of roof planes

1. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Full Overview .

2. Select Window> Tile Vertically , then make the plan view the active window.

3. Go Down One Floor to Floor 1 and Zoom out until the entire structure can be seen.

4. Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane , then:

l Hold down the Shift key, then click and drag a rectangular selection marquee around the entire structure.
l Notice that the Status Bar states that seven objects are selected.
5. Click the Display On Floor Above edit button and notice that the roof planes disappear in plan view but are
unchanged in the overview.
6. Go Up One Floor and note that the roof planes are now found on Floor 2.

7. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser . Next, right click on the "Roof Plan View" and select Edit View from the contextual menu.

8. On the GENERAL panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, select "2nd Floor" as the Floor that is used
whenever this view is opened, and click OK.
9. Close the 3D Overview window and Save your work.

163
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
With the roof in place, some basic roof annotations can be added.
In previous tutorials, the "Working Plan View" was active, annotations were added using "Plan Defaults" for annotations
like Rich Text and Dimensions, and were placed on specific layers like "Text" and "Dimensions, Manual". Those layers
were turned off, however, when the "Roof Plan View" was opened. See To compare plan views on page 146.
In addition to creating an uncluttered space for drawing roofs, another benefit of switching to the "Roof Plan View" is that
annotations added while it is active will be placed on their own layer. This means that roof annotations will display in the
roof plan but not in other views.
As described in previous tutorials, one way to access the defaults for annotations is by selecting Edit> Default Settings.
Another way to access them is through the Saved Plan View Specification dialog.

To set dimension defaults

1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser .

2. Expand the "Plan Views" folder if necessary, then right-click on "Roof Plan View" and select Edit View from the
contextual menu.
3. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, notice:
l The Default Set that the view is Currently Using is the "Roof Default Set".
l Most of the Selected Defaults have names that begin with "Roof".
l To the right of each of the defaults are a set of buttons allowing you to manage them.
4. Click the Edit button to the right of Dimensions to open the Dimension Defaults dialog. Notice:
5. "Roof Dimension Defaults" is stated in the dialog box’s title bar.
6. On the LAYER panel, the "Dimensions, Roofs" layer is set as the layer on which manually drawn dimensions are
placed by default.
7. On the LOCATE MANUAL panel:
l Under the Walls heading, make sure that Wall Dimension Layer is selected.
l Make sure under CAD Objects, Lines/Sides is checked.
8. Click OK to close both dialogs.

A dimension line can be added to indicate the depth of the roof overhang, often abbreviated as O.H. in plans.

To create a dimension line with additional text

1. Select CAD> Dimensions> Manual Dimension , then click and drag a horizontal line from the right vertical
eave to the exterior wall to its left.

164
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

2. Zoom in on the dimension line and confirm that it is locating the roof plane edge and the wall’s framing layer.

3. Click on the dimension line to select it, then click the Open Object edit button.

4. On the PRIMARY FORMAT panel of the Dimension Line Specification dialog:

l Uncheck Use Default Formatting.

l Select the inch symbol (") from the Units drop-down list.
5. On the SEGMENTS panel:

l In the Leading Text field, type: O.H.

l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.
6. A Leader Line for dimension text is helpful when a segment's text is longer than the segment itself. Move this
dimension's Leader Line from the left to the right:

165
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

l Click on the dimension line to selected it.

l Click the small, square Move Dimension Label edit handle located over the text and drag it to the right.
l When the preview of the text is in a position that you like, release the mouse button.
7. When you are finished, Save your work.

Additional roof annotations that include CAD objects are also added in the Dormers tutorial. See "Adding Annotations" on
page 182 of the Dormers Tutorial.
The Dormers tutorial describes several ways that dormers can be added to the Chic Cottage roof. Or, you can continue
working on this plan in the Custom Ceilings tutorial.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Roof.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating automatically generated and manually edited roofs.
To open and examine a saved plan view 145
To compare plan views 146
To close a plan view 147
To tile floor plan and camera views 147
To set the roof defaults 148

166
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

To add gable walls 149

To create a nested gable 150
To create a reverse gable 151
To add a shed roof over the deck 152
To create a story and a half 153
To edit the nested gable wall 155
To add a gull wing 157
To edit roof overhangs 158
To create a curved roof plane 160
To add roof returns 161
To add frieze moldings 162
To move the display of roof planes 163
To set dimension defaults 164
To create a dimension line with additional text 164
To save a plan revision 166

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 8 - Chic Cottage Roof

Name one or more reasons why switching to the Roof Plan View is helpful for working on roofs?
l Information that is not relevant to roofs, such as room labels and general text, is not visible or in the way.
l Walls are unfilled and wall lines are lighter in color, making roof planes stand out more clearly.
l Text is placed on the "Text, Roofs" layer in this view.
What edit tool is used to set the roof directives for the side walls of a shed roof?
l The Change to Gable Wall(s) edit button lets you specify a selected wall as a Full Gable Wall, which is the setting the
two sides of a shed roof should have.
What edit tool allows you to add a new corner to a roof plane?
l The Add Break edit tool lets you add new corners to roof planes and other CAD-based object.
What edit tool allows you to join two roof planes along a valley, hip, or ridge?
l The Join Roof Planes edit tool lets you join two roof planes so that they meet along a geometrically correct valley, hip,
or ridge line.
By default, what determines the initial height of a roof over a structure?
l By default, roof height is based on the ceiling heights of the rooms below.
In what dialog are automatic roof returns specified?
l Automatic roof returns are specified on the Roof panel of the Wall Specification dialog. They are only created when
the wall is specified as a Full Gable Wall.
What layer are dimensions created on in the Roof Plan View?
l In the Roof Plan View, dimensions are placed on the "Dimensions, Roof" layer.

167
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

How do you specify a non-default number format for a dimension line?

l On the Primary Format panel of the Dimension Line Specification dialog, uncheck "Use Default Formating" and then
specify the Unit and other formatting options.

Dormers
Dormers can be created in three different ways: they can be placed using the Auto Dormer tools; generated when the rest of
the roof is built; and their individual components can be drawn manually.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for creating dormers. Concepts introduced include:
File Management 168
Productivity Tips 168
Setting the Defaults 169
Using Plan Views 169
Placing an Auto Floating Dormer 169
Placing a Structural Auto Dormer 172
Drawing a Structural Dormer 175
Drawing a Dormer Manually 175
Adding Annotations 182
Creating Revisions 186

FILE MANAGEMENT
In this In this tutorial, an alternative to the roof created in the Chic Cottage Roof tutorial will be produced. Since it is a
design option, it will be saved in its own file rather than the main working file.

To create a plan option file

1. Select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT,
and click Open
l Alternatively, you can select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent
Files List.
2. Select File> Save As . In the Save Plan File dialog:

l Make sure that the Documents\Chic Cottage folder is the save location.
l For the File name, type Chic Cottage-Dormer Option and click the Save button.

It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create the roof in Chic Cottage, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

168
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

Drawing and Editing

l The Join Roof Planes edit tool lets you join the edges of two roof planes along a line or arc to form a
geometrically correct valley, hip, or ridge.
l Like other objects, Auto Dormers can be positioned using dimensions, temporary dimensions, and the Center Object
edit tool.

Interface
l Tiling 2D and 3D views can make it easier to manually edit a roof design.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Ctrl/⌘ + R - Build Roof
l 3 - Add Break edit tool
l 2 - Join Roof Planes edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
creating dormers, there are several defaults that should be borne in mind.
When manually drawing dormers, settings in the Roof Defaults dialog as well as a number of other structural defaults is
important. See "Setting the Defaults" on page 144 of the Chic Cottage Roof Tutorial.
Before placing Auto Dormers, the Dormer Defaults should be also set. See To set the Dormer Defaults on page 169.
Dormer windows derive most of their settings from the Window Defaults, so if multiple dormers will be created, consider
modifying these as well. See To set the Window Defaults on page 170.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Roof Plan View will work well for adding dormers to the roof. See Chic Cottage Roof on page 143.

PLACING AN AUTO FLOATING DORMER

An Auto Floating Dormer is a non-structural dormer that rests on top of the roof.

To set the Dormer Defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog, then click on "Dormer" in the tree list and
click the Edit button.
2. On the ROOF panel of the Dormer Defaults dialog, under the Framing heading, check the box beside Frieze.

169
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

3. On the WALLS panel:

l Select "Shingle-6" from the Wall Type drop-down list.

l Specify the Width as 96".
l Click OK.

The windows in Auto Dormers derive most of their initial settings from the Window Defaults dialog. Since the other
windows in this plan have already been placed, adjusting some of the default settings for use in dormers will save time and
help to avoid errors.

To set the Window Defaults

1. In the Default Settings dialog, click on "Window", then click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Window Defaults dialog:
l Do not change the Window Type. This setting is dynamic and will affect existing windows.
l Specify the Width as 72" and the Height as 48".
l Specify the Floor to Top height as 93 1/2".
3. On the LITES panel, specify the Lites Vertical as 3 and click OK.
4. Click Done to close the Default Settings dialog.

To place an Auto Floating Dormer

1. On Floor 2 of Chic Cottage, Zoom in on the left side of the structure.

2. Select Build> Roof> Auto Floating Dormer .

170
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

3. Click once in the space to the left of the staircase to place a dormer at that location.

To position an Auto Floating Dormer

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the front or side wall of the dormer to select it.

2. If the window becomes selected instead, click the Select Next Object edit button.

3. With the dormer selected, click the Center Object edit button, then:

l Move the mouse pointer into the room area just in front of the dormer.
l When the room is highlighted and a dashed vertical centering axis line displays, click once.

171
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

4. With the dormer still selected, click on the Temporary Dimension line that reports how far its front wall is from the
exterior wall in front of it.
5. In the inline text field, type 2’ and press the Enter key.

To edit an Auto Floating Dormer window

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the dormer window to select it.

2. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the GENERAL panel of the Window Specification dialog:

l Select "Double Casement" from the Window Type drop-down list.

l Confirm that the Width is 72" and the Height, 48".
l Specify the Floor to Top as 56", then click OK.
l Under Component Options, make sure the Left side is set to Left Hinges and the Right side, set to Right Hinge.
3. Create a Full Camera view of the interior of the dormer to see the results.

l Notice that none of the dormer walls extend down to the floor.
4. When you are finished, close the camera view and Save your work.

PLACING A STRUCTURAL AUTO DORMER

Auto Dormers use the same defaults that Auto Floating Dormers use, but because they are structural dormers, they have
more requirements than Auto Floating Dormers.
The unused space next to and sometimes in front of a structural Auto Dormer should be specified as an Attic room and
separated from the living area by a Knee Wall.

To create a knee wall and Attic room

1. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options . In the Active Layer Display Options side
window:

172
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

l Type the word "ceiling" in the Name Filter field. As you type, the names of the layers listed in the table will
be filtered in response.
l Locate the "Ceiling Break Lines" layer and click once in the "Disp" column to add a check mark.
l Ceiling Break Lines indicate where the full height flat ceiling meets the sloped bottom of a roof plane.
2. Select Build> Wall> Straight Interior Wall , then draw a horizontal wall across the back of the structure, near
the Ceiling Break Line.
3. Once the Knee Wall is drawn, the "Ceiling Break Lines" layer can be turned off again.
4. Select the new wall and click the Open Object edit button.

l On the ROOF panel of the Wall Specification dialog, check the box beside Knee Wall and click OK.
5. With the wall still selected, click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far it is from the back horizontal
exterior wall. In the inline text field, type 8’ and press the Enter key.
6. Click the Select Objects button, then click in the narrow room defined by the Knee Wall and click the Open
Object edit button.

l On the GENERAL panel of the Room Specification dialog, select "Attic" from the Room Type drop-down list
and click OK.
7. When prompted to turn on the "Rooms, Labels" layer, click No, since room names are not typically included in roof
plans. Room labels are shown here for illustrative purposes only.

With a Knee Wall and Attic room created, a structural Auto Dormer can be added.

173
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

To place an Auto Dormer

1. Select Build> Roof> Auto Dormer , then click once in the Attic room, between the Knee Wall and exterior wall.

2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the front or side wall of the dormer to select it.

3. If the window becomes selected instead, click the Select Next Object edit button.

4. Click the Center Object edit button, then:

l Move the mouse pointer over the center of the Auto Floating Dormer.
l When a dashed vertical centering axis line displays, click once.
5. With the dormer still selected, click on the edit handle over its front wall. Notice that the Temporary Dimension line
that locates its front wall reports how far it is from the edge of the Deck roof instead of the back exterior wall.
6. Select CAD> Manual Dimension> End to End Dimension , then click and drag a dimension line from the
outside of the back exterior wall to the front of the dormer wall.
7. In the inline text field, type 2’ and press the Enter key.

8. Modify the new dormer’s window, as described above. See To edit an Auto Floating Dormer window on page 172.
l Select "Double Casement" from the Window Type drop-down list.
l Specify the window’s Width as 72" and its Height as 48".
l Specify the Floor to Top height as 93 1/2".
l Under Component Options, make sure the Left side is set to Left Hinge and the Right side, set to Right Hinge.

174
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

9. Create a Full Camera view of the interior of this dormer to see the results.

l Notice that unlike the Auto Floating Dormer, all three of this dormer’s walls bear on the floor.
10. Close the camera view and remember to Save your work.

DRAWING A STRUCTURAL DORMER

A dormer can also be produced when the roof is built by creating the necessary structural conditions inside the house. For
details about this approach, see Knowledge Base article KB-00449 at [Link]/support/[Link].

DRAWING A DORMER MANUALLY

Automatic Dormers are actually a collection of different architectural objects blocked together. These component objects
can be created individually to produce a manually-drawn dormer. Begin by creating a Perspective Full Overview and then
tiling it and the plan view side by side. See "Working in Camera Views" on page 147 of the Chic Cottage Roof Tutorial.

175
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

To create a roof hole

1. Zoom in on the right back corner of the structure in plan view, then select Build> Roof> Roof Hole and
click and drag to draw a rectangular shape over the Attic and knee wall.
l Make sure the rectangle is larger than the Auto Dormer to its left but does not extend past the edges of the roof
plane that contains it.
2. Select the roof hole and add an extra edge to its shape:

l Click the Add Break edit tool.

l Move your mouse pointer over the horizontal edge that is closest to the front of the structure and click once.
l Click and drag the new Reshape edit handle that displays at the point where you clicked and drag it towards the
front of the building.
l Make sure that you do not drag the handle past the roof plane’s horizontal ridge edge.

176
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

To draw the dormer walls

1. Select Build> Wall> Exterior Wall and draw a wall segment located inside the roof hole polyline.

l Begin at the horizontal knee wall and draw upwards into the Attic room.
l Notice that the new wall segment extends up through the roof hole.
2. Draw two more exterior walls to create a small room on the Attic side of the knee wall, inside the area of the roof
hole.
3. Assign the "Shingle-6" Wall Type to the three new exterior walls. See "To customize the second floor wall type" on
page 51 of the Multiple Floors Tutorial.
4. Click on the horizontal knee wall to select it, then:

l Click the Add Break edit button.

l Click the Sticky Mode edit button, which allows you to keep the Break tool active for multiple uses.

l Click once at each intersection where knee wall meets the two vertical dormer walls drawn in step 2, above.
5. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the wall segment located between the two wall breaks and click
the Delete button.

177
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

6. Click on the right vertical dormer wall to select it, then:

l Click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far it is from the vertical exterior wall on the right.
l In the inline text field, type 3’ and press the Enter key.
7. Click on the left vertical dormer wall to select it, then:
l Click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far it is from the right vertical side wall.
l In the inline text field, type 8’ and press the Enter key.
8. Click on the horizontal dormer wall to select it, then:
l Click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far it is from the back exterior wall.
l In the inline text field, type 2’ and press the Enter key.
l Do not be concerned if any of the walls are no longer located within the area of the roof hole: the hole will be
edited to fit the dormer perfectly in a moment.
9. Select Build> Window> Window , then:

l Move the mouse pointer over the horizontal dormer wall.

l When the Midpoint Snap Indicator displays, click once.

10. Modify the new window to match those in the automatic dormers:
l Select "Double Casement" from the Window Type drop-down list.
l Specify the window’s Width as 72" and its Height as 48".
l Specify the Floor to Top height as 93 1/2".

178
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

Roof planes are often generated automatically; but they can also be drawn manually.
The dormer roof planes need slightly different default settings than the main roof. Roof Default settings can be set in either
the Roof Defaults or Build Roof dialog. See "Setting the Defaults" on page 144 of the Chic Cottage Roof Tutorial.

To set the roof plane defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog. Select "Roof" and click the Edit button.

2. On the ROOF panel of the Roof Defaults dialog, which opens next:
l Specify both the Eave and Gable Roof Overhangs as 6".
l Specify the Raise/Lower from Ceiling Height value as 0".
3. On the GUTTER panel, click the Delete button to remove the gutter profile from the table.
4. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To draw the dormer roof planes

1. Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane , then move your mouse pointer over the left vertical dormer wall.

2. Click and drag along the length of the wall to create the roof plane’s Baseline.
l By default, the Baseline will snap to the outside of the wall’s Main Layer.
l As you draw the Baseline, a rectangular preview outline indicates the location of the eave area.

179
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

3. Move your mouse pointer to the right, so it is located between the two vertical "Shingle-6" walls to specify the
direction of the roof plane’s pitch and location of its ridge.

4. Click once to create the roof plane.

5. Select the top horizontal edge of the new roof plane and click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far it is
from the horizontal "Shingle-6" wall.

l In the inline text field, type -6" and press the Enter key.
l Notice that typing a negative number moves the selected edge to the opposite side of the wall.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create a roof plane with a Baseline over the right vertical "Shingle-6" wall.

180
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

7. Join the two roof planes to create the dormer roof ridge:

l Select the left roof plane and click on its right vertical edge to make it the Selected Edge.

l Click the Join Roof Planes edit button.

l Move your mouse pointer over the right roof plane.

l When it becomes highlighted, click once. The two roof planes meet along the geometrically correct ridge line.

To edit the dormer roof hole

1. Still in plan view, select the vertical edge on the left side of the roof hole, then:
l Notice the Resize edit handle that displays where you clicked to select the edge.
l Use the Resize handle to drag the roof hole edge until it snaps to the outside of the left dormer wall.
2. Repeat step 1 to snap the right edge of the roof hole to the right dormer wall.
3. Repeat step 1 to snap the horizontal edge of the roof hole to the horizontal dormer wall with the window.

4. Join the left roof plane with the larger roof to create a valley:

181
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

l Select the left roof plane and click on its bottom horizontal edge to make it the Selected Edge.

l Click the Join Roof Planes edit button.

l Move your mouse pointer over the angled edge on the left side of the roof hole.
l When it becomes highlighted, click once. The two roof planes meet along the geometrically correct valley line.
5. Repeat step 8 to join the right roof plane with the larger roof.

6. When you are finished, close the camera view and Save your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
With dormers added, the roof plan for this design option will require additional annotations.
The Roof Plan View is active as it was in the previous tutorial, so "Roof Rich Text Defaults" and other saved defaults set up
specifically for the "Roof Plan View" are in use.

To set the rich text defaults

1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser .

2. Right-click on "Roof Plan View" and select Edit View from the contextual menu.
3. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, click the Edit button to the
right of Rich Text to open the Rich Text Defaults dialog.
4. In the Rich Text Defaults dialog, notice that "Roof Rich Text Defaults" is stated in the dialog box’s title bar.
5. On the RICH TEXT panel:

l Click the Uppercase button.

l Notice that the character size is set at 6".

182
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

l Click the Print Size button to open the Print Size Calculator dialog. At a printed scale of 1/4" = 1’, a capital A
will be 1/8" tall when printed. Click Cancel.
6. On the APPEARANCE panel, note that Rich Text is placed on the "Text, Roofs" layer by default when this Saved
Default is active.
7. Click OK to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To add rich text annotations

1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text , then click in the view, near the right side of the roof.

2. In the Rich Text Specification dialog:

l Notice that Uppercase is active.
l In the text field, type: valley flashing.
l Click OK to close the dialog and create a Rich Text object.
3. Click on the newly created text object to select it, then click and drag its triangular Rotate edit handle to adjust its
angle to match that of the angled roof valley.

CAD shapes are sometimes used along with text to annotation features of a plan. The most important CAD default to set in
advance is the Current CAD Layer.

To set the CAD defaults

1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser . Next, right-click on "Roof Plan View", and select Edit View from the contextual menu.

2. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, notice that the Current CAD
Layer is "CAD, Roof", then click OK.

The Copy/Paste and Reflect About Object edit tools can be used to efficiently replicate annotation objects, just as they can
architectural objects like windows. See "Replicating Doors and Windows" on page 102 of the Doors and Windows Tutorial.

183
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

To add CAD annotations

1. Select CAD> Boxes> Rectangular Polyline , click and drag across and down to create a rectangular shape, and
release the mouse button.
2. Click on either of the polyline’s vertical edges to select it, then resize it using dimensions:
l Click on the dimension that reports how far the selected edge is from the opposite edge.
l In the inline text field, type 24 and press the Enter key.
3. With the edge still selected, make the polyline parallel with the nearby roof valley:

l Double-click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular edit button.

l In the Make Parallel/Perpendicular dialog, select Rotate entire polyline and click OK.
l Move the mouse pointer over the angled roof valley on the right. When a dashed alignment axis line displays
parallel to the roof valley, click once.
4. Center the polyline over the valley:

l With the polyline still selected, click the Center Object edit button.

l Move the mouse pointer over the roof valley. When a dashed centering axis line displays parallel to the roof
valley, click once.
5. Use the polyline’s resize edit handles to extend the polyline along the as much of the length of the roof valley as you
would like.

6. Make a copy of the flashing and text for the opposite roof valley:

184
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

l With the polyline still selected, hold down the Shift key and click on the text to add it to the selection set.

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button, and then click the Reflect About Object edit button.

l Move the mouse pointer over the vertical roof ridge line. When a dashed centering axis line displays parallel to the
roof ridge, click once.

To add leader line annotations

1. Select CAD> Text> Leader Line , then:

l Click and drag a horizontal line from the left wall of the back left dormer towards the right. When your mouse
pointer is between the two back dormers, release the mouse button.
l Click once more without dragging.
l When you release the mouse button, the Rich Text Specification dialog opens.
2. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog, type "flashing at wall" and click OK.

3. Click on the text to select it, then center between the two dormers:

l Click the Center Object edit button.

l Move your mouse pointer into the center of the attic room area that surrounds the back dormers.
l When the attic room area becomes highlighted and a vertical dashed centering axis line displays, click once.
4. Click on the Leader Line to select it, then make a copy of it:

185
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button.

l Click the Paste Hold Position edit button.

l A second Leader Line is created at the same location as the original, and is selected.
5. Click the edit handle on the arrow end of the selected Leader Line and drag down and to the right until it snaps to
the right wall of the dormer.

6. With the new, angled Leader Line still selected:

l Hold down the Shift key and click on the horizontal Leader Line to select the two as a group.

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button.

l Click the Reflect About Object edit button.

l Move your mouse pointer into the text.

l When the Rich Text object becomes highlighted and a vertical dashed centering axis line displays, click once.
7. Remember to Save your work.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

186
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Dormers.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating automatically generated and manually drawn dormers.
To set the Dormer Defaults 169
To set the Window Defaults 170
To place an Auto Floating Dormer 170
To position an Auto Floating Dormer 171
To edit an Auto Floating Dormer window 172
To create a knee wall and Attic room 172
To place an Auto Dormer 174
To create a roof hole 176
To draw the dormer walls 177
To set the roof plane defaults 179
To draw the dormer roof planes 179
To edit the dormer roof hole 181
To set the rich text defaults 182
To add rich text annotations 183
To set the CAD defaults 183
To add CAD annotations 184
To add leader line annotations 185
To save a plan revision 187

Assessment Questions

187
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Design Tutorials

Interior Design Tutorials Chapter 3

The Interior Design Tutorials describe best practices for adding elements of interior design to a drawing in Chief Architect:
In this tutorial you will learn about:

TOPICS
Custom Ceilings 189
Finish Materials 204
Room Moldings 226
Interior Furnishings 238

188
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

Custom Ceilings
By default, Chief Architect automatically produces a flat ceiling in most types of rooms. There are various options for
modifying this automatic ceiling, however.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for customizing ceilings. Concepts introduced include:
File Management 189
Productivity Tips 189
Setting the Defaults 190
Using Plan Views 191
Creating a Lowered Ceiling 192
Creating a Cathedral Ceiling 195
Drawing a Tray or Coffered Ceiling 197
Adding Annotations 201
Creating Revisions 202

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Chic Cottage Roof tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Roof and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File Management" on page 4 of the Exterior
Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create different types of custom ceilings, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l The Soffit tool can be used to model a wide variety of straight-sided objects and is particularly useful for objects
that attach to walls.
l The Copy/Paste and Reflect About Object edit tools can be used to make reflected copies of Soffits and
other objects.

189
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

Content
l Create template plans that have your custom ceiling finish definitions set as defaults, and ready for use when you
begin a new plan.

Interface
l Back Clipped Cross Section views are useful for viewing details of a model’s internal structure.
l Tiling views can help confirm that changes made in 2D have the desired effect in 3D.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
creating ceilings, there are several defaults that should be borne in mind.
Before creating custom ceilings, it’s a good idea to make sure that all aspects of the structure that influence ceiling height
are set. See "Setting the Defaults" on page 13 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial and "Setting the Defaults" on page 50 of the
Multiple Floors Tutorial.
It’s also a good idea to set the defaults for ceiling finishes.

To set the plan-wide default ceiling finish

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog. Click the arrow to the left of "Floors and
Rooms" to expand the category, select "Floor/Ceiling Platform", then click the Edit button.
2. In the Floor/Ceiling Platform dialog, click the Ceiling Finish Edit button.
3. In the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog, note that the ceiling finish is composed of two layers: drywall and a paint
color.
4. Click OK to close both dialogs and return to the Default Settings dialog.
5. Ceiling finish definitions can also be customized for room types.

To set the default ceiling finish for room types

1. In the Default Settings dialog, under the "Floors and Rooms" category, select "Room Types" and click the Edit
button.
2. In the Room Types dialog, notice:
l A variety of Room Types have their own defaults.
l A selected Room Type can be edited, copied, renamed, and deleted.
3. Select "Garage" from the list and click the Edit button.

190
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

4. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Garage Room Defaults dialog, click the Ceiling Finish Edit button.
5. In the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog:
l Make sure that the Thickness of Layer 1 is 5/8".
l Click on Layer 1’s Name, Pattern, or Texture.
6. On the LIBRARY MATERIAL panel of the Select Material dialog:
l The content is filtered by Type so that it only lists Materials.

l The location of the currently selected material is shown in the Folders panel.
l Further down the tree list in the Wallboard Folder, select the "Drywall Fire Rated" material and click OK
7. Returning to the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog and with Layer 1 still selected, add a layer of insulation above it:

l Click the Insert Above button.

l Specify the new layer’s Thickness as 1 1/2".
l Click on the new layer’s Name, Pattern, or Texture.
l Specify the new layer’s material as "Insulation Rigid".
8. Click OK three times to return to the Default Settings dialog, then click Done.

A customized ceiling finish can also be used to create a lowered ceiling for an entire floor. See To set ceiling defaults for a
floor level on page 193.
Soffits are a useful tool for creating different types of tray and coffered ceilings. See To set the Soffit Defaults on page 197.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
In the Chic Cottage Roof and Dormers tutorials, the Roof Plan View is active, the Roofs Layer Set is active, and annotations
are created using saved "Roof Rich Text Defaults" settings. These settings are not helpful for customizing ceilings, however,
so you can save time by opening a Saved Plan View better suited for the task at hand.
In the Chic Cottage Roof tutorial, the Roof Plan View and Working Plan View were open at the same time and the two
views’ appearance and settings were compared. Then, the Working Plan View was closed and work was done in the Roof
Plan View. See "Using Plan Views" on page 145 of the Chic Cottage Roof Tutorial.
A more efficient way to switch between Saved Plan Views is using the Saved Plan View Control drop-down in the
toolbars.

191
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

To switch to a different saved plan view

1. Click the Saved Plan View Control drop-down, which is located in the top toolbar by default.

2. Select "Working Plan View" from the drop-down list.

3. The current view window remains open, and now uses the Working Plan View.

Ceilings can now be customized and annotated without affecting the appearance of the roof plan.

CREATING A LOWERED CEILING

You can define a lowered or dropped ceiling without affecting the top heights of the walls by modifying the Ceiling Finish
Definition.
In the Floor 0 Defaults dialog, space in the ceiling can be allotted for soundproofing drywall hat channels for the entire
basement level.

To create a custom hat channel framing type

1. Select Edit>Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog. Click the arrow the left of "Framing" to
expand the category, select "Framing Types", and click the Edit button.
2. In the Framing Types dialog, select "U Channel" and click the Copy button.
3. In the New Default dialog, type a short, descriptive name, then click OK. Here, "Hat Channel" is used.
4. In the Framing Type - Hat Channel dialog, confirm that the Composition is Steel and the Shape, Steel U.
5. Click OK to close all dialogs.

To create a custom hat channel material

1. Select 3D> Materials> Plan Materials , and in the Plan Materials dialog, click the New button.

2. On the PATTERN panel of the Define Material dialog, click the Material Color box and select a grey color to
represent this material in 3D views.
3. On the MATERIALS LIST panel:

l Type a short, descriptive Material Name such as "Hat Channel".

l Specify the Materials List Calculation type as "None".
l Click OK.

192
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

4. In the Plan Materials dialog:

l Select the new "Hat Channel" material in the list on the left.
l Click the Add to Library button.
l Click OK to close the dialog and add the new material to the User Catalog in the library for use in this and
other plans.

To set ceiling defaults for a floor level

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog.

l Click the arrow to the left of "Floors and Rooms" to expand the category.
l Expand the "Floor Levels" subcategory.
l Select "Floor 0" and click the Edit button.
2. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Floor 0 Defaults dialog, click the Ceiling Finish Edit button.
3. In the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog:
l Click in the Thickness field for Layer 1 to make it the selected layer.
l Click the Insert Above button to add a layer above it.
l With the new layer selected, set its Thickness to be 1", then click on its Name, Pattern, or Texture in the table.
4. In the Select Material dialog, select your new "Hat Channel" material, created above. It can be selected on either the
LIBRARY MATERIALS or PLAN MATERIALS panel.
l On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel, it will be found in the User Catalog.
l On the PLAN MATERIALS panel, all materials in the current plan are listed alphabetically.
l Click OK.

193
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

5. Returning to the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog, the new Hat Channel material will be selected:

l Under the "Structure" heading, check the box beside Framing.

l Specify the Structure Type as "Hat Channel" to distinguish the hat channels from regular furring when framing is
generated later on.
l Specify the Spacing as 24" On Center.
l Specify the new Layer 1’s Width as 1".
6. Click OK and then Done to close all dialogs.

See "To generate floor and ceiling framing" on page 363 of the Floor Framing Tutorial.
The differences in ceiling finishes can be seen in a Backclipped Cross Section view.

To view ceiling finishes in 3D

1. If you have not already, go Down One Floor to Floor 1.

2. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Back Clipped Cross Section , then:

194
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

l Click and drag vertically to create a camera inside the Foyer room.
l Limit the length of the camera’s line of sight to one or two plan feet and make sure that you draw the camera
either straight up or straight down on-screen.
3. Zoom in on the left side of the Garage ceiling. Notice:

l The Closet room on the left has a single layer of drywall on the ceiling.
l The Garage on the right has two ceiling layers: drywall and insulation.

The ceiling finish can also be removed from an individual room.

To remove a ceiling finish

1. Go Down One Floor to Floor 0.

2. Click the Select Objects button, then click in an empty space in the room below the Porch to select it.

3. Click the Open Object edit button to open the Room Specification dialog.

4. On the STRUCTURE panel, click the Ceiling Finish Edit button.

5. In the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog, select each of the layers and click the Delete button.
6. Click OK to close both dialogs.
7. When you are finished, be sure to Save your work.

CREATING A CATHEDRAL CEILING

A cathedral ceiling has the same pitch as the roof and can be easily created using the underside of the roof above the room.

To create a cathedral ceiling

1. Go to Floor 1, and create a Back Clipped Cross Section inside the Deck. Be sure to draw the camera arrow
horizontally, either left to right or right to left.
2. Select Window> Tile Vertically to tile the two views side by side and Zoom in on the Deck room.

195
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

3. Return to the plan view window, click the Select Objects button, and select the Deck room.

4. Click the Open Object edit button. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Room Specification dialog, uncheck Flat
Ceiling Over This Room and click OK.

5. Notice that the Deck’s ceiling is now the underside of its shed roof.

By default, cathedral ceilings use the ceiling material set in the Room Specification dialog. If you require a different
material on a given roof plane, uncheck Use Room Ceiling Finish in the Roof Plane Specification dialog.

196
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

DRAWING A TRAY OR COFFERED CEILING

A tray ceiling is an area within a ceiling that is raised and has either vertical or sloping sides, and you can easily create one
using the Tray Ceiling Polyline tool or the Make Tray Ceiling in Room edit tool.
One of the requirements of Tray Ceiling Polylines is that they be located in a room with an uninterrupted, flat ceiling. The
basement of Chic Cottage does have a flat ceiling; however, it is interrupted by a hole in the ceiling to accommodate the
stairs. To create a tray ceiling here, Soffits will be placed around the perimeter of the room.

To set the Soffit Defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings , click the arrow next to "Cabinets" to expand the category, select "Soffit" in the
list, and click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Soffit Defaults dialog:

l Specify the Width as 60", the Height as 12", and the Depth as 36".
l Specify the Floor to Top as 106 5/8", which is the Finished Ceiling Height of the basement room.
l Make sure that Use Floor Finish is checked, since the Finished Ceiling Height is measured from floor finish as
opposed to the slab.
3. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

197
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

To create a tray ceiling using Soffits

1. Go to Floor 0, then select Build> Cabinet> Soffit .

2. Click along each of the exterior walls of the basement room to place a soffit at that location.

l Soffits, like other cabinet objects, will snap to the side of a nearby wall.
l Soffits should not extend through intersecting walls, so place two soffits along the wall separating the basement
from the Porch area: one on each side of the staircase wall.
3. Select one of the soffits and use its edit handles to extend it across the length of the room.
4. Repeat this step with each of the soffits until they completely encircle the ceiling.

5. Create a Camera view in the basement room to see the results.

198
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

A coffered ceiling can be created by simply replicating additional Soffits across the middle of the room.

To create a coffered ceiling using Soffits

1. Select Window> Swap Views to return to plan view.

2. Click the Select Objects button, then select the soffit located against the vertical wall separating the basement
from the Garage area.
3. Click the Resize edit handle located on the soffit’s top edge and extend it upward until it meets the horizontal soffit
against the back wall of the basement.

199
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

4. Select the soffit located against the vertical wall on the left side of them basement, then:

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button.

l Click the soffit’s Move edit handle located at its center and drag to the right.
l When the object preview outline snaps to the wall next to the staircase, click once.
5. Select the soffit located against the horizontal wall separating the basement from the Garage area, then

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button

l Click the Reflect About Object edit button.

l Move the mouse pointer over top edge of the vertical soffit immediately to its left.
l When a vertical reflection axis displays, click once.
l Use the Resize handle on the left side of the new soffit to snap it to the side of the staircase.
6. Select the newly created soffit and repeat step 6 to create one more copy on the left side of the basement, between
the two horizontal soffits.
l You can reflect the soffit about either the staircase or the soffit to its left.
l In either case, both the left and right sides will need to be moved using the Resize edit handles.

200
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

7. The results can be seen in a Perspective Floor Overview view.

8. When you are finished, close the camera view and Save your work.

There are other ways to produce tray and coffered ceilings, as well. Visit [Link]/support/[Link] for
more information.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
Some information about the customized ceilings in this plan should have annotations.
The Working Plan View is active, so "Plan Rich Text Defaults are in use as they were in previous tutorials. See "To set the
rich text defaults" on page 26 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.

To add rich text ceiling annotations

1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text , then click near the center of the horizontal soffit near the back wall of the
basement.

201
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

2. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog, type: 36" x 12" soffits.
3. On the APPEARANCE panel, note that the text is placed on the "Text" layer, then click OK.
4. Go Up One Floor to Floor 1, and in the back Deck room, create a Rich Text object that says: 2:12 cathedral
ceiling.
5. Go Up One Floor to Floor 2 and:

l Notice that the roof annotations created in the Chic Cottage Roof tutorial do not display.

l Click the Saved Plan View Control drop-down and select "Roof Plan View" from the drop-down list.

l Notice the changes that occur in the view, then switch back to the "Working Plan View".
6. Turn on the display of the "Ceiling Break Lines" layer using the Active Layer Display Options side window. See To
create a knee wall and Attic room on page 172.
7. Along the dashed horizontal Ceiling Break Lines, create two Rich Text objects that say: 8’ 0" ceiling break from
these lines.

8. When you are finished, Save your work.

You can continue working on this plan in the Finish Materials tutorial.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revsions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.

202
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Ceilings.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating various types of custom ceilings, including lowered ceilings and custom
ceiling finishes, tray ceilings, and coffered ceilings. It also discusses the important default settings associated with ceilings.
To set the plan-wide default ceiling finish 190
To set the default ceiling finish for room types 190
To switch to a different saved plan view 192
To create a custom hat channel framing type 192
To create a custom hat channel material 192
To set ceiling defaults for a floor level 193
To view ceiling finishes in 3D 194
To remove a ceiling finish 195
To create a cathedral ceiling 195
To set the Soffit Defaults 197
To create a tray ceiling using Soffits 198
To create a coffered ceiling using Soffits 199
To add rich text ceiling annotations 201
To save a plan revision 202

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 10 - Custom Ceilings

In what dialog should a lowered ceiling be defined?
l A lowered ceiling can be specified in the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog.
How does a lowered ceiling affect the structure of a room?
l You can define a lowered or dropped ceiling without affecting the top heights of the walls by modifying the Ceiling
Finish Definition.
What supplies the surface of a cathedral ceiling?
l A cathedral ceiling is created using the underside of the roof above the room.
Name two tools that can be used to create a tray or coffered ceiling.
l A standard tray or coffered ceiling can be easily created using the Tray Ceiling Polyline tool in many cases.
l In situations where this tool cannot be used, Soffits can be placed around the perimeter of a room.
What two edit tools can be used to create identical objects on either side of a room?
l The Copy/Paste and Reflect About Object edit tools can be used to create identical objects on either side of a room.

203
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

Finish Materials
The finish materials applied to walls and floors are an important aspect of a plan’s interior.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for applying finish materials to walls and floors. Concepts introduced
include:
File Management 204
Productivity Tips 204
Setting the Defaults 205
Using Plan Views 205
Organizing Library Materials 205
Applying Wall Finish Materials 206
Wall Coverings 211
Using Wall Material Regions 213
Specifying Flooring Materials 217
Using Floor Material Regions 221
Creating Schedules 223
Adding Annotations 224
Creating Revisions 225

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Custom Ceilings tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Ceilings and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File Management" on page 4 of the Exterior
Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create finish materials to walls and floors, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l The Material Painter is a powerful and flexible way to assign materials to objects in 3D views.

204
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

Content
l A selection of name brand paint, flooring, and other materials are available for download in the "Materials and
Surfaces" category of the 3D Library. Select Library> Get Additional Content Online to launch your default
web browser to that page.
l Create template plans with your preferred wall and floor finish materials set as defaults when you begin a new plan.
l Group paint colors, floor finishes, and other materials that you often use together in custom library folders in the User
Catalog.

Interface
l Perspective Floor Overviews are a useful way to view the relationships between room spaces.

l The Wall Elevation tool lets you create an elevation of a wall that is confined to a single room in the plan.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Tab - Select Next Object
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l 3 - Break edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
specifying finish materials, there are several defaults that can be useful.
Floor finish materials can be specified for different room types in the Floor/Ceiling Platform and Room Type Defaults
dialogs. See Specifying Flooring Materials on page 217.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Working Plan View, which was used in the Custom Ceilings tutorial and should be active now, will work well for
customizing finish materials. See "To switch to a different saved plan view" on page 192 of the Custom Ceilings Tutorial.

ORGANIZING LIBRARY MATERIALS

The Library Browser provides access to thousands of finish materials to add style to your designs. Materials catalogs are
organized by material type as well as Manufacturer.
With so many options available, it can help to organize materials to meet your creative needs so that finding the right look
for each project is a streamlined process.

205
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

To create custom library folders

1. The Library Browser side window is docked to the right side of the program window.
l Click on its tab to bring it to the front of the other side windows docked at that location.

l If you do not see the Library Browser, select View>Library Browser .

2. The Library Browser is composed of multiple panels. The Folders panel contains a browsable tree list of the main
categories, the catalogs they contain, and all folders and subfolders.
l Click the arrow next to the User Catalog line item in the Folders panel to expand the category and view its
contents.
l The Hat Channel material created in the Custom Ceilings tutorial will be listed here, along with any other
content you may have added.
3. Right-click on the User Catalog line item and select New> Folder from the contextual menu.
4. Type a short, descriptive name for this new folder. Here, "Beach Palette" is used.
5. You can create additional palette folders as well if you like.

With a custom folder created, you can now start adding materials to it.

To copy items to a custom folder

1. Still in the Folders panel, navigate to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials. This catalog contains a wide variety
of materials, from structural and landscaping to finishes.
2. Next, browse to Colors> Generic Colors.
3. Click on the Blue folder and notice that the Filter Results panel reports that 20 items are found in this folder.
4. There are two way to view the Filter Results. Toggle buttons at the bottom of the Library Browser let you switch
between them:

l List Mode presents items in a vertical list. Names are often easier to read but fewer item thumbnails can be
seen at once.

l Tile Mode presents items in a grid. More item thumbnails can be seen, but names may be truncated.

5. Right-click on "Color - Dew" and select Copy to User Catalog from the contextual menu. A copy of the material is
created in the User Catalog and is visible and selected in the Folders panel.
6. Click and drag this material over the Beach Palette folder. When the folder becomes highlighted, release the mouse
button to move the material into the folder.
7. Repeat steps 3-6 to add a variety of colors to the Beach Palette folder. These are materials are used here:
l From the Blue folder: "Color - Dew" and "Color - Fresh"
l From the Green folder: "Color - Robin's Egg"
l From the Yellow folder: "Color - Butter" and "Color - Mustard"

APPLYING WALL FINISH MATERIALS

A Floor Overview is a good place to customize wall materials because the relationships between walls can be easily seen,
and the Material Painter tool can be used to apply new materials to surfaces in the view. It has five Modes that allow you to

206
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

control the scope of each paint operation.

To specify the wall finish for all rooms

1. Go to Floor 1, then select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Floor Overview .

2. Use the Mouse-Orbit Camera tool to orbit the camera upward so that the interior rooms can be seen. See "To
create a camera view" on page 18 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.

3. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter Plan Mode .

4. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter .

5. On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog:

l The content is filtered by Type so that it only lists Materials.

l To further filter the results, type "beach palette" in the Search field, then move your mouse pointer over the "Beach
Palette" Folder line item in the Filters drop-down list.

l The Folders panel expands to show the contents of the User Catalog.
l Open the Beach Palette folder, select the material named "Color - Butter", then click OK.
6. Move your mouse pointer into the camera view and notice that it now displays a paint roller icon. Click once on
any interior wall surface and notice that nearly all walls become painted.

207
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

7. While the Perspective Floor Overview is active, go Up One Floor to Floor 2.

8. Select 3D> Material> Adjust Material Definition , then click on an interior wall surface and note that the
material on that surface is "Color - Butter". Click Cancel.
9. Go Down to Floor 0 and repeat step 8 to confirm that the interior wall surfaces have been painted "Color -
Butter" there, as well. When you are finished, return to Floor 1.

To use the Material Eyedropper

1. Zoom in on the Garage and Orbit around so the wall between it and the Foyer can be seen.

l Notice that two of the walls were not painted.

l This is because these two walls have a fire rated Drywall material instead of standard Drywall used by the other
walls.
2. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Eyedropper , then:

208
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

l Notice that your mouse pointer now displays an eyedropper icon.

l Click on a wall surface that has "Color - Butter" applied to it and notice that the mouse pointer icon changes to an
eyedropper .

3. Click once on either fire wall. Because the Material Painter Plan Mode is still active, both walls will be
painted.

With the primary wall color for the plan applied, you can now apply custom colors to specific rooms. This can be done in
the Room Specification dialog or using the Material Painter.

To specify the wall finish for a room

1. Zoom out and Orbit the camera until all interior rooms can be seen again.

2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the floor of the Dining room to select it.

3. Click the Open Object edit button to open the Room Specification dialog. On the MATERIALS panel:

l Click on the "Walls" component in the tree list to select it and note that "Color - Butter" is currently specified as its
material.
l Click the Select Material button to open the Select Material dialog and select "Color - Fresh" from the Beach
Palette folder in the User Catalog.
l Click OK to close the Room Specification dialog and apply your change.
4. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter Room Mode .

5. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter and apply the "Color - Dew" material to the Bedroom walls.

209
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

An accent wall can be created by specifying a different material for one wall. Just as with rooms, this can be done in the
Wall Specification dialog or using the Material Painter.

To specify a custom finish for a single wall

1. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter Object Mode .

2. Instead of activating the Material Painter tool using the menu or toolbar button, select a material directly from the
Library Browser:

l If it is not already open, select View>Library Browser .

l In the Folders panel, browse to User Catalog> Beach Palette and select "Color - Mustard".
3. When you move the pointer into the camera view, it displays the paint roller icon.

4. Click on the wall separating the Dining room from the Bedroom to paint it.

In order to edit a wall in 3D, it first must be selected.

210
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

To select a wall in 3D
1. Click the Select Objects button, then click in the Living room, on the exterior wall separating the Living room
from the Deck.
2. Notice that the Living room becomes selected by default.
3. Click the Select Next Object edit button or press the Tab key to select the wall instead.

4. Click the Open Object edit button to open the Wall Specification dialog.

5. On the MATERIALS panel:

l Because this wall is a Pony Wall, it has four wall surface components: two exterior and two interior.
l Notice that the Interior Wall Surface components are described as "No Change".
l This is because the wall spans three rooms, and one has a different wall finish material than the others.
l Click Cancel.
6. Remember to Save your work.

WALL COVERINGS
Wall coverings can be used in addition to a wall’s surface material to create accents like wallpaper borders or wainscoting.

211
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

To apply a wall covering

1. Go Down One Floor to Floor 0.

2. Select the basement room and click the Open Object edit button to open the Room Specification dialog.

3. On the WALL COVERING panel:

l Click the Add New button to open the Select Material dialog.
l Search for "beadboard" and select the "Beadboard" Folder line item in the Filters drop-down list, located at
Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials> Siding and Paneling.
l Select the "White Beadboard" material and click OK.
l Change the Height to 48" and the Floor to Bottom value to 0".
l Click OK.

l Here, the "Cabinets, Soffits" layer is turned off so the white beadboard wall covering is not hidden behind coffered
ceiling in the camera view.
4. When you are finished, close the camera view and Save your work.

212
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

Additional wall covering materials are available for download.

USING WALL MATERIAL REGIONS

Unlike a Wall Covering, Wall Material Regions do more than just apply a material to the surface of a wall: they actually
replace the wall surface layer with a different material. They also have depth and can extend out past the surface of the wall.

To set the Wall Material Region defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings , and in the Default Settings dialog:

l Click the arrow next to "Material Region" to expand the category.

l Select "Wall Material Region" and click the Edit button.
l On the STRUCTURE panel of the Wall Material Region Defaults dialog:
l Notice that Cut Finish Layers of Parent Object is checked.
l This means that by default, a wall material region will cut into and replace the finish layers of the wall it is placed
onto.
l Click the Edit button.
2. In the Material Layers Definition dialog, notice that the default region is composed of layers of backerboard, thinset
mortar, and tile, then click OK.

3. Click OK and then Done to close the remaining dialogs.

This tile surround will be positioned 18" above the floor to accommodate a bathtub that will be placed later on. See "To
place bathroom fixtures" on page 307 of the Appliances and Fixtures Tutorial.

To create a Wall Elevation view

1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Wall Elevation .

2. Click and drag a camera arrow located inside the Bath room, pointed straight at the vertical wall on the left side of
the room.
3. The resulting camera view shows only the portion of the left vertical wall that defines the Bath. Any objects located
between the camera and the wall in the current room will display in a Wall Elevation, as well.

To resize a Wall Material Region with accuracy, make sure that Temporary Dimensions are toggled on. Select View>
Temporary Dimensions and confirm that there is a check mark in lower right corner of the tool icon.

213
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

To create a tile shower surround

1. Select Build Wall> Wall Material Region , then click once on the wall surface. A Wall Material Region that
covers the entire wall is created and is initially selected.
2. Move the bottom edge of the region upward:

l Click on the edit handle at the center of the bottom edge of the region to select it.
l Move the mouse pointer over the temporary dimension that reports the region’s height.
l When the mouse pointer changes to a pointing hand icon, click on the dimension line.
l Click in the inline text field, to the right of the existing value, then type -18 after that value and press the Enter
key.
l The bottom edge moves upward 18", reducing the total height of the Region by that amount.
3. Click on the top edge of the Region to select it, then repeat step 3 to lower the top edge by 12".

4. Select File> Close View to close the current Wall Elevation view.
5. Create a new Wall Elevation view in the Bath room, this time pointed at the bottom horizontal wall

214
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

6. Click to create a Wall Material Region that covers this wall as described above.

l Notice that the top and bottom edges of this Region are composed of two segments separated by diamond-shaped
Reshape edit handles.
l This is because the Bath is defined by two separate walls along this side rather than a single wall.
7. With the Region selected, click the Simplify Polyline edit button. The top and bottom edges become single
segments instead of two.
8. Select the left vertical edge of the Region and:

l Click on the dimension that reports how far it is from the right edge.
l Type 32" and press the Enter key.

215
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

9. Raise the bottom edge of the polyline 18" above the floor and lower the top edge 12" below the ceiling, as described
above.
10. Select File> Close View to close the current Wall Elevation view.

To complete the tile shower surround, make a copy of the Wall Material Region on the opposite wall.

To copy a Wall Material Region

1. Zoom in on the lower left corner of the Bath room and notice that a rectangular shape extends out past the
horizontal wall’s drywall. This is the second Wall Material Region created above.
2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the Wall Material Region to select it.

l To confirm that a Material Region is the selected object, look at the left side of the Status Bar at the bottom of
the program window.

l If the Wall is selected instead, click the Select Next Object edit button.

3. Zoom out so the top horizontal wall of the Bath can be seen.
4. With the Wall Material Region still selected, click the Copy/Paste edit button.

216
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

5. Click the Reflect About Object edit button, then:

l Move the mouse pointer up into the Bath room.

l When the room becomes highlighted and a horizontal dashed reflection axis line displays, click once.
l A copy of the Wall Material Region is created on the opposite wall and is selected.
6. You can see the results in a Full Camera view inside the Bath.

7. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

Custom Backsplashes are a type of Wall Material Region that does not cut into the existing wall surface by default. See "To
add a Custom Backsplash" on page 306 of the Appliances and Fixtures Tutorial.

SPECIFYING FLOORING MATERIALS

Just like with walls, flooring materials can be set in a Perspective Floor Overview.
Flooring materials are an example of a Dynamic Default: if you change a setting in the appropriate defaults dialog, rooms in
your plan that are set to use that default will update automatically. If a room has been customized and is no longer set to use
the default flooring, that room will not be affected.

217
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

To set flooring defaults

1. On Floor 1, select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Floor Overview .

2. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog:

l Click the arrow beside "Floors and Rooms" to expand the category.
l Select "Floor/Ceiling Platform", and click the Edit button.
3. In the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog, click the Floor Finish Edit button to open the Floor Finish Definition
dialog.

4. With Layer 1 selected, click in the Name, Pattern, or Texture cell in its row to open the Select Material dialog.
5. On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog:
l The content is filtered by Type so that it only lists Materials and is additionally filtered to show the selected
material's "Maple" Folder located at Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials> Flooring> Wood Flooring>
3-4-5" Plank.
l In the Folders panel, click the arrow to the left of the "Maple" folder to close it and instead expand the "Red
Oak" folder.
l Select the "Red Oak 3-4-5" Plank - Natural" material and click OK.
6. Click OK once more to return to the Default Settings dialog and notice that in the 3D view behind the dialog, all
rooms aside from the Bath, Garage, and Porch update to display the new default flooring material.

218
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

7. Click Done to close the Default Settings dialog and Orbit as needed to see all of the rooms.

8. Go Down One Floor to Floor 0 and notice that the room on this floor is also using the new default flooring
material.

The flooring material specified in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog is the default material for all floors; however,
each floor can have a different default flooring material if you choose.

To set flooring defaults by floor

1. Go Up to Floor 2 and select Edit> Default Settings .

l Click the arrow beside "Floors and Rooms" to expand the category.
l Click the arrow beside "Floor Levels" to expand this subcategory.
l Select "Floor 2" and click the Edit button.
2. On the STRUCTURE panel of the 2nd Floor Defaults dialog:

l Notice that the Default check box to the right of the Floor Finish Edit button is checked, which means that
Floor 2 is currently using the default floor finish set in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults.
l Click the Floor Finish Edit button to open the Floor Finish Definition dialog.
3. Click in the Thickness field for Layer 1 to select it, then click the Select Material button.
4. On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog:
l The content is filtered by Type so that it only lists Materials and is additionally filtered to show the selected
material's "Red Oak" Folder .

l Click on the "Red Oak" Folder filter so that it is no longer used and type "carpet" in the Search field.

l Select the "Carpet" Folder line item from the drop-down list

219
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

l The Folders panel now expands to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials> Flooring> Carpet.
l Select a carpet material such as "Carpet-01 Dover" and click OK.
5. In the 2nd Floor Defaults dialog, notice that the Floor Finish Default check box is now unchecked. This mean that
this setting is no longer tied to the Floor Finish setting in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog.
6. Click OK and then Done to close all dialogs and notice that the floor finish material on Floor 2 is now the carpet that
you selected.

Many Room Types are set to use the default floor finish for the Current Floor. Some Room Types like Kitchen, Bath,
Garage, and Porch are typically set up with their own unique default materials, however.

To set flooring defaults by Room Type

1. Go Down One Floor to Floor 1 again and Orbit as needed so that the floor of the Bath can be seen.

2. Select Edit> Default Settings , and in the Default Settings dialog:

l Click the arrow beside "Floors and Rooms" to expand the category.
l Select "Room Types" and click the Edit button.
3. In the Room Types dialog, scroll down the list, select "Bath", and click the Edit button.
4. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Bath Room Type Defaults dialog:
l Notice that the Default check box to the right of the Floor Finish Edit button is unchecked.
l This means that this room type is not using the default material set in the 1st Floor Defaults dialog, and explains
why the Bath room’s floor finish did not change when the "Red Oak 3-4-5" Plank - Natural" material set as the
default, above.
l Click the Floor Finish Edit button to see the composition of the floor finish: Ivory Tile, Thinset Mortar, and
Backerboard.
l You can click the Floor Finish Edit button and specify a different default surface material for Bath rooms, if you
wish.
5. Click OK and then Done to close all dialogs.

In addition, flooring materials can be specified for each room individually. The best way to do this is to edit a room's
Floor Finish Definition to ensure that the finish layer has the correct underlayment.
The Kitchen, for example, uses the default wood planking underlaid by foam underlayment. We can use the Material Painter
to replace the wood planking with tile, but the result would be tile installed over foam. An easy way to apply the floor finish
layers to the Kitchen would be appropriate for tile is using the Object Painter tools.

To apply properties from one object to another

1. In the Perspective Floor Overview, Orbit around until both the Kitchen and Bath floor can be seen.

2. Select Tools> Object Painter> Object Eyedropper .

3. Click on the floor surface of the Bath room, then click the Select Properties to Paint edit button.

220
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

4. In the Select Properties to Load dialog:

l Click the Clear All button so no Properties in the list are selected.
l Check the box beside Floor Finish.
l Click OK.
5. Move the mouse pointer over the Kitchen floor surface and click once.
6. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the floor surface in the Kitchen to select the room.

7. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the STRUCTURE panel of the Room Specification dialog:

l Click the Define button for Floor Finish.

l Confirm that the Kitchen now has a tile surface material along with thinset and backerboard instead of foam
underlayment, then click OK.
8. You can now use the Material Painter in Object Mode to replace the surface material if you wish.

9. Remember to Save your work.

USING FLOOR MATERIAL REGIONS

Similar to Wall Material Regions, Floor Material Regions replace a portion of a room’s floor surface layer with a different
material. They also have depth and can extend up past the surface of the floor if need be. Like Wall Material Regions, they
also have a defaults dialog where you can set properties in advance.

To add a Floor Material Region

1. In the Perspective Floor Overview, Orbit around until the front door in the Foyer room can be seen, then Zoom
in.

2. Select Window> Tile Vertically to tile the Overview and plan view side by side.

3. Click in the plan view window to make it active and Zoom in on the Foyer room.

221
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

4. Select Build> Floor> Floor Material Region , then click and drag a rectangle in the middle of the Foyer room.
Do not worry about exact size or position right now.

5. Click on the Floor Material Region to select it, then click the Open Object edit button.

6. In the Material Region Specification dialog:

l Notice that Cut Finish Layers of Parent Object is checked.
l Click the Edit button.
7. In the Material Layers Definition dialog:

l Click the Insert Below button to add a copy of the selected layer below the original.
l With the new layer selected, click the Move Down button to below the other layers, making it Layer 3.
l With Layer 3 selected, click in the Name, Pattern, or Texture cell in its row to open the Select Material dialog.
8. On the PLAN MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog, select the "Backerboard 1/4"" material, then click OK.
9. Notice that the Total Thickness, reported to the right of the layer table, is 3/4" and recall that the thickness of the
rooms’ Floor Finish is 7/8".
10. Increase the Thickness of the "Thinset Mortar" layer to 3/8", then click OK.

222
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

To resize and position a Floor Material Region

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the Floor Material Region to select it.

2. Click and drag the edit handle that displays in the middle of its bottom edge to extend its bottom edge until it snaps
to the front door wall’s interior surface.
3. Use Temporary Dimensions to resize it to 72" wide and 48" deep.
4. Use the Center Object edit tool to center the Floor Material Region in front of the entry door.

5. You can also use the Material Painter to experiment with different tile materials. Here, "Natural Slate Tiles"
from Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials> Tile> Stone> Slate is applied using Plan Mode .

6. Remember to Save your work.

CREATING SCHEDULES
The finish materials for interior rooms can be listed in a Room Finish Schedule.

To set room finish schedule defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings and in the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow beside "Schedules, select
"Room Finish Schedule" from the list, and click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Room Finish Schedule Defaults dialog, under Categories to Include:
l Click the arrow to the left of Rooms to expand the category.
l Uncheck Deck and Porch.
l Click OK and Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To prevent your plan views from becoming unnecessarily cluttered, schedules should be created in CAD Detail windows.

223
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

To create a finish material schedule

1. Open the "Schedules Detail" CAD Detail. There are two ways to do this:

l Select CAD> CAD Detail Management . In the CAD Detail Management dialog, select the "Schedules
Detail" and click the Open button.

l Select View> Project Browser , expand the CAD Details folder, right-click on the "Schedules Detail" and
select Open View from the contextual menu.
2. Select Tools> Schedules> Room Finish Schedule , then click once in an empty space near the Door and
Window Schedules.
3. Click on the new schedule to select it, then click the Open Object edit button.

4. On the GENERAL panel of the Room Finish Schedule Specification dialog, change the Main Title to "Room Finish
Materials".
5. On the COLUMNS/ROWS panel:
l In the list of Columns to Include, click on the top line item, scroll down to the bottom of the list, press the
Shift key on the keyboard, then click on the last line item to select all line items.
l Release the Shift key and press the Ctrl/⌘ key, then click on "Room Name" to remove it from the selection
set.
l With the Ctrl/⌘ key still pressed, remove "Wall Material" and "Floor Finish", as well.
l Click the Remove button. Only "Room Name", Wall Material", and "Floor Finish" should be listed under
Columns to Include.
l Click OK.

6. Increase the width of the Wall Material column so the Foyer’s and Living room's materials are listed on separate
lines. See "To edit schedule columns" on page 60 of the Multiple Floors Tutorial.
7. When you are finished, Save your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
Some information about the material finishes in this plan should have annotations.
The Working Plan View is active, so "Plan Rich Text Defaults" are still in use. See "To set the rich text defaults" on page
26 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.

224
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

To add rich text annotations for materials

1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text , then click in the Porch room.

2. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog, type "concrete" in the text field and click OK.
3. With the text selected, use Copy/Paste edit tool to add the same annotation in the Garage.

4. Add a Rich Text object that says "1 x 5 1/2 composite decking" inside the back Deck room.
5. When you are finished, Save your work.

You can continue working on this plan in Room Moldings on page 226.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Materials.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for assigning finish materials to walls and floors using a variety of techniques and
tools.
To specify the wall finish for all rooms 207
To use the Material Eyedropper 208
To specify the wall finish for a room 209
To specify a custom finish for a single wall 210
To select a wall in 3D 211
To apply a wall covering 212
To set the Wall Material Region defaults 213
To create a Wall Elevation view 213
To create a tile shower surround 214
To copy a Wall Material Region 216
To set flooring defaults 218
To set flooring defaults by floor 219
To set flooring defaults by Room Type 220

225
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

To apply properties from one object to another 220

To add a Floor Material Region 221
To resize and position a Floor Material Region 223
To set room finish schedule defaults 223
To create a finish material schedule 224
To add rich text annotations for materials 225
To save a plan revision 225

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 11 - Finish Materials

What Material Painter mode is best for applying a paint color to all interior walls in a plan?
l The Material Painter Plan Mode will replace all instances of a particular material with a new material. In a plan where
no walls have been previously painted, all or nearly all wall drywall surfaces will be replaced.
What are two ways to assign a paint color to all the walls of a particular room?
l A custom color can be assigned to a specific room in the Room Specification dialog or using the Material Painter's
Room Mode.
What tool lets you apply multiple attributes from one object to another similar object?
l The Object Eyedropper tool allows you to select attributes belonging to one object and then apply them to another,
similar object.
How is a Wall Material Region different from a Wall Covering?
l Wall Coverings can be used in addition to a wall’s surface material to create accents like wallpaper border or
wainscoting.
l Unlike a Wall Covering, Wall Material Regions do more than just apply a material to the surface of a wall: they
actually replace the wall surface layer with a different material. They also have depth and can extend out past the
surface of a wall.
What is the name of the dialog where the default floor finish for all rooms can be set?
l The default floor finish can be set in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog click the Floor Finish Edit button to
open the Floor Finish Definition dialog.
How can you tell if a room is set to use the default floor finish material?
l On the Structure panel of the Room Specification dialog, the Default check box to the right of the Floor Finish Edit
button will be checked if it is set to use the default floor finish for its Room Type.

Room Moldings
Moldings are a common design feature on the interior and exterior of homes.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for adding base, crown, and chair rail moldings to rooms. Concepts
introduced include:

226
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

File Management 227

Productivity Tips 227
Setting the Defaults 228
Using Plan Views 228
Applying Room Moldings 228
Using Molding Polylines 232
Creating Schedules 236
Creating Revisions 237

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Finish Materials tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Materials and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File Management" on page 4 of the Exterior
Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to add moldings to rooms, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l Each floor has an Exterior Room that can be used to edit that floor’s exterior in various ways, including adding
horizontal molding around the perimeter. See To select the Exterior Room on page 233.
l When a polyline-based object is selected, the edge that you clicked on is the Selected Edge and can often be edited in
special ways.

Content
l You can create your own custom molding profiles and save them in the Library for future use.
l Create template plans with your preferred room moldings set as defaults when you begin a new plan.
l A selection of moldings and millwork catalogs are available for download in the "Millwork" category of the 3D
Library. Select Library> Get Additional Content Online to launch your default web browser to that page.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

227
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
adding interior moldings, there are a number of defaults that should be borne in mind.
Base, crown and chair rail molding defaults can be assigned to each floor in your plan. See To specify the default room
moldings on page 228.
Moldings, or casing, can also be applied to doors and windows. For more information, see "Setting the Defaults" on page 89
of the Doors and Windows Tutorial.
Moldings can be assigned to cabinets, as well. See "Adding Moldings and Millwork" on page 259 of the Cabinet Styles
Tutorial.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Working Plan View will work well for adding room moldings, as it did when customizing ceilings and finish materials.
See "To switch to a different saved plan view" on page 192 of the Custom Ceilings Tutorial.

APPLYING ROOM MOLDINGS

Base, crown and chair rail moldings can be specified by floor, and also customized for individual rooms. Room moldings
are an example of a Dynamic Default.

To specify the default room moldings

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog.

l Click the arrow beside "Floors and Rooms" to expand the category.
l Click the arrow beside "Floor Levels" to expand this subcategory.
l Select "Floor 1" and click the Edit button.
2. On the MOLDINGS panel of the 1st Floor Defaults dialog, note that the Selected Profile is Default Base Molding and
that its Type is "Base Molding".

228
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

3. Click the Replace button to open the Select Library Object dialog:
l The content is filtered by Type so that it only lists Moldings and Profiles.

l To further filter the results, type "base molding" in the Search field, then select the "Base Molding" Folder
line item in the Filters drop-down list.
l The tree list in the Folders panel will now expand to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural>
Moldings> Base Molding.
l Select "BM08 - Base Molding" and click OK.
4. Click the Add New button to open the Select Library Object dialog again.

229
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

l Browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Moldings> Crown Molding.

l This time, type "crown molding" in the Search field, then select the "Crown Molding" Folder line item in the
Filters drop-down list.
l Select "CM02 - Crown Molding" in Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Moldings> Crown Molding
and click OK.
5. Returning to the 1st Floor Defaults dialog:
l Note that the Type for this molding is "Crown Molding".
l Below the Molding Profiles list, make sure that Retain Aspect Ratio is checked.
l In the Molding Profiles list, select the "CM02 - Crown Molding" line item, click in its Height field, and type
3".
6. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs.
7. The results can be seen in an interior Full Camera view.

By default, Stairwells and other Open Below rooms do not receive moldings. Neither do exterior rooms like Porches and
hybrid rooms like Garages. However, moldings can be specified for individual rooms.

To customize a room’s moldings

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click in a blank space in the Dining room to select it.

2. Click the Open Object edit button to open the Room Specification dialog.

230
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

3. On the MOLDINGS panel of the Room Specification dialog, uncheck Use Default. Then:

l Click the Add New button.

l Search for and select "CR01 - Chair Rail Molding" in the Select Library Object dialog.
l Confirm that "Chair Rail" is selected as the molding Type.
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your change.
4. The results can be seen in a Full Camera view of the Dining room.

231
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

Not all moldings make sense in all rooms and can be removed when they are not needed.

To remove molding from a room

1. Select File> Close View to return to plan view, then click the Select Objects button and click in a blank space
in the front Closet to select it.
2. Click the Open Object edit button to open the Room Specification dialog.

3. On the MOLDINGS panel:

l Uncheck Use Default.
l Select the "CM02 - Crown Molding" line item in the table.
l Click the Delete button.
l Click OK to close the Room Specification dialog.
4. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

USING MOLDING POLYLINES

Moldings are also important to exterior design. Here, a horizontal transition board or "belly band" will be added that follows
the shape of the structure’s exterior.
The Chief Architect Library has a wide selection of different types of moldings. If you do not find a profile that meets your
needs, however, you can create one using the CAD tools. Moldings can be very complex, but here a simple rectangular
profile is needed.

To create a rectangular molding profile

1. Select CAD> Boxes> Rectangular Polyline .

2. Make sure that Temporary Dimensions are enabled.

3. Click and drag to draw a rectangular shape in an empty space in plan view.
4. Using Temporary Dimensions, resize the polyline's width:
l Select vertical edge and click on the Temporary Dimension that reports its distance from the opposite edge.
l Type 1 1/2" in the inline text field and press the Enter key.
5. Select a horizontal edge and repeat the above steps to make the polyline's height 11 1/4".
6. With the polyline selected, click the Add to Library edit button. A new "Molding" line item is added to the
User Catalog.
7. Right-click on the new Molding line item and select Rename from the contextual menu. Type a short, descriptive
name like 2x12 Profile and press the Enter key.
8. Right-click on the 2x12 Profile line item and select Open Object from the contextual menu. On the General
panel of the Molding Specification dialog, confirm that its Height and Width are 11 1/4" and 1 1/2", respectively,
then click OK.
9. Select the rectangular CAD polyline that you drew in step 1 and click the Delete edit button.

232
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

To select the Exterior Room

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click once just outside an exterior wall.

l Most likely, the wall or a roof plane will become selected.

l The type of object currently selected is stated on the left side of the Status Bar at the bottom of the program
window.
2. Click the Select Next Objects button until the Exterior Room becomes selected.

3. When the Exterior Room is selected:

l A band around the exterior of the structure will become highlighted.
l The words "Exterior room" will display on the left side of the Status Bar.

To create an exterior room molding

1. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Full Overview .

2. Select Window> Tile Vertically , then return to the plan view window.

3. Select the Exterior Room as described above and click the Make Room Molding Polyline edit button.

233
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

4. In the Make Room Molding Polyline dialog:

l Select "Blank Molding" from the Convert Molding drop-down list.

l Specify the Height as 96" and click OK.
5. With the newly created Molding Polyline selected, click the Open Object edit button.

6. On the MOLDINGS panel of the Molding Polyline Specification dialog:

l Click the Add New button, and assign your new "2x12 Profile" to the selected polyline.
l Note that the molding profile’s Width is 1 1/2" and its Height is 11 1/4".
l Uncheck Extrude Inside Polyline, then click OK.
7. Click in the overview window and Orbit around the model. Notice that the molding is present around all sides of the
structure.

234
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

Once a Molding Polyline has been created, it can be modified in either floor plan or a 3D view.

To edit a Molding Polyline

1. Orbit the overview camera until the front of the structure can be seen.
2. Return to plan view, then Zoom in on the Porch and the front of the Garage.
3. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the edge of the Molding Polyline located over the front of the
Garage to make it the Selected Edge.

4. Click the Remove Molding from Selected Edge edit button. Notice:

l The molding polyline no longer displays along the front of the Garage in either view.
l The Remove Molding from Selected Edge button on the edit toolbar has been replaced by the Add Molding to
Selected Edge edit button.

5. When the polyline is selected, the edge located over the front of the Porch can be seen. Click on it to make it the
Selected Edge, then click the Open Object edit button.

6. On the GENERAL panel of the Molding Polyline Specification dialog, uncheck No Molding on Selected Edge and
click OK.
7. Orbit the camera so that the Deck can be seen, then return to the plan view window.
8. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the edge of the Molding Polyline located along the back railing of
the Deck. If the wall becomes selected instead, use the Select Next Object edit tool, described above.

235
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

9. Click the edit handle located at the center of the horizontal Deck railing and drag it down until it snaps to the back
wall of the house.

10. With the edge still selected, click the Add Molding to Selected Edge edit button.

11. When you have finished, remember to Save your work.

CREATING SCHEDULES
Like finish materials, room moldings can be listed in a Room Finish Schedule. The Room Finish Schedule Defaults were set
in the Finish Materials tutorial. See "To set room finish schedule defaults" on page 223 of the Finish Materials Tutorial.
To prevent your plan views from becoming unnecessarily cluttered, schedules should be created in CAD Detail windows.

To create a room moldings schedule

1. Open the "Schedules Detail" CAD Detail. There are two ways to do this:

l Select CAD> CAD Detail Management . In the CAD Detail Management dialog, select the "Schedules
Detail" and click the Open button.

l Select View> Project Browser , expand the CAD Details folder, right-click on the "Schedules Detail" and
select Open View from the contextual menu.
2. Select Edit> Snap Settings and confirm that at least one the Extension Snaps at the bottom of the submenu is
enabled.
3. Select Tools> Schedules> Room Finish Schedule , then:

236
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

l Move your mouse pointer over the bottom left corner of the Finish Materials Schedule.
l A square Endpoint Snap Indicator and within it, a round Extension anchor will appear. When they do,
move the mouse pointer straight down from the corner.
l Notice the extension line that follows the mouse down from the anchor and the Extension Snap icon that
follows the mouse pointer.
l Click to place another Room Finish Schedule directly below the first.
4. Click on the schedule to select it, then click the Open Object edit button.

5. On the GENERAL panel of the Room Finish Schedule Specification dialog:

l Change the Main Title to "Room Moldings".
l In the list of Objects to Include, click the arrow next to "Rooms" to expand the category and uncheck "Open
Below".
6. On the COLUMNS/ROWS panel, remove all columns from the Columns to Include list except "Name", "Base
Molding", "Chair Rail", and Crown Molding", then click OK.

7. When you are finished, Save your work.

You can continue working on this plan in the Interior Furnishings tutorial or move on to the Cabinet Styles tutorial.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Moldings.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for assigning moldings to rooms, including the Exterior Room

237
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

To specify the default room moldings 228

To customize a room’s moldings 230
To remove molding from a room 232
To create a rectangular molding profile 232
To select the Exterior Room 233
To create an exterior room molding 233
To edit a Molding Polyline 235
To create a room moldings schedule 236
To save a plan revision 237

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 12 - Room Moldings

In what dialog can you specify the default room moldings for a plan?
l The default base, crown and chair rail moldings can be specified by floor in Floor Defaults dialogs.
How do you select the Exterior Room in plan view?
l In plan view, click just outside of an exterior wall using the Select Objects tool. If the wall or another object becomes
selected, click the Select Next Object edit button until the left side of the Status Bar reports that the Exterior Room is
selected and a band around the entire outside of the structure becomes highlighted.
What type of object can be used to create a horizontal band around a building’s exterior?
l A Molding Polyline around the exterior of the structure can be used to create a horizontal band. An easy way to create
it is using the Create Room Molding Polyline edit tool.
What type of snapping behavior allows you to align an object as it is drawn with another nearby object that already exists?
l Extension Snaps allow you to align an object with a snap point on another object.
What Schedule tool allows you to create a schedule of interior moldings?
l The Room Schedule tool creates schedules that are set to list a variety of room attributes such as moldings.

Interior Furnishings
Furnishings can help with space planning and are an important element of presentation views.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for adding a variety of furniture and accessories to a plan. Concepts
introduced include:
File Management 239
Productivity Tips 239
Setting the Defaults 239
Using Plan Views 240
Placing Library Objects 241

238
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Room Moldings tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Moldings and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See File Management on page 4.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to add furnishings to a plan, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l Use the Material Defaults dialog to specify the materials initially assigned to furniture objects placed from the Library
Browser.
l Hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key when moving or resizing an object to override snapping and other movement restrictions.

Content
l A wide selection of accessories and furniture are available for download from the Chief Architect 3D Library. Select
Library> Get Additional Content Online to launch your default web browser to that page.
l Create Architectural Blocks of furniture groupings and add them to the library for future use.

Interface
l Use the Advanced Search in the Library Browser to help you focus the results of Library Browser Searches.
l Right-click on an item in the Library Browser to access a contextual menu with a variety of options.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Ctrl/⌘ - override movement restrictions
l C - Concentric Edit Behavior
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
placing symbols from the Library, the settings in the Material Defaults dialog can be helpful.
Some furnishing objects in the library have been assigned particular materials to complement the object’s design and
initially use those materials regardless of the overall style of the plans they are placed into. Some furnishings, however,
inherit default materials for furniture and upholstery that can set differently for each plan.

239
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

To set the Material Defaults for upholstery

1. Select Edit> Default Settings , click on "Materials" in the list and click the Edit button.

2. In the Material Defaults dialog, scroll down the list, select "Furniture", and notice that the material specified for this
item is "Birch (honey)".
3. Next, select "Furniture Upholstery" and notice that the material specified for this item is "Paris 5 Textile".
4. Scroll up and select the "Accent Upholstery" item in the list.
5. Click the Select Material button and on the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog:

l The content is filtered by Type so that it only lists Materials.

l To further filter the results, type "fabric" in the Search field, then move your mouse pointer over the "Fabric &
Wall Coverings" Folder line item in the Filters drop-down list.

l The Folders panel expands to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials> Fabric & Wall Coverings.
l Browse through the folders and choose a default fabric material for fabric accents and pillows placed into the
current plan from the library.
l Here, "Bubbles 3 Print" is used.
l When your choice is selected, click OK.
6. Click Done, then Save your work.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Working Plan View will work well for adding furnishings, as it did when customizing ceilings, finish materials, and
moldings. See "To switch to a different saved plan view" on page 192 of the Custom Ceilings Tutorial.

240
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

PLACING LIBRARY OBJECTS

A variety of items in the Library are designed to be assigned to other objects: for example, handles, locks, and hinges are
meant to be assigned to doors. For more information, see "Using Library Content" on page 93 of the Doors and Windows
Tutorial.
A wide selection of other library symbols, on the other hand, are designed to stand alone as fixtures and furnishing objects.

To place a furniture object in a plan

1. In the Search text field, type "queen".
l As you type, items that match this search parameter appear in a drop-down list below the Search field.
l Click on the "Queen" Folder line item in the Filters drop-down list to use it as a search filter.

l The Folders panel will expand to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Interiors> Furniture> Beds.
2. Click on a bed in the "Queen" folder to see it in greater detail in the Preview panel and select it for placement.

When you select a library object and move the mouse

pointer into a view window, the pointer icon indicates the
type of library object selected, a preview outline of the object follows
your pointer as you move it, and basic information displays in the
Status Bar at the bottom of the program window.

3. Move your mouse pointer around the perimeter of the Bedroom and notice:
l The Furniture icon follows your mouse pointer.

l The bed’s preview outline snaps to the nearest wall, orienting it so that its back faces the wall.
4. When the bed’s preview outline is located under the windows, click once to place a bed at that location.
5. Perform a new Library search:
l Click on the Queen Folder filter to remove it from use.

l In the Search field, type "end table" and select the End Tables Folder .

241
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

l The Folders panel will expand to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Interiors> Furniture> Tables> End
Tables.
6. Place an End Table with Drawers on each side of the bed in the Bedroom.
7. Perform a new Library search for "dresser" and place a dresser such as "Basket Dresser 1" in the Foyer, against the
wall of the Staircase.

To place furniture sets in a plan

1. Clear the previous filter and perform a new search.
2. Type "sets" in the Search field and select the Dining Sets Folder located at Chief Architect Core Catalogs>
Interiors> Furniture> Tables> Dining Tables> Dining Sets.
3. Select a grouped dining set and place it in the Dining room.
4. Clear the Dining Sets filter and search for "sets" again.
5. This time, select the Living Room Sets Folder .

6. Place a sofa, matching chair, and a coffee table in the Living room.

242
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

To add decorative furnishings

1. In the Folders panel, Browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Interiors> Accessories.
2. Zoom in on the Foyer room and place a vase from the "Vases & Pots" catalog on the dresser.

3. Browse to the Square folder in the Mirrors & Frames catalog, select the "Double Mat Frame", and place it on the
wall at the back of the dresser.

4. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Full Camera , then click and drag a camera arrow in the Foyer, from
right to left, in the direction of the dresser.

CUSTOMIZING LIBRARY OBJECTS

Once a library object has been placed into a plan, it can be edited in a variety of ways in both 2D and 3D views.

To modify a symbol from the Library

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the coffee table in the Living room to select it. Notice that the
table has ten edit handles that can be used to resize, reshape, and rotate it:

243
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

2. Select Window> Select Next Tab to return to the camera view in the Foyer.
3. Click the Select Objects button and click on the frame to select it. When selected on its side in a camera view,
the frame displays only four edit handles: an Extend handle along each side.
4. Use these edit handles to resize and reshape the frame so it better suits the aspect ratio of the painting.
5. To resize the frame concentrically, hold down the C key as you drag an edit handle.

6. You can specify the size of the frame with greater precision in its specification dialog. With the frame still selected,
click the Open Object edit button.

7. On the GENERAL panel of the Furniture Specification dialog:

l Select the Standard Rendering Technique from the drop-down above the Preview pane so the painting can be
seen instead of a solid color.

244
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

l Specify the Finished Floor to Top as 80".

l Make any adjustments to the Width and Height that you would like.

You can create custom materials for use in picture frames. For details, see Knowledge Base article KB-00007 at
[Link]/support/[Link].
By replacing the painting texture inside the frame, it can instead be turned into a hall mirror.

To create a mirror
1. On the MATERIALS panel of the Furniture Specification dialog, select the "Image" component and click the Select
Material button.
2. On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog, Search for "mirror", select the solid grey "Mirror"
material.
3. Click OK to close both dialogs and apply your changes.
4. Select 3D> Material Painter> Component Mode .

5. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Eyedropper , then:

l Notice that the regular mouse pointer is replaced with an Eyedropper icon .

l Click on the mirror material in the center of the frame to load it into the eyedropper.
l The mouse icon changes from an eyedropper into a spray can .

l Click on the green mat just inside the wood of the frame.
l The mirror material replaces the green mat, leaving a rectangular white accent that follows the shape of the
mirror.
6. When you are finished, select File> Close View to return to plan view.

You can replace a library object in your plan with a different item from the Library using the Replace From Library edit
tool. This can be particularly helpful if you have multiple copies of the same object and would like to replace them all at
once.

245
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

To replace a library object

1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Wall Elevation , then click in the Bedroom and drag to draw a camera
arrow pointed straight up on screen, towards the back wall.
2. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options . In the Active Layer Display Options side
window:
l Notice that because the Wall Elevation is currently active, "Camera View Layer Set" is listed as the active Layer
Set.
l In the Name Filter field, begin typing the word "furniture". The list of layers will be filtered to match as you type.
l Select the "Furniture, Interior" layer and click in the Disp column to add a check mark.
3. Click the Select Objects button, then click on one of the end tables to select it.

4. Click the Replace From Library edit button to open the Replace From Library dialog.

l Select one of the Replacement identical objects in room.

l Click the Library button.
l In the Select Library Object dialog:
o Type "bedside" in the Search field.
o Select the "Manning Bedside Table" from the Search results and click OK.
5. Click OK once more to close the Replace from Library dialog and notice that both tables are replaced by the new
bedside table.
6. Notice, too, that these tables are not using the default furniture material like the bed is. Use the Material
Eyedropper to apply the lighter colored Ash wood to the tables, as described above.

246
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

Many accessory symbols are set up to snap to a nearby wall or rest on top of a table. You can override this behavior to place
items inside larger objects like storage furniture.

To place an accessory inside a furniture object

1. Select Window> Select Next Tab to return to plan view while leaving the Wall Elevation view in the Bedroom
open.
2. In the Library Browser, search for "box", select the "Storage Box", and move your mouse pointer into the Bedroom.
3. Click once on one of the bedside tables to place a box at that location.
4. Select Window> Select Next Tab to return to the Wall Elevation view again.
5. Zoom in on the table with the Storage Box and notice that the box is resting on top of the table.

6. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the box and try to drag it downwards toward the lower shelf. The
box does not move because the table already occupies that space.
7. Hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key and try again. The Ctrl/⌘ key allows you to override movement restrictions so you can
position the box on the lower shelf, inside the table.

247
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

8. When you are finished, select File> Close View to return to plan view.
9. Remember to Save your work.

USING ARCHITECTURAL BLOCKS

Architectural Blocks are groups of objects like furniture and accessories that are blocked together so they can be placed,
moved, rotated and even deleted as though they were a single object.

To create an Architectural Block

1. Zoom in on the dresser in the Foyer.

2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the vase to select it.

3. With the vase selected, hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key and click on the wall frame to add it to the selection set.
4. Continue holding down the Ctrl/⌘ key and click on the dresser to select it, as well.
5. The Status Bar should now report "3 objects currently selected" at the bottom left corner of the program window.
6. Click the Make Architectural Block edit button and notice:

l The Status Bar now reports that an "Architectural Block" is the selected object.

l The Make Architectural Block edit button has been replaced by the Explode Architectural Block button,
which lets you break the block into its individual component objects again.
7. Click and drag the selected Architectural Block’s Move edit handle to move it away from the wall and notice that the
dresser, vase, and wall frame all move together as a single unit.
8. Select Edit> Undo to return the Architectural Block to its original location.

248
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

To edit a component object in an Architectural Block

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the vase. The Architectural Block will become selected.

2. Click the Select Next Object edit button.

3. The vase will become selected, and you can edit it using its edit handles, edit tools, and specification dialog.

Architectural Blocks provide a way to furnish and accessorize a plan quickly and easily. When you’ve created one that can
be useful in other projects, add it to the library.

To add an Architectural Block to the library

1. Click on the Architectural Block to select it.
2. Click the Add to Library edit button to add the block to the User Catalog in the Library Browser.

3. Right-click on the new item in the User Catalog and select Rename from the contextual menu to change the name
from "Untitled" to something descriptive like "Foyer Table".

You can organize the content in your User Catalog into project-specific folders.

To create a folder of plan-specific library content

1. Right-click on the User Catalog line item and select New>Folder from the contextual menu.
2. Type a short, descriptive name for this new folder. Here, "Chic Cottage" is used.
3. Select the "Foyer Table" line item, then click and drag it over the new Chic Cottage folder. When the folder becomes
highlighted, release the mouse button to move the item into the folder.
4. Move the "Hat Channel" and "2x12 Profile" line items into the Chic Cottage folder, as well.
5. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

The Beach Palette folder was created in the Finish Materials tutorial to collect a selection of complementary colors in one
place. These materials are used in Chic Cottage, but are not project-specific. Instead of moving Beach Palette folder into the
Chic Cottage folder, you can add a link.

To create a link to a folder

1. Right-click on the Beach Palette folder and select Copy from the contextual menu.
2. Right-click on the Chic Cottage folder and select Paste Link from the contextual menu.
l A copy of the Beach Palette folder is created in the Chic Cottage folder.
l The materials in both Beach Palette folders are linked to one another.
3. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

You can continue working on this plan in the Cabinet Styles tutorial.

CREATING A SCHEDULE
Although not usually present in construction drawings, furnishings play a vital role in interior designs. The furnishings in a
particular room can be listed in a Furniture Schedule.

249
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

To set furniture schedule defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings and in the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow beside "Schedules, select
"Furniture Schedule" from the list, and click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Furniture Schedule Defaults dialog:

l Under Columns to Include, remove all of the columns except "Qty" and "Description".
l Under Available Columns, select "3D Perspective" and click the Add button.
l With "3D Perspective" selected in the Columns to Include list, click the Move Up button to move it to the top
of the list.
l Add the "Dimensions" column and move it to the bottom of the list.
l Under Object Preview Options, check the box beside Scale Images.
3. Click OK and Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To create a furniture schedule

1. Select CAD> CAD Detail Management .

2. In the CAD Detail Management dialog, select "Schedules Detail" and click the Open button.
3. Select Tools> Schedules> Furniture Schedule , then click once in an empty space near the other schedules.

Just like real furnishings, furniture symbol measurements are not always in whole inches. In schedules, these values are
reported as fractions by default. They can, however, be rounded instead.

To edit number formatting in a schedule

1. Select the schedule and click the Open Object .

2. On the NUMBER FORMATTING panel of the Schedule Specification dialog:

l Click on the "Dimensions" line item under Format Column.
l Below the list, you can specify the units of measurement as well as accuracy.
l Here, simply set the Smallest Fraction to 1/1 and click OK.

If you wish, you can use Extension Snaps to align the furniture schedule below the room moldings schedule created
previously. See "To create a room moldings schedule" on page 236 of the Room Moldings Tutorial.
As an alternative to listing the dining room chairs and table individually, they can instead be listed as a set.

250
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

To add an architectural block to a schedule

1. Select the Dining room furniture set and click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Architectural Block Specification dialog, check the box beside Treat as One Object.
3. On the SCHEDULE panel:
l Check Include in Schedule.
l Select the Include in Schedule As radio button.
l Click the arrow beside "Furniture" and check the box beside "Indoor".
4. On the OBJECT INFORMATION panel, delete the %automatic_description% macro from the Description field and
instead type a short but more descriptive phrase like "Dining Set".
5. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your change.
6. Click in the Schedule Detail to make it the active window and notice that the separate line items for the chairs and
table have been replaced by a single Dining Set line item.

Accessories like frames, baskets, and vases do not necessarily belong in a furniture schedule.

To remove an object from a schedule

1. Still in the Schedule Detail, click on the "Double Mat Frame" line item in the Furniture Schedule to select it and
highlight the row.
2. Click the Find Object in Plan edit button. The frame behind the dresser in the Foyer becomes selected
automatically in plan view, and that view window becomes active.
3. With the frame selected, click the Open Object edit button.

4. On the SCHEDULE panel of the Furniture Specification dialog, uncheck Include in Schedule and click OK.
5. Repeat this process to remove the vase and storage boxes from the schedule, as well.
6. When you are finished, Save your work.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Furnishings.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

251
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for adding furniture and accessories to a plan
To set the Material Defaults for upholstery 240
To place a furniture object in a plan 241
To place furniture sets in a plan 242
To add decorative furnishings 243
To modify a symbol from the Library 243
To create a mirror 245
To replace a library object 246
To place an accessory inside a furniture object 247
To create an Architectural Block 248
To edit a component object in an Architectural Block 249
To add an Architectural Block to the library 249
To create a folder of plan-specific library content 249
To create a link to a folder 249
To set furniture schedule defaults 250
To create a furniture schedule 250
To edit number formatting in a schedule 250
To add an architectural block to a schedule 251
To remove an object from a schedule 251
To save a plan revision 251

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 13 - Interior Furnishings

How do the Material Defaults affect furnishing objects placed from the Library Browser?
l Some furnishing objects in the library have been assigned particular materials to complement the object's design and
initially use those materials regardless of the overall style of the plans they are placed into. Some furnishings,
however, inherit the default materials furniture and upholstery that can set differently for each plan in the Material
Defaults dialog.
What are two ways to find an object in the Library Browser?
l To get an idea of what options are available, you can browse the contents of the Library.
l When you know what you want to find in the Library, you can save time by searching.
What edit tool lets you substitute all instances of an object with a different object from the library?
l You can replace a library object in your plan with a different item from the Library using the Replace From Library
edit tool. This can be particularly helpful if you have multiple copies of the same object and would like to replace
them all at once.
What key on the keyboard lets you move an object through another object, overriding movement restrictions
l The Ctrl key allows you to override movement restrictions when moving or resizing objects.

252
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

What is an Architectural Block?

l Architectural Blocks are groups of objects like furniture and accessories that are blocked together so they can be
placed, moved, rotated and even deleted as though they were a single object.
What feature in the program can you use to customize how information like object sizes is reported?
l The NumberFormatter Ruby class allows you to specify the unit of measurement used in a macro.
What feature allows you to create a custom schedule column?
l The Custom Object Fields tool allows you to create object attributes that can be listed in custom schedule columns.
What two things must you do to include an Architectural Block in a schedule?
l To include an Architectural Block in a schedule, it must have Treat as One Object and Include in Schedule checked in
the Architectural Block Specification dialog.
What edit tool lets you locate a particular object listed in a schedule?
l The Find Object in Plan edit tool locates the object associated with a selected line item in a schedule.
What setting lets you remove an object from a schedule?
l The Include in Schedule check box found in a variety of different objects’ specification dialogs, on the Schedule panel.

253
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Kitchen and Bath Tutorials

Kitchen and Bath Tutorials Chapter 4

The Kitchen and Bath Tutorials describe best practices for designing kitchens and baths in Chief Architect:
In this tutorial you will learn about:

TOPICS
Cabinet Styles 255
Cabinet Layout 279
Appliances and Fixtures 299
Light Fixtures 324
Electrical Objects 345

254
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

Cabinet Styles
Cabinet objects support a high degree of customization, allowing you to model a wide variety of styles.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for customizing cabinet styles. Concepts introduced include:
File Management 255
Productivity Tips 255
Setting the Defaults 256
Using Plan Views 256
Specifying Door and Drawer Styles 257
Specifying Countertops and Backsplashes 258
Adding Moldings and Millwork 259
Modifying Cabinet Fronts 263
Updating Cabinet Defaults 271
Applying Custom Materials 273
Creating File Revisions 277

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Interior Furnishings tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Furnishings and
CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working.
However, Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left
unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See Creating File Revisions on page 277.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to customize cabinet styles, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l Use the Material Defaults dialog to specify the materials initially assigned to cabinet doors and drawers placed from
the Library Browser.
l The Match Properties edit tool lets you assign selected attributes from one object to another.

l The Set as Default edit tool allows you to apply a selected object’s specifications to the defaults for that type of
object.

255
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

Content
l A selection of name brand cabinet catalogs are available for download in the "Cabinets" category of the 3D Library.
Select Library> Get Additional Content Online to launch your default web browser to that page.
l Create template plans that have your custom cabinet styles set as the defaults and ready for use when you begin a new
plan.

Interface
l Cabinet doors and drawers can be applied to a cabinet directly from the library: select the door or drawer in the
Library Browser, then click once on the cabinet in a camera or plan view.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
placing cabinets, there are several defaults that should be borne in mind.
Before placing cabinets, it is a good idea to set the Cabinet Defaults so that they meet your needs.
As an alternative to setting all desired specifications, you can place a cabinet into a plan, customize its construction and
appearance, and then apply all of its settings to the defaults for its object type. See Updating Cabinet Defaults on page 271.
When a cabinet door, drawer, or panel is inserted into a cabinet, it inherits the default "Cabinet Door/Drawer" material set in
the Material Defaults dialog for the current plan. See To set the Material Defaults on page 273.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
As noted in the Exterior Walls tutorial, Saved Plan Views have a number of important settings associated with them,
including active Layer Set and Default Set. See "To examine a saved plan view’s settings" on page 7 of the Exterior Walls
Tutorial.
When you know that a particular task will require you to make changes to multiple layers and to create annotations using
different saved defaults, you can save time by opening a Saved Plan View created for that task.
In the Chic Cottage Roof tutorial, the Roof Plan View and Working Plan View were open at the same time and the two
views’ appearance and settings were compared. Then, the Working Plan View was closed and work was done in the Roof
Plan View. See "Using Plan Views" on page 145 of the Chic Cottage Roof Tutorial.
A more efficient way to switch between Saved Plan Views is using the Saved Plan View Control drop-down in the
toolbars.

256
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

To switch to a different saved plan view

1. Click the Saved Plan View Control drop-down, which is located in the top toolbar by default.

2. Select "Kitchen & Bath Plan View" from the drop-down list.
3. The current view window remains open, and now uses the Kitchen and Bath Plan View.
4. In the Active Layer Display Options side window, notice that the "Kitchen and Bath Layer Set" is now listed as
active, and that:
l Wall layers and manually drawn dimensions no longer display.
l Dimensions associated with room labels do display.
l Object labels and the saved section view camera symbol are smaller.
5. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser .

6. Right-click on the "Kitchen and Bath Plan View" in the Project Browser and select Edit View from the contextual
menu.
7. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, notice that the names of the Saved
Defaults associated with this view all begin with "Kitchen and Bath", then click Cancel.

Cabinets can now be customized and later, laid out and annotated, without affecting the appearance of either the floor or
roof plan.

SPECIFYING DOOR AND DRAWER STYLES

A variety of custom door and drawer styles is available in the Library and can be specified in the Cabinet Defaults dialogs
as well as applied to a cabinet in either its specification dialog or in a 3D view.
It is recommended that you set the defaults for an object before placing instances of that object in a plan. A slightly different
alternative to this best practice is to place a single instance of an object, customize it, and then set its attributes as the
defaults before placing more objects.

To specify a custom door or drawer style

1. Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet , then click in the Kitchen near the windows to place a base cabinet
against the left vertical wall.
2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the base cabinet to select it and click the Open Object edit
button.
3. On the DOOR/DRAWER panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog, click the Library button under the Door
Panel heading.

257
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

4. In the Select Library Object dialog:

l The content is filtered by Type so that it only lists Cabinet Doors/Drawers/Panels.

l In addition, the door currently assigned to the cabinet is from the Library. As a result, the Doors Folder is
selected and the tree list in the Folders panel is expanded to show the door selected at Chief Architect Core
Catalogs> Architectural> Cabinet Doors, Drawers, & Panels> Doors.
l Browse through the folder and select a different cabinet door style, such as "Beaded Recessed Panel Door",
then click OK.
5. Click OK to close the Base Cabinet Specification dialog and apply your change.

Doors and drawers can also be applied directly from the library. See To apply a secondary door or drawer style in 3D views
on page 264, below. The process is best seen in a camera view.

SPECIFYING COUNTERTOPS AND BACKSPLASHES

Countertops and backsplashes are customizable components of base cabinets.

To customize a countertop
1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the base cabinet to select it and click the Open Object edit
button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog:
l Specify the Thickness as 3 cm and press the Tab key on the keyboard to update the dialog.
l 3 cm slabs are often described as being 1 1/4" in U.S. units, so change the Thickness to that value instead.
l Specify the Overhang as 1 1/2".

Custom Countertops that are independent objects can also be created. See "To create a custom countertop" on page 291 of
the Cabinet Layout Tutorial.

To specify a backsplash
1. With the GENERAL panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog still open:
l Specify the Height as 4".
l Check the box beside Side.

258
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

l Click OK.
2. Remember to Save your work.

Like countertops, backsplashes can also be drawn as independent objects. See "To add a Custom Backsplash" on page 306
of the Appliances and Fixtures Tutorial.

ADDING MOLDINGS AND MILLWORK

Just like doors, windows, and rooms, cabinets can be customized using moldings. See "Applying Room Moldings" on page
228 of the Room Moldings Tutorial.
As with door and drawer styles, it is best practice to set the defaults for cabinet moldings and millwork prior to placing the
cabinets; however, the Set as Default edit tool allows for a slightly different approach.

To specify a counter edge profile

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the base cabinet in the kitchen to select it.

2. Click the Open Object edit button to open the Base Cabinet Specification dialog.

3. On the MOLDINGS panel, click the Add New button.

4. In the Select Library Object dialog:
l The content is filtered by Type so that it only lists Moldings and Profiles.

l To further filter the results, type "edge molding" in the Search field, then click on the "Edge Molding" Folder
line item in the Filters drop-down list.

l The tree list in the Folders panel will now expand to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural>
Moldings, Profiles, Extrusions> Edge Molding.
l Select the "EM05 - Edge Molding" and click OK.
5. Returning to the MOLDINGS panel:
l Below the Molding Profiles list, check the box beside Retain Aspect Ratio.
l Specify the Height as 1 1/4" to match the Countertop Thickness and notice that the Width value adjusts so the
profile becomes smaller without its shape being distorted.
l Click in the Name field and type: EM05 Counter Edge Profile.
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

259
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

All new moldings are initially assigned the same material as the cabinet. This, however, can be changed if you wish. See
Applying Custom Materials on page 273 for more information.
Before adding crown molding to wall cabinets, it’s important that the correct cabinet height be established.

To find the finished ceiling height

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the floor surface of the Kitchen to select it.

2. Click the Open Object edit button.

3. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Room Specification dialog, note that the Finished Ceiling value is 95 5/8" and click
OK.

To apply crown molding

1. Select Build> Cabinet> Wall Cabinet , then move your mouse pointer into the camera view.

2. Notice that as you move your mouse pointer, the program will try to snap the cabinet at a particular height on the
wall.
l This is its default height, set in the Wall Cabinet Defaults dialog.
3. Click to place a wall cabinet to the right of the windows.
4. Select the cabinet and click the Open Object edit button.

l On the GENERAL panel of the Wall Cabinet Specification dialog, specify the Finished Floor to Top value as
95 5/8".
5. On the MOLDINGS panel, click the Add New button.
6. In the Select Library Object dialog:
l The content is filtered by Type so that it only lists Moldings and Profiles.

l To further filter the results, type "crown molding" in the Search field, then click on the "Crown Molding"
Folder line item in the Filters drop-down list.

260
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

l The tree list in the Folders panel will now expand to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural>
Moldings, Profiles, Extrusions> Crown Molding.
l Select the "CM02 - Crown Molding", which is also the default crown molding for Floor 1, and click OK.
7. Returning to the Wall Cabinet Specification dialog:
l Make sure that Retain Aspect Ratio is checked and change the Height of CM02 - Crown Molding to 3" to
match the room’s crown molding.
l Specify the Vertical Offset as -2 3/4", which is the height of the molding profile then make sure that From
Top is selected.
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

8. Notice that since the top of the cabinet touches the ceiling, the crown molding is forced into the ceiling and cannot
be seen. To correct this, adjust the cabinet’s Finished Floor to Top height.
9. With the wall cabinet still selected, click the Open Object edit button once more.

10. On the GENERAL panel of the Wall Cabinet Specification dialog:

l Click in the Finished Floor to Top value to place the cursor after the current value of 95 5/8".
l Press the Spacebar, then press the - key followed by 2 3/4", which is the height of the CM02 - Crown
Molding.
l Press the Tab key to update the dialog settings and notice the new value: 92 5/8", then click OK.

261
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

There are two ways to create a light rail. One way is to create space under the cabinet bottom by increasing the Item Height
of a wall cabinet's lowest Separation face item. For recessed or decorative light rails, you can instead apply a molding.

To add a light rail

1. With the wall cabinet still selected, click the Open Object edit button and return to the MOLDINGS panel of the
Wall Cabinet Specification dialog.
2. Click the Add New button, and in the Select Library Object dialog:
l Browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Moldings, Profiles, Extrusions> Brackets and
Channels.
l Select the "L-Bracket" and click OK.
3. Notice that the new molding can now be seen near the top of the cabinet in the dialog preview.
4. With the L-Bracket selected in the table, specify the Type as "Light Rail" and notice:
l To Top is no longer checked in the moldings table.
l The molding is now positioned at the bottom of the cabinet in the dialog preview.
5. Set the Profile Rotate to 180° to rotate it so the horizontal edge is against the bottom of the cabinet.
6. Make sure Retain Aspect Ratio is checked and specify the Width and Height as 1".
7. Specify the Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset as - 1" to make the light rail flush with the front, sides, and
bottom of the cabinet box.

262
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

8. Rename the L-Bracket: click once on its Name in the table, then type "Light Rail" and click OK.
9. Select File> Close View to return to plan view, and remember to Save your work.

Millwork items such as feet can also be applied to cabinets. See To add cabinet feet on page 270, below.

MODIFYING CABINET FRONTS

The layout of doors, drawers, and other items on a cabinet front can also be customized.

To create a drawer base

1. Create a copy of the customized base cabinet next to the original:

l Click the Select Objects button, then click on the cabinet to select it.

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button.

l Position the mouse pointer along the left wall of the Kitchen, closer to the back wall than the existing cabinet,
and click once.
2. Click on the new base cabinet to select it.
3. Click the Open Object edit button and on the FRONT panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog:

l Click on the drawer in the preview pane on the right side of the dialog to select it.
l Notice that its Item Type is "Drawer", and its Item Height, 5".
4. Next, click on the cabinet door in the preview pane.

263
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

l Notice that its Item Type is "Auto Right Door". This means that if the cabinet is over 24" wide, it will change to a
double door, but if it is under 24" wide, it will be a single right-handed door.
l Select "Drawer" from the Item Type drop-down list instead.

5. Click the Add New button, and in the New Cabinet Face Item dialog:

l Select "Drawer" from the Item Type drop-down list.

l Specify the Height as 12".
6. Click OK to close the Base Cabinet Specification dialog and apply your changes.

Shelves can also be specified for any cabinet Door or

Opening front item.

You can apply a secondary drawer style directly from the Library to the larger lower drawers so they match the door style.
This process is best seen in a camera view.

To apply a secondary door or drawer style in 3D views

1. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Full Camera , then click and drag to draw a camera arrow pointed at the
front of the base cabinet.
2. If it is not already open, select View> Library Browser to open the Library Browser side window.

3. In the Search field, type "drawer" and then select the "Drawer Fronts" Folder located in Architectural> Cabinet
Doors, Drawers, & Panels.

264
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

4. In the Folders panel, the tree list expands to show the Browse to show the Cabinet Doors, Drawers and Panels folder.
Open the Drawer Fronts folder and select the "Beaded Framed Drawer".
5. Move your mouse pointer into the view window and position it over the cabinet. Notice that it displays the Replace
from Library icon.

6. Click anywhere on the base cabinet to apply the selected drawer front to the cabinet.
l Library items specified as drawer fronts will be assigned to any drawers or false drawer front items on a
cabinet.
l Library items specified as doors will be assigned to any door or door panel front items on a cabinet.
7. Select the new drawer base cabinet and click the Open Object edit button and on the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel,
notice the information for the Drawer line items in the Face Items table:
l The top drawer, "2 Drawer" has "Default: Slab" reported as its drawer panel. "Default" indicates that this is the
cabinet's Main Drawer Style, specified on the DOOR/DRAWER panel.
l The other two drawers have "Beaded Framed Drawer", which is a secondary style applied to the individual face
items.
8. When you are finished, Save your work and select File> Close View to return to plan view.

265
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

The new drawer base can be further customized to serve as a vanity in the Bath.

To change cabinet box construction and overlay

1. Select the drawer bank in the Kitchen and click the Copy/Paste edit button.

l Click once along the lower horizontal wall in the Bath, in front of the door, to place a copy of the drawer bank at
that location.
l Select the new cabinet and move it into the lower right corner of the Bath using its edit handles.
2. With the new cabinet selected, click the Open Object edit button.

3. On the BOX CONSTRUCTION panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog:

l Under the Box Construction heading, select Framed.

l Under the Door/Drawer Overlay heading, select Inset.

266
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

4. On the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel, notice the information for the Drawer line items in the Face Items table:
l The top drawer, "2 Drawer" has "Default: Slab" reported as its drawer panel. "Default" indicates that this is the
cabinet's Main Drawer Style.
l The other two drawers have "Beaded Framed Drawer", which is a secondary style applied to the individual face
items.
5. Still on the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel:

l Click on line item "3 Separation - Horizontal" in the list of Face Items.
l Specify the Item Height as 1/2".
l Specify the Item Height of line item "5 Separation - Horizontal" as 1/2", as well.
6. Specify the Item Height of the top drawer as 8 3/4" and the Item Height of the bottom two drawers as 9".
7. With the drawers essentially the same size, it makes sense for them to use the same Main Drawer Panel:
l Select the middle drawer face item and click the Specify button for Appliance/Door/Drawer under the
Selected Item Properties heading.
l In the Drawer Face Item Specification dialog, select "Use Default" from the Door Panel Style drop-down list,
then click OK.
l Select the bottom drawer and make it "Use Default" as well.
8. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

267
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

To create a split cabinet front

1. Open the Base Cabinet Specification dialog again and on the GENERAL panel, specify the Width as 48".
2. On the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel, divide the cabinet front into two vertical sections:

l Click on "Vertical Layout Parent" at the top of the Face Items list to select it.
l Click the Split Vertical button to divide the stack of drawers into two stacks, side by side.
3. Vertically divide the stack of drawers on the left to make a total of three vertical sections:
l In the Face Items list, click on line item "1.1 Layout - Vertical" to select it.
l Notice that the vertical section on the left side of the cabinet becomes selected in the preview pane.
l Click the Split Vertical button to divide the stack of drawers into two smaller stacks, side by side.
4. Specify the Item Widths of the three vertical sections:

268
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

l With "1.1 Layout - Vertical" still selected, specify the Item Width as 10".
l Scroll down the Face Items list, select "1.5 Layout - Vertical" and specify its Item Width as 10" as well.
l Select "1.3 Layout - Vertical" in the Face Items list and confirm that its Item Width is 22".
5. Specify the Item Widths of the two vertical separation pieces:
l Select line item "1.2 Separation - Vertical" and specify its Item Width as 1/2".
l Specify the Item Width of "1.4 Separation - Vertical" as 1/2".
6. Replace the three drawers in the center with a door:

l Click on the top drawer in the middle vertical selection and click the Delete button.
l Delete the top drawer once more.
l Select the remaining middle drawer and specify its Item Type as "Door - Double".

269
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

7. On the DOOR/DRAWER panel:

l Under the Door Handle heading, select the Distance From Top radio button and set this value as 3 3/4".
l Under the Drawer Panel heading, click the Main Style Library button and select the "Beaded Framed
Drawer" panel, as described above.
8. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

To add cabinet feet

1. Select the base cabinet in the Bath and click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog, specify the Toe Kick Height as 6".
3. On the ACCESSORIES panel, click the Library button next to Foot Style.
4. In the Select Library Object dialog
l The content is filtered by Type so that it only lists Millwork.

l In the Search field, type "feet" and select the Cabinet Feet s Folder in the drop-down filter list.

l T tree list in the Folders panel expands to show the contents of the Chief Architect Core Catalogs>
Architectural> Millwork> Cabinet Feet folder.
l Select "Narrow Taper" and click OK.

270
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

5. Click OK to close the Base Cabinet Specification dialog, as well.

When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

A sink can be added to this cabinet later on. See "To add a drop-in sink" on page 304 of the Appliances and Fixtures
Tutorial.
Custom materials can be assigned to this bathroom vanity, as well. See Applying Custom Materials on page 273.

UPDATING CABINET DEFAULTS

Once a base cabinet has been customized to meet your needs, you can apply its attributes to the Base Cabinet Defaults
dialog so that the Base Cabinet tool creates new cabinets that are identical to the one you modified.

To use the Set as Default tool

1. Select the customized drawer base cabinet in the Kitchen.
2. Click the Set as Default edit button.

3. A message will confirm that the Base Cabinet Defaults have been updated.

The Wall Cabinet Defaults can also be updated; however, first the wall cabinet’s Door Style should be set to match that of
the base cabinets.

271
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

To use the Match Properties tool

1. Select either of the base cabinets in the Kitchen and click the Match Properties edit button.

2. In the Match Properties dialog:

l Type "door" in the Search field and notice that Found Properties matching your search term are moved to the top
of the list.
l Check the box beside "Main Door Style", then click OK.
3. Notice that now, all of the base cabinets are group-selected.
l This is because they have the same "Beaded Recessed Panel Door".
l The wall cabinet is not included in the selection set, though, because it has a different Door Style.
4. Next, click the Apply Properties edit button and click once on the wall cabinet. Notice that it is added to the
selection set when you do this.
5. Click the Select Objects button, then select the wall cabinet and click the Open Object edit button.

6. On the DOOR/DRAWER panel of the Wall Cabinet Specification dialog, confirm that the Door Style is now the
"Beaded Recessed Panel Door", then click OK.
7. With the wall cabinet still selected, click the Set as Default edit button.

Many of the customized features of your wall cabinet can also be applied to full height cabinets, and then saved as the
defaults for those cabinet types, as well.

272
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

To create a matching full height cabinet

1. Select Build> Cabinet> Full Height , then click to place a tall cabinet in the bottom right corner of the Kitchen.

2. Select the customized wall cabinet in the Kitchen and click the Match Properties edit button.

3. In the Match Properties dialog:

l Type "door" in the Search field and check the box beside "Main Door Style".
l Delete "door" from the Search field and replace it with "molding".
l Check the box beside "Moldings".
l Click OK.
4. Next, click the Apply Properties edit button and click once on the full height cabinet.

5. Click the Select Objects button, then select the full height cabinet and click the Open Object edit button.

6. On the GENERAL panel of the Full Height Cabinet Specification dialog:

l Specify the Height as 92 5/8", which is the top height of the wall cabinet created earlier.
l Specify the Depth as 12".
7. On the MOLDINGS panel:
l Notice that the "CM02 - Crown Molding" crown molding is assigned to the cabinet with the same -3" Vertical
Offset as the wall cabinet.
l Select the "Light Rail" line item and click the Delete button, then click OK.
8. With the full height cabinet still selected, click the Set as Default edit button

9. A message will confirm that the Full Height Cabinet Defaults have been updated.
10. Remember to Save your work.

APPLYING CUSTOM MATERIALS

Material Defaults offer a way to specify the default material for broad categories of objects - including those placed from
the library - rather than specific types of objects. Cabinets offer a good example of their usefulness, which can be seen in 3D
views.

To set the Material Defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings and in the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow next to "Cabinets" to expand
the category, select "Base Cabinet" and click the Edit button.

273
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

2. On the MATERIALS panel of the Base Cabinet Defaults dialog:

l Notice that nearly all of the items in the list of components has "Default" stated before the material name.
l This means that these components are drawing their material assignments from the Material Defaults dialog.
l Click Cancel to return to the Default Settings dialog.
3. Select "Materials" in the list and click the Edit button.
4. In the Material Defaults dialog is where cabinets and a variety of other object types inherit their default materials
from.
l Scroll to find the "Cabinet" line item .Click on "Cabinet", hold down the Shift key and click on "Cabinet
Door/Drawer" and note that they are both set to use "Color - White".
l Click on "Countertop" and note that it is set to use "Black-Granite".
l Click on "Hardware" and note that it is set to use "Aluminum - Brushed"
5. Click on "Cabinet", hold down the Shift key and click on "Cabinet Door/Drawer" and note that they are both set to
use "Color - White".

274
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

6. Click OK and then Done to close all dialogs.

To set the base cabinet material defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings and in the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow next to "Cabinets" to expand
the category, select "Base Cabinet" and click the Edit button.
2. On the MATERIALS panel of the Base Cabinet Defaults dialog, click on the Cabinet component in the tree list to
select it and note that "Default: Color - White" is currently specified as its material.
3. Click the Select Material button to open the Select Material dialog, select the "Color - Robin’s Egg" material in
your Beach Palette folder in the User Catalog, and click OK.
4. Returning to the Base Cabinet Defaults dialog, notice that it no longer says "Default:" before the material name
because the material is not being drawn from the Material Defaults dialog any longer.
5. Assign the "Color - Robin’s Egg" material to the following components: Panel, Shelves, Toe Kick, Beaded Frame
Main, and the Framed Panel Frame and Panel.

6. Select the EM-05 - Edge Molding's Molding component and click the Select Material button. On the PLAN
MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog, select "Black-Granite" from the list of materials used in the plan,
then click OK.
7. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.
8. Create a Camera view in the Kitchen to see the results, and notice that the cabinet doors and drawers selected
from the Library are still using the "Color - White" material. This is because they are still set to derive their
materials from Material Defaults.

275
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

Customizing materials on individual cabinets is best done after doors, drawers, hardware, millwork, and moldings is have
been finalized. This is because these objects use the materials set in the Material Defaults dialog by default. When applying
custom finish materials to a cabinet, the Material Painter Modes can be very helpful.

To specify custom materials on cabinets

1. Click the Select Objects button, then select one of the base cabinets and click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the MATERIALS panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog:

l Notice that all of the components that are still using "Default: Color - White" are associated with objects that
were assigned to the cabinet from the Library: the Beaded Frame drawer, Framed Recessed Panel Door, and
EM-05 - Edge Molding countertop profile.
l Assign the "Color - Robin’s Egg" material to the Beaded Frame and Framed Panel door components.
l Assign the "Black-Granite" material to the EM-05 - Edge Molding's Molding component, then click OK.
3. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter Object Mode .

4. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Eyedropper , then click on any surface displaying the "Color - Robin’s
Egg" material.

276
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

5. When the mouse pointer displays a spray can icon, click on a surface of the drawer base that has the "Color - White"
material to replace it with "Color - Robin’s Egg".
6. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter Component Mode .

7. Use the Material Eyedropper to assign the "Black-Granite" material to the countertop profile on the drawer
base.

8. Select File> Close View to return to plan view and Zoom out so that the Bath can be seen.

9. Assign the materials "Ash" and "Soapstone - Graphite" to the vanity cabinet in the Bath as described in step 2.
10. When you are finished, Save your work.

You can continue working on this plan in the Cabinet Layout tutorial.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Cabinet Style.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for setting the style of the default cabinets.
To switch to a different saved plan view 257

277
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

To specify a custom door or drawer style 257

To customize a countertop 258
To specify a backsplash 258
To specify a counter edge profile 259
To find the finished ceiling height 260
To apply crown molding 260
To add a light rail 262
To create a drawer base 263
To apply a secondary door or drawer style in 3D views 264
To change cabinet box construction and overlay 266
To create a split cabinet front 268
To add cabinet feet 270
To use the Set as Default tool 271
To use the Match Properties tool 272
To create a matching full height cabinet 273
To set the Material Defaults 273
To set the base cabinet material defaults 275
To specify custom materials on cabinets 276
To save a plan revision 277

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 14 - Cabinet Styles

What are two ways that cabinet doors and drawers can be assigned to a cabinet?
l Cabinet doors and drawers can be assigned on the Door/Drawer panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog.
l They can also be assigned directly from the Library: select a door or drawer and then click on a cabinet in the drawing
area.
What type of object is used to add counter edge profiles and light rails to cabinets?
l Counter edge profiles and light rails can be added to cabinets using moldings assigned on the Moldings panel of the
Cabinet Specification dialog.
What option in the Cabinet Specification dialog lets you create a set of drawers next to a door?
l On the Front/Sides/Back panel, click the Split Vertical button to divide a face item into two identical items, side by
side.
What does the Set as Default edit tool do?
l The Set as Default edit tool lets you apply the settings in a selected object’s specification dialog to the defaults for that
type of object.
What tool lets you assign certain properties of one object to another object in the plan?
l The Match Properties edit tool let’s you apply specific attributes assigned to one object to another object.
What defaults can you use to help ensure that all cabinets use the same materials?

278
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

l Assigning Material Defaults to objects like cabinets helps ensure that they use the same materials in the current plan.

Cabinet Layout
Laying out cabinets with different sizes and face items requires precision, and is made easy with snapping, bumping, and a
variety of editing tools.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for placing and arranging cabinets. Concepts introduced include:
File Management 279
Productivity Tips 279
Setting the Defaults 280
Using Plan Views 280
Laying out Base Cabinets 280
Creating a Kitchen Island 287
Adding Wall Cabinets and Soffits 291
Placing Full Height Cabinets 293
Creating Schedules 295
Adding Annotations 295
Creating File Revisions 297

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Cabinet Styles tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-CabinetStyle and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See Creating File Revisions on page 297.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to lay out a cabinet design in a plan, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l Create a single drawer base or other special cabinet and then copy it to produce any additional ones that you need.
l Use the Center Object edit tool to center cabinets relative to windows, other cabinets, or other objects.

279
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

l The Reflect About Object edit tool lets you move a cabinet to the other side of another cabinet; use with the
Copy/Paste edit tool to create identical cabinets on either side.

Content
l Create Architectural Blocks of cabinet groupings like islands and add them to the library for future use.

Interface
l Because cabinets often have different combinations of face items, it is often helpful to design their layout in a Wall
Elevation or other camera view.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
adding cabinets to a plan, there are several defaults of particular importance.
Before placing cabinets, it is a good idea to set the Cabinet Defaults so that they meet your needs. Cabinet style,
construction, and materials can all be set in advance. See "Cabinet Styles" on page 255 of the Cabinet Styles Tutorial.
When a cabinet door, drawer, or panel is inserted into a cabinet, it inherits the default "Cabinet Door/Drawer" material set in
the Material Defaults dialog for the current plan. See "To set the Material Defaults" on page 273 of the Cabinet Styles
Tutorial.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Kitchen & Bath Plan View is ideal for adding cabinets to a plan. See "To switch to a different saved plan view" on page
257 of the Cabinet Styles Tutorial.

LAYING OUT BASE CABINETS

Several cabinets were placed in the Cabinet Styles tutorial for the purposes of setting defaults using the Set as Default edit
tool. Additional cabinets can now be added to create a kitchen cabinet layout. See the Cabinet Styles tutorial.

To bump and push cabinets

1. Zoom in on the Kitchen area in plan view.
2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on either of the base cabinets that were placed in the Cabinet Styles
tutorial.

280
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

3. Move your mouse pointer over the square Move edit handle located at the cabinet’s center, then click and drag to
move the cabinet in the direction of the other cabinet.
l When the selected cabinet’s editing preview outline reaches the other cabinet, it bumps into it and stops.
4. Release the mouse button again, and then repeat the same action: click and drag the Move edit handle towards the
other cabinet.
l Notice that this time, the selected cabinet pushes the other cabinet, moving them both.
l Drag upward until the cabinets bump into the corner of the room.

To place base cabinets

1. Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet , then click to place a base cabinet along the left vertical wall in the
kitchen, in front of the middle window. Notice that its back snaps to the wall surface automatically.
2. Place another base cabinet in the middle of the room and notice that it is oriented so that its front faces down on-
screen.
3. Move the mouse pointer into the bottom left corner of the Kitchen room and notice that the shape of the cabinet
preview outline changes. Click to place a corner cabinet.
4. Place one more cabinet along the wall separating the Kitchen from the Dining room, just to the right of the corner
cabinet.

281
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

Often, the base cabinet located under a window is wider than average to accommodate a sink.

To resize a cabinet
1. A cabinet can be selected in several ways:

l Click on it while the Select Objects tool is active.

l Click on it while the Cabinet Tool used to create it is active.

l Right-click on it when any tool is active.

2. Select the cabinet under the window, and notice that edit handles and a front indicator display.

3. Move your mouse pointer over its various edit handles. The arrow that displays indicates what function that handle
performs, as does the Status Bar.
4. Click and drag one of the cabinet’s horizontal sides to adjust its width.
l As you drag, notice the Temporary Dimension that reports its width changes in 3" increments. Cabinets resize in
this manner to conform to standard cabinet sizes.
l Notice that its label updates as well. When it is 24" wide, the label is B24R; when it is 27" wide, it becomes B27R.
l Do not release the mouse button. Instead, press the Esc key to restore the cabinet to its original size.

282
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

5. Click the Open Object edit button and on the GENERAL panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog, specify
the Width as 30" and click OK.
6. Specify the other base cabinet along the left vertical wall that is not in a corner as 30" wide, as well.
7. Using either its edit handles or specification dialog, make the cabinet next to the diagonal-front corner cabinet 18" in
width.

When a cabinet is located under a window, it is typically centered on it.

To center a cabinet
1. With the base cabinet still selected, click the Center Objects edit button.

2. Move your mouse pointer over the middle window.

3. When a dashed horizontal centering axis displays in the window, click once.

While default cabinets are easily placed using the Base Cabinet tool, special cabinets like the drawer base take some time to
create. When more than one is needed, though, it can be copied and pasted. The drawer base in this plan can be
distinguished in plan view by its label; however, it is much easier to see in a Wall Elevation view.

283
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

To copy and paste cabinets

1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Wall Elevation , then click and drag a camera arrow in the Kitchen
room, pointed towards the left vertical wall. Click to the left of the cabinet in the middle of the room and be sure to
draw the camera arrow perfectly horizontal.
2. Select the drawer base on the right, click the Copy/Paste edit button, then click the Sticky Mode edit
button.
3. Click the Reflect About Object edit button, then:

l Move your mouse pointer over the 2-door cabinet to its left.
l When a dashed vertical reflection axis displays, click once.
l A copy of the original drawer base is created on the other side of the door base.
4. With the newly pasted drawer base selected, click the Reflect About Object edit button.

5. Move your mouse pointer over the 2-door sink base cabinet to its left.
l When a dashed vertical reflection axis displays, click once.
l Another copy of the drawer base is created on the left side of the sink base.
6. Click Main Edit Mode to get out of Sticky Mode but leave the new cabinet selected.

7. Resize the selected drawer base to a Width of 18", then click and drag it to the left until it bumps into the corner
cabinet.
8. To finish the layout, select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet and click to place a cabinet in the gap between the
sink base and the drawer base to its left.

284
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

Small gaps between cabinets or between cabinets and walls are filled in with fillers automatically.

To control module lines and filler locations

1. Zoom in on the right half of the Kitchen room and notice that the partition between the sink base and the drawer
base to its right is wider than the others.

2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the drawer bank on the right to select it.

285
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

3. Click the cabinet’s Move edit handle and drag slowly to the left.

l When you see the cabinet and two cabinets to its left shift and bump against the sink base cabinet, release the
mouse button.
l Notice that the wider than average separation now is located on the far right, next to the wall.

l Select File> Close View to return to plan view and Zoom in on the top left corner of the Kitchen. Note that
cabinet fillers can also be see in plan view.

4. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options . In the Active Layer Display Options side
window:
l Locate the "Cabinets, Module Lines" layer in the list.
l Click in the Display column for this layer to remove the check mark.
l Click OK and notice that the dashed lines representing the sides of base cabinet boxes no longer display.
5. Select Edit> Undo to turn the display of the "Cabinets, Module Lines" layer on again.

6. Pan down to the bottom left corner of the kitchen:

286
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

l Select Window> Pan Window or click and hold the middle mouse button.

l Drag the mouse pointer in an upward direction, then release the mouse button when the lower left corner of the
Kitchen comes into view.
7. Select the drawer base located against the left vertical wall, next to the corner cabinet.
8. Click the cabinet’s Move edit handle and drag slowly upward.
l When you see the cabinet and the one to its right shift and bump against the sink base, release the mouse button.
l Notice that there is a wider than average separation between the corner cabinet and the drawer base.

9. When you are finished, Save your work.

CREATING A KITCHEN ISLAND

Kitchen islands can have a wide variety of cabinet configurations and styles.

To create a cabinet island

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the base cabinet located in the middle of the kitchen to select it.

2. Using either its edit handles or its specification dialog, increase its Width to 30".

287
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

3. With the cabinet still selected, rotate it so it faces to the left:

l Move your mouse pointer over the triangular Rotate edit handle.
l Click and drag in a circular motion until the cabinet has rotated 180°, then release the mouse button.
l With the cabinet still selected:
4. Place 18" wide drawer bases on both sides of the island cabinet:
l Select the drawer base located on either side of the corner cabinet

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button, then click the Sticky Mode edit button.

l Click once on each side of the island cabinet.

l Notice that the pasted drawer bases are oriented in the same direction as the cabinet that they are placed beside.

l Click Main Edit Mode to get out of Sticky Mode but leave the new cabinet selected.

5. Select the three island cabinets as a group:

l With one of the drawer bases still selected, hold down the Shift key.
l Click on each of the other island cabinets to add them to the selection set.
l The total number of selected objects is stated on the left side of the Status Bar.
6. Click the Open Object edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog, under the
Countertop heading:
l Uncheck the box beside Uniform.
l Specify the Back as 0".
l Notice that the Active Defaults icon in the text field loses its check mark. This means this value is not using
the Dynamic Default.
7. Still on the GENERAL panel, uncheck the box beside Backsplash, then click OK.

288
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

8. With the three cabinets still group-selected, center the island on the side of the sink base:

l Click the Center Object edit button and move your mouse pointer over the top horizontal edge of the sink
base.
l When a dashed horizontal centering axis displays along the edge of the sink base, click once to center the
grouped kitchen island cabinets relative to that edge.
9. At this point, you may find it helpful to move the Kitchen room label. See "To control the display of room labels" on
page 38 of the Interior Walls Tutorial.

Using a number of the techniques introduced in the Cabinet Styles tutorial, a base cabinet can also be modified to serve as
the support for a breakfast bar.

To add a breakfast bar

1. Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet , then click to place a base cabinet at the back of the island cabinets.

2. Select the new cabinet and click the Open Object edit button.

3. On the GENERAL panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog, specify the Height as 42" and the Depth as 7".

289
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

4. On the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel:

5. Select the drawer and click the Delete button.

l Select the door and specify its Item Type as "Side Panel - Applied".
6. On the ACCESSORIES panel, click the Library button next to Panel Style.
7. In the Select Library Object dialog, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Cabinet Doors,
Drawers & Panels> Doors, select the "Beaded Beadboard Door" panel and click OK.
8. On the MATERIALS panel, select the "Beaded Beadboard Door" component, assign the "Color - Robin’s Egg"
material to it.
9. On the LABEL panel, check the box beside Suppress Label and click OK.
10. Using the edit handles, snap each side of the cabinet to the sides of the drawer bases so that its Width equals the total
width of the other three island cabinets.

290
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

To create a custom countertop

1. With the back cabinet still selected, click the Generate Custom Countertop edit button.

2. Click on the right vertical edge of the countertop polyline to select it, then:
3. Click on the Temporary Dimension that reports the overhang distance from the selected edge to the cabinet box.
4. You may need to Zoom in on this dimension in order to click on it.

5. In the inline text field, type 12" and press the Enter key.

Custom Countertops can be edited into a wide variety of custom shapes. For more information, visit [Link].
Like furnishings, cabinets can be blocked together into a single unit. See "Using Architectural Blocks" on page 248 of the
Interior Furnishings Tutorial.

To create an architectural block

1. Zoom out so that the entire kitchen island can be seen.

2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the Kitchen room label to select it.

3. Hold down the Shift key, then click and drag to draw a rectangular selection marquee around the island.
l When you release the mouse button, the four cabinets and the Custom Countertop will become selected, while the
room label will become deselected.
l The total number of selected objects will be stated on the left side of the Status Bar.
4. With the five objects that make up the island selected, click the Make Architectural Block edit button.

5. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

ADDING WALL CABINETS AND SOFFITS

Wall cabinets and soffits can be added in much the same manner as base cabinets.
A wall cabinet was placed in the Cabinet Styles tutorial for the purposes of setting defaults using the Set as Default edit tool.
Additional wall cabinets can now be placed. See Cabinet Styles on page 255.

291
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

To place and edit wall cabinets

1. Select Build> Cabinet> Wall Cabinet .

2. Move the mouse pointer into the lower left corner of the Kitchen, and when the preview outline changes from a
standard rectangular to a corner cabinet shape, click once.
3. Click once on either side of the corner cabinet to create a wall cabinet on the left vertical wall, and one on the
horizontal wall separating the Kitchen from the Dining room.
4. Select the wall cabinet in the upper left corner of the Kitchen and:
l Move it into the corner using its Move edit handle.
l Resize it to 36" in width.
5. Select the wall cabinet between the corner cabinet and the windows and resize it to 12" in width.
6. Select the wall cabinet on the right side of the corner cabinet and resize it to 30" in width.
7. Create a Full Camera view of the Kitchen to see the results.

The Soffit tool is a versatile tool that can be used for a wide variety of applications, but its primary purpose is to fill in gaps
between wall and full height cabinets and the ceiling. In Chic Cottage, the wall cabinets are positioned so that their crown
molding reaches the ceiling. Rather than use a full height cabinet with a custom height to do the same thing, a standard
height cabinet can be used, and the space above filled with a soffit.

To set the soffit defaults

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the full height cabinet in the Kitchen to select it and click the
Open Object edit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Full Height Cabinet Specification dialog, specify the Height as 84".
3. On the MOLDINGS panel, select the "CM02 - Crown Molding", click the Delete button, and then click OK.
4. Select Edit> Default Settings , and in the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow next to "Cabinets" to expand
the category, select "Soffit" and click the Edit button.
5. On the GENERAL panel of the Soffit Defaults dialog, specify the Width as 24", the Height as 12", the Depth as 12",
and the Floor to Bottom value as 84". Then, click OK.

292
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

To place soffits
1. Select Build> Cabinet> Soffit then click above the full height cabinet in the Kitchen to place a soffit above it.

2. Create a Camera view in the Kitchen, pointed towards the wall cabinet.
3. Notice that the room’s crown molding wraps around the soffit automatically.
4. Use the Material Eyedropper to assign the "Color - Butter" material on the walls to the soffit so they match.

5. Select File> Close View to return to plan view, and remember to Save your work.

PLACING FULL HEIGHT CABINETS

A full height cabinet was placed in the Cabinet Styles tutorial for the purposes of setting defaults using the Set as Default
edit tool.

To place and edit full height cabinets

1. Select Build> Cabinet> Full Height , then click along the back horizontal wall of the Garage to place a cabinet
at that location.
2. Select the cabinet and click the Open Object edit button.

3. On the GENERAL panel, specify the Width as 36", the Height as 72", and the Depth as 18".
4. On the BOX CONSTRUCTION panel, click the radio buttons beside Framed and Inset.
5. On the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel:
l Select the upper door and click the Delete button.
l Notice that it is replaced by an "Opening" item with shelves. Delete it as well.
6. On the DOOR/DRAWER panel:
l Select "Slab" from the Door Style drop-down list.
l Select "Pull Vertical" from the Door Handle Main Style drop-down list.

293
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

l Specify Horizontal the Distance From Edge value as 2".

7. On the ACCESSORIES panel:
l Specify "Caster" as the Foot Style.
l Check the box beside Always Present.
l See "To add cabinet feet" on page 270 of the Cabinet Styles Tutorial.
8. On the MOLDINGS panel, select the crown molding and click the Delete button.
9. On the MATERIALS panel, assign the "Color - Mouse" material to the following components: Cabinet,
Doors/Drawers/Panels, and Shelves.

10. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

The shelves in all Door and Opening cabinet face items are adjustable.

To adjust cabinet shelves

1. With the full height cabinet still selected, click the Open Object edit button to open the Full Height Cabinet
Specification dialog again.
2. On the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel:
l Select the Door face item.
l Click the Specify button to the right of the Shelves label.

294
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

3. In the Cabinet Shelf Specification dialog:

l Click the radio button beside Manual.

l Specify the Number of Shelves as 5, then click OK.
4. Click OK to close the Full Height Cabinet Specification dialog and apply your change.
5. Remember to Save your work.

CREATING SCHEDULES
Like doors, windows, and furnishings, cabinets can be listed in dynamic, customizable schedules. See "Creating Schedules"
on page 104 of the Doors and Windows Tutorial and "Creating a Schedule" on page 249 of the Interior Furnishings
Tutorial.
See, too, "To change schedule numbering" on page 129 of the Decks and Porches Tutorial.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
With cabinets in place, annotations can be added. The Kitchen and Bath Plan View is active, so "Kitchen and Bath Text
Defaults" are in use. See "To switch to a different saved plan view" on page 257 of the Cabinet Styles Tutorial.
Kitchen and bath views are often printed at a larger scale than other types of views, but their annotations should still be
consistent in size with annotations in other views.

To set the rich text defaults

1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser .

2. Right-click on "Kitchen and Bath Plan View" and select Edit View from the contextual menu.

295
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

3. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, click the Edit button to the
right of Rich Text to open the Rich Text Defaults dialog.
4. In the Rich Text Defaults dialog, notice that "Kitchen and Bath Rich Text Defaults" is stated in the dialog box’s title
bar.
5. On the RICH TEXT panel:

l Click the Uppercase button.

l Notice that the character size is set at 3" and recall that in the "Roof Rich Text Defaults", the character size is
6". See "To set the rich text defaults" on page 182 of the Dormers Tutorial.

l Click the Print Size button to open the Print Size Calculator dialog. At a printed scale of 1/4" = 1’, a
capital A will be 1/16" tall when printed, whereas in the "Roof Rich Text Defaults" it will be 1/8" tall when
printed.
l Change the Printed Scale to 1/2" = 1’, then change the Desired Print Size to 1/8" and notice that at this scale,
3" character size will produce the same size printed text as the "Roof Rich Text Defaults".
6. On the APPEARANCE panel, note that Rich Text is placed on the "Text, Kitchen & Bath" layer by default when this
Saved Default is active.
7. Click OK to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To add Rich Text cabinet annotations

1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text then click near right side of the Kitchen island.

2. In the Rich Text Specification dialog:

l In the text field, type the following: breakfast bar.
l Click OK to close the dialog and create a Rich Text object.
3. Click on the newly created text object to select it, then click and drag its triangular Rotate edit handle to rotate it 90°
to the left.

4. Move it so that is next to the edge of the breakfast bar countertop.

296
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

To customize a cabinet label

1. Select the 3DB18 base cabinet located next to the corner cabinet and click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the LABEL panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog:

l Select the Specify Label radio button and delete the label text.
l Click the Insert Macro button, browse to Object Specific in the menu, and select "Automatic Label".
l Press the Enter key to wrap to a second line and type "w/ cd" to indicate a cutlery drawer.
l Select "Centered" from the Alignment drop-down list.
l When you are satisfied with the label’s appearance, click OK.
3. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

Cabinet floor plans often have key notes. Notes created in the Kitchen & Bath Plan View use "Kitchen and Bath Note
Defaults" and are placed on the "Text, Kitchen & Bath" layer. See "To add plan notes" on page 85 of the Interior Stairs
Tutorial.
You can continue working on this plan in the Appliances and Fixtures tutorial.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Cabinets.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

297
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for placing cabinets. It also discussed the important default settings associated with
cabinets.
To bump and push cabinets 280
To place base cabinets 281
To resize a cabinet 282
To center a cabinet 283
To copy and paste cabinets 284
To control module lines and filler locations 285
To create a cabinet island 287
To add a breakfast bar 289
To create a custom countertop 291
To create an architectural block 291
To place and edit wall cabinets 292
To set the soffit defaults 292
To place soffits 293
To place and edit full height cabinets 293
To adjust cabinet shelves 294
To set the rich text defaults 295
To add Rich Text cabinet annotations 296
To customize a cabinet label 297
To save a plan revision 297

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 15 - Cabinet Layout

What edit tool can be used to align a cabinet with another object, such as a window?
l Use the Center Object edit tool to center objects like cabinets relative to windows, other cabinets, or other objects.
What two edit tools can be used to create identical cabinets on either side of cabinet?
l The Reflect About Object edit tool lets you move a cabinet to the other side of another cabinet; use with the
Copy/Paste edit tool to create identical cabinets on either side.
How do you remove the dashed lines between cabinet boxes in plan view?
l Turn off the display of the "Cabinets, Module Lines" layer in the current plan view.
What tool allows you to create a counter that is independent of any base cabinet?
l The Generate Custom Countertop edit tool creates an independent custom countertop over a selected cabinet.
What tool can be used to create an island that can be selected and edited like a single object?

298
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

l The Make Architectural Block edit tool groups a set of selected object into an architectural block which can be moved,
rotated, or deleted as a single object.
What is the primary purpose of the Soffit tool?
l The Soffit tool is meant to be used to fill in the space between wall or full height cabinets and the ceiling.

Appliances and Fixtures

Along with cabinets, fixtures and appliances are essential to kitchen and bath layouts.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for placing appliances and fixtures. Concepts introduced include:
File Management 299
Productivity Tips 299
Setting the Defaults 300
Using Plan Views 300
Placing Appliances 300
Placing Fixtures 304
Editing Appliances and Fixtures 308
Creating a Kitchen Elevation 309
Creating Schedules 314
Adding Annotations 316
Creating File Revisions 322

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Cabinet Layout tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Cabinets and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See Creating File Revisions on page 322.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to place appliances in a plan, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

299
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

Drawing and Editing

l Use the Center Object edit tool to center cabinets relative to windows, other cabinets, or other objects.

l The Reflect About Object edit tool lets you move a cabinet to the other side of another cabinet; use with the
Copy/Paste edit tool to create identical cabinets on either side.

Content
l A wide selection of name brand appliances are available for download from the Chief Architect 3D Library. Select
Library> Get Additional Content Online to launch your default web browser to that page.
l Create Architectural Blocks of cabinet groupings like cooktop islands and add them to the library for future use.

Interface
l Because appliances are often placed in or beside cabinets, it is often helpful to design their layout in a Wall Elevation
or other camera view.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Ctrl/⌘ + L - Library Browser
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
placing symbols from the Library, the settings in the Material Defaults dialog can be helpful.
Some appliances in the library have been assigned particular materials because those are the standard for that particular
item, and they initially use those materials regardless of the overall style of the plans they are placed into. Some appliances,
however, are available in multiple finishes and are set up inherit the default appliance materials that can set differently for
each plan in the Material Defaults dialog.
When adding fixtures and appliances to a plan, it is helpful to set the Material Defaults for "Appliances", "Appliance Trim",
"Fixtures, and "Fixture Trim".

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Kitchen and Bath Plan View is ideal for adding cabinets to a plan and will work well for appliances as well. See "Using
Plan Views" on page 256 of the Cabinet Styles Tutorial.

PLACING APPLIANCES
Unlike objects like cabinets that have drawing tools, appliances and fixtures are placed into plans from the Library. As such,
they do not have default settings.

300
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

Appliances fall into two basic categories: freestanding and built-in.

To place built-in appliances

1. If it is not already open, select View> Library Browser to open the Library Browser.

2. In the Folders panel, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Appliances> Dishwashers.
3. Select a dishwasher for placement, and move your mouse pointer into the drawing area. Notice that the pointer
displays the Fixtures icon.

4. Click once on the 24" wide cabinet located just below the sink base to place a dishwasher at that location. Notice
that the cabinet label is replaced by the dishwasher’s label.

Note: Only one front mounted fixture can be inserted into a cabinet in
this manner. Additional front fixtures can be added in the Cabinet
Specification dialog.

To place freestanding appliances

1. In the Chief Architect Core Catalogs, browse to Architectural> Appliances> Refrigerators> Standard Size.
2. Select a Bottom Mount Refrigerator, then click along the wall separating the Kitchen from the Dining room to place
a refrigerator next to the cabinets.

301
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

3. Now is a good time to specify a final position for the doorway to the Dining room:
l Click on the doorway to select it.
l Click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far the doorway is from the vertical wall on the right.
l In the inline text field, type 24" and press the Enter key.

Like furnishings, Appliances and cabinets can be blocked together to form a single unit. See "Using Architectural Blocks"
on page 248 of the Interior Furnishings Tutorial.

To modify an architectural block

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the kitchen island Architectural Block to select it.

2. Click the Explode Architectural Block edit button to break the block into its component objects.

3. Select the 30" wide middle cabinet and Delete it.

4. In the Library, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Appliances> Ranges> Slide-In and select the "Flat Top
Range".
5. Move the mouse pointer into the space left by the deleted cabinet and click once to place the range.
6. In the Library, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs, browse to Architectural> Appliances>Hoods> Large, select
the "Glass Island Hood", and place it in front of the island.
l Click on the hood to select it, then move over the island using its edit handle.
l If necessary, Rotate it so it faces the same direction as the range.

l Use the Center Objects edit tool to center the hood over the range. See "To center a cabinet" on page 283
of the Cabinet Layout Tutorial.
7. Group-select the appliances and cabinets that make up the island and click the Make Architectural Block edit
button. See "To create an architectural block" on page 291 of the Cabinet Layout Tutorial.

Some appliances are free-standing, but designed to mount under a cabinet.

302
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

To place an undermount appliance

1. Create a Camera view in the Kitchen, pointed at the wall cabinet in the upper left corner.
2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the wall cabinet to select it, and use the Resize edit handle located
along its bottom edge to raise the bottom edge up until the Temporary Dimension reports its height as 27".

3. With the wall cabinet still selected, click the Open Object edit button, and on the MOLDINGS panel of the Wall
Cabinet Specification dialog, select the "Light Rail", click the Delete button, and then click OK.
4. Select Window> Tile Vertically , then click in the plan view window to make it the active view and Zoom
in on the upper left corner of the Kitchen.
5. In the Library Browser, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs, browse to Architectural> Appliances>Microwave
Ovens.
6. Select the "Under Cabinet Microwave", then move the mouse pointer over the wall cabinet at the top left corner of
the Kitchen.
7. Click on the wall cabinet in the plan view window to place a microwave under it.

303
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

8. If need be, you can use the Center Objects edit tool to center the microwave under the wall cabinet. See "To
center a cabinet" on page 283 of the Cabinet Layout Tutorial.
9. When you are finished, close the Camera view and Save your work.

PLACING FIXTURES
Like appliances, plumbing fixtures can be either free-standing or inserted into cabinets.

To add a drop-in sink

1. In the Search field, type "bathroom sink" and select the "Bathroom Sinks" Folder located at Architectural>
Fixtures> Sinks> Bathroom Sinks.
2. Open the Vanity folder and select the "Rectangular Sink".
3. Move your mouse pointer into the drawing area and click once on base cabinet located in the Bath to insert the sink
into that cabinet.

l A warning message will note that to accommodate the sink, all top drawers will be converted to False Drawers.
Click OK.
4. Select the cabinet and click the Open Object edit button.

304
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

5. On the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog:

l Click on the top left drawer in the preview to select it and change its Item Type to "Drawer",
l Specify the top right drawer as a "Drawer" as well, then click OK.

You can also specify a drop-in fixture for a cabinet as well as its
position in the Base Cabinet Specification dialog.

Drop-in and undermount sinks are inserted objects. Vessel and apron sinks, on the other hand, are stand-alone objects. To
place an apron sink, the cabinet that holds it must first be modified and an optional Custom Backsplash drawn.

To create an apron sink base

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the 30" wide sink base cabinet located under the windows in the
Kitchen.
2. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the GENERAL panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog:

l Specify the Height as 28".

l Uncheck Countertop.
3. On the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel, click on the drawer in the preview pane, then click the Delete button and click
OK.
4. On the MOLDINGS panel, click the Delete button to remove the "EM-05 - Counter Edge Profile" from this cabinet
and click OK.

305
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

To add a Custom Backsplash

1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Wall Elevation , then click and drag a camera arrow in the Kitchen,
pointed towards the apron sink. Be sure to draw the camera arrow perfectly horizontal.
2. Make sure that Object Snaps are enabled.

3. Select Build> Cabinet> Custom Backsplash , then:

l Move your mouse pointer the top left corner of the sink base.
l When you see an Endpoint Snap Indicator, click and drag up and to the right until you reach the top right
corner of the space that needs a backsplash.
l When you see an Intersection Snap Indicator, release the mouse button.

4. When you are finished, select File> Close View to return to plan view.

306
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

To place an apron sink

1. In the Library Browser, type "apron" in the Search field and click on the "Apron Front" Folder line item in the
Filters drop-down list.
2. The tree list in the Folders panel will now expand to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Fixtures> Sinks> Kitchen
Sinks> Apron Front.
3. Select the "Apron Front Sink" and click on the edited base cabinet to place the sink on top of it.
4. Create a Full Camera view in the Kitchen to see the results.

5. If you want, you can select the Custom Backsplash behind the sink and adjust its bottom edge upwards using its edit
handles.
6. When you are finished, select File> Close View.

To place bathroom fixtures

1. In plan view, Zoom in on the Bath.

2. In the Library, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Plumbing Fixtures> Bathtubs> Standard
Tubs and select "Standard Tub 1".
3. Move the mouse pointer into left side of the Bath, then:
l Move the mouse pointer from wall to wall and notice that the bathtub’s preview outline snaps to the nearest
wall.
l When the preview outline is snapped to the left vertical wall and the V-shaped front indicator points to the
right, click once to place the bathtub.
4. Click on the tub to select it, then click the Open Object edit button. On the General panel of the Fixture
Specification dialog, specify the Width as 60" and click OK.
5. With the tub still selected, us the Center Object edit tool to center it along the left wall of the bathroom.

6. Browse to the Plumbing Fixtures> Toilets folder and select the "Standard Toilet".

307
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

7. Move your mouse pointer into the space between the bathtub and the cabinet and click once to place the toilet at that
location.

8. When you are finished, Save your work.

EDITING APPLIANCES AND FIXTURES

Like most objects, fixtures and appliances can be modified using their edit handles and their specification dialogs.

To reverse a fixture symbol

1. Click on the bathtub to select it and click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the 3D panel of the Fixture Specification dialog:

l Check Reflect Geometry and click OK.
l Notice that the faucet and drain move to the other side of the tub.

3. Zoom out so the Kitchen can be seen.

4. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Full Camera , then click and drag to draw a camera arrow in the
Kitchen, pointed at the refrigerator.

308
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

5. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the refrigerator to select it.

6. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the GENERAL panel of the Fixture Specification dialog, check the box
next to Reflect Geometry and click OK.
7. Notice that the door handle moves to the opposite side of the refrigerator.

8. When you are finished, close the Camera view and Save your work.

CREATING A KITCHEN ELEVATION

Kitchen and bath plans often require cabinet elevations with dimensions. Wall Elevation views are often ideal for this task
because they only include objects in the same room as the camera.
The automatic dimension tools each have their own defaults dialogs. In addition, automatic dimensions inherit many of their
settings from the currently active Saved Dimension Defaults.

309
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

To set the Wall Elevation dimension defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog.

l Click the arrow beside "Camera Tools" to expand the category.

l Select "Wall Elevation" and click the Edit button.
2. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Wall Elevation Defaults dialog:
l Just like plan views, elevation views have saved defaults associated with them.
l These are the defaults that are active when a new Wall Elevation view is created.
l Notice, too, that Wall Elevations are set to use the "Kitchen and Bath Elevation Layer Set".

l Click the Edit Default button to the right of the Dimensions drop-down list.

3. In the Dimension Defaults dialog:

l Notice that Kitchen and Bath Dimension Defaults is stated in the title bar.
l On the SETUP AUTOMATIC panel, notice that you can specify which sides of the elevation Auto Elevation
Dimensions generate.
l On the LOCATE AUTO ELEVATION panel, you can choose to add an Outer Dimension as well as specify whether a
variety of different objects are located by Auto Elevation Dimensions.
l On the LAYER panel, notice that dimensions are created on the "Dimensions, Kitchen & Bath" layer when the
Kitchen and Bath Dimension Defaults are in use.
l On the TEXT STYLE panel, notice that dimensions use the 1/2" Text Style, which is assigned to their default layer,
when this saved default is active.
4. Click Cancel and then Done to close all dialogs.

To create a Wall Elevation view

1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Wall Elevation , then click one or two plan inches to the left of the
Kitchen island cabinets and drag a horizontal camera arrow from right to left.
2. In the Wall Elevation view that is created when you release the mouse button, notice:
l Only the Kitchen can be seen in the view.
l The Active Layer Display Options side window reports that the "Kitchen and Bath Elevation Layer Set" is now
active.
3. Select Tools> Edit Active View and on the GENERAL panel of the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog,
notice that Clip to Room is checked and click Cancel.

Automatic dimensions can be created with a single click, and then edited in a variety of ways.

310
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

To create Auto Elevation Dimensions

1. Select CAD> Automatic Dimensions> Auto Elevation Dimensions .

2. A complete set of dimensions are created around all four sides of the wall elevation.

Auto Elevation Dimensions on all four sides typically locate more objects than you actually need. Once created, though,
they are easily edited.
Extension line edit handles sometimes display in front of other objects and may not be easy to see. To make them easier to
use, you can change their fill color.

To change the edit handle fill color

1. Select Edit> Preferences in Windows or Chief Architect> Preferences in macOS.

2. On the COLORS panel of the Preferences dialog, click the Handle Fill Color button and choose a bright, easy to see
color, then click OK.

To move an extension line

1. Click the Select Objects button, then select the horizontal dimension line located above the model that has three
Centerline dimensions. Notice:
l The end points and each extension are numbered from left to right.
l Diamond-shaped edit handles under each CL extension are positioned on the surface of the object the extension
line locates. These are Move Extension Line edit handles.

311
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

2. Click on the diamond-shaped Move Extension Line edit handle associated with extension 2, located at the top center
of the under mount microwave and drag it to the left. Notice:
l As you drag, an extension line preview snaps to the location of each object that the dimension line can locate.
l The dimension value previews on either side of extension 2 update to reflect the line’s current location.
3. When the extension line locates the center of the right window, release the mouse button.
4. A message will confirm whether you want to turn off Auto Refresh Elevation Dimensions. Click the Yes button.

This particular extension line is not actually required, however, so it can be removed. There are two ways to do this.

To delete an extension line

1. Click and drag the extension line 2’s Move Extension Line edit handle to the right until it meets and replaces
extension 3.
2. Select Edit> Undo .

3. Click and drag the extension line 2’s Move Extension Line edit handle upwards, away from the dimension line
entirely. When the extension line’s number no longer displays, release the mouse button.

312
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

4. When you are finished editing extension lines, you may want to return to the COLORS panel of the Preferences dialog
and change the Handle Fill Color back to a pale grey color.

Extensions can also be added to dimension lines. See "To position a ceiling light" on page 329 of the Light Fixtures
Tutorial.

To reposition a dimension label

1. With the dimension line still selected, move your mouse pointer over the small, square Move Dimension Label edit
handle located in the middle of a dimension segment label.
2. When the mouse pointer turns into a four-headed arrow , click and drag to move the label.

Cabinet elevations sometimes use cross boxes to cover objects that are clipped in the view. CAD objects drawn in an
elevation are placed on the view’s Current CAD Layer.

To set kitchen and bath CAD defaults

1. Select Tools> Active View> Edit Active View .

2. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Wall Elevation Defaults dialog, note that the Current CAD Layer in this
view is "CAD, Kitchen and Bath" and click OK.

To add a cross box

1. Make sure that Object Snaps are enabled.

2. Select CAD> Boxes> Cross Box , then:

l Click on the top back corner of the refrigerator and drag across and down to the bottom front corner.
l When you release the mouse button, a cross box is created.
3. You can resize the cross box if you want:
l Click and drag a corner edit handle and notice that both adjacent edges move and/or resize but the corner angle
remains 90°.
l CAD Box objects like Cross Boxes always have four 90° corners.

313
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

Cabinet elevations are often included in construction documents, so this Wall Elevation view can be saved for use later on.
See "Sending Section and Elevation Views to Layout" on page 528 of the Sending Views to Layout Tutorial.

To save and name a camera

1. Select Tools> Active View> Save Active View .

2. Select Tools> Edit Active View to open the Camera Specification dialog.

l On the GENERAL panel, type a short, descriptive Name for the camera, like "Kitchen Elevation".
l On the PLAN DISPLAY panel, notice that the camera is set to display as a callout in plan view, and that its Callout
Label is E1.
l On the LAYER panel, notice that the camera is located on the "Cameras" layer. This layer controls its display in
plan view.
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.
3. Select File> Close View to close the camera view and return to plan view.
4. Remember to Save your work.

Saved camera views are listed in the Project Browser using their camera Name.

CREATING SCHEDULES
Several different schedules have been created in previous tutorials. Here, two different types of schedules will be created
using the same Fixture Schedule tool: one for appliances and one for plumbing fixtures.

To set fixture schedule defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings and in the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow beside "Schedules, select
"Fixture Schedule" from the list, and click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Fixture Schedule Defaults dialog:
l Under Categories to Include, expand the "Fixture" category and uncheck everything except "Appliances" and
"Plumbing".

314
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

l Under Columns to Include, remove all of the columns except "Qty", "Description", "Code", "Manufacturer", and
"Comments".
3. On the LABELS panel, select the Use Label radio button.
4. Click OK and Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To prevent your plan views from becoming unnecessarily cluttered, schedules should be placed in CAD Detail windows.
You can access these views in the Project Browser as well as via the CAD menu.

To create appliance and plumbing fixture schedules

1. Select CAD> CAD Detail Management .

2. In the CAD Detail Management dialog, select "Schedules Detail" and click the Open button.
3. Select Tools> Schedules> Fixture Schedule , then click once in an empty space near the other schedules.

4. If you wish, you can use Extension Snaps to align the Fixture Schedule below, above, or beside the other schedules
created previously. See "To create a room moldings schedule" on page 236 of the Room Moldings Tutorial.
5. Select the schedule and click the Open Object edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Fixture Schedule
Specification dialog:
l Change the Main Title to "Kitchen Appliance Schedule".
l Uncheck Include Objects from All Floors.
l Select "Kitchen" from the Include Objects from Room drop-down list.
l Under Objects to Include, uncheck "Plumbing".
l Click OK.
6. Create a second Fixture Schedule for plumbing fixtures using the steps above:
l Change the Main Title to "Plumbing Fixture Schedule".
l Add "Room Name" to the list of Columns to Include and move it to the top of the list.
l Under Objects to Include, uncheck "Appliances".
7. If you want, you can adjust the schedules' column widths so they are aligned. See To edit schedule columns on page
60.

An easy way to locate an object listed in a schedule is using the Find in Plan edit tool.

315
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

To customize an object’s Description

1. Select Window> Tile Vertically , then click in the plan view to make it the active window.

2. Click on the Apron Front Sink line item in the Plumbing Fixture Schedule to select it, then click the Find in Plan
edit button. The apron front sink will become selected in the plan view window.

3. Notice that its label reports the same information as the Description column in the Plumbing Fixture Schedule.
4. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the 3D panel of the Fixture Specification dialog:

l Notice that the symbol's Name is "Apron Front Sink"

l Notice, too, that "Width" is selected as the Include Size option. This is what produces the [29 1/2W] in its name.
l Click the drop-down list and select "None" instead.
5. On the OBJECT INFORMATION panel, notice:
l %automatic_description% is used as the symbol's Description.
l Code, Manufacturer, and Comment information can be added, as well, if you wish.
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your change.
6. Notice that the sink's automatic label updates to reflect your change.
7. Click on the Schedules Detail view tab and confirm that the sink’s Description in the Plumbing Fixture Schedule
also shows this change.
8. Other fixtures’ Descriptions can be modified, as well, if you wish.
9. When you are finished, close the "Schedules Detail" window and Save your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
Additional annotations for appliances can be added in plan view. Text objects can be used for this purpose as they have
been in previous tutorials, but so can the appliances’ object labels.
Object labels always use the Text Style assigned to their layer. An easy way to access this and other layer information is
using the Active Layer Display Options side window.

To set the defaults for fixture labels

1. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options . In the Active Layer Display Options side
window:

316
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

2. Click the Options button at the bottom left corner of the side window, then:

l Click on Columns in the contextual menu that opens.

l Click on Text Style in the submenu to add a check mark.
l Notice that in the list of layers above, there is now a Text Style column on the right.
3. Type "label" in the Name Filter field to show only layers with this word in their name, and notice that most of them
use the "1/2" Text Style". This allows various types of object labels to have the same, consistent appearance in views
using a particular layer set: here, the "Kitchen and Bath Layer Set".

317
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

4. Select a base cabinet in the drawing and notice that:

l Now, only seven layers display: the selected object’s layer, plus six others.
l When an object is selected, only the layers that affect that object’s appearance are listed.
5. Now select the refrigerator and notice that only two layer display: the "Fixtures, Interior" and "Fixtures, Labels"
layer.
6. Click on the "Fixtures, Labels" layer to select it, and notice that information about this layer displays and can be
edited at the bottom of the side window.

7. Click the Define button to the right of the Text Style drop-down list.
8. In the Saved Text Styles Defaults dialog, which opens next:
l Notice that there are a number of different Saved Text Styles set up for particular drawing scales and tasks.
l "1/2" Text Style" is selected in the list because it is assigned to the "Fixtures, Labels" layer.
l With the "1/2" Scale Text Style" selected, click the Edit button.
9. In the Text Style Defaults dialog, make sure that the box beside Uppercase is checked.

318
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

10. Click OK to close all dialogs.

Currently, the only appliance with a label showing is the dishwasher. This is because it is an inserted fixture that will
essentially replace an actual cabinet at that location. As such, its label displays along with the cabinet labels. The other
appliance labels can be turned on in any of several ways.

To turn on the display of appliance labels

1. Click to add a check mark in the Disp column for the "Fixtures, Labels" layer in the Active Layer Display Options
side window.
2. There are other ways to turn on the display of the "Fixtures, Labels" layer, as well:

l Select Tools> Layer Settings> Display Options to open the Layer Display Options dialog.

l With the refrigerator or any other fixture selected, click the Object Layer Properties edit button to open the
Object Layer Properties dialog.

Automatic symbol labels like the Apron Front Sink's report a symbol's Name and optional Include Size information. See To
customize an object’s Description on page 316, above. There are other ways to include size information in an object’s label
that give you more control over the formatting.

To specify an automatic label

1. Zoom in on the kitchen island.

2. Click the Select Next Object button, then click on the front of the range symbol visible to the left of the range
hood.
l The Architectural Block will become selected rather than the fixture symbol, which you can confirm by
checking the left side of the Status Bar at the bottom of the program window.

l Click the Select Next Object edit button to select the range.

l When the range is selected, its label can be seen from beneath the hood and the Status Bar will report that an
Interior Fixture is selected.
3. With the flat top range selected, click the Open Object edit button.

4. On the 3D panel of the Fixture Specification dialog, notice that the Name and Include Size selection match the
information in the range's automatic label.
5. On the LABEL panel:
l Click the Specify Label radio button.
l The text of the range's Name and Include Size information now populate the label text field.
l Delete this text and instead type: Flat Top Range

319
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

6. Next, click the Insert Macro button and:

l In the menu that opens, browse to and select Object Specific> Width.
l When you click on Width, "%width%" is added to the text field, after "Range".
l In the preview pane, you can see that the width is formatted with the inch sign ".
l Add a space after "Range", a W after %width%, and brackets [ ] around "%width% W".
7. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

In some cases, you may want to move or rotate an object label to improve its visibility.

To move and rotate object labels

1. Zoom in further on the flat top range.

2. With the range still selected, notice its edit handles. To the right of the square Move edit handle located at its center,
there is a small square Move Label handle.
3. Drag the Move Label edit handle to the left, past the edge of the range symbol.

4. Now click the Open Object edit button. On the Label panel of the Fixture Specification dialog:

l Under the Plan View Position and Orientation heading, notice that Y Offset value is not 0 like the X Offset is.
This is the result of moving the label using its edit handle.

320
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

l Set this value to as 18" and click OK.

5. Next, Pan or Zoom as needed so the under cabinet microwave can be seen at the top left corner of the
kitchen.
6. Select the microwave and notice that its label can now be seen.
7. Click the Move Label edit handle and drag to the right, past the edge of the countertop.
8. With the microwave symbol still selected:

l Notice the small triangular Rotate Label handle located near the Move Label handle.
l Click and drag the Rotate Label handle so the label is oriented horizontally instead of vertically.
9. Move the label closer to the back wall of the kitchen so it does not interfere with nearby cabinet labels.
10. With the microwave symbol still selected, click the Open Object edit button.

11. On the LABEL panel of the Fixture Specification dialog:

321
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

l Notice the Plan View Position and Orientation settings.

l Change the X Offset, Y Offset, and Angle settings all to 0 and press the Tab key to update the dialog.
l Notice that the label in the preview pane is returned to its original position in the middle of the symbol.
l Click Cancel.

To suppress an individual label

1. Select the apron sink in the kitchen and click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the LABEL panel of the Fixture Specification dialog, check Suppress Label and click OK.
3. Remember to Save your work.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Fixtures.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for placing fixtures and appliances.
To place built-in appliances 301
To place freestanding appliances 301
To modify an architectural block 302
To place an undermount appliance 303
To add a drop-in sink 304
To create an apron sink base 305
To add a Custom Backsplash 306
To place an apron sink 307
To place bathroom fixtures 307
To reverse a fixture symbol 308
To set the Wall Elevation dimension defaults 310
To create a Wall Elevation view 310
To create Auto Elevation Dimensions 311

322
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

To change the edit handle fill color 311

To move an extension line 311
To delete an extension line 312
To reposition a dimension label 313
To set kitchen and bath CAD defaults 313
To add a cross box 313
To save and name a camera 314
To set fixture schedule defaults 314
To create appliance and plumbing fixture schedules 315
To customize an object’s Description 316
To set the defaults for fixture labels 316
To turn on the display of appliance labels 319
To specify an automatic label 319
To move and rotate object labels 320
To suppress an individual label 322
To save a plan revision 322

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 16 - Appliances and Fixtures

What are the two broad categories of appliance fixtures that describe how they are placed?
l Freestanding appliances can be placed as independent objects.
l Built-in cabinets are designed to be inserted into cabinets, either in the front or in the countertop.
How can a cabinet drawer be removed?
l On the Front/Sides/Back panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog, click on the drawer in the preview pane, then
click the Delete button.
How are apron sink symbols different from drop-in sinks?
l Drop-in and undermount sinks are built-in or inserted objects. Vessel and apron sinks, on the other hand, are stand-
alone objects.
What tool can be used to position one object relative to a point on another object?
l The Point to Point Move edit tool lets you move an object by clicking on a point on that object, then clicking on a
different point somewhere else, including on another object.
What setting lets you flip features like opening handles from one side of a fixture to the other?
l On the General panel of the Fixture Specification dialog, check or uncheck the box beside Reverse Symbol.
What camera tool creates an elevation view of a single room?
l The Wall Elevation tool creates an elevation view of one wall in the room that the camera is created in.
What tool allows you to create dimensions around the sides of an elevation view?

323
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

l The Auto Elevation Dimensions tool creates dimensions above, below, and on both sides of the model in a cross
section or elevation view.
What are two ways to remove an extension from a dimension line?
l Both methods use the Move Extension Line edit handle: click and drag this handle to move an extension line to the
location of another extension line, or click and drag it away from the dimension line entirely.
Where do object labels get their appearance from?
l Object labels get their appearance from the Text Style that is assigned to their layer. Appliance labels, for example, get
their Text Style from the "Fixtures, Labels" layer by default.
What are two ways to move or rotate an object label?
l Object labels have their own Move and Rotate edit handles.
l You can also specify a label’s position and orientation in its object’s specification dialog, on the Label pane.

Light Fixtures
Lighting is an important practical and aesthetic consideration in any building plan.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for adding light fixtures to a plan. Concepts introduced include:
File Management 324
Productivity Tips 325
Setting the Defaults 325
Using Plan Views 327
Adding Ceiling Lighting 327
Adding Wall Lights 337
Adding Table and Floor Lights 340
Creating Schedules 341
Adding Annotations 342
Creating File Revisions 344

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Appliances and Fixtures tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Appliances
and CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working.
However, Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left
unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See Creating File Revisions on page 344.

324
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to add lighting to a plan, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l Use the Center Object edit tool to center a light fixture relative to a window, cabinet, or other object.

l The Reflect About Object edit tool lets you move one light to the other side of another light; use with the
Copy/Paste edit tool to create a row of evenly spaced fixtures.

l Use the Center Object edit tool to center a light fixture relative to a window, cabinet, or other object.

Content
l A selection of Lighting catalogs is available for download from the Chief Architect 3D Library. Select Library> Get
Additional Content Online to launch your default web browser to that page.
l Create template plans that have your custom light fixtures set as the defaults and ready for use when you begin a new
plan.

Interface
l Default Sets let you activate a set of defaults and layer settings for a specific purpose: for example, an electrical plan.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Ctrl/⌘ + L - Library Browser
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l Tab while moving - Enter Coordinates
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
adding light fixtures to a plan, there are several defaults that should be set in advance.
When positioning electrical objects, it is a good idea to make sure your Dimension Defaults are set to meet your needs. See
To set the dimension defaults on page 328.
Unlike other drawing tools, the Electrical Tools place symbol objects. You can specify which symbols are placed by these
tools in the Electrical Defaults dialog. Here, the default Light fixtures will be set; however, the defaults for outlets and
switches can also be specified.

325
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

To set the Electrical Defaults for light fixtures

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog.

l Click the arrow beside “Electrical” to expand the category.

l Select “General Electrical” and click the Edit button.
2. In the Electrical Defaults dialog, notice that there is a scrollable list of electrical objects for a variety of different
purposes.
l Select "Light - Ceiling" and notice that the default symbol is a 4" Recessed can light.
l Select "Light - Outdoor" and notice that the default symbol is a bollard light.
3. Select "Light - Wall" and click the Library button:

l In the Select Library Object dialog, the content is filtered by Type so that it only lists Electrical objects.

l The currently selected library object's Folder , Flush Mounted, is selected as a filter and shown in the
Folders tree list.
l Click on the Flush Mounted Folder to remove it from use as a filter and in the Search field, type "lighting".

l In the Filters drop-down list, click on the "Lighting Suites" Folder .

l The Folders panel tree list now expands to show the contents of Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural>
Lighting> Lighting Suites.
l Open the Small Cone folder and select the Small Cone Sconce, then click OK.
4. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.
5. Select File> Save to save these changes.

326
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
As noted in the Exterior Walls tutorial, Saved Plan Views have a number of important settings associated with them,
including active Layer Set and saved defaults. See "To examine a saved plan view’s settings" on page 7 of the Exterior
Walls Tutorial.
When you know that a particular task will require you to make changes to multiple layers and to create annotations using
different saved defaults, you can save time by opening a Saved Plan View created for that task.

To switch to a different saved plan view

1. Click the Saved Plan View Control drop-down, which is located in the top toolbar by default.

2. Select "Electrical Plan View" from the drop-down list.

3. The current view window remains open, and now uses the Electrical Plan View.
4. In the Active Layer Display Options side window, notice that the Active Layer Set Options side window reports
that the "Electrical Layer Set" is now active, and that:
l Kitchen and Bath text as well as door, window, cabinet labels no longer display.
l Furnishings do not display.
l The saved section view camera symbol does not display.
5. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser .

6. Right-click on the "Electrical Plan View" in the Project Browser and select Edit View from the contextual menu.
7. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, notice that the names of the Saved
Defaults associated with this view all begin with "Electrical", then click Cancel.

An electrical plan can now be drawn and annotated, without affecting the appearance of the kitchen plan or other plan
views.

ADDING CEILING LIGHTING

The Light tool will place a different fixture, depending on where you click: when you click on a wall, an interior or exterior
sconce will be placed; when you click in the middle of a room, a ceiling mounted fixture will be placed; if you click outside
a structure, a path light will be created.
Lighting is often described as having three categories: ambient, task, and accent. Ceiling lights provide examples of all
three.
Light fixtures can be placed using the Light tool as well as from the Library.

To add ceiling light fixtures

1. Select Build> Electrical> Light , then click in the Kitchen, between the island and the dishwasher. A recessed
can light, as specified in the Electrical Defaults dialog, is created.

327
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

2. Select View> Library Browser to open the Library Browser:

l Browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Lighting> Chandeliers> Pendant Chandeliers.
l Select the "Bowl Chandelier" and click in the Dining area to place a copy at that location.
l Browse to the Lighting> Ceiling Mounted> Flush Mount folder, select the "Half Dome" symbol, and click in
the Foyer, near the front door.
l Browse to the Lighting> Ceiling Mounted> Recessed folder, select the "Recessed Eyeball Light (rotated)" and
click in the Foyer, in line with the door to the Garage.
l Browse to the Lighting> Pendants folder, select the "Craftsman Lantern", and click an empty space in the
Deck.

Once a room has a can light in it, that light can be positioned and then replicated to produce evenly spaced ambient lights.

To set the dimension defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings , click the arrow next to "Dimension" to expand the category, then select
"Dimensions" and click the Edit button.
2. In the Saved Dimension Defaults dialog that opens next, notice that "Electrical Dimension Defaults" is selected and
click the Edit button.
3. On the SETUP panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog:
l Notice that "Electrical Dimension Defaults" is stated in the title bar.
l Notice, too, the Reach setting. This value controls how close an eligible object must be in order for a
dimension line to locate it as it is drawn.

328
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

4. On the LOCATE MANUAL panel, under the Locate Objects heading:

l Under the Cabinets heading, check the box beside Sides.
l Under the Fixtures/Appliances heading, check the box beside Sides/Corners.
l Under the Other Objects heading, make sure that Electrical is checked.
l Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

Ceiling can lights are often positioned at regular intervals. There are several ways to achieve this.

To position a ceiling light

1. Zoom in on the Kitchen.

2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the recessed can light to select it.

3. Select CAD> Dimensions> Manual Dimension , then click and drag to draw a vertical dimension line from the
front of the refrigerator to the bottom edge of the island.

l Draw the dimension line on the far right side of the refrigerator so it is more than 24" away from the recessed
can light, leaving it beyond the default Reach distance.
4. Use the dimension line to position the island Architectural Block 3' 6" away from the refrigerator:

l Click the Select Objects button, then click on the island.

l Move your mouse pointer over the dimension line.

l When the arrow changes to a pointing hand, click once.
l Type 42" in the inline text field and click OK.

329
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

5. Select the dimension line and add an extension line that locates the recessed can light:

l Click and drag the diamond-shaped Add Extension Line edit handle towards the light.
l When an extension line to the light displays, release the mouse button.

l The dimension line now locates the light fixture as well as the two cabinets.
l Click on the can light to select it.

l If the dimension line is selected instead, click the Select Next Object edit button or press the Tab key as
needed until the light becomes selected.
l The type of object currently selected is stated at the bottom left corner of the program window, in the Status Bar.

330
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

6. With the light fixture selected:

l Click on one of the dimension labels.

l In the inline text field, type in a new dimension and press the Enter key.
l The light will move to the new position that you specified.
l The space between the island and refrigerator is 3’ 6" wide, so typing 1' 9" will center the light between the
two.
7. Center the light in the 42" space between the dishwasher and the island cabinets:

l Draw a Manual Dimension from the dishwasher to the can light.

l Select the can light, then click on the dimension line.

l In the inline text field, type 21" and press the Enter key.

8. When you are finished, the dimension lines can be deleted if you wish. See "To delete a dimension line" on page 44
of the Interior Walls Tutorial.

There are a number of ways to replicate objects like light fixtures. The best method to use will depend on the specific
circumstances and your needs.

331
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

To specify ceiling light spacing

1. Click on the can light to select it, then click the Copy/Paste edit button.

2. Click and drag the Move edit handle upward and with the mouse button held down, press the Tab key.

3. In the Enter Coordinates dialog, specify End Point Y Position as 40".

4. When you click OK, a copy of the can light is created 40" above the original on-screen.

5. With the new can light still selected, hold down the Shift key and click on the other can light to add it to the
selection set. Then:

332
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button.

l Click the Reflect About Object edit button.

l Move your mouse pointer over the kitchen island Architectural Block and look for a horizontal dashed
reflection axis line.
l When you see the reflection axis, click once to make a copy of the lights identically spaced on the other side of
the island.

6. Use the Shift key to select all four can lights as a group and click the Transform/Replicate Object edit button.
In the Transform/Replicate Object dialog:

l Check the box beside Copy and specify the Number of Copies as 1.
l Under the Move heading, specify the X Delta value as 6’ 6".
l Click OK.
7. With the four newly pasted can lights selected, click on the two middle lights one at a time to remove them from the
selection set.

333
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

8. With the top and bottom lights still selected, click the Transform/Replicate Object edit button and:

l Check the box beside Copy and specify the Number of Copies as 1.
l Specify the X Delta value as - 3’ 3". This value is half the distance used previously, and the negative value will
position the copies to the left of the originals rather than to the right.
l Click OK.

9. Remember to Save your work.

In some spaces, a regularly spaced array of ceiling lights is required.

334
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

To create an array of lights

1. Go Down One Floor to Floor 0.

2. Select Build> Electrical> Light , and place a can light in the lower left corner of the basement.

3. Select CAD> Dimensions> End to End Dimension , then click and drag to draw dimension lines between the
can light and the two nearest exterior walls.
4. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the can light to select it.

5. Click on each dimension line, and in the inline text field, type 5’ and press the Enter key.

6. With the can light still selected, click the Multiple Copy edit button.

335
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

7. Next, click the Multiple Copy Interval edit button, and in the Multiple Copy Interval dialog:

l For General Objects, specify the Primary Offset as 50".

l For General Objects, specify the Secondary Offset as 52".
l Click OK.
8. Move the mouse pointer over the can light, and when the pointer displays the Multiple Copy icon, right-click and
drag upward to create a row of evenly-spaced copies.

336
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

9. Release the right mouse button, then:

l With no mouse button pressed, drag to the right, across the wider portion of the basement.
l Click once to create an array of lights in the wider portion of the basement.
10. With the top right can light selected:

l Hold down the Shift key and select the light immediately below it to select it as well.

l Click the Multiple Copy edit button.

l Left-click and drag to the right to create three more pairs of lights.
11. When you are finished, Save your work.

ADDING WALL LIGHTS

Wall lights can also add ambient, task and accent lighting.

337
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

To add wall lights

1. Select Build> Electrical> Light , then click in the Kitchen, on the wall over the sink to place a sconce light at
that location.

2. Click on the light to select it and click the Open Object edit button. In the Electrical Service Specification
dialog, note that the light is the "Small Cone Sconce" specified as the default interior wall light, then click the
Cancel button.
3. With the Light tool still active, click in the Deck, to the right of the sliding door.

4. Select this new light and click the Open Object edit button. Notice that this light is the "Wide Brim Sconce"
specified as the default exterior wall light, then click the Cancel button.
5. In the Library Browser , browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Lighting> Wall Mounted>
Flush Mount.
6. Select the "Prism Sconce", then click in the Bath to place two sconces: one above each side of the vanity.

Once placed, wall lights can be modified. Properties like height are sometimes most easily adjusted in a 3D view.

338
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

To edit wall lights

1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Wall Elevation , then click and drag a camera arrow in the Kitchen
room, pointed towards the left vertical wall. Be sure to draw the camera arrow perfectly horizontal.
2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the wall sconce to select it.

3. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the GENERAL panel of the Electrical Service Specification dialog,
change the Height to Center to 86" and click OK.
4. With the sconce still selected, center it over the left window:

l Click the Center Object edit button.

l Move your mouse pointer over the left window.

l Look for an outline to display around the window and a vertical dashed centering axis to display below it, near
the bottom of the view extents.
l When the outline and centering axis can be seen, click once to center the sconce.

339
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

5. Click the Copy/Paste edit button, then drag the sconce’s Move edit handle to create a copy over the middle
window.
6. Use the Center Object edit tool to center the new sconce over the middle window.

7. Repeat steps 4 - 6 to create a light centered over the right window as well.

8. The position of the bathroom sconces can be adjusted in the same manner.
9. When you are finished, select File> Close View to return to plan view.
10. Remember to Save your work.

ADDING TABLE AND FLOOR LIGHTS

A variety of additional light fixtures are available in the Library Browser that are designed to be cabinet-mounted or rest on
a table or the floor.
In order to place table and floor lamps, the display of furnishings should be turned on.

To add table and floor lights

1. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options . In the Active Layer Display Options side
window:
l Begin typing "furniture" in the Name Filter field.
l Select the "Furniture, Interior" layer and click in the Disp. column to add a check mark.

2. In the Library Browser , type "table lamp" in the Search field and click on the Table Lamps Folder in the
Filters drop-down list.

340
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

l The Folders panel expands to show the contents of Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Lighting>
Lamps> Table Lamps.
l Select the "Table Lamp", move the mouse pointer into the Bedroom, and click to place a lamp on each of the
night stands.
3. In the Library, search for "floor lamp and select the Floor Lamps Folder in the Filters drop-down list.

4. Select a "Floor Lamp", and click to place a lamp in the top right corner of the Living room.

CREATING SCHEDULES
In previous tutorials, schedules were created using the Schedule Tools. Another option allows you to quickly create a
schedule of objects located in a single room.
Although a typical plan is unlikely to have more than one electrical schedule, it is still a good idea to set up the schedule
defaults the way you want them in your template plans. "To set schedule defaults" on page 105 of the Doors and Windows
Tutorial.

To create a kitchen lighting schedule

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click in an empty space in the Kitchen to select it.

2. Click the Create Schedule from Room edit button.

3. In the Create Room Schedule dialog, select Electrical and click OK.
4. Click once in the plan view to place a schedule at that location.
5. Select the schedule and click the Open Object edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Electrical Schedule
Specification dialog:

l Change the Main Title to "Kitchen Lighting Schedule".

l Notice that "Kitchen 13’-0" x 15’ x 7"" is selected in the Include Objects from Room drop-down list.

341
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

l Under Objects to Include, uncheck Outlets, Switches, and Other so that only Lighting is selected.
l Click OK.

To prevent your plan views from becoming unnecessarily cluttered, schedules should be placed in CAD Detail windows.

To move a schedule to a CAD Detail

1. With the schedule still selected select Edit> Cut .

2. Select CAD> CAD Detail Management .

3. In the CAD Detail Management dialog, select the "Schedules Detail" and click Open.
4. Select Edit> Paste> Paste and click once in an empty space to the right of the other schedules to place the
electrical schedule at that location.
5. Select File> Close View to close the Schedule Detail window.
6. When you are finished, Save your work.

Lights are often included in electrical legends, as well. See "Adding a Legend" on page 356 of the Electrical Objects
Tutorial.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
With lighting in place, relevant annotations can be added.
In previous tutorials, the "Kitchen & Bath Plan View" was active, annotations were added using "Kitchen and Bath Rich
Text Defaults", and were placed on the "Text, Kitchen & Bath", layer. That layer was turned off, however, when the
"Electrical Plan View" was opened. See Light Fixtures on page 324.
In addition to creating an uncluttered space for drawing lighting and other electrical objects, another benefit of switching to
the "Electrical Plan View" is that annotations added while it is active will be placed on their own layer. This means that
electrical annotations will display in the electrical plan but not in other views.

To set the Rich Text defaults

1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser

2. Right-click on "Electrical Plan View" and select Edit View from the contextual menu.
3. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, click the Edit button to the
right of Rich Text to open the Rich Text Defaults dialog.
4. In the Rich Text Defaults dialog, notice that "Electrical Rich Text Defaults" is stated in the dialog box’s title bar.
5. On the RICH TEXT panel:

342
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

l Click the Uppercase button.

l Notice that the character size is set at 6". This is the same size as used in the Working Plan View and Roof Plan
View, and will produce a capital A that is 1/8" tall when printed. See "To set the rich text defaults" on page 182 of
the Dormers Tutorial.
6. On the APPEARANCE panel, note that Rich Text is placed on the "Text, Electrical" layer by default when this Saved
Default is active.
7. Click OK to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

Text macros can be used to insert dynamic information about an object into a text object with a line with arrow that points
to that object.

To use a text macro in rich text annotations

1. Zoom in on the Deck room.

2. Select CAD> Text> Leader Line , then:

l Click on the center of the ceiling light and drag a line to the left. When the line is one or two plan feet in length,
release the mouse button.
l You can click and drag to draw a second line segment attached to the end of the first line if you wish. See "To set
leader line preferences" on page 107 of the Doors and Windows Tutorial.
l Alternatively, simply click an additional time to draw no additional leader line segments.
l Either way, when you release the mouse button, the Rich Text Specification dialog opens.
3. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:

l Type the following macro into the text field: %description%

l Click OK.
4. Instead of displaying the text that you typed, the Rich Text object reports the Description of the light fixture that the
leader line is snapped to: in this case, "CRAFTSMAN LANTERN".

5. When you are finished, Save your work.

Lights and other electrical symbols are often listed in an electrical legend. See Adding a Legend on page 356.

343
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

You can continue working on this plan in the Electrical Objects tutorial.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Lighting.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for adding lighting to a plan.
To set the Electrical Defaults for light fixtures 326
To switch to a different saved plan view 327
To add ceiling light fixtures 327
To set the dimension defaults 328
To position a ceiling light 329
To specify ceiling light spacing 332
To create an array of lights 335
To add wall lights 338
To edit wall lights 339
To add table and floor lights 340
To create a kitchen lighting schedule 341
To move a schedule to a CAD Detail 342
To set the Rich Text defaults 342
To use a text macro in rich text annotations 343
To save a plan revision 344

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 17 - Light Fixtures

How does the Light tool behave differently depending on where you click?

344
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

l The Light tool will place a different fixture, depending on where you click: when you click on a wall, an interior or
exterior sconce will be placed; when you click in the middle of a room, a ceiling mounted fixture will be placed; if you
click outside of a structure, a path light will be created.
What are two ways you can get a dimension line to locate a light fixture?
l Dimension lines can be drawn directly from a light fixture to another object.
l A dimension line can also be drawn between two objects, and then an extension line can be added to the dimension
line, locating the light fixture as well.
What are two edit tools that can be used to create an evenly spaced set of ceiling lights?
l The Transform/Replicate Object and Multiple Copy edit tools can both be used to create evenly spaced sets of ceiling
lights.
What edit tool lets you efficiently create an array or grid of ceiling lights?
l The Multiple Copy tool lets you create an array of objects like ceiling lights.
What edit tool lets you create a schedule of objects located in a specific room?
l The Create Schedule from Room edit tool lets you create a schedule of objects that are located in the currently selected
room.

Electrical Objects
Like lighting, electrical switches and outlets are an important practical consideration. So, too, are data and security items
like jacks and smoke detectors.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for placing electrical, data, and security items. Concepts introduced
include:
Productivity Tips 346
Setting the Defaults 346
Using Plan Views 347
Placing Outlets 347
Placing Switches 352
Drawing Electrical Connections 353
Adding Data and Security Items 355
Adding a Legend 356
Creating File Revisions 356

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Light Fixtures tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Lighting and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.

345
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See Creating File Revisions on page 356.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to add electrical objects to a plan, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l Use the Center Object edit tool to center a light fixture relative to a window, cabinet, or other object.

l The Reflect About Object edit tool lets you move one outlet to the other side of another outlet; use with the
Copy/Paste edit tool to create a row of evenly spaced outlets.
l Make a dimension line locate an additional object by adding an extension line to it.

Content
l A selection of special outlets, switches, and data and security items is available in the Core Catalogs of the Library
Browser.
l Create template plans that have your preferred switches and outlets set as the defaults and ready for use when you
begin a new plan.

Interface
l Wall mounted items like outlets and switches are often best edited in camera views.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Ctrl/⌘ + L - Library Browser
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l Tab while moving - Enter Coordinates
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
adding electrical objects to a plan, it is a good idea to set your Electrical Defaults in advance.
Unlike other drawing tools, Electrical Tools place symbols from the Library. You can specify which symbols are placed by
these tools in the Electrical Defaults dialog. See "To set the Electrical Defaults for light fixtures" on page 326 of the Light
Fixtures Tutorial.
An electrical layout is an example of a plan view that requires its own set of annotations and layer settings. See To switch to
a different saved plan view on page 327.

346
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Electrical Plan View will work well for adding electrical and data items, as it did when adding lighting in the Light
Fixtures tutorial. See "To switch to a different saved plan view" on page 327 of the Light Fixtures Tutorial.

PLACING OUTLETS
Electrical Outlets can be placed using the 110V, GFCI, and 220V Outlet tools, as well as from the Library. The type of
outlet symbol that is created by the Outlet tools depends on the location where it is placed.

To place wall and floor outlets

1. Zoom in on the Kitchen.

2. Select Build> Electrical> 110V Outlet , then click along the wall at the back of the refrigerator to place a 110V
outlet at that location.
3. Place another 110V Outlet to the left of the sliding door to the Deck.
4. Place a third in the Deck room, also to the left of the sliding door.
l Note that its symbol includes the letters WP, which stands for "weatherproof".
l This outlet is currently offset from the wall because it is attached to the stone layer of the lower exterior pony
wall. This will be addressed in a moment.
5. Move the mouse pointer an empty space in the Kitchen and notice that the object preview outline has a square
around it, indicating that a floor outlet will be placed at that location if you click.

6. Click the Select Objects button, then click on one of the 110 Volt outlets to select it.

l If you select a different object like a wall, cabinet, or fixture instead, click the Select Next Object edit
button until the outlet becomes selected.
l You can see what kind of object is currently selected on the left side of the Status Bar.

l With the outlet selected, click the Open Object edit button and on the GENERAL panel of the Electrical
Service Specification dialog, notice that the Height to Center is 11 1/2" and click Cancel.

347
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

To recess a wall-mounted electrical object

1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Wall Elevation , then click in the Deck room and drag a camera arrow
downward, towards the main house.
2. Zoom in on outlet to the right of the siding door.

3. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the outlet to select it.

4. Click the Open Object edit button and on the GENERAL panel of the Electrical Service Specification dialog,
change the Distance from Wall value to -4", then click OK.

5. Click the Select Objects button once more to deselect the outlet and notice that it is no longer visible because it
is embedded 4" into the wall.
6. Select Build> Wall> Wall Material Region , then and drag to draw a rectangular region around the area where
the outlet is located.
7. When you release the mouse button and the region is created, the outlet becomes visible.
8. Select the Wall Material Region and click the Open Object edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Electrical
Service Specification dialog:

348
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

l Notice that Cut Finish Layers of Parent is checked.

l This explains why the front of the outlet became visible when the region was created: all of the wall's exterior
layers do not generate within the region's area.
l Click the Cancel button.
9. With the Wall Material Region still selected, use its edit handles to resize it so it matches the size and shape of the
outlet.
10. When you are finished, close the Wall Elevation view and notice that the waterproof outlet on the Deck is now
aligned with the wall in plan view.

To place an outlet above the countertop

1. Select Build> Electrical> GFCI Outlet ,

2. Click along the left vertical wall of the Kitchen, under a window, to place a GFCI outlet at that location.

3. Click on the outlet to select it and click the Open Object edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Electrical
Service Specification dialog:
l Notice that the Height to Center is 43" rather than 11".
l This is because this outlet was placed using an Outlet tool at a location where a countertop is present.
l Because this outlet should be under the window, change the Height to Center is 39", then click OK.

To rotate a wall-mounted electrical symbol

1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Wall Elevation , then click between the kitchen island and the cabinets
to the left, and drag a camera arrow to the left.
2. In the Wall Elevation view, Zoom in on the outlet.

3. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the outlet to select it and rotate it so that it is oriented horizontally
instead of vertically:

349
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

l Move your mouse pointer over the triangular Rotate edit handle.
l Click and drag in a circular motion until the cabinet has rotated 90°, then release the mouse button.
4. A Question message will ask if you want to regenerate the outlet’s 2D plan view symbol.
l Be sure to click No to continue using the standard symbol for 110V outlets.
l If you click Yes, the standard CAD symbol for 110V outlets will be replaced by a thin rectangle representing
the outlet’s shape, as viewed looking straight down on it.

To lay out kitchen counter outlets

1. With the outlet still selected, click the Center Object edit button.

2. Move the mouse pointer over the apron sink base, and when a vertical centering axis displays, click once to center
the outlet under the window.
3. Click the outlet’s square Move edit handle and drag to the right, and with the mouse button held down, press the Tab
key.
4. In the Enter Coordinates dialog:

l Make sure Relative to Start is selected.

l Specify the End Point X Position as 72" and make sure the End Point Y Position is 0".

350
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

l Click OK.
5. With the outlet still selected, click the Transform/Replicate Objects edit button.

6. In the Transform/Replicate Object dialog, which opens next:

l Check the box beside Copy and set the Number of Copies to be 3.
l The box beside Move should be checked. If there is not, click to add a check mark.
l In the Y Delta field, type -48".
l Make sure that Relative to Itself is checked and click OK.

7. Select File> Close View to return to plan view.

8. Copy and paste one more GFCI outlets on the horizontal wall, to the left of the refrigerator:
l Select one of the existing GFCI outlets.

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button.

l Click once along the horizontal wall to place a final GFCI outlet.

To add outlets from the library

1. If it is not already open, select View> Library Browser .

2. In the Library Search field, type "outlets" and select the "Outlets" Folder line item in the Filters drop-down list.

3. The Folders panel will expand to show the contents of Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Mechanical, Electrical,
Plumbing> Electrical> Outlets.
4. Browse to Floor Mounted> 220V and select the 220V Receptacle symbol.
5. Move the mouse pointer over the kitchen island click once to place a 220 volt floor outlet for the range.
6. Next, browse to Outlets> Surface Mounted> Appliances and place a wall-mounted Garbage Disposal outlet behind
the sink base
7. Place a wall-mounted Garbage Disposal outlet behind the sink base.

351
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

PLACING SWITCHES
With lights and outlets in place, electrical switches to control them are needed. Switches can be placed using the Switch tool
as well as by selecting symbols from the Library Browser.

To place switches
1. Select Build> Electrical> Switch , then click on the back horizontal wall, to the right of the sliding door to the
Deck to place a switch at that location.
2. Place a second switch to the right of the doorway into the Dining room.
3. Select View> Library Browser , then browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Mechanical, Electrical,
Plumbing> Electrical> Switches.
4. Select the "Air Switch - Countertop" symbol, then on the countertop near the sink to place an air switch for the
garbage disposal at that location.

352
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

Multiple single switches can be positioned side-by-side to form multi-gang switches. Multi-gang outlets can also be created
using this technique.

To create multi-gang switches

1. Zoom in on the switch located near the sliding door to the Deck.

2. Use the Switch tool to place two more switches to the right of the existing switch.

3. Adjust the switches' positions using either their edit handles or the Arrow keys on the keyboard so they are spaced
the way you want them.

4. Place a second switch to the right of the doorway to the Dining room as well.
5. When you are finished, Save your work.

DRAWING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

With lights, outlets, and switches in place, wiring connections can be drawn.

353
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

To draw electrical connections

1. Select Build> Electrical> Electrical Connection , then click on the switch that is closest to the sliding door to
the Deck.
2. Hold the mouse button down, drag a line to the exterior wall light on the Deck, and release the mouse button to
create an Electrical Connection spline.
3. Draw a second spline between the wall light and the Deck ceiling light.

To create three way connections

1. Use the Electrical Connection tool to draw an Electrical Connection spline between the middle switch to the
right of the sliding door and the top right can light in the Kitchen.
2. Draw another spline between the top right can light and the light located below it.

3. Continue drawing splines to connect the four lights on the right side of the Kitchen.

354
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

4. Draw a final spline from the bottom right can light to a switch located to the right of the doorway to the Dining
room.

5. Notice that when the circuit has switches on each end, they automatically become 3 Way switches.

6. When you are finished, be sure to Save your work.

Once drawn, Electrical Connection splines can be selected and edited like other spline-based objects.

ADDING DATA AND SECURITY ITEMS

A selection of data and security objects is available in the Library.

355
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

To add data and security symbols

1. Select View> Library Browser to open the Library Browser side window.

2. Browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing> Electrical.

3. Notice that there is a selection of Detectors and Alarms, Jacks, and other Special Symbols.
4. Select any of these symbols to place them in your plan.
5. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

ADDING A LEGEND
An electrical legend can be created using an Electrical Schedule.

To create an electrical legend

1. If it is not open, select View> Project Browser , then:

l Click the arrow next to CAD Details to expand the category.

l Right-click on "Legends and Notes" and select Open View from the contextual menu.

l You can also open CAD Detail windows by selecting CAD> CAD Detail Management .

2. Select Tools> Schedules> Electrical Schedule , then click in an empty space near the Wall Legend to place an
Electrical Schedule.
3. Select the new schedule and click the Open Object edit button.

4. On the GENERAL panel of the Electrical Schedule Specification dialog:

l Click in the Main Title text field and rename the schedule "Electrical Legend".
l Make sure both Scale Images and Use Plan View Scale are checked.
5. Remember to Save your work.

You can continue working on this plan in the Floor Framing tutorial.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.

356
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Electrical.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for placing electrical outlets and switches.
To save a plan revision 356

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 18 - Electrical Objects

How does the Outlet tool behave differently depending on where you click?
l The Outlet tool will place a different outlet type, depending on where you click:
o Click on a wall in an interior room to place a standard 110V outlet.
o Click on a wall in an exterior room or on the building’s exterior to place a weatherproof outlet.
o Click in the middle of a room to place a floor mounted outlet.
How do you create multi-gang Switches?
l Multiple single switches can be positioned side-by-side to form multi-gang switches. Multi-gang outlet can also be
created using this technique.
What tool can be used to connect Switches to Lights and Outlets?
l The Connect Electrical tool can be used to draw splines connecting switches to lights and outlet.
Where can you specify whether an outlet is floor or ceiling mounted?
l Where an outlet mounts is specified on the Options panel of its Electrical Service Specification dialog.
What setting allows or prevents a symbol’s CAD block from being replaced when the symbol is resized or rotated?
l The Auto Generate Block options on the 2D Block panel of the Symbol Object Specification dialogs control whether
or not a symbol’s CAD block gets replaced.
What dialog lists all of the CAD blocks referenced by the current plan?
l The CAD Block Management dialog lists all of the CAD blocks referenced by the current plan.
What edit tool lets you make changes to the individual components objects in a CAD block?
l The Explode CAD Block edit tool breaks a CAD block into its individual components so they can be edited.

357
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Framing Tutorials

Framing Tutorials Chapter 5

The Framing Tutorials describe best practices for generating and editing framing in Chief Architect Premier:

TOPICS
Floor Framing 359
Wall Framing 377
Roof and Ceiling Framing 393

358
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

Floor Framing
Floor platforms are framed using joists and beams, often using a combination of automatic and manually edited framing.
Lowered ceilings can be added under floor platforms, as well.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect Premier for generating floor and ceiling framing. Concepts introduced
include:
File Management 359
Productivity Tips 359
Setting the Defaults 360
Using Plan Views 361
Generating Floor and Lowered Ceiling Framing 361
Using Bearing Walls 364
Adding Posts and Beams 366
Editing Floor and Ceiling Framing 371
Adding Annotations 374
Creating File Revisions 376

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Electrical Objects tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Electrical and
CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working.
However, Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left
unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create floor and ceiling framing, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l Before generating framing, place a Framing Reference Marker at the point where you would like the framing
layout to be measured from.
l Most framing plans are a combination of manually drawn and automatically generated framing objects.

359
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

Content
l Create template plans that have your preferred structural defaults set and ready for use when you begin a new plan.

Interface
l When drawing and editing framing, it may be helpful to turn off Grid Snaps . Object Snaps , however, should
be left on.
l Default Sets let you activate a set of defaults and layer settings for a specific purpose: for example, framing plans.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
adding floor and ceiling framing to a plan, there are several defaults of particular importance.
Settings in the Floor Defaults dialogs that affect the overall height of a structure will also affect the heights of floor and
ceiling platforms.
Floor Defaults also include the default Ceiling Heights and Floor and Ceiling Platform Thicknesses.
The structure of individual rooms can be customized, as well.
Deck framing automatically generates separate from interior floor framing using settings from the Deck Room Defaults
dialog.
The default floor framing structures were set in the Exterior Walls tutorial; however, additional floor framing defaults can
also be set in the Framing Defaults dialog.
Snap settings play an important role when framing objects are drawn and edited. It is usually helpful to toggle Grid Snaps
off. Object Snaps, however, should be toggled on.

To set the Snap Settings

1. Begin by turning off Grid Snaps: select Edit> Snap Settings> and notice whether there is a small check mark in the
icon to the left of Grid Snaps .

l If there is a check mark, Grid Snaps are currently toggled on. To turn them off, click on Grid Snaps in the
submenu.
l If there is no check mark, Grid Snaps are already toggled off.
2. Make sure that Object Snaps are turned on: select Edit> Snap Settings> Object Snaps .

360
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
Several different Saved Plan Views have been used in previous tutorials. Framing is another example of a drawing task that
is made easier and more efficient by using a Saved Plan View created for that purpose.
In the Chic Cottage Roof tutorial, the Roof Plan View and Working Plan View were open at the same time and the two
views’ appearance and settings were compared. Then, the Working Plan View was closed and work was done in the Roof
Plan View.
A more efficient way to switch between Saved Plan Views is using the Saved Plan View Control drop-down in the
toolbars.

To switch to a different saved plan view

1. Click the Saved Plan View Control drop-down, which is located in the top toolbar by default.

2. Select "Framing, Floor Plan View" from the drop-down list.

3. The current view window remains open, and now uses the Framing, Floor Plan View.
4. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options . Note that the Active Layer Set Options
side window reports that the "Framing, Floor Layer Set" is now active, and that:
l Cabinets, fixtures, and electrical objects no longer display.
l Room Labels do not display.
l Doors and window openings now display only header lines using a dashed line style and do not include casing
or sills.
5. Switch to the Project Browser side window by clicking on its tab. If it is not open, select View> Project Browser
. Next:

l Click the arrow to the left of "Plan Views" to expand the category.
l Right-click on the "Framing, Floor Plan View" and select Edit View from the contextual menu.
6. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Plan View Specification dialog, notice that the names of the Saved
Defaults associated with this view all begin with "Framing" and end with "Floor", then click Cancel.

The settings in the "Framing, Floor Plan View" are typical of floor framing drawings and will make working on floor
framing easier.

GENERATING FLOOR AND LOWERED CEILING FRAMING

The floor framing for a given floor level is always generated or manually drawn on the floor level below.
The default floor framing structures were set in the Exterior Walls tutorial; however, additional floor framing defaults can
also be set in the Framing Defaults dialog.

361
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

To set the default joist width

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog.

l Click the arrow beside “Framing” to expand the category.

l Select "General Framing" and click the Edit button.
2. On the FOUNDATION panel of the Framing Defaults dialog, under the "Subfloor for Floor 1" heading:

l Notice that the Floor Structure is 12" in depth, as set in the Exterior Walls tutorial.
l Make sure the Spacing is set to 16".
l Specify the Width of the joists as 1 1/2".
3. Repeat step #2 on the 1ST and 2nd panels, as well.
4. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs.

Before generating framing, it is a good idea to place a Framing Reference Marker to specify the point where the framing
layout is measured from.

To place a Framing Reference Marker

1. Go to Floor 1 and Zoom in on the lower left corner of the structure.

2. Select Build> Framing> Framing Reference Marker and move the mouse pointer over the wall intersection.

3. When an Endpoint Snap Indicator displays at the outside corner of the wall framing, click once to place a
Framing Reference Marker at that location.

4. When you are finished, Save your work.

The Framing, Floor Plan View is set up specifically to show floor framing. For the purposes of exploring how floor and
lowered ceiling framing work, both types of joists need to display. One solution is to create a custom layer set.

362
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

To create and use a custom Layer Set

1. If it is not already open, select View>Active Layer Display Options . In the Active Layer Display Options side
window:
l Note that "Framing, Floor Layer Set" is selected at the top of the window.
l Click the Copy Set button.
2. In the New Layer Set dialog, type a short, descriptive Name for the new Layer Set, such as "Framing Set - Working"
and click OK.

3. Notice that "Framing Set - Working" is now the selected layer set.
4. Turn on the "Framing, Ceiling Joists" layer.

The "Framing Set - Working" can now be changed as needed while editing framing objects, while the original "Framing,
Floor Layer Set" will be ready for use when it is time to create framing plans for printing.

To generate floor and ceiling framing

1. Go Down One Floor to Floor 0 and select Window> Fill Window .

2. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing .

3. In the Build Framing dialog:

363
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

l You can choose which categories of framing to generate, as well as specify whether they automatically rebuild
when changes are made to the model.
l Under the Automatically Rebuild Framing option, check the boxes beside Floors and Ceilings.
l Click OK.

Note: When floor or ceiling framing is set to generate

automatically in the Build Framing dialog, it will do so
automatically for all floors, and will rebuild any time changes are
made to the model that affect floor or ceiling platforms.

There are several ways to change the direction of floor and ceiling joists. The Joist Direction Line tool is one of them,
although it is typically only useful in situations where joists can span in either direction and still be structurally sound.

To use a Joist Direction Line

1. Select Build> Framing> Joist Direction .

2. Click inside the basement room and drag to draw a horizontal line.
3. When you release the mouse button, notice that the floor and ceiling joists rebuild to follow the same direction as the
Joist Direction Line.

4. Select the Joist Direction Line and use its Rotate handle to rotate it 90°. With Auto Rebuild Floor and Ceiling
Framing checked, both the floor and ceiling joists rebuild vertically to follow the Joist Direction Line.
5. Select the Joist Direction Line and Delete it. Notice that both floor and lowered ceiling joists change back to
their original directions.
6. Select Edit> Undo to restore the vertical Joist Direction Line.

7. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing and clear the check box next to Automatically Build Framing, which
will prevent all categories of framing from automatically rebuilding, then click OK.
8. Delete the Joist Direction Line and notice that this time, none of the joists are modified.

9. When you are finished, Save your work.

USING BEARING WALLS

Another way to control joist direction is by specifying key walls as Bearing Walls that floor and ceiling joists can bear on.
This is the recommended method in most situations because it affects the structure by allowing shorter joist spans.

364
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

To specify an interior bearing wall

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the wall to the left of the staircase to select it.

l If a different object is selected instead, click the Select Next Object edit button.

l The type of object selected is stated on the left side of the Status Bar.
2. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the GENERAL panel of the Wall Specification dialog:

l Check the box beside Foundation Wall.

l Notice that a footing is added under the wall in its dialog preview.
3. On the STRUCTURE panel, check the box beside Bearing Wall and click OK.

Because Auto Rebuild Floor and Ceiling Framing has been turned off, the program must be directed to rebuild the floor
joists.

To rebuild floor framing for a single floor level

1. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing .

2. In the Build Framing dialog:

l Under the Build Framing Once option, check the box beside Floors.
l Select "Floor 1" from the drop-down list to only rebuild the floor joists for that floor level.
l Click OK.
3. Notice that the floor joists change direction, running horizontally and bearing on the Bearing Wall created above,
while the lowered ceiling framing is unchanged.

365
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

4. When you are finished, Save your work.

ADDING POSTS AND BEAMS

One other way to modify the structure and produce shorter joist spans is by adding beams that floor and ceiling joists can
bear on.

To set the post and beam defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings , and in the Default Settings dialog, select "Framing" in the list and click the Edit
button.
2. On the BEAMS panel of the Framing Defaults dialog:
l Click the radio button beside With Joists.
l Click the Edit Floor Beam Defaults button. Note that the default beams are Lumber measuring 12" x 3 1/2",
then click OK.
3. On the POSTS panel:
l Click the radio button beside Square.
l Notice that you can specify the defaults for Post Footings created using the Post with Footing tool.
l Click the Edit Post Defaults button. Note that the default posts are set as Lumber measuring 3 1/2" x 3 1/2",
then click OK.
4. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

It is easier to place posts and draw beams when no joists are present in the view. When placing posts in walls, displaying
wall layers is also helpful. An easy way to achieve both is to switch to the "Working Layer Set".

366
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

To add a post
1. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options and then:

l Select "Working Layer Set" from the Layer Sets drop-down list.
l Notice that the display of framing is turned off while the display of wall layers is turned on.
2. Zoom in on the top end of the interior wall next to the stairwell.

3. Select Build> Framing> Post with Footing , then move the mouse pointer over the end of the wall and click
once to place a post inside the wall’s framing layer.

4. A message will ask whether you want to turn on the "Framing, Posts" layer. Click the Yes button.
5. Place a second Post with Footing in the corner of the wall furring at the top left corner of the Garage area.

With the posts in place, beams can be drawn. When With Joists is specified in the Framing Defaults dialog, Floor/Ceiling
Beams will draw with the same top height as joists.

367
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

To draw a beam at joist level

1. Zoom in on the post located at top end of the wall next to the staircase.

2. Select Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling Beam , then:

l Move the mouse pointer over the bottom edge of the post.
l When the Midpoint snap indicator displays, click the mouse button.

l Drag upward to draw a floor beam.

3. Zoom out as needed so the back wall of the basement can be seen.

If you zoom out using the mouse scroll wheel, the beam will
remain selected.

4. Extend the floor beam upward until it reaches the outside surface of the back basement wall’s furring layer.
5. You can add a Post with Footing to support this end of the beam, as well.

6. Select the beam and click the Open Object edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Framing Specification
(Floor Beam) dialog:

368
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

l Notice that the Top Height is -3/4", which puts it directly underneath the subfloor on Floor 1, even with the
tops of the joists.
l Click Cancel.

To create a beam that runs under the floor joists, you can either change the default Placement setting for beams to Under
Joists, or you can draw a beam and then edit its height.

To position a beam below floor joists

1. Draw a Floor/Ceiling Beam from the post located near the Garage to the back basement wall, as described
above.
2. Add a Post with Footing at the top end of the beam.

3. Select the beam and click the Open Object edit button.

4. On the GENERAL panel of the Framing Specification (Floor Beam) dialog:

l The Top Height is -3/4", which puts it directly underneath the subfloor on Floor 1, even with the tops of the
joists.
l Check the box beside Raise/Lower, and in the field to the right, type -11 7/8", which is the depth of the floor
joists.
5. Click the Apply button and:

l Notice that the Top and Bottom Height values adjust to this change.
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply the change in height to the beam.
6. In the Active Layer Display Options side window, select "Framing Set - Working" as the active layer set again.

369
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

7. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing , and in the Build Framing dialog:

l Under the Build Framing Once option, check the box beside Floors.
l Select "Floor 1" from the drop-down list to only rebuild the floor joists for that floor level.
l Click OK.
8. Notice:
l The joists butt against the beam on the left.
l The joists lap over the beam on the right.
l To make this easier to see, you can temporarily turn off the "Soffits" and "Framing, Ceiling Joists" layers.

9. The difference can also be seen in a Back Clipped Cross Section view. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View>
Back Clipped Cross Section , then click and drag a short camera arrow in the basement area. Be sure to draw
the camera arrow straight up on-screen.

370
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

10. When you are finished, select File> Close View to return to plan view.

You can also create joists that pass over a beam without breaking.

To prevent joists from breaking over a beam

1. Select the beam on the right and click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Framing Specification (Floor Beam) dialog, uncheck Bearing Beam and click OK.
3. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing , and build Floor framing for Floor 1, as described above.

4. The joists now run across the top of the beam on the right without interruption.
5. Remember to Save your work.

EDITING FLOOR AND CEILING FRAMING

Once floor and ceiling framing have been generated, it can be modified. Floor and ceiling framing can be moved and resized
using their edit handles, edit tools, and specification dialogs.
The lowered ceiling framing in Chic Cottage is for sound-proofing only, so it does not need to extend over the exterior
concrete walls like the structural floor platform does.

To move joists
1. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options . In the Active Layer Display Options side
window:
l First, make sure that the "Framing Set - Working" layer set is in use.
l Turn off the display of the "Framing, Floor Joists" layer.
l Turn off the "Footings" layer.
l Turn on the "Walls, Layers".
l Turn off the "Walls, Main Layer Only"
l Lock the "Walls, Foundation" layer.

371
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

2. Zoom in on the bottom left corner of the basement.

3. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the horizontal ceiling joist located over air gap in the basement
wall assembly.

l If a different object is selected instead, click the Select Next Object edit button.

l When the joist is selected, it will display the grey Selection Fill color, which you can customize on the Colors
panel of the Preferences dialog.
l The type of object selected is also stated on the left side of the Status Bar.
4. Click the joist’s Move edit handle and drag upwards until its bottom edge aligns with the outside edge of the
basement wall’s furring layer.
5. As you drag upwards, notice that the vertical joists display the Selection Fill color and are bumped upwards by the
selected joist.

6. Zoom in on the top left corner of the basement. Notice:

l The vertical joists extend through the exterior wall's air gap to the edge of the concrete layer.
l The horizontal ceiling joist positioned at their ends was also pushed and is now located in the concrete layer.
7. Select Edit>Snap Settings>Bumping/Pushing to turn off the bumping and pushing behavior.

372
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

8. Select the horizontal joist and drag its Move edit handle downward until its top edge aligns with the outside edge
of the basement wall’s furring layer.
9. Notice that now, the vertical ceiling joists do not get pushed and extend through the horizontal joist after it is moved.
10. Select Edit>Snap Settings>Bumping/Pushing to turn the bumping and pushing behavior on again.

To trim joists
1. With the horizontal ceiling joist still selected:

l Click the Trim Object(s) edit button.

l Click the Sticky Mode edit button.

2. Move your mouse pointer just below the select joist, between the ends of the vertical ceiling joists that extend over
the concrete wall.
3. Click and drag a temporary cutting line through one or more of the vertical ceiling joists' ends.

4. When you release the mouse button, the vertical joists are trimmed to the top edge of the selected horizontal ceiling
joist.

5. Continue clicking and dragging to trim all of the vertical joists that extend over the selected horizontal joist.

373
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

To delete a joist
1. Select the vertical lowered ceiling joist located over the left basement wall.
2. Click the Delete edit button or press the Delete key.

3. Once you are done editing floor and ceiling framing, open the Active Layer Display Options side window and switch
back to the Framing, Floor Layer Set.
4. When you are finished, Save your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
With the floor framing in place, some framing annotations can be added.
In the Light Fixtures and Electrical Objects Tutorials, the "Electrical Plan View" was active, annotations were added using
"Electrical Rich Text Defaults", and were placed on the "Text, Electrical" layer. That layer was turned off, however, when
the "Framing, Floor Plan View" was opened.
In addition to creating an uncluttered space for generating, editing, and displaying floor framing, another benefit of
switching to the "Framing, Floor Plan View" is that annotations added while it is active will be placed on their own layer.
This means that floor framing annotations will display in the floor framing plan but not in other views.

To set the rich text defaults

1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser .

2. Right-click on "Framing, Floor Plan View" and select Edit View from the contextual menu.
3. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, click the Edit button to the
right of Rich Text to open the Rich Text Defaults dialog.
4. In the Rich Text Defaults dialog, notice that "Framing Rich Text Defaults, Floor" is stated in the dialog box’s title
bar.
5. On the RICH TEXT panel:

l Click the Uppercase button.

l Click the Align Center button.

l Notice that the character size is set at 6". This is the same size as used in the Working, Roof, and Electrical
Plan Views and will produce a capital A that is 1/8" tall when printed.

374
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

6. On the APPEARANCE panel:

l Note that Rich Text is placed on the "Text, Framing - Floor" Layer by default when this Saved Default is
active.
l Check the box beside Border to produce a border around Rich Text objects when "Framing Rich Text
Defaults, Floor" is active and notice that the border’s default Color, Line Style, and Line Weight can be
specified.
7. Also on the APPEARANCE panel, increase the Margins to 6".
8. Click OK to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To add rich text annotations

1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text , then click in the view, near the front left corner of the drawing on Floor 0.

2. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:

l Confirm that Uppercase is active.
l In the text field, type the following: all floor joists are u.n.o.:
l Press the Enter key and note that the text wraps to a second line.
l Type: 2x12s SPF #2 or better @16" O.C.
3. Use your mouse to highlight the first line of text, then click the Underline button to apply that attribute to the
selection.
4. Use your mouse to highlight just the letter x in 2x12, then click the Uppercase button to remove that attribute
from the selection.
5. Select the letter s after 2x12 and remove its Uppercase attribute as well.

375
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

6. Click OK to close the dialog and create a Rich Text object with a border.

7. Select the newly created Rich Text object and click the Copy/Paste edit button.

8. Click once near the deck joists at the back of the drawing to create a copy of the text at that location.
9. With the newly pasted text selected, modify its text:

l Click the Open Object edit button.

l On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog, replace the word "floor" with "deck".
l Replace the number "12" with "10", then click OK.

10. Remember to Save your work.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Floor Framing.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating and editing floor and lowered ceiling framing.

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 19 - Floor Framing

What does a Framing Reference Marker do?

376
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

l A Framing Reference Marker specifies the point where framing layout is measured from. Before generating framing, it
is a good idea to place a Framing Reference Marker.
When working on framing, what is helpful about switching to the Framing, Floor Plan View?
l The Framing Layer Set becomes active, so unnecessary objects like wall layers and cabinets no longer display.
l Most of the Active Defaults’ names begin with the word "Framing", which means that they are set up for use
specifically in framing plans and will create objects on layers that only display when the Framing Layer Set is active.
How does the presence of soffits against the ceiling affect lowered ceiling framing?
l The ceiling finish layers, including lowered ceiling framing, do not generate anywhere a soffit touches the ceiling
surface.
What determines the direction of automatically generated joists?
l By default, floor and ceiling joists will generate in whatever direction results in the shortest spans. The Joist Direction
Line tool can be used to specify joist direction regardless of span. Interior bearing walls and bearing beams can change
the direction of shortest span.
What effect does an interior bearing wall have on the floor framing in Chic Cottage?
l The interior bearing wall on Floor 0 causes the floor joists to change direction and bear on that wall instead of the
horizontal exterior walls. Lowered ceiling framing is not affected.
What is the difference between the two floor beams drawn in Chic Cottage?
l One beam is drawn at the same height as the floor joists and one is drawn lower, so the joists bear directly on top of it.
What edit tool can be used to adjust the lengths of multiple joists?
l The Trim Objects edit tool allows you to trim framing members to the edge of a selected object.

Wall Framing
Wall framing is typically generated automatically, and can be edited in a Wall Detail view.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect Premier for generating wall framing. Concepts introduced include:

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Floor Framing tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Floor Framing and
CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working.
However, Chic Cottage-Floor [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left
unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

377
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create wall framing, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l Before generating framing, place a Framing Reference Marker at the point where you would like the framing
layout to be measured from.
l Wall framing can often be edited most effectively in a Wall Detail view.

Content
l Create template plans that have your preferred structural defaults set and ready for use when you begin a new plan.

Interface
l Wall Details and other saved views are listed in and can be opened from the Project Browser side window.
l When drawing and editing framing, it may be helpful to turn off Grid Snaps . Object Snaps , however, should
be left on.
l Default Sets let you activate a set of defaults and layer settings for a specific purpose: for example, framing plans.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l ‘ - Layer Display Options
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
adding wall framing to a plan, there are a number of defaults of particular importance.
Many of the defaults associated with wall framing are set in the Wall Type Definitions assigned to the walls in the plan.
Settings in the Floor Defaults dialogs that affect the overall height of a structure will also naturally affect wall heights.
The structure of individual rooms can be customized, and may also affect wall heights.
The defaults for wall top and bottom plates, headers, and more can be set in the Framing Defaults dialog.
Door and window rough openings, headers, and more are specified in their respective defaults dialogs, and can be
customized in their individual specification dialogs.
Before generating framing, it is a good idea to place a Framing Reference Marker to specify the point where the framing
layout is measured from.
When working with framing objects, it is often helpful to toggle Grid Snaps off. Object Snaps , however, should be
toggled on.

378
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
Wall framing is not typically shown in most plan views in construction documents; however, it can be useful to see and edit
it in plan view while working on a design. For this purpose, switch to the Working Plan View, then select "Framing Set -
Working" as the active layer set in the Active Layer Display Options side window.

GENERATING WALL FRAMING

Wall framing is always generated automatically using the Build Framing dialog.

To generate wall framing

1. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing .

2. In the Build Framing dialog, under the Build Framing Once heading, check the box next to Walls and click OK.
3. In plan view, only wall studs and headers will display, regardless of which layers are turned on.
4. Go Up One Floor to Floor 1 and notice that door and window headers receive automatic labels describing their
size and number.
5. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Framing Overview to see the plates and sills.

6. When you are finished, select File> Close View and Save your work.

EDITING WALL FRAMING

Once generated, wall framing can be edited to produce a variety of configurations.
Because wall framing is generated inside walls, it is helpful to modify some layer settings before trying to select and edit it.

To modify layer settings

1. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options .

2. In the Active Layer Display Options side window:

l Turn off the display of the "Framing, Ceiling Joists" and "Framing, Rim Joists" layers.
l Lock the "Walls, Railings" layer.

379
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

To edit wall studs

1. Still on Floor 1, Zoom in on the lower left corner of the Porch.

2. Click on the vertical corner wall stud positioned above the horizontal stud and use its Move edit handle to move
it upward, out of the corner.

3. Select the horizontal corner wall stud and click the Transform/Replicate Object edit button. In the
Transform/Replicate Object dialog:

l Check the box beside Copy and specify the Number of Copies as 3.
l Confirm that the box beside Move is checked and specify the Y Delta value as 1 1/2".
l Click OK to create a total of 4 horizontal corner studs.
4. Select the vertical corner stud that was moved in step 2 and click the Open Object edit button.

380
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

5. On the GENERAL panel of the Framing Specification (Wall Framing) dialog:

l Specify the Width as 3 1/2".

l Make sure that Flat to Inside is selected.
l Click OK.
6. With the vertical stud still selected, click the Point to Point Move edit button, then:

l Move the mouse pointer over the stud’s lower right corner. When the Endpoint Snap Indicator displays,
click once.
l Move the mouse pointer over the top right corner of the top horizontal corner stud. When the Endpoint
Snap Indicator displays, click once.
7. When you are finished, Save your work.

SPECIFYING STUD SPACING

By default, stud spacing is set in the properties of the material assigned to each wall type’s framing layer. Although like all
defaults, it is best to set this up as early as possible, you can change a wall type’s stud spacing after wall framing is built.
Although not a common requirement, it is possible to specify stud thickness and spacing for all walls in throughout a plan.

To specify stud spacing by wall type

1. Go Down One Floor to Floor 0.

2. Select Build> Wall> Define Wall Types .

381
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

3. In the Wall Type Definitions dialog:

l Select the "8" Concrete with Furring" wall type from the drop-down list at the top left corner of the dialog.
l Click on Layer 3 to select it.
l On the Material Properties panel, note that the structure Type is "Framing" and the Spacing is 16" On Center.
4. Change the Spacing to 24" On Center.
5. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your change to this wall type.
6. Be sure to Save your work when you are done.

Notice that the framing in the basement walls does not change. In order for it to update, it will have to be regenerated.

REGENERATING WALL FRAMING

In order for changes to a setting like stud spacing to affect framing, the framing needs to be rebuilt. There are three ways
that this can be accomplished:
l Set wall framing to build automatically in the Build Framing dialog.
l Check the box beside Wall under Build Framing Once in the Build Framing dialog.
l Use the Build Framing for Selected Object(s) edit tool.
When wall framing is generated using the Build Framing dialog, wall framing is generated plan-wide. This means that
manually edited wall framing will be deleted and replaced unless precautions are taken.

To regenerate all wall framing

1. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing , check the box beside Wall under Build Framing Once in the Build
Framing dialog, and click OK.
2. Notice that:
l The spacing of the basement wall framing increases.
l Although the "Walls, Foundation" layer is currently locked, it is still possible to make changes to these walls. If
objects are on a locked layer, it only means that they cannot be selected.
3. Go Up One Floor to Floor 1.

4. Zoom in on the Porch and notice that the customized wall corner framing has been replaced.

5. Select Edit> Undo to undo the previous action and restore the wall corner framing.

To rebuild framing in selected walls

1. Go Down One Floor to Floor 0 and notice that the basement wall framing is spaced at 16" on center again.

2. In the Active Layer Display Options side window, unlock the "Walls, Foundation" layer.

382
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

3. Click the Select Objects button, then select the basement walls as a group:

l Click on one of the basement walls to select it.

l Hold down the Shift key and click on the other walls that define the basement area to add them to the selection
set.
4. When all six of the basement walls are selected, click the Build Framing for Selected Object(s) edit button.

Wall framing should only be edited when you are confident that you will not need to regenerate wall framing throughout the
plan. To avoid losing your work, though, you can specify that a wall’s framing not be rebuilt.

To retain wall framing

1. Go Up One Floor to Floor 1.

2. In the Active Layer Display Options side window, unlock the "Walls, Railings" layer.
3. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the front railing of the Porch to select it.

4. Press the Shift key and click on the side Porch railing to add it to the selection set.
5. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the STRUCTURE panel of the Railing Specification dialog, check
Retain Wall Framing and click OK.

6. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing , and on the WALL panel of the Build Framing dialog, check Build
Wall Framing and click OK.
7. Notice that this time, the customized wall corner framing is not replaced.
8. When you are finished, Save your work.

WORKING IN WALL DETAILS

Wall Details are a special type of view in which only the studs, plates and headers used to frame a selected wall display.
By default, Wall Details use the naming convention "Wall Detail - X", where X is simply a number. A more descriptive
name can be assigned to any Wall Detail by customizing the associated wall’s label.

383
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

To specify a Wall Detail’s name

1. In plan view, click the Select Objects button, then click on the wall that contains the kitchen windows.

2. Click the Open Object edit button and on the LABEL panel of the Wall Specification dialog:

3. Click the radio button beside Specify Label.

4. Notice that the text field becomes populated by the name of the Wall Detail associated with the wall.
5. Delete the default name and type a short description like "Kitchen Window Wall", then click OK.
6. A Wall Detail can be opened in either of two ways: by selecting a wall and clicking the Wall Detail edit button,
and using the Project Browser.

To find and open a Wall Detail view

1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser .

2. Click the arrow next to "Wall Details" to expand a list of subfolders, one for each floor in the plan.
3. Click the arrow next to the "1st Floor" subfolder to expand a list of the Wall Details for all walls on Floor 1 of the
CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plan.

4. The "Kitchen Window Wall" detail should be the first item in the "1st Floor" folder. Right-click on it and select

384
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

Open View from the contextual menu.

Wall framing can be selected and edited in a Wall Detail. Wall Details are also the only views in which Wall Bridging can
be drawn.

To draw Blocking in a Wall Detail

1. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing , and on the WALL panel of the Build Framing dialog, note that
Stagger Blocking is checked, then click Cancel.
2. Select Build> Framing> Blocking , then move your mouse pointer over the midpoint of either end wall stud.

3. When the Midpoint Snap Indicator displays, click and drag a horizontal line across the wall until you reach the
side of the first window.

385
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

4. Repeat these steps to create blocking between the windows and at the other end of the wall.

5. When you are finished, Save your work but leave the Wall Detail view open.

If you rebuild wall framing after manually editing in a Wall Detail, your changes will be lost. To protect changes made to a
wall’s framing, check Retain Wall Framing in the Wall Specification dialog.

DIMENSIONING A WALL DETAIL

Dimensions and annotations can be added to Wall Detail views, and just like plan, elevation, and other CAD Detail views,
Wall Details have saved defaults associated with them. Wall Details use the Default Set that was active when they were
created and are assigned the "Detail Layer Set" by default. Once created, though, both can be changed and will be saved
with the view.

To set the Dimension Defaults

1. Select Tools> Active View> Edit Active View .

2. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the CAD Detail Specification dialog:

l Notice that the Default Set the Wall Detail view is Currently Using is the "Plan Default Set" and that most of
the Selected Defaults’ names begin with "Plan", as well.
l Recall that the Working, Roof, and Electrical Plan Views have defaults set up for printing at a 1/4" = 1’ scale.
See "To set the rich text defaults" on page 182 of the Dormers Tutorial.
3. Details are typically printed at a larger scale than plan views are, so select "1/2" Scale Default Set" from the
Currently Using drop-down list.
4. The 1/2" Scale defaults are not task-specific and may be used in any view, whereas Wall Details have a few
formatting requirements that are not needed in all views.

l Click the New Default button to the right of Dimension.

l In the New Default dialog, type a short, descriptive name like, "Wall Detail Dimension Defaults" and click
OK.
5. In the Dimension Defaults dialog which opens next, notice that "Wall Detail Dimension Defaults" is stated in the
dialog box’s title bar.

386
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

6. On the PRIMARY FORMAT panel:

l Select " from the Units drop-down list.

l Make sure that Smallest Fraction is selected and that 16 is set as the denominator.
7. On the LOCATE MANUAL panel, make sure under "Framing", Both Sides is selected.
8. On the LOCATE END TO END panel, make sure under "Framing", Both Sides is selected.
9. On the TEXT STYLE panel:
l Notice that the "1" Text Style" is in use and that it uses a Character Height of 1".
l Select Use Custom Text Style.
l Specify a Character Height of 6".
10. On the ARROW panel, specify the Size as 6", as well.
11. Click OK to return to the CAD Detail Specification dialog and notice:
l The Selected Defaults for Dimensions is "Wall Detail Dimension Defaults".
l The Default Set that the Wall Detail is Currently Using is now described as "Active Defaults". This is because
there is no saved Default Set that uses the new "Wall Detail Dimension Defaults".
12. Click the Save New Active Default button to the right of the Currently Using drop-down list and in the New
Default Set dialog, type a short, descriptive name like, "Wall Detail Default Set" and click OK.

The new Wall Detail Default Set is now in use in the currently open Wall Detail, and will be available in other views, as
well.

To draw dimension lines

1. Select CAD> Dimensions> End to End Dimension , then click and drag to draw a vertical End to End
Dimension line on the left side of the wall framing, measuring the wall’s total height

2. Draw a horizontal End to End Dimension line about 12" above the wall’s top plate.

387
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

3. Click on the dimension line to select it, then click on the Move edit handle that displays where you clicked on the
line and drag upwards above the top plate 24".
4. Draw another horizontal End to End Dimension line identical to the one created in step 3, and in the original
location.
5. Draw an End to End Dimension inside each of the two window openings.

To add a secondary dimension label

1. Select the topmost horizontal dimension line and click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the SECONDARY FORMAT panel of the Dimension Line Specification dialog:

l Uncheck Use Default Formatting.

l Check Use Second Format.
l Select ’ from the Units drop-down list.
l Under the Accuracy heading, select Smallest Fraction.
l Click OK.

388
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

To add extension lines

1. Click on the lower 336" long horizontal dimension line to select it.
2. Notice the diamond shaped edit handle located just above the location where you clicked.
3. Click and drag this Add Extension Line edit handle towards the bottom midpoint of the left window header.

4. When a new extension line locating the header displays, and the Midpoint Snap Indicator can be seen, release the
mouse button.
5. Repeat these steps to add an extension line that locates the header on the right.
6. Using the same technique, add extension lines that locates both sides of the blocking for the interior wall.
7. Select the vertical dimension line and add an extension line locating the horizontal blocking.

389
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

The Running Dimension tool creates cumulative dimension lines that can be used to measure the framing members that
support window openings. Running Dimensions use the settings on the Locate Manual panel of the Dimension Defaults
dialog.

To draw a Running Dimension line

1. Zoom in on the right half of the wall framing.

2. Select CAD> Dimensions> Running Dimension , then click and drag to draw a vertical dimension line on the
right side of the window opening, from the bottom of the wall framing to the bottom of the header.
3. Click on the dimension line to select it, then click on the Move edit handle that displays where you clicked on the
line and drag to the right until it is about 12" past the last stud.

4. Running Dimensions have a number of special features:

l A circle indicating the starting end of the dimension line.
l Arrows that only point in one direction: away from the starting end.
l Each dimension label is positioned near the arrow associated with its segment.

390
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

l The dimension values in each segment of this dimension line are cumulative: each measures from the same
point at the bottom of the wall.
l These features are more easily seen when extra extension lines are removed.

To move and remove extension lines

1. Click on the Running Dimension line to select it.
2. Notice the diamond shaped edit handles located at the far ends of each of the extension lines. These are Extension
Line handles.
3. Click on the Extension Line handle located at the top of the window sill board and drag it to the left until it snaps to
the bottom of the sill board of the other window opening.
4. Click and drag the extension line locating the bottom surface of the wall’s bottom plate and drag it to the right, past
the dimension line itself. When you release the mouse button, it will be removed from the dimension line.

5. When you are finished, select File> Close View to return to plan view.
6. Remember to Save your work.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Wall Framing.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

391
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for generating and editing wall framing.
To generate wall framing 379
To modify layer settings 379
To edit wall studs 380
To specify stud spacing by wall type 381
To regenerate all wall framing 382
To rebuild framing in selected walls 382
To retain wall framing 383
To specify a Wall Detail’s name 384
To find and open a Wall Detail view 384
To draw Blocking in a Wall Detail 385
To set the Dimension Defaults 386
To draw dimension lines 387
To add a secondary dimension label 388
To add extension lines 389
To draw a Running Dimension line 390
To move and remove extension lines 391
To save a plan revision 391

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 20 - Wall Framing

What are the two types of wall framing object that can be seen in plan view?
l Wall studs and headers are the only types of wall framing that can be seen in plan view.
Where should wall stud spacing be set in most cases?
l Wall stud spacing should be set in the Wall Type Definition.
Where is the default rough opening size for doors and windows set?
l Door and window rough openings are specified in their respective defaults dialogs, and can be customized in their
individual specification dialogs.
What can you do to prevent objects on a particular layer from being selected?
l If you lock a layer in the Layer Display Options dialog, objects on that layer cannot be selected.
What are two ways that manually edited wall framing can be protected when other wall framing needs to be rebuilt?
l You can rebuild framing in a selected wall only by clicking the Build Framing for Selected Object(s) edit button.
l You can also check the box beside Retain Wall Framing on the Structure panel of the Wall Specification dialog to
prevent the selected wall's framing from being rebuilt.
How is wall Blocking drawn?

392
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

l Wall Blocking can only be drawn in a Wall Detail view using the Blocking tool.
How do you get a dimension line to display two dimension labels instead of one?
l A second label can be specified on the Secondary Format panel of the Dimension Line Specification dialog.
What Dimension tool allows you to create a dimension line with segments that all measure from the same point?
l The Running Dimension tool creates dimension lines that measure all segments from the same beginning point.

Roof and Ceiling Framing

Roof and ceiling framing are typically generated automatically and then edited as needed.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect Premier for generating roof framing. Concepts introduced include:
Productivity Tips 393
Setting the Defaults 394
Using Plan Views 394
Generating Roof Framing 395
Modifying Roof Framing 397
Editing Roof Framing 399
Generating Ceiling Framing 404
Editing Ceiling Framing 406
Adding Annotations 408
Creating File Revisions 409

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Wall Framing tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Wall Framing and
CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working.
However, Chic Cottage-Wall [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left
unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create roof framing, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

393
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

Drawing and Editing

l The Paste Hold Position tool lets you create a copy of an object at the identical position as the original, but on a
different floor.
l Select a group of objects of the same type by activating the tool used to draw them, holding down the Shift key, and
then drawing a selection marquee.

Content
l Create template plans that have your preferred structural defaults set and ready for use when you begin a new plan.
l Template plans can also include custom Layer Sets.

Interface
l When drawing and editing framing, it may be helpful to turn off Grid Snaps . Object Snaps , however, should
be left on.
l Tiling 2D and 3D views can help in the positioning of objects like posts.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l F9 - Reference Display
l Ctrl/Command + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/Command + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
adding roof framing to a plan, there are several defaults of particular importance.
Primarily, since roof framing generates inside the roof planes, it is important that the roof be completely correct before you
build roof framing. If you design a roof and then later on decide that its structure needs to be changed, you need to either
edit the roof planes or rebuild the roof.
Before generating framing, place a Framing Reference Marker to set where framing layout is pulled from.
As with other types of framing objects, when working on roof and ceiling framing it is often helpful to toggle Grid Snaps
off. Object Snaps, however, should be toggled on.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
As with floor framing, roof framing is an example of a drawing task that is made easier and more efficient by using a Saved
Plan View created for that purpose.

394
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

To switch to a different saved plan view

1. Click the Saved Plan View Control drop-down, which is located in the top toolbar by default.

2. Select "Framing, Roof Plan View" from the drop-down list.

3. The current view window remains open, and now uses the Framing, Roof Plan View.
4. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options . Note that the Active Layer Set Options
side window reports that the "Framing, Roof Layer Set" is now active, and that it is similar in most ways to the other
framing layer sets.
5. Switch to the Project Browser side window by clicking on its tab. If it is not open, select View> Project Browser
. Next:

l Click the arrow to the left of "Plan Views" to expand the category.
l Right-click on the "Framing, Roof Plan View" and select Edit View from the contextual menu.
6. In the Saved Plan View Specification dialog:
l On the GENERAL panel, select "2nd Floor" as the Floor that is used whenever this view is opened.
l On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel, notice that the names of the Saved Defaults associated with this view all
begin with "Framing" and end with "Roof".
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your change.
7. When you are finished, Save your work.

The settings in the "Framing, Roof Plan View" are typical of roof framing drawings and will make working on roof framing
easier.

GENERATING ROOF FRAMING

Roof defaults can be set in both the Framing Defaults and the Build Roof dialogs. The settings used to actually generate
roof framing are those in each roof plane's specification dialog, regardless of whether they are using the defaults.

To generate roof framing

1. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof .

2. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Build Roof dialog:

l Check Use Framing Reference.
l Specify the Rafter Spacing as 16" On Center.
l Under the Roof Layers heading, click the Edit button to the right of Structure.
3. In the Roof Structure Definition dialog, increase the depth of the framing to 11 1/4" and click OK.

395
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

4. Returning to the STRUCTURE panel:

l Specify the Width of the Ridge board as 3 1/2" and its Depth as 15 1/4".
l Check the box beside Build Roof Framing and click OK.
5. Notice that a message warns that the changes made to the roof framing defaults will not affect the existing roof
planes.
l This will be addressed in the Modifying Roof Framing on page 397 section, below.
l Click OK to close the message box.

The meaning of the warning message becomes clear when the newly generated roof framing is examined. Roof framing can
be viewed in both 2D and 3D views.

To examine roof framing

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on a roof rafter to select it.

2. Click the Open Object edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Framing Specification (Rafter) dialog, note
that the Depth is 9 1/4" rather than the 11 1/4" specified above, then click Cancel.

396
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

3. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Framing Overview .

4. Zoom in on the ridge of the roof.

5. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the ridge board to select it. Notice that a Temporary Dimension
reports its depth as 11 1/4" rather than the 15 1/4" specified above

6. With the ridge board selected, click the Open Object edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Framing
Specification (Rafter Ridge) dialog, confirm that the Depth is 11 1/4", then click Cancel.
7. Select File> Close View and Save your work.

The reason why the roof framing does not reflect the current defaults is that the roof framing is generated based on the
current state of the roof planes in the plan - not on the defaults. The roof planes in this plan were created using earlier
structural default settings and as a result, they have framing specifications that are different from the current defaults. In
order to produce roof framing that does use the new defaults, the roof will need to be edited and the framing, rebuilt.

MODIFYING ROOF FRAMING

In order to apply changes made to the roof framing defaults to the roof already drawn in a plan, the roof must either be
rebuilt, or edited. Since some of Chic Cottage’s roof planes have been manually edited, it will be more efficient to edit the
existing roof planes.
The Edit All Roof Planes tool allows you to open the Roof Plane Specification dialog shared by all roof planes in the
current plan. A wide variety of style and structural settings can be modified, but bear in mind that changes to structure depth
using this tool are not recommended because they can have unintended effects on roof height and connections between roof
planes.

397
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

To modify the entire roof structure

1. Select Build> Roof> Edit All Roof Planes .

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Roof Plane Specification dialog:

3. Notice:
l Most of the values are reported as "No Change". This is because this dialog is shared by all roof planes in the
plan, as though they had been group-selected, and not all roof planes have the same height values.
l The Baseline Height for all roofs is locked and a different height reference cannot be selected. This means that
if the depth of the roof planes' Structure or Ceiling Layers is modified, the tops of the roofs will remain at the
same heights but the bottom will change.
4. On the STRUCTURE panel, some settings can be modified without affecting roof depth:
l Specify the Rafter Spacing as 16".
l Specify the Ridge Width as 3 1/2".
l Click OK to close the dialog, apply your changes to all roof planes.
5. Select Build>Framing>Build Framing .

6. In the Build Framing dialog, under the Build Framing Once heading, check the box next to Roofs and click OK.
7. Select a ridge board to confirm that it is 3 1/2" wide. See To examine roof framing on page 396, above.

A similar approach can be used to modify the framing for a single roof plane. An easy way to select a roof plane when roof
framing displays is using the Roof Plane tool.

To modify a single roof plane’s structure

1. Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane , then click on the roof plane over the Deck room to select it.

l With the Roof Plane tool active, framing members and other types of objects cannot be selected: only roof
planes.

398
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

2. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the GENERAL panel, notice:

l The Top Plate Height is reported for reference, and that it is locked by default. In this example, it will remain
locked.
l When a single roof plane is selected, you can instead lock another Height reference to control which part of the
roof plane adjusts when its depth is changed.
l Notice too, that the Baseline Height is 122 13/16".
3. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Roof Plane Specification dialog:
l Specify the Rafter Spacing as 24".
l Click the Edit button to the right of Structure and specify the framing depth as 11 1/4".
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes to the selected roof plane.
4. Return to the GENERAL panel:
l Notice that the roof plane's Top Plate Height did not change, while its Baseline Height increased from 122
13/16" to 124 7/8".
l This means that the top/exterior surface of the roof plane is 1 15/16" higher than it was, while the
bottom/interior did not move.
5. With the roof plane still selected, click the Build Framing for Selected Object(s) edit button.

6. Select a roof rafter over the Deck to confirm its size.

7. Remember to Save your work.

EDITING ROOF FRAMING

Like other types of framing, roof framing can be edited after it is created. Here, the ridge board will be divided in two and
supported by posts where the two boards meet.
The default 3 1/2" square Posts will work well for this task. See Adding Posts and Beams on page 366.

399
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

To break the ridge beam over a post

1. Zoom in on the vertical wall on the right side of the Stairwell on Floor 2.

2. Select Build> Framing> Post , then:

l Move your mouse pointer over the point where the roof ridge passes over the center of the vertical wall.
l When the Intersection Snap Indicator displays, click once to place a post that is centered in the wall and
under the roof ridge.
3. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the horizontal ridge board that runs along the ridge of the roof.

l If another object becomes selected instead, click the Select Next Object edit button.

l When the ridge board is selected, the selected object will be described as a Rafter Ridge in the Status Bar.
4. Click the Add Break edit button, then:

l Move your mouse pointer over the bottom edge of the post.

400
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

l When the Midpoint Snap Indicator displays, click once to break the ridge board in two along the center line of the
post.

To stack load-bearing posts

1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Back Clipped Cross Section , then click and drag a horizontal camera
arrow pointed at the new post. Make sure that the camera arrow is perfectly horizontal and that it extends past the
post.
2. In the Active Layer Display Options side window, select "3D Framing Set" as the active layer set. Notice that now,
only framing objects and foundation walls display in the cross section view.
3. Select Window> Tile Vertically to tile the cross section and plan views side by side, then click in the plan view
to make it the active window.

4. Click the Select Objects button and click on the post to select it. If necessary, use the Select Next Object
edit tool, then:

l Select Edit> Copy .

l Go Down One Floor to Floor 1.

l Select Edit> Paste> Paste Hold Position to create a copy of the post in the same location as original.

401
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

l Notice that although a new post has been created, it cannot be seen in the cross section. This is because
although it is on a different floor, it has the same absolute height as the original.
5. With the newly pasted post still selected, click the Open Object edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the
Framing Specification (Post) dialog:

l Notice that the Top Height is 206 1/4", which is the ceiling height for rooms on Floor 2.
l Check the box beside Raise/Lower and type -97 1/8" in the text field.
l Click the Apply button and notice that the Top Height is now 109 1/8". This is the height of the subflooring
on Floor 2.
l In the Raise/Lower field, type -3/4" and click the Apply button once more to align the top of the post with the
floor joists, then click OK.
6. Go Down One Floor to Floor 0 and use Paste Hold Position to create one more post.

7. With the newly pasted post still selected, click the Open Object edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the
Framing Specification (Post) dialog:

l Click the Lock Total Height radio button.

l Specify the Top Height as -3/4" to position the post's top at the same height as Floor 1's floor joists, then click
OK.
8. In order to see the results in the cross section view, click in that view window to make it active and turn off the
"Walls, Foundation" layer.
9. Select the post on Floor 0 and use its end edit handle to extend its bottom end downward until it snaps to the wall's
bottom plate.

402
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

You can add a footing under the new post on Floor 0 by

copying and pasting one of the other post's footings. Use
the Center Object Snap to center the footing on the post.

10. Using their edit handles, edit the heights of the other two posts:

l Select the post on Floor 1 make sure it snaps to the post below it and the top of the floor framing above it.
l Select the post on Floor 2, snap its bottom end to the top of the post below it, and extend its top end upward so
it snaps to the roof ridge rafter.

Displaying foundation walls in Framing Overviews is useful, so leaving the "Walls, Foundation" layer turned off in the
3D Framing Set not a good idea. A better solution is to place the interior wall with footings on a different layer.

To place a wall on a non-default layer

1. Click in plan view to make it the active view.
2. Go to Floor 0 and select the interior wall to the left of the stairs.
3. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the LAYER panel of the Wall Specification dialog, select "Walls,
Normal" from the Layer drop-down list and click OK.

403
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

4. Use the Active Layer Display Options side window to turn the "Walls, Foundation" layer on in the 3D Framing Set.
5. When you are finished, close the Back Clipped Cross Section view and Save your work.

GENERATING CEILING FRAMING

On Floors 0 and 1, all of the ceilings are supported by floor platforms. There is no living space above Floor 2, so the ceiling
joists do not need to be as deep as floor joists are.
Framing defaults can be set in the Framing Defaults dialog.

To customize joist direction

1. Begin by selecting "Framing, Ceiling Plan View" from the Saved Plan View Control drop-down, which is
located in the top toolbar by default.
2. Next, go to Floor 2 and notice:

l Ceiling framing was generated earlier when Automatically Build Floor and Ceiling Framing was checked.
See "To generate floor and ceiling framing" on page 363 of the Floor Framing Tutorial.
l Ceiling joists are all horizontally oriented and are only generated in the area where a flat, full-height ceiling is
present.

404
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

3. Specify a vertical direction for the ceiling joists:

l Select Build> Framing> Joist Direction .

l Click and drag to draw a vertical Joist Direction Line to the right of the staircase.
4. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing and click the Framing Defaults button.

5. On the 2ND panel of the Build Framing dialog:

l Check Use Framing Reference.
l Make sure the Spacing is set to 16" on center.
l Click OK.
6. Returning to the Build Framing dialog:
l Under the Build Framing Once heading.
l Select Ceilings and choose "Floor 2" from the drop-down list, then click OK.
7. Select Build>Framing>Bearing Line , then click and drag to draw a horizontal line along the bottom edge of
the full-length joist just above the short joists.
8. Draw a horizontal Joist Direction line in the area of the short joists.

9. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing and build the ceiling framing for Floor 2 once more, as described
above.

405
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

10. Save your work.

EDITING CEILING FRAMING

Ceiling joists can be edited in the same ways that floor joists can.
Here, the ceiling framing layout will be shifted so that the joists butt against the sides of the rafters rather than being aligned
with their centers.

To customize the Reference Display

1. Select Window> Fill Window or Zoom out until the entire floor plan can be seen.

2. Select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Reference Display .

3. Select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Change Floor/Reference or click the toolbar button that reports the
current floor level.
4. In the Change Floor/Reference dialog:

l Notice the table under the "Reference Display" heading. The Reference Display can be set to show a specific
floor level of your choosing and use the layer set that you specify. It can even display information from another
plan file.
l Row #1 is the Reference Display. Specify that it display the 2nd Floor.
l Click on the "Define" cell in row #1 to open the Layer Display Options dialog.

406
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

5. In the Layer Display Options dialog, notice that the "Reference Display Layer Set" is the selected Layer Set.
6. In the Name Filter field, type the word "roof", then:

l Turn on the display of the "Framing, Roof Rafters" layer.

l Turn off the display of the "Roof Planes" layer.
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.
7. Notice that roof rafters are now represented in the Reference Display, and that they are aligned with the ceiling
joists.

The ceiling framing on Floor 2 can be easily selected while the Joist tool is active.

To shift the ceiling framing layout

1. Select Build> Framing> Joist , then hold down the Shift key and click and drag a rectangular selection marquee
around the drawing.
2. When you release the mouse button, notice that the Status Bar reports the number of objects that are selected.
3. To confirm that all of the selected objects are ceiling joists, click the Open Object edit button:

l Note that the title of the dialog that opens is Framing Specification (Ceiling Joist).
l Click the Cancel button.
4. With the array of ceiling joists still selected, click the Transform/Replicate Object edit button. In the
Transform/Replicate Objects dialog:
l Check the box beside Move.
l Specify the X Delta value as 1 1/2", then click OK.
5. Zoom in on the joists and confirm that they are now positioned against the sides of the rafters instead of being
aligned with them.

407
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

6. Repeat steps 1-4 to offset the shorter horizontal joists 1 1/2" upward using the Y Delta setting in
Transform/Replicate Object dialog.
7. When you are finished, toggle the Reference Display off again and Save your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
With roof and ceiling framing in place, annotations can be added.
In the Floor Framing tutorial, the "Framing Floor Plan View" was active, annotations were added using "Framing Rich Text
Defaults, Floor", and were placed on the "Text, Framing - Floor", layer. That layer was turned off, however, when the
"Framing, Roof Plan View" was opened.
In addition to creating an uncluttered space for drawing roofs, another benefit of switching to the "Framing, Roof Plan
View" is that annotations added while it is active will be placed on their own layer. This means that roof framing
annotations will display in the roof framing plan but not in other views.
Notice that although the layer is turned on, no roof framing labels can be seen. This is because unlike Posts and Beams,
most framing members do not have automatic labels. You can, however, create custom labels for any members that require
them. Adding a fill color can also bring attention to certain members.

To annotate framing members using their labels

1. Select the "Framing, Roof Plan View" from the Saved Plan View Control drop-down list in the toolbars.

2. Use the Active Layer Display Options dialog to turn off the display of the "Framing, Bearing Lines" layer so the
Joist Direction Lines are not visible.
3. Click the Select Objects button, then group-select the valley rafters over the garage and porch:

l Click on one of the valley rafters on either side of the vertical ridge over the Garage.
l Hold down the Ctrl/Command key, then click on the other two valley rafters to add them to the selection set.
4. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the FILL STYLE panel of the Framing Specification (Rafter Ridge)
dialog:
l Select "Solid" from the Pattern Type drop-down list.
l Click the Color bar and choose a grey color from the Select Color dialog.

408
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

5. On the LABEL panel of the Framing Specification (Rafter Ridge) dialog:

l Select the Specify Label radio button.

l Click the Insert Macro button and in the menu that opens, browse to and select Object Specific>
Nominal Size.
l When you click on Nominal Size, "%nominal_size%" is added to the text field.
6. Click after the inserted macro in the text field and type: VALLEY RAFTER.
7. Click OK to close the dialog.

8. If you want, you can select each valley rafter and use its Move Label edit handle to adjust the position of the label.
9. Remember to Save your work.

Additional annotations can be added using the Rich Text and Leader Line tools. If you wish, you can also switch to the
"Framing, Ceiling Plan View" and add annotations using any of the techniques you have learned.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Roof Framing.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

409
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating and editing roof and ceiling framing.

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 21 - Roof and Ceiling Framing

When roof framing is generated, are the current framing defaults used, or the current roof plane specifications?
l The roof plane’s current specifications are used when roof framing is generated. In order for changes to the framing
defaults to affect roof planes, they must be regenerated or redrawn.
What tool allows you to change the specifications of all roof planes at once?
l The Edit All Roof Planes tool lets you open the shared specification dialog for all roof planes in the current plan.
What edit tool allows you to rebuild the framing for an individual roof plane?
l The Rebuild Framing for Selected Object(s) edit button allows you to rebuild the framing for the selected object(s)
only.
What tool allows you to create a copy of an object at the same location as the original?
l The Paste Hold Position tool creates a copy of an object at the same location as the original.
What edit tool can you use to move multiple selected objects a precise distance?
l The Transform/Replicate Object edit tool lets you move selected objects a precise distance along the X, Y, and/or Z
planes.

410
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Tutorials

Landscaping Tutorials Chapter 6

The Landscaping Tutorials describe best practices for creating site plans and landscaping in Chief Architect:
In this tutorial you will learn about:

TOPICS
Plot Plans 412
Terrain Elevation 434
Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads 452
Landscaping Design 466

411
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

Plot Plans
A plot plan is essentially a map of a property’s legal description. Plot plans, or site plans, usually have a North Pointer and
can also include other features such as the location of buildings and setback lines.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect Premier for creating a plot plan. Concepts introduced include:
Productivity Tips 412
Setting the Defaults 413
Tracing a Lot Image 413
Importing a DXF/DWG 413
Using Plan Views 413
Drawing a Lot Perimeter 414
Adding Setback Lines 422
Converting a Plot Plan into Terrain 425
Defining the Direction of North 427
Positioning the Structure 429

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial describes how to create a plot plan. Unlike other tutorials in this series, this process will be done in new plan
rather than in CHIC [Link]. This will allow the direction of North to be defined in two different ways:
one, for the purposes of a site plan and one for all other purposes.

To save a new plan file

1. Select File> New Plan to open a new, blank plan.

2. Select File> Save As . In the Save Plan File dialog, browse to your Documents\Chic Cottage folder so that it is
the Save location for your site plan file.
3. For the File name, type Chic Cottage-Plot Plan and click the Save button.

It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create a plot plan, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l Use the Input Line tool to create a series of lines with specific starting points, lengths and angles.
l Use the Concentric Edit Behavior to concentrically resize objects using in increments that you specify.

412
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

Interface
l The Number Style/Angle Style dialog controls how length and angle values are entered and display in dialogs and the
Status Bar.
l Default Sets let you activate a set of defaults and layer settings for a specific purpose: for example, a plot plan.
l When drawing and editing a plot plan polyline, it may be helpful to turn off Grid Snaps . Object Snaps ,
however, should be left on.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
creating a plot plan, it is a good idea to set your CAD and Annotation Defaults in advance.
While the direction of North is typically straight up in a site plan drawing, that is not often the case in most floor plans. To
allow the direction of North to be defined in two different ways: one, for the purposes of a site plan and one for all other
purposes, create the site plan in a separate plan file.
A plot plan is an example of a plan view that requires text, dimensions, and other annotations to be drawn at a different
scale than other views. You can easily switch to a layer set specifically for plot plans, and enable defaults that place text,
dimensions, and other annotations on special layers for that purpose. See To switch to a different saved plan view on page
414.
Before drawing a plot plan, it is helpful to set the General CAD Defaults to meet your needs for this task. See To set the
CAD Defaults on page 414.
Creating setback lines is easy to accomplish using the Concentric Edit Behavior. See To create setback lines on page 423.

TRACING A LOT IMAGE

One fast and easy way to create a lot perimeter is to import an image of the lot and then trace over it. To see a
demonstration of the process, see the "Trace a Terrain Lot Image to Create a Site Plan or Terrain Perimeter" tutorial video at
[Link].

IMPORTING A DXF/DWG
Often, plot plans and elevation data are available in DXF/DWG file format, which can be imported into Chief Architect.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
When drawing a plot plan, it is helpful to use a Saved Plan View with layer settings and defaults preset for that task. This is
the case even when a plan file is created for a single use.

413
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

To switch to a different saved plan view

1. Click the Saved Plan View Control drop-down, which is located in the top toolbar by default.

2. Select "Plot Plan View" from the drop-down list.

3. The current view window remains open, and now uses the Plot Plan View.
4. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options . Note that the Active Layer Set Options
side window reports that the "Plot Plan Layer Set" is now active, and that:
l The Terrain Perimeter created in the Decks and Porches tutorial displays. See "To create a Terrain Perimeter"
on page 121 of the Decks and Porches Tutorial.
l Doors, windows, and General Note callout shapes now display.
l Roof framing and framing labels no longer display.
5. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser .

6. Right-click on the Plot Plan View in the Project Browser and select Edit View from the contextual menu.
7. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Plan View Specification dialog, notice that the names of the Saved
Defaults associated with this view all begin with "Plot Plan", then click Cancel.
8. When you are finished, Save your work.

The settings in the "Plot Plan View" are typical of site plan drawings and will make working on this task easier.

DRAWING A LOT PERIMETER

Plot plans can also be drawn using the CAD Tools. A plot plan can be drawn in plan view or, if you prefer, in a CAD
Detail.

To set the CAD Defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings , and in the Default Settings dialog, expand the CAD category, select "General
CAD", and click the Edit button.
2. In the CAD Defaults dialog, click the Define button under the Displayed Line Length Format heading.

414
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

3. In the Displayed Line Length dialog:

l Click the Units drop-down and choose either "ft" or the ’ sign from the list.
l Select the Decimal Places radio button and specify 2 as the number of decimals.
l Click OK.
4. Returning to the CAD Defaults dialog, select the Quadrant Bearing radio button located under the Display Line
Angle as heading.

5. Click OK, then click Done to close both dialogs.

Before drawing a plot perimeter using the lot description, you need to indicate where you want the starting point to be
located in your drawing area. Here, we will place it at the origin.

415
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

To define the starting point

1. Select CAD> Points> Input Point to open the New CAD Point dialog.

2. Select the Absolute Location radio button.

3. Specify both the X and Y Position of the point as 0. This will place the point at the origin of the drawing space:
(0,0).
4. Click OK to close the dialog and create a point at (0,0). This is the Current Point that will serve as the Start Point for
the first line of the plot plan.
5. Select Window> Pan Window , then click in the drawing area and drag up and to the right to bring the Current
Point to the center of the view window.
6. For a better view of the plot lines as they are created, you can Zoom out a bit, as well.

With the starting point of the property description in place, the lines can be added using the Input Line tool.
In this example, this lot description is used:

Distance Bearing Radius

155.69’ N 61 25 10 E ---
118.65’ S 28 29 35 E ---
154.37 N 49 59 11 E ---
150.00 --- 450’

To create a plot plan polyline

1. Select CAD> Lines> Input Line to open the New CAD Line dialog.

l Notice that the Start Point is at (0,0): the location of the Current CAD Point.
l Click on the dialog’s title bar and drag it over to the side of the program window so it covers as little of the
drawing window as possible.

416
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

2. Click the Number Style button and in the Number Style/Angle Style dialog:

l Select Decimal Feet as the Number Style;

l Select Quadrant Bearing as the Angle Style.
l Click OK to return to the New CAD Line dialog.
3. Select Relative to Start Point and check the box beside Polar.
4. Using decimal feet, enter the length of the first side of the property boundary’s legal description in the Distance
field.
5. Enter the direction of that line in the Angle field. To enter an angle using Quadrant Bearings, type:
l The primary direction (N or S), followed by a space; then,
l The angle in degrees, minutes, and seconds with a space after each value; then,
l The secondary direction (E or W).
l Press the Tab key and notice that the program adds degree, minute, and second symbols automatically.

417
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

6. Click Next and notice:

l The Start Point is no longer (0,0).

l In the drawing area, a line now extends out from the point at (0,0).
l If you have zoomed out far enough, you can also see that there is a new CAD Point at the end of the line. This
is the new Current Point.
7. Enter the Distance and Angle of the next property line and click the Next button.
8. Continue until all property lines are entered, then click OK to close the New CAD Line dialog.

In most cases, the resulting polyline will be closed, with the end point of the last line the same as the start point of the first.

Note: The angle of a given line can be described differently depending on

which end is used as the start point. Some property descriptions proceed
in the same direction around the perimeter, whereas some do not.

If you realize that a line is entered incorrectly or that its direction is reversed, you can easily correct the problem. Here, for
example, the first two lines proceed in a clockwise direction around the perimeter while the third line is described in a
counterclockwise direction.

418
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

To correct an error
1. If a line is incorrect, click OK to close the New CAD Line dialog.
2. Select CAD> Lines> Disconnect Edges , then:

l Click on the incorrect segment to select it.

l Notice that it is the only segment along the polyline to display edit handles.
3. Click the Delete button to remove the problem edge.

4. Select CAD> Point> Place Point , then click at the end of the last correct line to create a new Current Point.

5. Select CAD> Lines> Input Line and continue entering data in the New CAD Line dialog.

If the direction of a lot line is reversed, simply enter the opposite direction letters to address it.

To reverse the direction of a property line

1. Select CAD> Lines> Input Line .

2. In the New CAD Line dialog, enter the Distance in decimal feet as normal.
3. Enter the reversed direction in the Angle field:
l Type the reversed primary direction (S instead of N or N instead of S), followed by a space; then,
l Enter the angle in degrees, minutes, and seconds with a space after each value; then,
l Type the reversed secondary direction (W instead of E or E instead of W).
l Here, S 69 40 44 W is entered instead of N 69 40 44 E.

The easiest way to create a curved property line is to draw it manually.

419
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

To create a curved property line

1. Use the Input Line tool to input all perimeter edges except for the curved edge, as described above.

2. To ensure that the existing edges do not change length, temporarily toggle off Angle Snaps.

l Select Edit> Snap Settings> Angle Snaps to remove the check mark from the tool icon.

l Notice that the Angle Snaps icon now follows your mouse pointer to remind you that this important Snap
Behavior is currently toggled off.
3. Select CAD> Lines> Draw Line , then move your mouse pointer over one the end points of the open polyline
and drag a line to the other open end of the polyline.

420
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

4. Click on a property line to select it, then click the Change Line/Arc edit button to turn this line into an arc.

5. If necessary, use the triangular Reshape edit handle to make the arc curve in the same direction as the actual property
edge. Here, the edge curves outward.
6. With the curved edge selected, click the Open Object edit button to open the Polyline Specification dialog.

7. On the SELECTED ARC panel:

l Click the Lock Chord radio button.

l Specify the length of the Radius. Here, 450’ is used.
l Alternatively, the Arc Length could be entered.
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes to the Selected Edge.
8. Select CAD> Points> Delete Temporary Points to remove the CAD points that were added as the plot plan
was created.
9. Select Edit> Snap Settings> Angle Snaps to turn Angle Snaps back on.

421
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

To display line length, bearing, and radius

1. Click the plot plan polyline to select it, then click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the LINE STYLE panel of the Polyline Specification dialog:

l Check Show Length, Show Angle,

l Make sure that All Angles is checked, then click OK.

3. When you are finished, Save your work.

ADDING SETBACK LINES

Setback lines can be added by creating a copy of the plot plan polyline that is resized using the Concentric Edit Behavior.

422
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

To create setback lines

1. Select Edit> Preferences in Windows orChief Architect> Preferences in macOS.

2. On the BEHAVIORS panel of the Preferences dialog:

l Select the Concentric radio button under the Edit Type heading.
l In the Jump field, type in the required setback distance, such as 10’, and click OK.

l When you return to plan view, notice that the Concentric tool icon follows your mouse pointer, reminding
you that this alternative behavior is active.
3. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the plot plan polyline to select it.

4. Click the Copy/Paste edit button, then:

423
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

l Move your mouse pointer over a corner edit handle,

l Click and drag towards the center of the polyline.
l When a second, inner polyline appears, release the mouse.
5. Select the inner polyline and click the Open Object edit button to open the Polyline Specification dialog. On the
LINE STYLE panel:
l Select a dashed line Style from the drop-down list
l Under the "Display Options" heading, uncheck Show Length and Show Angle, then click OK.

You can also click the Library button to the right of the line
Style and choose from a selection of task-specific line styles
in the Library Browser.

6. When you have finished creating the concentric copy, select Edit> Edit Behaviors> Default to restore the
default edit behavior.

If you want, you can place the setback polyline on its own custom layer so that its display can be controlled independent of
the perimeter polyline.

To place the setback polyline on a new layer

1. Select the setback polyline and click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the LINE STYLE panel of the Polyline Specification dialog, click the Define button to the right of the Layer drop-
down list.
3. In the Layer Display Options dialog, which opens next, notice that the "CAD, Plot Plan" layer is selected in the layer
table.
4. Click the New button below the layer table to open the New Layer Name dialog. Type a short, descriptive name such
as "CAD, Setback Lines", then click OK.
5. Notice that the new "CAD, Setback Lines" layer is selected, then click OK to close the Layer Display Options
dialog.

424
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

6. Returning to the Polyline Specification dialog, notice that the "CAD, Setback Lines" Layer is now assigned to the
setback polyline, then click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

CONVERTING A PLOT PLAN INTO TERRAIN

The plot plan drawn above is a 2D CAD object that will be useful in a site plan. It can also be converted in to a 3D Terrain
Perimeter in which you can model the lot’s slope and landscaping.
So that the terrain and landscaping can be included in the same 3D model as the house, the plot plan perimeter must first be
copied and pasted into the CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plan.

To copy the plot plan polyline into plan view

1. Click the Select Objects tool, then click on the plot plan perimeter to select it. Hold down the Shift key and
click on the setback polyline to add it to the selection set.
2. With the two objects selected, select Edit> Copy .

3. Select File> Open Plan and open the plan file that your site plan is associated with.

4. Select File> Open Recent Files and select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT to open it.
5. In plan view, go to Floor 1. See "To navigate between floors levels" on page 52 of the Multiple Floors Tutorial.
6. Notice that "Framing, Roof Plan View" is selected in the Saved Plan View Control drop-down, then select
"Plot Plan View" instead.
7. Select Edit> Paste> Paste then click in the drawing area near the house to place a copy of the two polylines.
The exact location isn’t important at this time.

8. If you do not see both plot plan polylines, select Window> Fill Window or Zoom out until they come into
view.
9. Notice, too, that the line lengths and bearings are specified in feet and inches and degrees rather than decimal feet
and Quadrant Bearings.

425
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

l This is because the settings in the CAD Defaults dialog, including the line length and angle formats, are view-
specific.
l Since this is not the plot plan drawing, these CAD Defaults do not need to be changed.

If you would like to use the Plot Plan perimeter polyline as your Terrain Perimeter, you must first delete the existing Terrain
Perimeter created in the Decks and Porches tutorial.

To convert to a Terrain Perimeter

1. Select the existing Terrain Perimeter and Delete it.

2. Select the newly pasted plot plan perimeter polyline and click the Convert Polyline edit button.

3. In the Convert Polyline dialog:

l Under the "Terrain" heading, select Terrain Perimeter.

l Under the "Layer Options for Converted Object" heading, make sure that Default Layer for Converted Object
Type (Terrain Perimeter) is selected.

426
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

If the Terrain Perimeter option is greyed out, then a Terrain

Perimeter already exists in your plan. You will need to
locate and delete it before you can convert the polyline.

4. The Terrain Specification dialog will open next. On the GENERAL panel:
l Uncheck Automatic.
l Specify the Subfloor Height Above Terrain as 28".
5. On the LINE STYLE panel:
l Notice that the terrain is on the "Terrain Perimeter" layer.
l Click the Define button to the right of the Layer drop-down list.
l In the Layer Display Options dialog, notice that "Plot Plan Text Style" is specified as the Text Style for this
layer in the Plot Plan Layer Set, then click OK.
6. Click OK once more to close the Terrain Specification dialog and apply your changes.
7. When you are finished, Save your work.

DEFINING THE DIRECTION OF NORTH

By default, North is assumed to be straight up on-screen, which is typical of most plot plans. Most building entrances do not
face due South, however, so specifying a different direction for North is often necessary.
The North Pointer tool allows you to specify a different direction for North, and affecting the direction of sunlight and
shadows, as well as where Quadrant Bearings are measured from.

To add a North Pointer

1. Select CAD> North Pointer , then click and drag to create a North Pointer.

2. The North Pointer should initially be drawn so that it points straight up on-screen.
3. Notice that the bearings of the lot’s sides do not change when the North pointer is drawn straight up.

427
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

Currently, the back line of the lot is oriented at an angle on the right side of the polyline. It should, however, be parallel
with the back of the house, or horizontal on-screen. The lot, setback lines, and North Pointer can be rotated together to
achieve this.

To rotate the lot

1. Select the setback polyline, Terrain Perimeter, and North Pointer as a group:

l Click the Select Objects button, then click on the setback polyline to select it.

l Hold down the Shift key and click on the plot plan perimeter to add it to the selection set.
l With the Shift key still pressed, click on the North Pointer to add it to the selection set, as well.
2. With these three objects selected, click the Rotate handle and drag in a counterclockwise motion until the back edge
of the lot appears perpendicular on-screen.
3. To override Angle Snaps, hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key while dragging.

If you need to rotate the lot so that a particular edge is at an exact angle, use the Transform/Replicate Object edit tool.
In this example, the back lot line needs to be parallel to the back wall of Chic Cottage.

To rotate the lot to a specific angle

1. Make a note of the angle of the back lot line. Here, it is -1°30’ 25".
2. Select the setback polyline, Terrain Perimeter, and North Pointer as a group, as described above, and click the
Transform/Replicate Object edit button.

428
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

3. In the Transform/Replicate Object dialog:

l Check the box beside Rotate.

l Click the Number Style button, and in the Dialog Number/Angle Style dialog, select Degrees, Minutes,
Seconds as the Angle Style and click OK.
l Returning to the Transform/Replicate Object dialog, type 1 30 25 in the Angle field.
l Press the Tab key and confirm that the value updates to 1° 30’ 25"
l Make sure the Relative Angle radio button is selected and click OK.

4. Before moving on, be sure to Save your work.

POSITIONING THE STRUCTURE

If a point on the building needs to be located a particular distance from the lot line, or at a particular point relative to a lot
corner, the lot lines can now be moved to meet that requirement. Here, the lot will be positioned so that the main roof at the

429
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

back right corner is 50’ from the back setback line, and 30’ from the right setback line.

To position a structure using dimensions

1. Zoom in on the back right portion of the lot so that the back setback line and the back corner of the main roof can be
clearly seen.
2. Select CAD> Dimensions> End to End Dimension, then click and drag a dimension line from the roof corner to
the setback line.
3. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the setback polyline to select it. Hold down the Shift key and click on
the Terrain Perimeter to add it to the selection set.
4. With the two objects selected, click on the End to End Dimension line.

5. In the inline text field, type 50’ and press the Enter key.

When the roof line or wall in question is not parallel to the setback line that it needs to be measured from, a different
method can be used.

To position a structure using CAD points

1. Select CAD> Point> Place Point , and then click at a reference point along the perimeter of the building or, as in
this example the corner of the roof.
2. Select CAD> Points> Input Point to open the New CAD Point dialog.

430
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

l Select Relative to Current Point.

l Make sure that Polar is unchecked.
l Using the X Position and Y Position fields, specify the distance that a known point on the property line should
be from the Current Point placed in step 2.
l Here, a value of 30’ is specified for the Y Position.
3. When you click OK, a point is created at the specified location. Use this point as a reference to accurately position
the setback lines and Terrain Perimeter.

4. Select CAD> Dimensions> Tape Measure , then:

l Click and drag a temporary dimension line from the Current Point to the setback line.
l Make a note of the distance. Here, it is 3’ 9".
5. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the setback polyline to select it. Hold down the Shift key and
click on the Terrain Perimeter to add it to the selection set.
6. With the two objects selected, click the Transform/Replicate Object edit button.

431
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

7. In the Transform/Replicate Object dialog:

l Uncheck the box beside Rotate.

l Check the box beside Move.
l Specify the distance that you need to move the selected objects in the X Delta or Y Delta field.
l Here, the X Delta is specified as - 3’ 9". A negative value is used because the selected objects need to move to
left, or in the negative direction along the X axis.
8. Press the Tab key and notice that the value changes to -3.75’. This is because Decimal Feet is still the specified
Number Style.
l Click the Number Style button and change the Number Style to Fractional Inches.
l Change the Angle Style to Degrees, as well.
l Click OK to close both dialogs and apply your changes.
9. When you are finished, Save your work.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
Currently, there are two files open: Chic Cottage - Plot Plan and CHIC COTTAGE CURRENT. Chic Cottage - Plot Plan is
a special file created specifically for the purpose of drawing a plot plan. Click on its tab to make it the current view, select
File> Save and then File> Close View.

Next, with CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT open, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a copy of the file with
a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Lot Lines.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

432
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating a plot plan. It also discussed the important default settings associated
with drawing CAD objects. These defaults include Default Sets and CAD Defaults.
To save a new plan file 412
To switch to a different saved plan view 414
To set the CAD Defaults 414
To define the starting point 416
To create a plot plan polyline 416
To correct an error 419
To reverse the direction of a property line 419
To create a curved property line 420
To display line length, bearing, and radius 422
To create setback lines 423
To place the setback polyline on a new layer 424
To copy the plot plan polyline into plan view 425
To convert to a Terrain Perimeter 426
To add a North Pointer 427
To rotate the lot 428
To rotate the lot to a specific angle 428
To position a structure using dimensions 430
To position a structure using CAD points 430
To save a plan revision 432

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 22 - Plot Plans

What is the name of the drawing tool that lets you define lines and arcs by entering their length and bearing?
l The Input Line tool to create a series of lines with specific starting points, lengths and angles. These lines can then be
converted into arcs using the Change Line/Arc edit tool.
Where can you specify that the length values in dialog boxes be entered using feet instead of inches?
l To change the format used for length values in dialog boxes, click the Number Style button at the bottom of most
dialogs to open the Number Style/Angle Style dialog.
In what dialog can you specify that the angles of polyline edges be described using Quadrant Bearings in plan view?
l The angle format of polyline edges is set in the CAD Defaults dialog.
What Edit Behavior is useful for creating setback lines?
l The Concentric Edit Behavior can be used to create a resized copy of the plot plan polyline that represents setback
lines.
What edit tool allows you to change a CAD polyline into a Terrain Perimeter?

433
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

l The Convert Polyline edit tool allows you to change a regular CAD polyline into a variety of polyline-based objects
such as a Terrain Perimeter.
What edit tool can be used to rotate the Terrain, setback lines, and North Pointer to a specific angle?
l The Transform/Replicate Object edit tool allows you to rotate a selected object or objects to a specific angle.

Terrain Elevation
Adding elevation data to a plan allows you to model sloping terrain.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for creating sloped terrain. Concepts introduced include:
File Management 434
Productivity Tips 434
Setting the Defaults 435
Using Plan Views 436
Adjusting the Building Pad Height 437
Importing Elevation Data 437
Drawing Elevation Data 437
Controlling the Terrain’s Slope 441
Adding a Retaining Wall 448
Adding Annotations 451
Creating File Revisions 451

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Plot Plans tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Lot Lines and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic Cottage-Lot [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Open Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The
Recent Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing
where your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File Management" on page 4 of the
Exterior Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to add elevation data to terrain, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

434
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

Drawing and Editing

l The distance between two Elevation Lines with different Elevation values influences how steep the terrain not just
between them but also beyond.
l Control the height of the building relative to the terrain using the Building Pad settings in the Terrain Specification
dialog.

Content
l Site plans and elevation data are project-specific, but you can still leverage existing content to improve your efficiency
by importing elevation data from DXF/DWG, text, and GPS files.

Interface
l An important angle like that of a lot line can be added to the list of Allowed Angles, making it easy to draw additional
objects at that exact angle.
l Tiling 2D and 3D views is often helpful when drawing and editing Elevation Data.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l ‘ - Layer Display Options
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
creating adding elevation data to a plan, it is a good idea to set your CAD and Annotation Defaults in advance.
Before Elevation Data can be drawn or imported, a Terrain Perimeter must be created. See "Converting a Plot Plan into
Terrain" on page 425 of the Plot Plans Tutorial.
When working with Elevation Data, it is helpful make sure Object Snaps are toggled on. Select Edit> Snap Settings and
confirm that there is a small check mark in the icon to the left of Object Snaps .

In the Plot Plans tutorial, a lot perimeter with accurately angled sides was created and then copied into the CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plan. When adding elevation data to this plan, being able to snap to those specific angles can be
useful.

To specify Allowed Angles

1. Select Edit> Default Settings and in the Default Settings dialog, click on "Plan" in the list then click the Edit
button.
2. In the General Plan Defaults dialog, click the Number Style button at the bottom of the dialog and in the Dialog
Number/Angle Style dialog, select Quadrant Bearings as the Angle Style and click OK.

435
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

3. Returning to the General Plan Defaults dialog:

l Under the Allowed Angles heading, check the box beside Additional Angles.
l In the first Additional Angles field, type the bearing of the angled perimeter line on the right side of the lot:
S50° 7' 10"W.
l Press the Tab key to update the information in the dialog and notice that the format of S50° 7' 10"W does not
change.
4. The settings in the Dialog Number/Angle Style dialog affect the formatting of values entered in all dialogs, and
Quadrant Bearings are only useful in specific situations, so:
l Click the Number Style button and specify Degrees as the Angle Style again and click OK.
l Notice that the angle is now described in degrees.
5. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
Several different Saved Plan Views have been used in previous tutorials. Terrain and landscaping is another example of a
drawing task that is made easier and more efficient by using a Saved Plan View created for that purpose.
In the Chic Cottage Roof tutorial, the Roof Plan View and Working Plan View were open at the same time and the two
views’ appearance and settings were compared. Then, the Working Plan View was closed and work was done in the Roof
Plan View. See "Using Plan Views" on page 145 of the Chic Cottage Roof Tutorial.

To copy and customize a Saved Plan View

1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser .

2. Click on the arrow to the left of "Plan Views" to expand the category.
3. Make a copy of the "Plot Plan View":
l Right-click on the "Plot Plan View" and select Duplicate from the contextual menu.
l In the New Saved Plan View dialog, type a short, descriptive Name for the new view, such as "Landscaping
Plan View" and click OK.

4. Notice that the new Saved Plan View opens in a second view window, and is the active view, then close the "Plot
Plan View" view window.
5. If the Active Layer Display Options side window is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options
.

436
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

l Notice that the "Plot Plan Layer Set" is active, just as it is in the "Plot Plan View".
l Click the Copy Set button and give the new layer set a short, descriptive name such as "Landscaping Layer
Set".
6. With the new layer set now active:
l Turn on the display of the "Terrain, Primary Contours" layer.
l Lock the "Roof Planes" layer.
7. Select Tools> Active View> Save Active View so the "Landscaping Layer Set" remains associated with the
"Landscaping Plan View".
8. Save your work.

ADJUSTING THE BUILDING PAD HEIGHT

When a Terrain Perimeter was created in the Decks and Porches tutorial, the Building Pad Elevation was set 28" below the
main floor level. See "To create a Terrain Perimeter" on page 121 of the Decks and Porches Tutorial.
That original terrain was deleted and replaced in the Plot Plans tutorial, but the original Building Pad Elevation places the
terrain just below the garage floor and should still be used

To set the building pad elevation

1. Select Terrain> Terrain Specification .

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Terrain Specification dialog:

l Under the Building Pad heading, uncheck Automatic.

l Specify the Subfloor Height Above Terrain as 28", then click OK.
l This will place the terrain 28" below the first floor’s subfloor and about 1" below the slab floor in the Garage.
3. Save your work.

IMPORTING ELEVATION DATA

Elevation data for a given parcel is often available in electronic format from a surveyor or assessor’s office. Importing this
data can save considerable time in developing a 3D model of the terrain.
Elevation data can be imported from files of several different formats, as the "Importing Terrain Elevation Data" video
explains at [Link].

DRAWING ELEVATION DATA

Elevation data can be added to a plan using the Elevation Data Tools.

437
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

To draw an Elevation Line

1. Go to Floor 1 and select Window> Fill Window or Zoom out until the Terrain Perimeter can be seen.

2. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Elevation Line , then:

l Click and drag to draw a horizontal line across the entire Terrain Perimeter.
l The Elevation Line can snap to the edges of the Terrain Perimeter or it can extend past the edges.
l Here, the Elevation Lines extend past the edges because they are easier to see and select.
3. When prompted, click Yes to turn on the display of the "Terrain, Elevation Data" layer in the current view.
4. Select the Elevation Line and click the Open Object edit button.

5. On the GENERAL panel of the Elevation Line Specification dialog, note that its Elevation value is 0".

6. Because Elevation Data is often described using feet and inches, click the Number Style button and in the Number
Style/Angle Style dialog:
l Select Decimal Feet as the Number Style.
l Click OK to close both dialogs.

438
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

7. With the Elevation Line still selected:

l Use its Move edit handle to snap it to the front wall of the Garage.
l Press the Down Arrow key once to move it 1" from the wall.

Sometimes, Elevation Data can be best worked on and understood when 2D and 3D views are tiled.

To create a slope
1. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Full Overview .

2. Select Window> Tile Vertically to tile the overview and plan views side by side.

3. Click and drag with the Mouse-Orbit Camera tool active to orbit the camera around to the right side of the
model so you can better see the slope as it is created.
4. Click in the plan view to make it active, then click the Select Objects button and click on the Elevation Line to
select it.

439
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

5. Create a copy of the Elevation Line:

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button.

l Click the line’s Move edit handle and drag downward towards the bottom of the Terrain Perimeter.
l When the mouse pointer is between the bottom setback line and the edge of the terrain, release the mouse
button to create a copy of the Elevation Line at that location.
l Notice that in the 3D Overview window, no change is made to the terrain’s slope.
6. With the newly pasted Elevation Line selected, click the Open Object edit button.

7. On the GENERAL panel of the Elevation Line Specification dialog:

l Note that like the original, its Elevation value is 0".

l Change this value to -8’.
l Click OK.
8. In the plan view window, notice that there are now evenly-spaced, horizontal contour lines displaying throughout the
Terrain Perimeter.
9. In the Overview window, notice that the terrain features a single, continuous slope from the front of the lot to the
back.

440
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

10. When you are finished, Save your work.

CONTROLLING THE TERRAIN’S SLOPE

To produce terrain that changes height, you simply need to add two pieces of Elevation Data with different Elevation values.
To control the slope that is produced, however, you will need to add additional Elevation Data and modify the spacing and
height.

To create changes in slope

1. In the plan view window, select the original Elevation Line and make another copy of it:

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button.

l Click the line’s Move edit handle and drag upward towards the back of the Porch.
l When the mouse pointer reaches the back of the Porch, release the mouse button to create a copy of the Elevation
Line at that location.
2. In the plan view window, notice:

441
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

l The contour lines above the top two Elevation Lines are more spread out than those located below them.
l The contour numbers indicate that the slope continues to climb upward towards the back of the lot.
3. In the 3D Overview window, note that the terrain’s slope flattens out near the front of the house but slowly begins to
increase in elevation again.
4. Move the Elevation Line from the back of the Porch to the back of the Deck and notice that the terrain flattens out
around the house as well as at the back of the lot.

5. Create one more copy of the original Elevation Line near the top edge of the Terrain Perimeter and specify its
Elevation as 6’.

The steepness of a slope is determined by the difference between two elevation lines and the distance between them.

To control slope steepness

1. Select the Elevation Line near the top of the Terrain Perimeter and using its edit handles or Temporary Dimensions,
move the new Elevation Line about 4’ from the back of the Deck.

442
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

2. Notice what happens:

l The terrain increases in height by 6’ over a span of only 4’, which produces a steep slope from the Deck that
continues to the back of the lot.
l In order to produce a smoothly curving terrain that passes through the two Elevation Lines at the back of the
Deck as well as the two other Elevation Lines, a wave shape is created, with a trough located between the two
Elevation Lines at 0’.
3. Now move the selected Elevation Line about 2’ down from the back setback line.

4. Create a copy of the back Elevation Line located between it and the back of the Deck.
5. With this new Elevation Line selected, specify its Elevation value as 5’ and position it 3’ from the back Elevation
Line.

443
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

6. Notice that the slope steepness is shallow behind the Deck but increases near the back of the lot.

Slope direction can be modified by simply changing the angles of your Elevation Lines. There are a number of ways to do
this.

To avoid conflicting data and unexpected results, Elevation

Lines with different Elevation values should never touch or cross
one another.

To set slope direction

1. Select and rotate the top two Elevation Lines as a group:

l Click on the top Elevation Line.

l Hold down the Shift key and click on the Elevation Line located below it.
l Click and slowly drag the triangular Rotate edit handle in a clockwise direction.
l Notice that the rotated angle is stated in the Status Bar, near the center.
l When the selection is rotated to 15°, release the mouse button.

444
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

2. Select the top Elevation Line and move one of its ends:
l Click and drag the square Resize handle located on the right end of the Elevation Line.
l Drag upward until the line snaps at a 15° angle relative to its original orientation.
l Now hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key to override movement restrictions and drag downward.
l When the Status Bar reports a value of around 13°, release the mouse button.
3. To specify a precise angle, click the Open Object edit button. On the SELECTED LINE panel of the Elevation
Line Specification dialog:
l Lock the Center.
l Specify an Angle of -13° and click OK.

4. Select the bottom Elevation Line located near the front of the lot and make it parallel to the chord of the curved lot
edge:

l Click the Make Parallel edit button.

l Move the mouse pointer over the bottom edge of either the Terrain Perimeter or the setback lines polyline, near
either corner.
l When the polyline becomes highlighted and a nearly horizontal, dashed alignment axis displays, click once.
5. To confirm that the line's angle matches that of the arc's chord, click the Open Object edit button.

6. On the SELECTED LINE panel of the Elevation Line Specification dialog, note the Angle value and click Cancel.
7. Select the curved edge of the Terrain Perimeter or the setback lines polyline and click the Open Object edit
button.
8. On the SELECTED ARC panel of the dialog:
l Confirm that the Chord Angle equals the angle of the line, then click Cancel.
l Note that the same angle can be described in one of two ways: using a positive value between 0° and 180°, or
using a negative value between 0° and -180°.

445
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

To create a curved elevation line

1. Select the Elevation Line located near the curved front edge of the Terrain Perimeter.
2. Click the Change Line/Arc edit button.

3. Click the arc’s triangular Reshape edit handle and drag downward to change the location of the arc’s center point.

4. With the arc still selected, click the Open Object button.

5. On the SELECTED ARC panel of the Elevation Line Specification dialog:

l Click the radio button beside Chord to Lock it.
l Specify the Radius as 450’, then click OK.

An Elevation Polyline is created when two or more Elevation Lines are snapped together. When an Elevation Polyline forms
a closed shape, the result is an Elevation Region. There are several ways to create Elevation Polylines.

To create an Elevation Polyline

1. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options . In the Active Layer Display Options side
window:
l Press the T key on your keyboard to automatically scroll to the layer names that begin with the letter T.
l Locate the "Terrain, Primary Contours" layer and click once in the "Disp" column to remove the check mark
and turn off this layer in this view again.

446
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

2. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Elevation Line , then:

l Move the mouse pointer to the right side of the Terrain Perimeter, between the Elevation Line at back of the
Deck and the lowest end of the angled Elevation Lines.
l Click and drag to draw a horizontal Elevation Line that ends in the middle of the terrain.
3. With the Elevation Line tool still selected:

l Move the mouse pointer over the left end of the new Elevation Line.
l Click the diamond-shaped edit handle and drag upward and to the left to draw an angled Elevation Line.
l When the Status Bar reports that the angle of the new Elevation Line is 15° and the line extends through the
edge of the Terrain Perimeter, release the mouse button.
l A polyline with two segments is created. Its initial Elevation value is 0" and does not need to be changed.

447
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

4. Click on the Elevation Line located at the back of the Deck to select it, then:

l Click the Add Break edit button.

l Move the mouse pointer over the right side of the line.
l Click once to add a new corner and edit handle at that location.
5. Click on the square edit handle located to the right end of new corner and drag downward. When the new line
segment reaches the middle of the house, release the mouse button.
6. When you are finished, Save your work.

ADDING A RETAINING WALL

Retaining Walls are different from other types of walls in that the Elevation Data on either side of them does not interact
with each other.

To draw a retaining wall

1. In both the plan view and Overview windows, Zoom in on the back right corner of the Terrain Perimeter.

2. Click in the plan view window to make it the active view and select Terrain> Terrain Wall and Curb> Straight
Retaining Wall . Next:

448
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

l Click on the setback polyline, just below the lowest angled Elevation Line.
l Drag in a downward direction, following the path of the setback line.
l Before the retaining wall preview outline reaches the horizontal Elevation Line, release the mouse button.
3. With the Straight Retaining Wall tool still selected:

l Move the mouse pointer over the top end of the new Retaining Wall.
l Click and drag upwards and to the left to draw a new angled Retaining Wall.
l When the Status Bar reports that the angle of the new wall is 15°, release the mouse button.
4. Select Window> Fill Window or Zoom out until entire top setback line can be seen.

449
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

5. Select the angled retaining wall, then click and drag its left end edit handle until it reaches the top setback line.

The default height of a retaining wall is determined by the height of the terrain on either side of it.

To specify a retaining wall’s top and bottom heights

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the angled Elevation Line located just above the new Retaining
Wall.
2. Click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far the line is from the wall and in the inline text field, type 8"
and press the Enter key.
3. Select the Elevation Polyline located just below the retaining wall and use the Add Break edit tool to add four
new breaks to the line.
4. Use the Elevation Polyline’s edit handles to reshape it so that two edges are parallel to the retaining walls.
5. Use Temporary Dimensions to position those two edges 8" from the retaining walls.

6. Remember to Save your work.

450
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
The Plot Plans Tutorial explains how to create a plot plan complete with annotations in the form of lot line lengths and
bearings, and setback lines. You can use any of the tools and techniques described in previous tutorials to add any additional
annotations that you may need. For example:
l Use the Leader Line tool to add information about the Retaining Wall. See "To use a text macro in rich text
annotations" on page 343 of the Light Fixtures Tutorial.
l Use a Dimension Line with Additional Text to annotate the setback lines. See "To create a dimension line with
additional text" on page 164 of the Chic Cottage Roof Tutorial.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Terrain.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for adding elevation data to create sloped terrain. It also discussed the important
default settings associated with drawing CAD objects. These defaults include Default Sets and CAD Defaults.

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 23 - Terrain Elevation

What dialog is the best place to make adjustments to the height of the terrain relative to the building?
l The height of the building pad can be specified on the General panel of the Terrain Specification dialog.
What is required in order to have terrain that slopes?
l To create a slope, at least two Elevation Data objects with different Elevation values must be present in the plan.
How can you turn on the display of contour lines in plan view?
l The display of the "Terrain, Primary Contours" layer can be turned on and off in the Layer Display Options dialog.
What is the name of the edit tool that changes a straight line into an arc?
l The Change Line/Arc edit button changes a selected line into an arc, or vice versa.
What is the name of the edit tool that lets you add a new edge to a line or polyline?

451
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

l The Add Break edit tool allows you to divide a line or polyline edge in two separate segments, creating a new corner
edit handle between them.
What determines the height of a Retaining Wall?
l The default height of a retaining wall is determined by the height of the terrain on either side of it.

Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

Roads, sidewalks, and driveways are an important aspect of a landscaping plan.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for creating roads, driveways, and sidewalks. Concepts introduced
include:
File Management 452
Productivity Tips 452
Setting the Defaults 453
Using Plan Views 453
Drawing a Road 453
Adding a Driveway 459
Creating Sidewalks 461
Adding Annotations 464
Creating File Revisions 465

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Terrain Elevation tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Terrain and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Open Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The
Recent Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing
where your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See Creating File Revisions on page 465.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to draw roads, driveways, and sidewalks, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l Road objects only display in 3D views where they cross the Terrain Perimeter.
l To override movement restrictions and make fine adjustments as you draw or edit, hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key.

452
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

Interface
l The Number Style/Angle Style dialog controls how length values are entered and display in dialogs and the Status Bar.
When working with large objects like a road, it can be helpful to set the Dialog Number Style as Feet and Fractional
Inches instead of Fractional Inches.
l When drawing and editing road objects, it is usually helpful to make sure that Object Snaps are toggled on.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
drawing road objects, it’s a good idea to begin by setting the Road, Driveway, and Sidewalk Defaults to meet your needs.

USING PLAN VIEWS

When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views with
customized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Landscaping Plan View is well suited for adding hardscaping to a plan. See "To copy and customize a Saved Plan
View" on page 436 of the Terrain Elevation Tutorial.

DRAWING A ROAD
The location of roads is an important consideration when developing a landscaping plan and are typically included in site
maps, as well.

To set the road defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings . In the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow beside "Terrain" to expand the
category, select "Road" and click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Road Defaults dialog, specify the Width as 28’.
3. On the CURB panel, note that roads can generate raised curbs along their edges and that those curbs can cut
driveways and sidewalks.
4. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs.

453
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

To draw and edit a road

1. Go to Floor 1 and select Window> Fill Window or Zoom out until the Terrain Perimeter can be seen.

2. Select Terrain> Road> Straight Road , then:

l Move the mouse pointer over the bottom right corner of the Terrain Perimeter.
l Click and drag to the left to draw a road across the bottom of the Terrain Perimeter.
l Move the mouse pointer over the lower left corner, and when a Midpoint Snap Indicator displays and the
Road preview outline angles downward slightly, release the mouse button.
3. Click on the road to select it, then click the Change Line/Arc edit button. Next:

l Click the arc’s triangular Reshape edit handle and drag it toward the curved edge of the Terrain Perimeter.
l When you see the On Object Snap Indicator, release the mouse button.

454
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

4. With the road still selected, click the Point to Point Move edit button, then:

l Move your mouse pointer over the top edge of the road.
l When the Midpoint Snap Indicator displays, click the mouse button.

l Move the mouse pointer over the curved edge of the Terrain Perimeter.
l When the Midpoint Snap Indicator displays, click the mouse button.

5. Click the road’s right end edit handle and drag to the right:
l Move the mouse pointer over the bottom right corner of the Terrain Perimeter.
l When the Endpoint Snap Indicator displays, release the mouse button.

455
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

Road stripes are often found along the center line of a road, but can be placed anywhere within a road. Here, a road stripe
will mark out a bike lane.

To add a road stripe

1. Select Terrain> Road> Road Stripe , then click and drag from the midpoint on the left side of the road to the
mid point on the right.
2. Click on the new road stripe to select it and click the Change Line/Arc edit button.

3. Click and drag the triangular Reshape edit handle towards the center of the road. When the Midpoint Snap
Indicator displays, release the mouse button.

4. With the Road Stripe still selected:

l Click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far the Road Stripe is from the bottom edge of the road.
l In the inline text field, type 6’ and press the Enter key.

In order to display in 3D views, the road must be located inside the Terrain Perimeter.

456
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

To display a road in 3D views

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the Terrain Perimeter to select it.

2. Create a copy of the Terrain Perimeter in the same location as the original:

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button.

l Click the Paste Hold Position edit button.

l A copy of the Terrain Perimeter is created in the same location as the original, and is selected.
l Since only one Terrain Perimeter can exist in a plan, the new copy is a CAD polyline.
3. With the newly created polyline selected, click the Open Object edit button. On the Line Style panel of the
Polyline Specification dialog, select "CAD, Plot Plan" from the Layer drop-down list and click OK.
4. Select Terrain Perimeter again.

l If the copied polyline becomes selected instead, click the Select Next Object edit button.

l The type of object that is currently selected is stated on the left side of the Status Bar. The Terrain Perimeter
will be described as "Terrain", while the copied polyline will be described as a "Special Polyline".
5. Click the small Resize edit handle on the curved edge and drag downward until the curved polyline edge snaps to
bottom edge of road.

457
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

6. With Terrain still selected, click the Open Object edit button. On the LINE STYLE panel of the Terrain
Specification dialog, uncheck Show Length and Show Angle, click OK.
7. Create a Perspective Full Overview to see the results.

Roads are flat across their width and measure their height from the height of the terrain along their center line.

458
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

To control road height

1. Select Window> Swap Views , to return to plan view without closing the overview camera.

2. Select the curved Elevation Line located near the bottom of the plot plan polyline. Next:

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button.

l Click and drag the Elevation Line’s Move edit handle downward.
l When the mouse pointer is positioned near the center of the road, release the mouse button to create a new
curved Elevation Line at that location.
3. Select Window> Swap Views , to return to the overview and notice that the slope down to the road is more
gradual now.

4. Click the Select Objects button, then select the road and click the Open Object edit button.

5. On the GENERAL panel of the Road Specification dialog, note that the Height is 1" and click Cancel.
6. When you are finished, select File> Close View and Save your work.

ADDING A DRIVEWAY
A driveway can now be added to the plan.

459
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

To set the driveway defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings . In the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow beside "Terrain" to expand the
category, select "Driveway" and click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Driveway Defaults dialog:
l Specify the Width as 13’.
l Under the Flare heading, check the box beside End and specify the Width as 3’.
3. On the MATERIALS panel, select the "Driveway" component in the list on the left, then click the Select Material
button.
4. On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog, search for and select the "Blacktop 1" material,
then click OK.
5. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To draw a driveway
1. Select Terrain> Driveway> Straight Driveway then:

l Move your mouse pointer in front of the Garage.

l When the Midpoint Snap Indicator displays, click and drag straight down.

2. When the driveway preview outline reaches the road, release the mouse button and create a driveway.

460
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

3. Create a Camera view near the intersection of the driveway and the road to see the results.

CREATING SIDEWALKS
Sidewalks can be generated using two different tools in Chief Architect Premier.

To set the sidewalk defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings . In the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow beside "Terrain" to expand the
category, select "Sidewalk" and click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Sidewalk Defaults dialog, specify the Width as 60" or 5’.
3. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To generate automatic sidewalks

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the road to select it.

2. Click the Auto Generate Sidewalks edit button.

3. In the Automatically Generate Sidewalks dialog, specify the Offset from Road as 60" and click OK.
4. Create a Perspective Full Overview and notice that the sidewalk on the far side of the road does not display in 3D
views because it is located outside the Terrain Perimeter.
5. Select File> Close View to return to plan view.

461
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

To draw a sidewalk
1. Zoom in on the area around the front porch stairs.

2. Select Terrain> Terrain> Straight Sidewalk , then:

l Move your mouse pointer over the bottom edge of the stairs.
l When a Midpoint snap indicator displays, click and drag straight down several plan feet to draw a
sidewalk.
3. Click along the sidewalk’s right side and drag to draw a second segment towards the driveway.

4. Click on the horizontal sidewalk segment to select it, then click and drag its Move edit handle downward until it

462
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

snaps to the bottom edge of the vertical segment.

A curved sidewalk can be created instead of an L-shape with straight sides.

To create a curved sidewalk

1. Begin by selecting the two sidewalk segments created above and Deleting them.

2. Select Terrain> Sidewalk> Straight Sidewalk , then:

l Move your mouse pointer over the bottom edge of the stairs.
l When a Midpoint snap indicator displays, click and drag at an angle, down and towards the right until it
reaches the left edge of the driveway.
l Notice the Status Bar reports the angle of the sidewalk as it is being drawn. When the Status Bar reports and
angle of 315°, release the mouse button.

463
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

3. Select the newly drawn sidewalk and click the Change Line/Arc edit button. Then:

l Click the arc’s triangular Reshape edit handle and drag it down and to the left.
l When the top edge becomes a horizontal line and the right edge becomes a vertical line, release the mouse
button.
l To override movement restrictions and make fine adjustments to the sidewalk’s arc, hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key
while you drag the Reshape edit handle.

4. When you are finished, Save your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
The Plot Plans Tutorial explains how to create a plot plan complete with annotations in the form of lot line lengths and
bearings, and setback lines. You can use any of the tools and techniques described in previous tutorials to add any additional
annotations that you may need. For example:
l Insert a street name for the Road object using its label. See "To specify an automatic label" on page 319 of the
Appliances and Fixtures Tutorial.
l Add information about the driveway and front sidewalk using Rich Text. See "To set the Snap Settings" on page 360
of the Floor Framing Tutorial.

464
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

l Create a custom hardscaping schedule with information about the sidewalk, driveway, and retaining wall. See Creating
Schedules on page 314.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;
for example, Chic Cottage-Driveway.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for generating and editing roads, driveways, and sidewalks.
To set the road defaults 453
To draw and edit a road 454
To add a road stripe 456
To display a road in 3D views 457
To control road height 459
To set the driveway defaults 460
To draw a driveway 460
To set the sidewalk defaults 461
To generate automatic sidewalks 461
To draw a sidewalk 462
To create a curved sidewalk 463
To save a plan revision 465

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 24 - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

Where can you set the default for whether driveways cut the curb on roads?
l You can specify raised curbs along roads and whether or not the curbs cut driveways and sidewalks on the Curb panel
of the Road Defaults dialog.
Where must road objects be located in order to be seen in 3D views?
l Only the portions of road objects that are located within the Terrain Perimeter can be seen in 3D views.

465
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

Where can you specify that driveways have flares at their ends?
l Driveway flares can be specified on the General panel of the Driveway Defaults and Driveway Specification dialogs.
What edit tool changes a straight road object into one with a curve?
l The Change Line/Arc edit button changes a selected line-based object into an arc, or vice versa.

Landscaping Design
With the elevation data and hardscaping in place, planting areas can be created.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for creating planting areas. Concepts introduced include:
To modify a custom Layer Set 468
To set the material defaults for Garden Beds 468
To create and edit a Garden Bed 469
To create a planting border 472
To align the planting border edges with other objects 474
To set the fencing defaults 477
To draw and customize fencing 477
To place a gate 478
To search using the Plant Chooser 479
To browse the Plants library category 480
To modify plant images 480
To block plants into groups 481
To save a plan revision 482

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-
Driveway and CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue
working. However, Chic [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be
left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan . If need be, browse to Documents\Chic
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Open Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The
Recent Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing
where your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See File Management on page 4.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to draw terrain features and place plants, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

466
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

Drawing and Editing

l The Selected Edge of a polyline-based object can be edited in a variety of ways using the edit tools.
l To override movement restrictions and make fine adjustments as you draw or edit, hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key.

Content
l A selection of plant images is available for download from the Chief Architect 3D Library. Select Library> Get
Additional Content Online to launch your default web browser to that page.

Interface
l The Status Bar at the bottom of the program window reports useful information like the angle an object is being drawn
at and what type of object is selected.
l When drawing and editing a plot plan polyline, it may be helpful to turn off Grid Snaps . Object Snaps ,
however, are often very helpful.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l 3 - Break edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + Z - Undo
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Adding
landscaping features, there are several defaults to bear in mind.
Before drawing Fencing, it is a good idea to set the Fencing Defaults to meet your needs. See To set the fencing defaults on
page 477.
When drawing Garden Beds, setting the default material for "Dirt" in the Material Defaults dialog can be helpful. See To set
the material defaults for Garden Beds on page 468.
The default material for generic Terrain Features can also be set; however, Terrain Features use the "Foundation/Slab"
material default, which is also the default for slabs and foundation wall footings, so it is best to leave as a concrete material.

USING PLAN VIEWS

In the Terrain Elevation tutorial, a custom Landscaping layer set was created. This layer set can be modified to make it even
better suited for working on landscaping drawings.

467
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

To modify a custom Layer Set

1. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options .

2. In the Active Layer Display Options side window, lock the "Roads" and "Roads, Sidewalks" layers:

3. Save your work.

CREATING TERRAIN FEATURES

Terrain Features are used to apply special materials over the surface of the terrain - from paving to mulch to water.

To set the material defaults for Garden Beds

1. Select Edit> Default Settings . In the Default Settings dialog, select "Materials" and click the Edit button.

2. In the Material Defaults dialog, select the "Dirt" component from the list on the left and click the Select Material
button.
3. On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog:
l The content is filtered by Type so that it only lists Materials and is additionally filtered to show the selected
material's "Mulch" Folder located at Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials> Landscaping and
Roadways> Bark and Mulch> Mulch.
l In the Folders panel, click the arrow to the left of the "Bark", "Mulch", or "Recycled Mulch" folder and choose
a material for your Garden Beds and click OK.
l Here, "Mulch - Dark" is used.

468
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

4. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs.

Garden Beds and other Terrain Features are closed polyline-based objects and can be drawn and edited like other closed
polylines.

To create and edit a Garden Bed

1. Zoom in on the right side of the front porch stairs.

2. Select Terrain> Garden Bed> Polyline Garden Bed , then:

l Move your mouse pointer over the bottom left corner of the Garage.
l Click and drag up and to the left until the mouse pointer snaps to the back right corner side of the stairs, where
they meet the porch railing wall.

469
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

3. Click on the Garden Bed polyline to select it, then:

l Click the square edit handle that displays on the bottom edge.
l Drag the handle down until the left.
l When it snaps to the top right corner of the sidewalk, release the mouse button.
4. Click the Add Break edit button, then:

l Click once on the right vertical edge of the Garden Bed, where it meets the corner of the Garage.
l A new diamond-shaped corner edit handle is created at that point.
5. Select the square edit handle that displays just below the new corner handle and drag to the right until the Garden
Bed edge snaps to the driveway.
6. Click the edit handle at the Garden Bed’s bottom right corner and drag downward until it meets the point where the
sidewalk meets the driveway.

470
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

7. Click on the angled edge of the Garden Bed to make it the Selected Edge, then:

l Click the Change Line/Arc edit button.

l Click the triangular Reshape Arc edit button that displays along the curved edge.
l Drag downward until the curved edge snaps to the inside curve of the sidewalk.

471
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

8. The results can be seen in a camera view.

9. Select File> Close View to return to plan view.

A generic Terrain Feature can also be created using the Convert Polyline edit tool. To save time, existing objects are used to
produce the desired shape.

To create a planting border

1. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the Terrain Perimeter.

l Check the left side of the Status Bar at the bottom of the program window to confirm that the Terrain Perimeter
is selected.
2. With the Terrain Perimeter selected, create an identical copy placed at the same location as the original:

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button.

l Click the Paste Hold Position edit button.

472
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

3. With the new polyline selected, click the Convert Polyline edit button. In the Convert Polyline dialog, select the
radio button beside Terrain Feature and click OK.
4. In the Terrain Feature Specification dialog:
l On the GENERAL panel, specify both the Terrain to Top and Thickness as 1".
l On the LINE STYLE panel, click to add a check mark to the Layer Default check box to place this terrain
feature on the "Terrain Features" layer like the Garden Bed.
l Also on the LINE STYLE panel, uncheck Show Length and Show Angle.
l On the MATERIALS panel, notice that this feature has a concrete material assigned to it. Click the Select
Material button and choose the "Mulch - Dark" material.
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.
5. With the Terrain Feature still selected, straighten the curved edge adjacent to the road:
l Click on the curved edge to make it the Selected Edge.

l Click the Change Line/Arc edit button.

6. Add two new corner edit handles along the bottom edge of the Terrain Feature:

l Click the Add Break edit button, then click the Sticky Mode edit button.

l Click on the bottom edge of the Terrain Feature, near the left vertical property line.
l Click once more on the bottom edge, this time near the right vertical property line.

l Click the Main Edit Mode edit button.

7. Click the square edit handle located between the two new corner handles and drag upward past the back Deck railing
of the house.

473
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

Additional edit tools along with Object Snaps can be used to align the Selected Edge of the Terrain Feature with other
objects in the drawing such as the setback lines and Retaining Walls.

To align the planting border edges with other objects

1. Click on the inside vertical edge on the right side of the Terrain Feature to make it the Selected Edge.
2. Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular edit button.

l Move the mouse pointer over the angled setback line on the right.
l When the special lot lines polyline becomes highlighted and a dashed alignment axis line displays along its
right edge, click once.
l The angle of the Selected Edge changes, becoming parallel with the lot edge line.

474
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

3. Click the Selected Edge’s square move handle and drag it until it snaps to the angled setback line.

4. Repeat steps 1-3 to align the other two inside edges of the Terrain Feature with the back and left setback lines.

5. Add an extra inside edge that follows the back Retaining Wall:

l With the Terrain Feature still selected, click the Add Break edit button.

l Click once on the inside edge that follows the back setback line, near the end of the back Retaining Wall.

475
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

l A new diamond-shaped corner edit handle is created at the point where you click.
6. Click on the inside corner edit handle on the right side of the Terrain Feature, located behind the back Retaining
Wall, then:

l Drag downward until the corner snaps to the back corner of the Retaining Walls.
l Release the mouse button.
7. Using the edit handles, pull the bottom edges on each side of the polyline back so they do not extend past the
sidewalk.
8. Create a Camera view to see the results.

When you are finished, select File> Close View and Save your work.

DRAWING TERRAIN WALLS AND FENCING

Like Terrain Features but unlike regular walls, Terrain Walls and Fences follow the contours of the terrain.

476
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

To set the fencing defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog. Click the arrow to the left of "Walls" to
expand the category, select "Fencing", then click the Edit button.
2. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel of the Fencing Defaults dialog:
l Specify the Railing Height as 72".
l Specify the Newels/Posts Height as 74".
l Click the Library button to the right of the Type drop-down list for Panels.
3. In the Select Library Object dialog:
l Notice that the dialog opens with the current panel selected in the library tree list.
l Browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Fences and Railings> Ironwork and select the "Pole"
panel from the list.
l Click OK.
4. On the RAIL STYLE panel of the Fencing Defaults dialog:
l Check the boxes beside Include Top Rail and Include Bottom Rail.
l Check Raise Bottom and specify the distance as 2".
5. On the RAILS panel:
l Select "Top Rail" in the rail profiles table.
l Specify the Height and Width as 5 1/2" and 1 1/2", respectively.
l Select "Bottom Rail" in the table and assign the same Height and Width values as the Top Rail.
6. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To draw and customize fencing

1. Select Build> Fencing> Straight Fencing then click and drag along the left vertical setback line, from the
sidewalk up to the back setback line.
2. Draw two more fences along the back and right angled setback lines.
3. Zoom in on the back right corner of the lot and:

l Notice that the fence drawn along the setback line has replaced the angled Retaining Wall at that location. This is
because two wall objects cannot be drawn at the same location in Chief Architect.

l Select File> Undo until the Retaining Wall is restored.

477
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

4. Click on the angled Retaining Wall near its bottom end to select it, then:

l Click on the Move edit handle that displays along the wall’s edge at the point where you clicked.
l Avoid the small square Move handles that display on the footing edges.
l Drag slowly towards the left.
l When an Endpoint Snap Indicator displays at the original location of the wall’s bottom left corner, release
the mouse button.
5. Click the Select Objects button, then select the Elevation Polyline that follows the angled Retaining Wall’s low
side. Use its Move edit handle to position it just outside the Retaining Wall’s footing line.

Because fencing is simply a special type of wall, a gate can be added just the way a door can.

To place a gate
1. Select View> Library Browser to open the Library Browser.

2. In the Core Catalogs, browse to Architectural> Fences & Railings> Gates and select a gate. Here, the "Wrought Iron
Gate (arched)" is used.
3. Click on the back fence near the left corner to place the selected gate at that location.

478
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

4. Select the gate and click the Open Object edit button.

5. On the GENERAL panel of the Interior Door Specification dialog, specify the Height as 72" and click OK.

PLACING PLANTS
Plants are represented using image objects that offer a high degree of realism without significantly increasing the surface
count of the 3D model.
The Plant Chooser allows you to search the plants in the library using a variety of parameters, including the plant’s common
name.

To search using the Plant Chooser

1. Open the Plant Chooser in either of two ways:

l Click the Plant Chooser button at the bottom of the Library Browser.

l Select Terrain> Plant> Plant Chooser .

l Type “fir” in the Common Name field.

l Click the Search button at the bottom left corner.
l The search results are listed on the right side of the dialog.
2. Above the search results, select the Common Name radio button.
3. Select a Balsam Fir from the search results, then:
l Click the View Item button to open the Plant Information dialog, where you can read size and growing
information about the selected plant.
l Click the Close button to close the dialog, locate the plant in the Library Browser, and select it for placement.
4. Notice that your mouse pointer displays the Plant icon and that a preview of a 2D tree symbol follows it. Click once
to place a copy of the tree image at that location.

You can continue clicking to place more copies of the selected tree if you wish, or choose a different drawing tool.
You can also browse the Library Browser and select plants for placement in your plan.

479
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

To browse the Plants library category

1. If the Library Browser is not open, select View> Library Browser to open it.

2. In the Core Catalogs, browse to Plants> Trees> Deciduous.

3. Note the many tree species to choose from. Many of these folders contain subfolders with different varieties of that
species.
4. Browse to Betula> Betula papyrifera and select the adult paper birch tree for placement.
5. Place two copies of the selected tree at the back right corner of the lot, in the planting area behind the retaining
walls.

Plants can be edited in both floor plan and 3D views. Making minor changes to plants can make multiple instances of the
same image look more natural.

To modify plant images

1. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Full Overview and Orbit the camera so the trees can be
clearly seen.
2. Click the Select Objects button, then click on one of the birch trees to select it.

3. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the IMAGE panel of the Plant Image Specification dialog, check the
box beside Reverse Image and click OK.

480
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

4. With the tree image still selected:

l Notice that it has two edit handles: a Move handle at its center and a Resize handle along its top edge.
l Click and drag the resize handle upward to make the image larger or downward to make it smaller.

Some plants look best when clustered into groups.

To block plants into groups

1. Use the Plant Chooser or browse the library to find the Evergreen Shrub named "Rhododendron (cream)".
2. Place three instances of this shrub in an open space, away from other objects.

3. Edit the three plant images as described above.

4. When they look the way you want them to, select them as a group:

l Click the Select Objects button, then click on one rhododendron to select it.

l Hold down the Shift key, then click on the other two rhododendrons to add them to the selection set.
l The total number of selected objects will be stated on the left side of the Status Bar.

481
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

5. With the three rhododendrons selected, click the Make Architectural Block edit button.

6. The selected architectural block has two edit handles: a square Move handle and triangular rotate handle. Move the
block into the planting area behind the Retaining Walls and rotate it as you see fit.
7. Use the Copy/Paste edit button to make additional copies of this architectural block along the length of the
angled Retaining Wall, rotating each of them to a different angle.

8. Select one of the blocks and click the Explode Architectural Block edit button. The individual plants can now
be edited individually.
9. When you are finished, Save your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
The Plot Plans tutorial explains how to create a plot plan complete with annotations in the form of lot line lengths and
bearings, and setback lines. You can use any of the tools and techniques described in previous tutorials to add any additional
annotations that you may need. For example:
Add Rich Text to describe the privacy fence. See "To set the Snap Settings" on page 360 of the Floor Framing Tutorial.
Create a Plant Schedule. See "To add door and window schedules" on page 106 of the Doors and Windows Tutorial.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;

482
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

for example, Chic Cottage-Landscaping.

4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for adding planting areas to a landscaping plan.
To modify a custom Layer Set 468
To set the material defaults for Garden Beds 468
To create and edit a Garden Bed 469
To create a planting border 472
To align the planting border edges with other objects 474
To set the fencing defaults 477
To draw and customize fencing 477
To place a gate 478
To search using the Plant Chooser 479
To browse the Plants library category 480
To modify plant images 480
To block plants into groups 481
To save a plan revision 482

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 25 - Landscaping Design

Where are the default materials for Garden Beds and regular Terrain Features set?
l The default materials for Garden Beds and regular Terrain Features are set in the Material Defaults dialog:
o The default material for Garden Beds is the "Dirt" material.
o The default material for regular Terrain Features is the "Foundation/Slab" material.
What edit tool creates a copy of an object at the same location as the original with one click?
l The Copy and Paste in Place edit tool creates a copy of an object in the same location as the original.
What edit tool lets you change the angle of an object or an object edge to match that of another object?
l The Make Parallel/Perpendicular lets you change the selected object or selected edge’s angle to match that of another .
What dialog lets you search the Library for the common names of plants?
l The Plant Chooser dialog allows you to search for plants using a variety of criteria, including the common name.

483
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Tutorials

Layout Tutorials Chapter 7

The Layout Tutorials describe best practices for creating layout files in Chief Architect for producing construction
documents:
In this tutorial you will learn about:

TOPICS
Layout Page Templates 485
Title Blocks and Borders 495
Sending Views to Layout 520

484
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

Layout Page Templates

The first step in creating an effective layout template file is to create the required page templates.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for creating and assigning layout page templates. Concepts introduced
include:
File Management 485
Productivity Tips 485
Setting the Defaults 486
Specifying Layout Page Templates 486
Assigning Page Templates 488
Assigning Page Titles 490
Creating a Page Numbering Convention 491
Inserting Layout Pages 492
Creating File Revisions 494

FILE MANAGEMENT
Just as with plan files, it is very important that you use a file naming convention that meets your needs and organize your
files effectively. See "File Management" on page 4 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.
Unlike most of the plan files in this series, the layout file created in this lesson is intended to be used as a template for
future projects rather than for one specific project.

To save a new layout file

1. Begin by selecting File> New Layout to open a new, blank layout file.

2. Select File> Save As . In the Save Plan File dialog, browse to your Documents folder.

3. Open the Chief Architect Premier X16 Data folder, then open the Templates folder.
4. For the File name, type MY LAYOUT TEMPLATE. You have now created a layout file that you can customize to
meet your needs.

It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create layout page templates, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Content
l Layout page templates should be set up as part of your layout template files so that they are ready for use whenever
you begin a new layout.

485
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

Interface
l The Project Browser side window lists the pages of the current layout file and provides a convenient way to organize
and access them.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l F6 - Fill Window
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. There are no default settings that come into play when setting up and assigning layout page templates; rather, this
information will serve as the part of the default setup in your layout template files.

SPECIFYING LAYOUT PAGE TEMPLATES

Layout Page Templates allow you to create one or more title blocks and borders and then assign them to the layout pages of
your choice. Unlike regular pages with content, Layout Page Templates do not print as part of a print range.
In this example, two Page Templates will be specified: one for the cover sheet and general notes, and one for the sheets that
follow it.

To specify a page template

1. Select Tools> Layout> Page Down to go to 0.

2. Select Tools> Layout> Edit Page Information , and in the Layout Page Information dialog:

l Notice that the current Title is Page Template.

l Change the Title to "Standard Template".
l Confirm that Use as Page Template is checked under the Page Template Options heading.
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

486
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

Page templates can also be specified in the Project Browser, which is docked to the right side of the program window by
default.

To specify a page template in the Project Browser

1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser . Next:

l Click the arrow to the left of "Plan Views" to expand the category.
l Right-click on the "Framing, Roof Plan View" and select Edit View from the contextual menu.

l Click the arrow next to the "Pages" folder to expand a list of the pages in the layout file that are currently in
use. In a new layout, only Pages 0 and 1 will be listed.
l Notice the icons beside each page. Page 0 is specified as the currently "open" page, while Page 1 is a page with
content.

Page 1 is listed as a page with content because it has a piece

of text on it.

2. Right-click on Page 1 in the Project Browser and select Edit Page Information .

487
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

3. In the Layout Page Information dialog:

l Delete the information in the Label field.

l Change the Title to "Cover Sheet Template".
l Check the box beside Use as Page Template and click OK.
4. In the Project Browser, notice that Page 1’s icon has changed and now indicates that it is a Page Template rather
than a page with content.

5. When you are finished, Save your work.

Using the same steps, you can set aside layout pages for any additional Page Templates that you might need for different
disciplines and sheet types.

ASSIGNING PAGE TEMPLATES

Once multiple Page Templates have been created, they can be assigned to non-template pages: either blank or with content.
You can wait and do this when you actually send views to layout for a project, or you can save time and set aside pages for
specific purposes beforehand.

488
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

To assign the Cover Sheet Template

1. Select Tools> Layout> Edit Page Information .

2. In the Layout Page Information dialog, select "Page 2" from the Selected Page drop-down list and then:

l Under the Page Template Options heading, click arrow next to the Page Template and select "Cover Sheet
Template" from the drop-down list.

To assign the Standard page template

1. Still in the Layout Page Information dialog, select "Page 3" from the Selected Page drop-down list, then choose
"Standard Template" from the Page Template drop-down list.

2. Repeat this process to assign the "Standard Template" to pages 4, 5, and 6.

3. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

489
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

4. In the Project Browser, notice that notice that pages 2 - 6 are now listed as blank pages.

5. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

ASSIGNING PAGE TITLES

A short, descriptive page title lets you identify the purpose that each layout page has been set up for.

To assign page titles

1. Select Tools> Layout> Edit Page Information .

2. In the Layout Page Information dialog:

l Select "Page 2" from the Selected Page drop-down list.

l Specify the Title as Cover Sheet.
3. Next, select "Page 3" from the Selected Page drop-down list and specify its Title as General Notes.
4. Next, select "Page 4" from the Selected Page drop-down list and specify its Title as Site Plan.
5. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

490
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

6. In the Project Browser, notice that notice that pages 2 - 4 now have titles.

7. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

The remaining layout pages can be assigned Titles when their Page Numbers are assigned.

CREATING A PAGE NUMBERING CONVENTION

There are a number of ways to include page numbers on layout pages. The most versatile uses the Page Label and allows
you to set up custom page numbering conventions using the Layout Page Information dialog.
In your own layout template file, you can assign sheet numbers that you typically use in advance and use the numbering
convention of your choice. Here, a fairly typical variation of the US National CAD Standard page numbering convention is
used.

To assign page numbers

1. Select Tools> Layout> Edit Page Information .

2. In the Layout Page Information dialog, select "Page 3" from the Selected Page drop-down list and then:

l Note that its Title is General Notes.

l Specify the Label as A0.#.
3. Select "Page 4" from the Selected Page drop-down list, then:
l Note that its Title is Site Plan.
l Specify the Label as A1.#.

491
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

4. Select "Page 5" from the Selected Page drop-down list, then:
l Specify its Title as Floor 1 Plan.
l Specify the Label as A1.#.
5. Select "Page 6" from the Selected Page drop-down list, then:
l Specify that its Title as Electical Floor 1.
l Specify the Label as E1.#.
6. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.
7. In the Project Browser, notice that A0, A1, and E1 are all treated as separate prefixes.

If you type a pound sign # in the Label field, the characters

before it will be treated as a numbering prefix, and the # will
be replaced by the current page number on the layout sheet.

8. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

INSERTING LAYOUT PAGES

If you need to add additional disciplines, types, and/or pages, they can be easily inserted at any time: either in a specific
project or in your layout template file.

To insert new layout pages

1. Select Tools> Layout> Change Layout Page or click the button that reports the current page number and go to
page 5, which was set aside for the Floor 1 Plan.

2. Select Tools> Layout> Insert Page Before to add a page before the current page. The original page 5 will
move to page 6, and will become the active page.

492
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

3. In the Project Browser, notice that page 5 has no sheet number or title.

4. Right-click on page 5 in the Project Browser and selectEdit Page Information. In the Layout Page Information
dialog:
l Notice that the new page’s Label and Title are blank.
l Specify the Label as A1.#.
l Specify the Title as Foundation Plan.
l Confirm that the Page Template is "Standard Template", then click OK.
5. Right-click on page 6 in the Project Browser and select Insert Page After. Page 6 is unchanged, the new page
becomes page 7, and the original page 7 becomes page 8.

6. Right-click on the new page 7 and select Edit Page Information. In the Layout Page Information dialog:
l Specify the Label as A2.#.
l Specify the Title as Elevations.
l Confirm that the Page Template is "Standard Template", then click OK.
7. Use the Insert Page After command to add a new page after page 7.

l Notice that the list of pages grows by one and that page 8 is listed as a blank page.

493
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

8. Right-click on page 8 and select Edit Page Information . In the Layout Page Information dialog:

l Specify the Label as A2.#.

l Specify the Title as Sections.
l Confirm that the Page Template is "Standard Template", then click OK.

9. Remember to Save your work.

Once your Page Templates have been defined as such, you can create a border and title block for each that matches how it
will be used. See Title Blocks and Borders on page 495.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a layout revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Layout File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chief Architect Premier X16 Data\Templates
folder.
3. For the File name, type My Layout Template as the name of the file followed by a short description of the current
state of the drawing; for example, My Layout Template_Page Templates.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for setting up page templates in a layout file.
To save a new layout file 485
To specify a page template 486
To specify a page template in the Project Browser 487
To assign the Cover Sheet Template 489

494
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To assign the Standard page template 489

To assign page titles 490
To assign page numbers 491
To insert new layout pages 492
To save a layout revision 494

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 26 - Layout Page Templates

What is the name of the side window that lists all of the pages of the current layout file?
l The Project Browser side window lists the pages of the current layout file and provides a convenient way to organize
and access them.
What are three categories of pages that are listed in this side window?
l Page templates, blank pages, and pages with content are listed in the Project Browser side window.
What information should be included on a page template?
l Layout Page Templates should include any information that you would like to display identically on multiple pages:
typically, title blocks and borders.
What is the name of the dialog in which you can assign sheet titles to layout pages?
l Sheet, or page, titles can be specified in the Layout Page Information dialog for each layout page.
What character can you type into a page’s Label to set up custom page numbering conventions?
l If you type a pound sign # in the Label field, the characters before it will be treated as a numbering prefix, and the #
will be replaced by a numeral 1 on the first page with that particular prefix in its Label, and will increase the number
by one on every page that follows if it too has the identical prefix in its Label.

Title Blocks and Borders

This tutorial describes tools and techniques for creating title blocks and borders for construction documents.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for creating title blocks and borders for construction documents.
Concepts introduced include:
File Management 496
Productivity Tips 496
Setting the Defaults 497
Setting up the Drawing Sheet 497
Drawing a Layout Border 498
Creating a Title Block 501
Adding Title Block Text 504
Using Text Macros 507

495
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

Including a Revision Table 511

Creating a Cover Sheet Template 513
Creating File Revisions 518
Creating a Custom Layout Template 518

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Layout Page Templates tutorial left off. At this point, both the My Layout Template_Page
Templates and MY LAYOUT TEMPLATE layout files contain the same information, so you could open either one and
continue working. However, My Layout Template_Page [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or
archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on MY LAYOUT TEMPLATE, select File> Open Layout . If need be, browse to
Documents\Chief Architect Premier X16 Data, select the file, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose MY LAYOUT TEMPLATE from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See Creating File Revisions on page 518.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create layout page templates, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l The Center Object edit tool can be used to center text and other CAD objects inside CAD polylines.
l Text Macros can be added to report page numbers and other information automatically.

Content
l Import an image of your company logo to display in your construction documents.
l Create one or more layout template files that can be used whenever you begin a new layout.
l Interface
l When designing a layout title block and border, it is helpful to have Grid Snaps toggled on.
l The Grid Snap Unit also determines how far a selected object is Nudged when the Arrow keys are pressed.

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l Arrow keys - Nudge selected object
l F6 - Fill Window
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save
Although Temporary Dimensions are toggled off in most of images in this tutorial, it is assumed that they are on for the
purposes of following the steps. Select View> Temporary Dimensions and confirm that there is a check mark in lower right
corner of the tool icon.

496
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
creating a layout title block and border, there are several defaults of particular importance.
Before drawing a title block and border, you need to define the size and shape of the Drawing Sheet. See Setting up the
Drawing Sheet on page 497.
Grid Snaps are very useful when drawing and positioning CAD objects for a layout title block. You can set the Grid Snap
Unit in the General Layout Defaults dialog. See To set the Grid Snap Unit and Nudge distance on page 499.
It is a good idea to set the default line style, weight, and other attributes of CAD objects that you draw on the layout sheet
prior to drawing them. See To set the default CAD line weight and style on page 499.
Before adding text to the layout, be sure that the Rich Text Defaults are set to meet your requirements. See To set the Rich
Text Defaults on page 504.

SETTING UP THE DRAWING SHEET

Before sending views to layout, it is recommended that you set up your drawing sheet and then use the CAD, Text, and
editing tools to create a border and title block for your layout pages on one or more Page Templates. For information about
the Drawing Sheet,

497
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To set up the layout sheet

1. Select File> Print> Drawing Sheet Setup to open the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog.

2. Specify the Orientation and Size of the Drawing Sheet.

3. The Drawing Scale for layout files should always be 1 in = 1 in (1 mm = 1 mm in metric files).
4. You can also specify the drawing sheet’s Margins if you want.
5. Click OK when you are finished.
6. Select Window> Fill Window so that you can see the entire drawing sheet.

7. When you are finished, select File> Save .

DRAWING A LAYOUT BORDER

The layout template files that are installed with Chief Architect have a title block and border already drawn in them on
Layout Page 0, which is the default Layout Page Template. You can use these as they are, modify them to suit your needs,
or delete them and create your own.
Although the CAD and Text objects that make up an existing layout border can be edited, it is sometimes easier to simply
create a new border from scratch.
It is often helpful to toggle Grid Snaps off when working certain tasks in a plan file. When working in layout, on the other
hand, Grid Snaps should almost always be toggled on.

498
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To set the Grid Snap Unit and Nudge distance

1. Select Edit> Default Settings , and in the Default Settings dialog click on "Layout" and click the Edit button.

2. In the General Layout Defaults dialog:

l Make sure that Use Snap Grid/Units is checked.
l Set the Grid Snap Unit to be 1/8" and click OK.

To delete an existing layout border

1. Select View> Drawing Sheet to turn off the display of the Drawing Sheet. This will prevent the Drawing Sheet
from being selected when the title block and border are group-selected.
2. Select Tools> Layout> Page Down to go to Page 0 and Zoom out so you can see the entire title block and
border.
3. Click the Select Objects button, then click and drag to draw a rectangular selection marquee around the entire
drawing. When you release the mouse button, all of the objects within the selection marquee will be selected as a
group.
4. Select Edit> Delete , click the Delete edit button, or press the Delete key to delete the entire title block and
border.
5. Select View> Drawing Sheet to turn the display of the Drawing Sheet back on.

As an alternative to deleting an existing title block and border, you can select Tools> Layout> Page Up to go to an
empty page and draw a new one there. That page should then be specified as a Page Template. See "Layout Page
Templates" on page 485 of the Layout Page Templates Tutorial.

To set the default CAD line weight and style

1. Select Tools> Layer Settings> Display Options .

2. In the Layout Page Display Options dialog:

3. Click on the "CAD, Default" layer to select it and notice that its attributes can be edited below the list of layers.
4. The default Line Weight of 18 and the solid Line Style are typical for CAD lines on a construction sheet, so click
Cancel to close the dialog without making any changes.

To create a new layout border

1. Make sure that Object Snaps are enabled, particularly Endpoint Snaps.

2. Select Edit> Preferences , then go to the BEHAVIORS panel of the Preferences dialog.

l Under the Edit Type heading, select Concentric.

l Specify the Jump value as the distance you would like your border to be drawn from the edge of the drawing
sheet.
l Here, 1/8" is used.

499
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

3. Click OK to close the dialog and make the Concentric Edit Behavior active and notice that the mouse pointer
displays the Concentric icon, reminding you that this non-default behavior is active.
4. Select CAD> Boxes> Rectangular Polyline , then click and drag a rectangle beginning at one corner of the
drawing sheet and ending at the opposite corner.
l Watch for the red snap indicators that will display at each corner when Endpoint Snaps are enabled.

5. Click on the rectangular polyline to select it, then:

l Look at left side of the Status Bar to confirm that a Standard Polyline is selected.

l If the Sheet Boundary is selected instead, click the Select Next Object edit button.

6. Zoom in on one corner of the polyline, then click and slowly drag a corner edit handle towards its center.

l When you reach the your specified Concentric Jump distance, the polyline’s preview outline will resize so
that its edges are that distance from the drawing sheet edges.
l Continue dragging inward and the preview outline will resize again each time you reach the next Concentric
Jump increment.
l When you reach the desired Concentric Jump increment, release the mouse button.
l You can create a double border in a similar manner. With the polyline still selected:

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button.

l Click and drag one of the corner edit handles towards the center. A concentric copy of the polyline is made
when you reach the Concentric Jump distance.

500
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

7. When you are finished, it is a good idea to restore the Default Edit Behavior. To do this, select Edit> Edit
Behaviors> Default .

8. Before moving on, remember to Save your work.

You can adjust the line weight, style and color for any CAD object in its specification dialog.
If you would like, you can fillet the corners of the border polylines using the Fillet Lines edit tool.

CREATING A TITLE BLOCK

With the border drawn, a title block can be added. Here, a vertical title block is added to the right side of the sheet.

To create a title block frame

1. Select the inner border polyline created above and create a concentrically resized copy inside it:

l Zoom in on one corner of the polyline.

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button.

l This time, hold down the C key, which is the temporary hotkey for the Concentric edit behavior.
l Click and drag one of the corner edit handles towards the center. A concentric copy of the polyline is made
when you reach the Concentric Jump distance.
l Here, two Concentric Jumps are used to resize the polyline by 1/4".
2. With the newly created polyline selected, click on its left vertical edge to make it the Selected Edge.
3. Click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far the Selected Edge is from the polyline’s opposite vertical
edge.

501
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

4. In the inline text field, type 2" and press the Enter key.

With the title block’s area defined, separate frames can be created for the information it will contain.

To add a title block component frame

1. Select the title block frame and create a concentrically resized copy inside it:

l Zoom in on one corner of the polyline.

l Click the Copy/Paste edit button.

l Hold down the C key to enable the Concentric edit behavior.

l Click and drag one of the corner edit handles towards the center, and release the mouse button when you reach
the Concentric Jump distance of 1/8".
2. Click on the top horizontal edge of the new polyline to make it the Selected Edge, then:
3. Click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far the Selected Edge is from the polyline’s bottom horizontal
edge.
4. In the inline text field, type 1" and press the Enter key.

502
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To replicate component frames

1. Select the component frame and click the Copy/Paste edit button.
2. Click the Point to Point Move edit button, then:

l Click once on the lower left corner of the component frame.

l Click once on the upper left corner of the component frame.
l A copy of the frame is created, and is positioned so that its lower left corner is snapped to the upper left corner
of the original.

3. With the new component frame selected, press the Up Arrow key one time to nudge it upward 1/8".

The Nudge distance is equal to the file’s Grid Snap Unit.

4. Create a third component frame above the first two using the same process.
5. Make the third frame 4" in height using Temporary Dimensions.
6. Repeat these steps to create:
l A fourth frame 5" in height.
l A fifth frame 4" in height.
l A blank space at the top of the title block frame will remain.

503
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

ADDING TITLE BLOCK TEXT

Text can now be created and centered with in the title block frames.

To set the Rich Text Defaults

1. Select Edit> Default Settings to open the Default Settings dialog. Click the arrow to the left of "Text, Callouts
and Markers" to expand the category, select "Rich Text", then click the Edit button.
2. In the Saved Rich Text Defaults dialog, click the Edit button.
3. On the RICH TEXT panel of Rich Text Defaults dialog:
l You can specify the default font that you want to use as well as its size. Here, the "Chief Blueprint" font sized
at 1/8" is used.
l Although you can specify special styles like Bold and Italic, it is usually best to not enable these by default.
l You can type in the text field; however, whatever is entered in the defaults dialog will appear in all newly
created Rich Text objects and is not recommended.
4. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

504
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To add company information

1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text , then click in an empty space on the right side of the drawing sheet.

2. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:

l Begin by clicking the Align Center button.

l In the main text field, type your company name and contact information.
l To change the size of the company name, highlight it with the mouse and then type the desired size in the text
field above. Here, 3/16" is used instead of 1/8".
l Click OK to close the dialog and create the text at the point where you clicked.
3. Use the triangular Rotate edit handle to rotate the selected objects 90° to the right, so the text faces the right side of
the sheet.

505
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To center text in a frame

1. Click the Center Object edit button, then:

l Move your mouse pointer over left side of the 4" high frame, just above the two 2" frames.
l When a horizontal centering axis displays, click once to center the text relative to the 4" frame.
2. With the text still selected, click the Center Object edit button once more. Next:

l Move your mouse pointer over the top edge of the 4" high frame.
l When a vertical centering axis displays, click once to center the text relative to the 4" frame.

506
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

Project information can be added to the 5" high frame located just above the company information.
3. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

USING TEXT MACROS

Text Macros can be used to automatically populate the text with information like the sheet title, sheet number, and the
current date.
Each of your layout pages can be assigned its own unique Title, which will display dynamically using the same text object.
For more information, see Layout Page Templates on page 485.

To add a sheet title

1. Create a Rich Text object to the left of the title block.

2. On the TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:

507
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

3. Click the Align Center button.

l Increase the text size to 1/4".

l Click the Insert Macro button.

l Browse to Global> Layout Info and select "Layout Page Title".

l Note that the Text object now contains the macro: %[Link]%, then click OK.
4. Notice that the Text object now says "Standard Template". This is the title that was assigned to Page 0 in the Layout
Page Templates tutorial. See "To specify a page template" on page 486 of the Layout Page Templates Tutorial.
5. Rotate the text so it faces to the right.
6. Use the Center Object edit tool to center the text inside the frame located just above the project information, as
described in To center text in a frame on page 506.

508
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

There are a number of page number macros, but the most versatile is used here and will allow you to set up custom page
numbering conventions using the Layout Page Information dialog.

To add a sheet number

1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text , then click in an empty space in the drawing sheet.

2. On the TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:

l Specify the text size as 1/4".

l Click the Align Center button.

l Click the Insert Macro button.

l Browse to Global> Layout Info and select "Layout Page Label".

l Note that the Text object now contains the macro: %[Link]%.
3. On the APPEARANCE panel, check Border, then click OK.
4. Notice that only the Text object’s border displays. This is because the current page does not have a Label specified
in the Layout Page Information dialog like it does a Title.

509
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

5. Use the Center Object edit tool to center the text inside the frame located at the bottom of the title bar, as
described in To center text in a frame on page 506.

6. Go to Page 3 and note that the %[Link]% is now displaying as "A0.1". This is the page number for the General
Notes, created in "To assign page numbers" on page 491 of the Layout Page Templates Tutorial.

7. Go back to Page 0, select the layout label text object, and click the Open Object edit button.

8. On the APPEARANCE panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog, uncheck Border and click OK.

510
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To add the current date

1. With the layout label text still selected, click the Copy/Paste edit button.

2. Click the Point to Point Move edit button, then:

l Click on the top right corner of the frame around the selected text.
l Click on the top right corner of the frame directly above.
l A copy of the Text is created, centered in the frame above the original.
3. With the newly pasted Text still selected, click the Open Object edit button.

4. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:

l Delete the existing macro text

l Click the Insert Macro button.

l Browse to Global> Time Date and select "Short Date".

l Note that the Text object now contains the macro: %[Link]% and click OK.
5. The Text object now reports the current date.

6. When you are finished, remember to Save your work.

INCLUDING A REVISION TABLE

Revisions can be added to any page, and can be listed in a Revision Table.

To place a revision table

1. Select Tools> Layout> Layout Revision Table , then click in the middle of the drawing sheet to place a
Revision Table at that location.

2. Select the Revision Table and rotate it 90° using its edit handle.

511
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

3. Click the Point to Point Move edit tool:

l Click on the lower left corner of the Revision Table.

l Click on the upper left corner of the border around the sheet title.
4. With the Revision Table still selected, press the Up Arrow key once to move it up 1/8".
5. With the Revision Table still selected, click the Open Object edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the
Revision Table Specification dialog, specify the Minimum Rows as 7, then click OK.
6. Click the Resize edit handle that displays along the top edge of the Revision Table and drag upwards until it is 1/8"
from the title block frame.

To add a revision to a page

1. To go Page 3 and select Tools> Layout> Edit Page Information .

2. In the Layout Page Information dialog, under the Page Revisions heading, click the New button.
3. In the Revision Specification dialog:

l Specify the Page Range as 3,4.

l Add a brief label and description, then click OK.

512
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

4. Notice that the new revision is listed under the Page Revisions heading for Pages 3 and 4.
5. Click OK and note that the Revision Table on Pages 3 and 4 displays the new revision, while on the other pages, it
does not.
6. Return to Page 3 and select Edit> Undo to remove the test revision from Pages 3 and 4.

7. Remember to Save your work.

CREATING A COVER SHEET TEMPLATE

A variation of the title block and border can be created for use on the cover sheet. See "To assign the Cover Sheet
Template" on page 489 of the Layout Page Templates Tutorial.
In this example, the Cover Sheet Template will use the same border as the Standard Sheet Template, but not the title block.
It will instead feature the project name and address, a sheet index, a space for a large presentation view.

To copy the border

1. Select Tools> Layout> Page Down to go to Page 0.

2. Zoom in on the top left corner of the Drawing Sheet.

3. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the outer border polyline to select it.

4. Hold down the Shift key and click on the inner border polyline to add it to the selection set.
5. Select Edit> Copy .

6. Select Tools> Layout> Page Up to go to Page 1.

7. Select Edit> Paste> Paste Hold Position .

8. Note that the new border is positioned inside the Drawing Sheet exactly like the original.

A company logo can be added to the title block by importing and embedding an image.

513
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To import a logo image

1. Zoom in on the space where you would like to display a logo or other image.
2. Select File> Import> Import Picture .

3. In the Import Picture File dialog, browse to a company logo or other image file saved on your computer, select it,
and click the Open button.
4. The imported picture will fill the extents of the current view, and can be edited.
5. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the imported picture to select it.

6. Click the Open Object edit button, and on the GENERAL panel of the Picture File Box Specification dialog:

l Check the box beside Save in Plan.

l Under the Size heading, make sure that Retain Aspect Ratio of is checked.
l Specify the desired Height and Width.
l Here, a square image is sized at 3" x 3".
l Click OK to close the dialog.
7. With the picture still selected, click the Point to Point Move edit button, then:

l Click on the lower left corner of the image.

l Click on the lower left corner of the inner border polyline.

514
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

8. Press the Up Arrow key twice, and the Right Arrow key twice to nudge the image 1/4" in from the border polyline.

Company and project information can be positioned and oriented using the same techniques used to create the standard page
template. See Adding Title Block Text on page 504.

To create a title bar

1. Select CAD> Lines> Draw Line , then click and drag to draw a horizontal line across the length of the inner
border polyline anywhere above the imported picture.

2. Click on the line, then move it down until it snaps to the top edge of the imported picture.
3. With the line still selected, press the Up Arrow key twice to create a 1/4" gap between it and the picture.

515
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

4. Place Rich Text objects with company and project information.

5. Here, the company information is centered along the right vertical edge of the imported logo image. It is Aligned
Left and positioned 1/4" to the right of logo.

6. The project information is located 1/4" to the left of the inner border polyline, and is Aligned Right .

To add a sheet index

1. Select Tools> Layout> Layout Page Table , then click once in the drawing area to create a layout page table at
that location.
2. Click on the new table to select it, then click the Open Object edit button.

3. On the GENERAL panel of the Layout Page Table Specification dialog, specify the table’s Name. Here, "Sheet Index"
is used.
4. Also on the GENERAL panel, organize and name the Columns to Include:

l Select "Description" and click the Remove button.

l Select "Comments" and click the Remove button.

516
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

l Select "Label" and click the Rename button.

l In the Schedule Column Name dialog, type "Sheet" and click OK.
5. On the ATTRIBUTES panel of the Layout Page Table Specification dialog, select "Centered" from the Alignment
drop-down list.
6. On the TEXT STYLE panel:
l Select a Font from the drop-down list.
l Specify the desired Character Height. Here, 1/4" is used.
l Click OK.
7. With the table still selected, use the edit handles to resize the columns as you wish.
8. Use the Point to Point Move edit button and Arrow keys to position the table in the top right corner of the
border.

Because the non-template pages of the layout are currently

blank, no pages are listed in the table. When views, text, or CAD
are added to each page, the table will become populated.

All of the text in a Layout Page Table uses the same Text Style. To create a title with a larger font, use a separate Rich Text
object.

To create a custom layout page table title

1. Select the Layout Page Table, then click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Layout Page Table Specification dialog, uncheck the box beside Display, to the right
of the Main Title text field, then click OK.
3. With the table still selected, use its edit handles to move downward on screen to make room for a text object above
it.
4. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text , then click in the drawing area, near the Layout Page Table.

5. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:

l Specify the desired font size. Here, 5/8" is used.

l Click the Align Center button.

l Type the desired title, then click OK.

6. Use the edit handles, Point to Point Move and Center Object edit tools to position the table and its custom title as
desired.

517
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

7. When you are finished, Save your work.

The left side of the cover sheet can now be used for one or more presentation views, while the right side will be used by the
Sheet Index as it expands to list sheets.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save your work. Before closing it, though, create a
copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a layout revision

1. Select File> Save As .

2. In the Save Layout File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chief Architect Premier X16 Data\Templates
folder.
3. For the File name, type My Layout Template as the name of the file followed by a short description of the current
state of the drawing; for example, My Layout Template_Title Block.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

CREATING A CUSTOM LAYOUT TEMPLATE

The MY LAYOUT [Link] file now has page templates, a title block and a border and is ready for use as the
basis for a new layout file for Chic Cottage.

518
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To specify a custom layout template

1. Select Edit> Preferences from the menu.
2. On the NEW PLANS panel of the Preferences dialog:
l Make sure that the radio button next to U.S. Units is selected.
l Click the Browse button to the right of the U.S. Units Layout Template field.
3. In the Select a Layout Template File dialog:
l Browse to Documents/Chief Architect Premier X16 Data/Templates.
l Select the MY LAYOUT TEMPLATE layout file and click OK.
4. Settings in the Preferences dialog are saved when you exit out of the program, so now is a good time to close down
the program:
l In Windows, select File> Exit.
l In macOS, select Chief Architect> Quit.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating custom layout borders and title blocks.
To set up the layout sheet 498
To set the Grid Snap Unit and Nudge distance 499
To delete an existing layout border 499
To set the default CAD line weight and style 499
To create a new layout border 499
To create a title block frame 501
To add a title block component frame 502
To replicate component frames 503
To set the Rich Text Defaults 504
To add company information 505
To center text in a frame 506
To add a sheet title 507
To add a sheet number 509
To add the current date 511
To place a revision table 511
To add a revision to a page 512
To copy the border 513
To import a logo image 514
To create a title bar 515
To add a sheet index 516
To create a custom layout page table title 517
To save a layout revision 518

519
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

To specify a custom layout template 519

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 27 - Title Blocks and Borders

What are two things that the Snap Grid Unit controls?
l The Snap Grid Unit controls the interval at which objects are drawn, resized, and moved.
l It also controls how far they are Nudged using the arrow keys on the keyboard.
What are three ways to enable the Concentric Edit Behavior?
l The Concentric Edit Behavior can be enabled on the Behaviors panel of the Preferences dialog.
l The different Edit Behaviors can also be enabled in the menus at Edit> Behaviors.
l It can also be enabled temporarily by holding down the C key on the keyboard.
What edit tool lets you align an object along an axis that runs through another object’s side?
l The Center Object edit tool allows you to align a selected object along an axis that runs along another object's side or
its midline.
What edit tool lets you snap the corner of one object to a point on another object?
l The Point to Point Move edit tool lets you move an object by clicking on a point on that object, then clicking on a
different point somewhere else, including on another object.
How do you specify two different font sizes in a single Rich Text object?
l To change the size of part of the text, highlight it with the mouse on the Text panel of the Rich Text Specification
dialog and then type the desired size in the text field above.
Describe how a company logo can be added to a layout page.
l A company logo can be added to the title block by importing and embedding an image. Select File> Import> Import
Picture to do this.
Name two uses for text macros on a layout page.
l The layout page title macro, %[Link]%, will report the current page’s title.
l There are also a variety of page number macros.
What are two types of tables that are available for use in layout files?
l Layout Revision Tables and Layout Page Tables are the two types of tables available in layout files.
Where can you specify the template file used when a new layout is created?
l You can specify the default layout template file used when a new layout is created on the New Plans panel of the
Preferences dialog.

Sending Views to Layout

With a layout template file set up, views can now be sent to layout and arranged on pages for printing.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
This lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for sending views to layout. Concepts introduced include:

520
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

File Management 521

Layout Links to Plan Files 521
Productivity Tips 521
Setting the Defaults 522
Sending Plan Views to Layout 522
Sending Section and Elevation Views to Layout 528
Sending Perspective Views to Layout 535
Printing Layout Files 537
Creating File Revisions 538

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Layout Page Templates tutorial left off. At this point, both the My Layout Template_Page
Templates and MY LAYOUT TEMPLATE layout files contain the same information, and you could open either one and
continue working. However, My Layout Template_Page [Link] was created specifically to serve as a revision or
archive file so it will be left unchanged. Similarly, MY LAYOUT TEMPLATE has been specified as a layout template file
and should not have views sent directly to it.
Instead of working in either of those files, select File> New Layout . Notice that the new, untitled layout file features the
custom title block and border that you created in the Title Blocks and Borders tutorial and that the Project Browser lists its
pages using the Layout Page Information that you specified in the Layout Page Templates tutorial.

To save a new layout file

1. Select File> Save As . In the Save Plan File dialog, browse to your Documents folder.

2. Navigate into your Chic Cottage folder so that it becomes the Save location for your layout file.
3. For the File name, type CHIC COTTAGE. You have now created the main layout file for the Chic Cottage project.

It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

LAYOUT LINKS TO PLAN FILES

In order to send any view to layout, first open both the destination layout file and the plan file. Once a view has been sent
from a plan file to a layout, the files are considered to be linked. To help avoid breaking layout links, it is recommended that
these two files have the same name and be saved in the same folder in your computer.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to send views to layout, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editing

l When set up correctly, layer sets like the Plot Plan Set and Electrical Set can meet your needs while working and also
when sending views to layout for printing.

Interface
l Use the information in the Project Browser to send different types of views to the correct layout page quickly.

521
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

Keyboard Hotkeys
l F1 - Help for the current context
l Ctrl/⌘ + U - Send to Layout
l Spacebar - Select Objects
l Arrow keys - Nudge selected object
l F6 - Fill Window
l Ctrl/⌘ + Tab - Select Next Tab
l Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit tool
l Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTS

In Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
sending views to layout, there are several defaults of particular importance.
Before sending views to layout, it is a good idea to create a layout template that meets your needs, including the proper
sheet size, page organization, and a title block with your company information. See Layout Page Templates on page 485
and Title Blocks and Borders on page 495.
Views sent to layout may use different scales. To save time, make sure that the Drawing Scale that you expect to use most
frequently is set as the default in the plan. See To set the default Drawing Scale for plan views on page 522.
The Drawing Scale of the layout file itself, however, should always be 1 in = 1 in. See "To set up the layout sheet" on page
498 of the Title Blocks and Borders Tutorial.
Each view sent to layout is contained in a Layout Box. You can set the Layout Box Defaults to use Line and Fill Styles that
meet your needs. You can also set up the defaults for Layout Box labels so they report the information you need. See
Sending Views to Layout on page 520.

SENDING PLAN VIEWS TO LAYOUT

Most construction documents have multiple plan views sent to layout for a variety of purposes. Here, two examples, a site
plan and electrical plan, will be sent.

To set the default Drawing Scale for plan views

1. Select File> Open Plan and open the CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plan saved in your Chic Cottage folder.

2. Select File> Print> Drawing Sheet Setup .

3. In the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog:

l Specify the Drawing Scale as the most common scale that your layout views will use.
l Here, 1/4 in = 1 ft will be used.
l Click OK to close the dialog and apply your change.
4. Save your work.

522
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

To send plan views to layout

1. Click the Saved Plan View Control drop-down, which is located in the top toolbar by default, and select "Floor
Plan View Dimensioned" from the drop-down list.
2. Select the Project Browser side window by clicking on its tab. If it is not open, select View> Project Browser .
Next:

l Click the arrow next to the "Pages" folder to expand the list of your customized layout pages.
l As you send views to layout, refer to this list to determine which page to send each view to. The floor plan for
Floor 1, for example, should be sent to Page 6.

523
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

3. Select File> Send to Layout to open the Send to Layout dialog:

l Under Choose Layout, notice that the open layout file, CHIC COTTAGE, is selected as the destination layout
file.
l Under Send Position, type Page Number 6 and confirm in the Project Browser that this page is set up for the
Floor 1 Plan.
l Leave Show Layout Page checked so that when you click OK, the layout window will become active.
l Under Send Options, select Entire Plan/View.
l Make sure that Link Saved Plan View is checked. This means that once sent to layout, the view will show
information as specified for the "Floor Plan View Dimensioned" saved plan view.
l Under Scaling, notice that the default scale of 1/4 in = 1 ft is used by default.

524
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

4. Click OK to send the view to the center of the specified layout page.

Notice that the layout box has a label underneath it that reports its name. This label can be customized. See To customize a
layout box label on page 533, below.

To send more plan views to layout

1. Select Window> Select Next Tab to return to plan view.
2. Click the Saved Plan View Control drop-down and select "Electrical Plan View" from the list.

3. Select File> Send to Layout to open the Send to Layout dialog:

l CHIC [Link] is still selected as the destination layout file.

l Specify Page Number 9 as the Send Position and confirm in the Project Browser that this page is set up for an
Electrical Plan.
l Confirm that Link Saved Plan View is checked.
l Note that the Scaling is still set to the default of 1/4 in = 1 ft.
l Click OK to send the view to the specified page.

525
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

Additional plan views can be sent to layout in a similar manner. A site plan is also a type of plan view, but uses a different
drawing scale than other plan views.

To send a site plan to layout

1. Click the Saved Plan View Control drop-down and select "Plot Plan View" from the list.

2. Select Window> Fill Window .

3. Select File> Send to Layout to open the Send to Layout dialog:

l Notice that CHIC [Link] is selected as the destination layout file.

l Under Send Position, type Page Number 4 and confirm in the Project Browser that this page is set up for the
Site Plan.
l Leave Show Layout Page checked so that when you click OK, the layout window will become active.
l Under Send Options, select Entire Plan/View.
l Confirm that Link Saved Plan View is checked. This means that once sent to layout, the view will show
information as specified for the "Plot Plan View" saved plan view.

526
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

l Under Scaling, notice that the default scale of 1/4 in = 1 ft is used by default. Site plans are typically a lot
larger than a floor plan, though, so specify 1 ft = 100 ft instead.
4. Click OK to send the view to the center of the specified layout page.
5. A message will warn you that the view is too large to fit on the page at the specified scale. Click OK.

It’s not uncommon to move, rotate, and/or resize a view once it is on the layout page.

To rotate, resize, and move a layout view

1. Click on the plot plan layout view on the layout page to select it, then rotate it 90° clockwise:
l Move your mouse pointer over the large triangular Rotate handle.
l Click and drag the handle in a clockwise direction around the outside of the layout view.
l When the view box has a portrait orientation and the road is located on the left side of the page, release the mouse
button.
2. With the view still selected, crop its extents:
l Click and drag the small Resize handles located on each side of the view inward to make the view smaller.
l You can use Temporary Dimensions to make fine adjustments to the view box’s size.
3. With the view still selected, center the view inside the sheet border:

l Click the Center Object edit button.

l Move the mouse pointer over the top edge of the large inner border polyline surrounding the plot plan view.
l When the inner border polyline becomes highlighted and a dashed vertical centering axis displays at the
midpoint of its top edge, click once.
l The door becomes aligned with the center of the Room Divider.
l Repeat these steps to center the view along the left edge of the white Drawing Sheet.
4. Click and drag the small Move Label edit handle to move the view’s label from the left side of the view to the
bottom center.

5. When you are finished, Save the work you have done so far in the layout file.

527
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

You can use the Text Tools to add a legal lot description, directions to the site, and any other notes that you may need on a
site plan page.

SENDING SECTION AND ELEVATION VIEWS TO LAYOUT

Cross Section/Elevation , Back Clipped Cross Section and Wall Elevation views can also be sent to layout.

Saved cross section/elevation views are listed in the Project Browser and can be sent to layout at any time.

To send a section view to layout

1. Switch to the Project Browser side window by clicking on its tab. If it is not open, select View> Project Browser
.

2. Under the "CHIC [Link]" heading:

l Click the arrow next to the "Cross Sections" folder to expand the list of saved cross section/elevation views.
l Notice that the "Stair Section" created in the Interior Stairs tutorial is listed, as is the Wall Elevation created in
the Appliances and Fixtures tutorial. See "Working in Cross Section Views" on page 70 of the Interior Stairs
Tutorial.
3. Right-click on the saved "Stair Section" and select Open View from the contextual menu.

4. Select File> Send to Layout to open the Send to Layout dialog:

l Confirm that CHIC [Link] is still selected as the destination layout file.
l Specify Page Number 8 as the Send Position and confirm in the Project Browser that this page is set up for
Sections.
l Change the Scaling to 1/2 in = 1 ft.
l Click OK to send the view to the specified page.

528
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

To send an elevation view to layout

1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Back Clipped Cross Section , then create an elevation view of the
right side of the structure:
l Click to place the camera location in the terrain, outside the roof overhang area.
l Make sure that the camera’s line of sight extends into but not past the front porch stairs.
l Make sure that the camera’s line of sight is perfectly horizontal.

2. Zoom in and use the CAD and Text tools to add any annotations that the view might require, such as roof
heights, pitches, material specifications, or other notes.

529
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

3. Select 3D> Edit Active View , and in the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog:

l Give the view a short, descriptive Name such as "Exterior Elevation - Right".
l Notice that the Saved check box under the Name field becomes checked automatically.
l Click OK.
4. Now is a good time to Save the plan file, so your new elevation camera is saved in the file.

5. Select File> Send to Layout to open the Send to Layout dialog.

530
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

l Confirm that CHIC [Link] is still selected as the destination layout file.
l Select Page Number 7 as the Send Position and confirm in the Project Browser that this page is set up for
Elevations.
l Select the Plot Lines radio button and check the box beside Color Fill.
l Under Scaling, use the default 1/4 in = 1 ft drawing scale.
l Click OK to send the view to layout.
6. An Information message will inform you that the view is too large to fit on the drawing sheet. The layout box can be
resized to fit the page in a moment, so click OK.

Notice that images like trees are not included in Plot Line views sent to layout.

To change a layout view’s Camera View Options

1. Click on the elevation view on the layout page to select it, then click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the LINKED VIEW panel of the Layout Box Specification dialog:

l Notice that information about the view that the selected box is linked to is reported and can be changed if need
be.
l Under "Camera View Options", select the Live View radio button and click OK.

531
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

Live Views offer a number of benefits; however, they must be linked to a saved camera view. If the Exterior Elevation -
Right camera were deleted, its layout view box would be empty.
All views sent to layout can be moved, cropped, and even rotated.

To crop and move a layout box

1. Click on the elevation view on the layout page to select it.
2. Click and drag the view box’s left, right, and top edges inward so the box only displays the house and a few plan
feet of the terrain on either side.
3. Click and drag the square Move edit handle at the view box’s center to position it in one corner of the layout page.

532
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

4. You can go to page 8 and move the Stair Section view, as well.

In construction documents, it is common for section and elevation views to have callout labels that include both an identifier
for the view along with the page where information relevant to that view can be found in a plan view.

To customize a layout box label

1. Select the Stair Section view and click the Open Object edit button.

2. On the LABEL panel of the Layout Box Specification dialog:

l Notice that layout box labels can use callouts, markers, or regular text.
l Click the Edit button to the right of the Use Callout radio button.
3. The Callout Label Specification dialog also provides numerous ways to customize both label information and style.
4. On the CALLOUT panel, notice that the preview pane on the right shows a callout with cross section line and several
pieces of text:

l The text inside the shape is the Callout Label set on the CALLOUT panel, which is using the %referenced_
view_callout_label% macro. This reports the Stair Section's callout label: "S1".
l The Text Above Line is set on the ATTRIBUTES panel and uses the %automatic_label% macro. This reports the
view's name, "Stair Section", which was set in the Interior Stairs on page 64 tutorial.
l The Text Below Line is also set on the ATTRIBUTES panel and uses the %box_scale% macro. This reports the
scale that was assigned to the view when it was sent to layout.
5. The callout shape can also include a second line of text below the Callout Label. Still on the CALLOUT panel:
l Check the Automatic box to the right of the Text Below Line setting, which is currently blank.
l Additional text will be added to the callout shape when the label is linked to a view.
6. On the LINK panel, click the Link button.

533
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

7. In the Link View dialog, which opens next:

l In the tree list on the left, under "Chic [Link]", click the arrow next to "Pages".
l Click on "Page 6 - A1.3 - Floor 1 Plan", then click OK.
8. Returning to the Callout Label Specification dialog, the preview now shows two rows of text in the callout shape.
The Text Below Line is now present, and reports the Page Label of layout page that the callout is linked to.

9. On the ATTRIBUTES panel, under "Callout Arrows" heading:

l Select the Large radio button.
l Check the box beside Filled.
l Set the Number of Arrows to 1.
l The arrow's direction can be adjusted using its edit handle in a moment.
10. You may also want to:
l Increase the Cross Section Line Length to better accommodate the arrow.
l Change the Alignment of the Text Above Line to "Away From Callout".
l When you are satisfied with the appearance of the callout, click OK.

534
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

11. Returning to the LABEL panel of the Layout Box Specification dialog, notice that the Position Reference is "Bottom
Center". You can choose a different Reference from the drop-down list if you wish, then click OK.
12. When you are finished, Save the work you have done so far in the layout file.

Once a full size cross section/elevation view has been cropped and moved, there is typically room to send additional views
to the same page if you wish.

SENDING PERSPECTIVE VIEWS TO LAYOUT

Perspective views add visual appeal and clarity to your documentation. Sending a presentation view as a static image rather
than a dynamic view allows you to easily control its size.

To send a perspective view to layout

1. Return to plan view.
2. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Full Camera and create a 3D view.

3. Orbit the camera to an angle that you like, then select 3D> Edit Active View .

4. On the CAMERA panel of the Perspective Full Overview Specification dialog, type a short, descriptive Name for the
camera, such as "Cover Sheet View" and click OK.

535
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

5. Select File> Send to Layout to open the Send to Layout dialog.

l Confirm that CHIC [Link] is still selected as the destination layout file.
l Specify Page Number 2 as the Send Position and confirm in the Project Browser that this page is set up for the
Cover Sheet.
l Under Send Options, select the Current Screen as Image radio button.
l Notice that nearly all of the options available for the previous views sent to layout are now unavailable.
l Click OK to send the view to the specified page.
6. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the view sent to page 2 to select it.

l Notice that in the Status Bar, it is described as a Picture File Box rather than a Layout Box.

536
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

7. Use the box’s edit handles to resize and crop the image as needed:

l Click and drag a corner Resize handle to change the size of the picture box while maintaining its aspect ratio.
l Click and drag a side Reshape handle to crop the extents of the picture within the box.
8. When you are finished, Save the layout file.

Repeat this process for any other camera views you may want to send to layout. Or, try using a different Rendering
Technique such as Technical Illustration or Hand Drawn Lines.

PRINTING LAYOUT FILES

Layout files can be printed on a local printer or plotter, or to a PDF file. A PDF, or Portable Document Format file saves all
of the printable information associated with a document such as a layout and makes it available for both viewing and
printing without using the software originally used to create it. PDFs are easy to create and provide you with an efficient
way to share your work with others or send documents to a print service.
Chief Architect has a built-in PDF writer, which you can select as your printer in any of the program’s Print dialogs.
Alternatively, you can print to PDF using a PDF writer installed on your computer.

To print to PDF
1. Select File> Print> Print .

2. In the Print Layout dialog:

l Select "Chief Architect Save as PDF" from the Destination Name drop-down list.
l Make sure that the Paper Size is ARCH D (24" x 36").
l Confirm that all the other settings in the dialog meet your needs.
l Click the Save as PDF button.
3. In the Choose PDF File Name dialog:
l Specify a short, descriptive File name such as CHIC COTTAGE FINAL.
l Navigate to your Documents directory and open the Chic Cottage folder to make it the save location, then click
the Save button.

537
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

CREATING FILE REVISIONS

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work that
you can refer back to when needed. Generally speaking, there are few reasons to create revisions of a layout file. It’s not
common for your page organization to require radical changes. And, because most views sent to layout update
automatically, they are a reflection of the current state of the working drawing.
If, however, you create more than one final version of a plan, multiple versions of the layout may be required as well. For
example, if you were to create construction drawings for Chic Cottage with dormers as well as without, you would need two
layouts: CHIC COTTAGE and CHIC COTTAGE DORMERS.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for sending views to layout.
To save a new layout file 521
To set the default Drawing Scale for plan views 522
To send plan views to layout 523
To send more plan views to layout 525
To send a site plan to layout 526
To rotate, resize, and move a layout view 527
To send a section view to layout 528
To send an elevation view to layout 529
To change a layout view’s Camera View Options 531
To crop and move a layout box 532
To customize a layout box label 533
To send a perspective view to layout 535
To print to PDF 537

Assessment Questions

Tutorial 28 - Sending Views to Layout

Where do you set the default drawing scale for all views sent to layout from a given plan file?
l Views sent to layout may use different scales. To save time, make sure that the Drawing Scale that you expect to use
most frequently is set as the default in the plan. This is done in the plan file’s Drawing Sheet Setup dialog.
How is the information in the Project Browser helpful when sending views to layout?
l As you send views to layout, you can refer to the list of layout pages to determine which page to send each view to.
The page number can then be specified in the Send to Layout dialog.
What is one difference between Live Views and Plot Line views sent to layout?
l Images are included in Live Views sent to layout, but not Plot Line views.
l Live Views, however, must be linked to a saved camera view whereas Plot Line views do not. If a Live View’s
originating view is deleted, its layout view box would be empty.
What kind of view sent to layout can be resized using its corner edit handles?

538
Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

l The Current Screen as Image option in the Send to Layout dialog produces a static picture box rather than a view
linked to the model. Picture boxes can be resized and their contents will get larger or smaller.
l When a layout box is resized, on the other hand, its contents are cropped.

539